Home

Delta Electronics VFD-E Power Supply User Manual

1. Aba EN METRONOME LEVEL knob and OUT socket The G 70 s metronome signals can be transmitted to the METRONOME OUT socket You can connect head phones Roland RH 200 RH 25 or RH 50 to this socket This is useful for a drummer for example as Click Track Use the METRONOME knob to set the metronome volume in the headphones 4D EXTERNAL SOURCE AUDIO IN L R sockets This is where you can connect the audio outputs of an external signal source CD MP3 player synthe sizer etc If the source has 1 4 outputs you either 13 USB PCMCIA VIDEO OUTPUT INTERNAL MEMORY al lg Note The MIDI functions can be accessed via the G 70 s Menu page 214 Frequently used MIDI settings can be written and recalled as MIDI Sets 6 USB port The USB port can be used for archiving purposes and MIDI data transfer from to a computer 7 PCMCIA slot This is where you can insert a memory card PCMCIA CompactFlash SmartMedia or Microdrive Memory cards that are not PCMCIA cards can only be inserted if you use an appropriate adapter available at your computer store See also the precautions on p 12 INTERNAL MEMORY protect switch This cap hides a switch that allows you to lock protect and unlock f the internal memory See page 21 9 VIDEO OUTPUT socket Connect this socket to the appropriate input of your TV or monitor In that case the lyrics of songs that contain such information and the
2. b ab mb ad ab Ah ab ab hs os ab ab CC 93 Chorus MOVE ga 0 1 7 01 000 Note 70 Bb4 37 1 01 060 Note 59 B 3 48 1 EVENT 01 060 Note 70 Bb4 33 1 02 000 Mote 38 D 2 127 1 PLACE 3 EVENT amp Press anywhere in the white area to assign that area to the DATA ENTRY section Use the a lv buttons or the dial to select the list entry you want to edit The name of the selected parameter appears in the upper right hand corner of the display Press the DATA ENTRY gt button to select the first value THES WINE EO YN MODE Pana Note Number 1 000 CC O Bank Select MSB 0 CREATE 1 000 CC 32 Bank Select LSB 4 EVENT 1 000 Program Change 4 1 000 CC 10 Pan 64 ERASE HK 1 000 CC 11 Expression 120 SUN PN 1 000 CC 31 Reverb 80 6555555555555 1 000 CC 93 Chorus 0 MOVE gt 1 000 Note 35 B1 113 1 event ge 1 000 Note 59 B 3 68 1 1 000 Mote 70 Bb4 37 1 COPY D 1 060 Note 59 B 3 48 1 EVENT 1 060 Note 70 Bb4 33 1 02 000 Note 3802 127 1 PLACE EVENT Tel Modify the value Rotate the dial to set the desired value or Set the value using the DEC INC buttons or Press the dial and enter the value using the numeric pad that appears in the display If you choose to work with the numeric pad proceed as follows G 70 Music Workstation Roland Editing individual Style events Style Micro Edit e Press the numeric button
3. Important notes e f you use the 16 track sequencer to edit a song that already contains Cover modifications the Cover set tings are ignored and erased when you save the edited version of your song We therefore recom mend saving songs you edit with the 16 track Sequencer under a different name e While in this mode the knob does not allow you to set the balance between the Song and Keyboard parts it only affects the volume of the Song parts TI S54 About the sequencer s main page Let us first look at the information shown on this page The button icon allows you to listen to the selected track in isolation it switches off all other tracks The selected track is displayed in yellow To select another track simply press its row in the left col umn of the display You can also use the or a but tons to select a track The button icon allows you to temporarily switch off the selected track which may be useful when you want to record or edit additional parts with out being distracted by already existing parts SOLO and MUTE need to be set as follows First press the Or field then press the fields of the tracks you want to solo or mute you can select several tracks for either function Note The MUTE function is not available while the SOLO func tion is on You can however select another track at that time which is then played back in isolation The SOLO function on the other hand can be activat
4. The keys in the highest octave now act as controllers and no longer play notes If you prefer to work with the following display page press and hold the button VATIIIK You can also use the assignable sliders for V Link control if this page is not displayed Use 16 4 and 2 17 sliders or the V LINK keys highest octave to manipulate the video pic tures in sync with your music CLIP Allows you to select the Edirol DV 7PR s clips or palettes 1 32 Press the keys in the high est octave to switch clips 148 PALETTE DISSOLVE TIME Allows you to switch between palettes 1 20 Allows you to set the transition speed between images The velocity of the keys in the highest octave can also be used to con trol the transition speed but only for the eight clips that can be selected via the key board Moving the slider upwards speeds up play back moving it downwards slows down play back At the center position playback speed is normal SPEED PLAYBK VFX Allows you to change video effects This func tion is not available if the receiving video processor is already set to Off Note VFX2 is not supported by the DV 7 BRIGHTNESS COLOR CB Controls the brightness of the image Allows you to change the color There are five steps that can be selected by pressing the lever several times green violet blue red original clip color COLOR CR Allows you to change the color green violet
5. 1 3 5 1 1 3 1 HARMONIC CHORUS BAR REVERB PANPOT VOLUME EFFECT DBEAM M INT MBS LW 2 LW 1 UP 3 UP2 UP 1 See the names below the sliders inside the grey box in the illustration When the position of the assigned slider does not match the value set for the parameter that is con trolled you first have to move the slider to the posi tion that corresponds to the green dots that sur round the knob icon or that are located next to the fader icon before being able to actually change the value ON OUR WN O m 95 G 70 Music Workstation Using the mixer functions 8 effects The D BEAM part refers to the sounds that are gener ated when you use the D Beam controller after selecting the DJ GEAR SOUND EFX or INSTRUMENT mode scratches sound effects other noises See page 64 for details Note The left most slider EFFECT does nothing while VOLUME is selected 4 After setting these levels you can use the knob to establish the correct balance between the Keyboard parts and the Recorder Arranger Mixing as you may know entails a lot more than just getting the balances right It also involves speci fying the stereo placement of sounds and the amount of effect that should be applied So here we go 5 Press the button again to assign the PANPOT function to the sliders The display page still looks as shown in 2 yet the emphasized area is sh
6. SAVE SONG E 1 Load the song whose Lyrics data you want to export as text file See Playing back songs Standard MIDI Files on p 38 for details about selecting songs 2 Press the button SI aja fed This page allows you to save the current song to the internal memory a memory card or a floppy disk It will be saved along with the Lyrics data you selected 18 Press the EXTERNAL MEMORY FLOPPY If the display is blank at this point the selected song INTERNAL MEMORY field to select the area aha doesn t contain Lyrics data It is therefore impossible you want to save the song to export its Lyrics data 19 To save the song under a different name press 3 Press the Field followed by the and enter the desired name Repeat this with the entry See page 49 If necessary you can also supply the required ARTIST and GENRE information for use with the SONG FINDER function Note The G 70 supports both upper and lower case letters for file names Choose whichever is more convenient or clearer Note ARTIST and GENRE are not available for files you save to floppy disk 20 Press the field to save the song If the selected memory area already contains a song of that name you are asked whether it is OK to over write It e Press the field to overwrite the file This replaces the song in question with the new version e Press the field to return to the SAVE SONG page change the name
7. Keyboard Exchange UP2 1 Allows you to switch off the UP1 part and activate the UP2 part and vice versa Note If neither UP1 nor UP2 are on when you first press the ASSIGN SW button one of them is activated Keyboard Exchange LW2 1 Allows you to switch off the LW1 part and activate the LW2 and vice versa Note If neither LW1 nor LW2 are on when you first press the ASSIGN SW button one of them Is activated MBass Keyboard Arranger Allows you to set the Arranger Chord parameter to Off chord recognition as well as ABS recognition off see p 80 and at the same time select the SPLIT Keyboard mode and activate the MBS part and vice versa Note Pressing the ASSIGN SW button you assign this func tion to does not mean that the Arranger stops If you switched on the Arr Hold function page 80 the last recog nized chord will go on sounding so that your MBS part may drown in the accompaniment We therefore suggest you assign the Arranger Hold function see above to the other ASSIGN SW button and use it to switch off the Arranger Hold function so that the Arranger only plays the drum pattern of the selected Music Style Piano Standard By pressing the ASSIGN SW button you alternate between the Standard and Piano Style Arranger Chord modes When the former is selected the chord recognition area page 80 is automatically set to LEFT When you switch to Piano Style the chord recogni tion area is automatically s
8. 3 Press the STYLE COMPOSER field STYLE COMPOSER LO j ET ADRUMS 4 POPt aag ABASS dierss supe ead 4 Press the field 193 The display changes to 0 0 CC 32 Bank Select LSB 0 Program Change 01 000 CC 10 Pan 0 0 0 6 01 000 CC 11 Expression 120 01 000 CC 91 Reverb 80 1 1 1 1 1 1 ji PLACE AN EVENT amp l 5 Nam Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the track you want to edit 6 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the Mode you want to edit Major minor 7th 7 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the Division you want to edit MAIN 1 4 Fill Up 13 Fill Dwn 1 3 Intro 1 4 Ending 1 4 General notes about STYLE MICRO EDIT Use the dial and 4 v buttons to scroll through the available events W Position indications Sequencers only register events whose positions and distances specify when the notes are to be sounded or when they should change i e their sequence Each event is executed at a given point in time which is why they all have a position indication 1 01 119 for example The first figure refers to the bar the second to the beat within that bar and the third to the clock CPT between the current beat and the next Each beat comprises 120 clocks W Monitoring note events The Style Composer can play back the note events
9. Note To keep your settings you must write them to a User Program 9 Press to leave this page or to modify other Auto Pitch settings Using the Vocoder A Vocoder is an effect that combines spoken words with sounds thus creating the impression that the instrument that produces the sounds can talk As this relies on complex filtering effects the character of the sound used as carrier can change dramatically 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press the button it must light This switches off the Or button if it was on because the Vocoder cannot be used simultaneously with the Harmonist function proper Switch on the button Stop song playback if it is running The Vocoder can also use a song part but for this demonstration we ll use the keyboard because It will help you understand how the Vocoder works Note If you use the Vocoder along with the G 70 s Arranger you will probably have to play the melody yourself because the Arranger does not contain it while a Standard MIDI File does Play a chord on the keyboard hold those notes and talk into the microphone For obvious reasons the Vocoder only works if you a talk or sing and b if there is a musical sound that can be processed Play various chords and listen to how that affects the Signal generated by the Vocoder Note The Vocoder can produce four voices at once Playing more than four notes simultaneously is thus unnecessary
10. Press to switch on all button icons or to switch them all off in which case the MICRO EDIT list only contains the End of Data message which is probably not what you need Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes 175 G 70 Music Workstation Using the 16 track sequencer General procedure 1 To change information already available on the selected track proceed as follows Use the 4 v buttons or the dial to select the list entry you want to edit The name of the selected parameter appears in the upper right hand corner of the display MINERO Sheet CC 121 Reset All Ctrl CC 10 Pan CC 11 Expression CC 7 Volume Pitch Bend CC 0 Bank Select MSB Program Change Note Note 65 F 4 Note 67 G4 19 04 010 Note 69 AA 91 far After selecting the entire line of a note event you can press and hold the dial to play the note it will be held until you release the dial If you press the dial after selecting another kind of event control change aftertouch pro gram change etc that value is memorized by the G 70 s tone generator ad used for the following note event you play back To reset such an event select another occurrence with a different value and press the dial yet again 2 Press the DATA ENTRY gt button to select the first value MINERO SUT TRACK Control Change Number 1 02 033 CC 121 Reset All Ctrl 0 1 02 035 CC 1
11. The display shows a list of 5 songs in the selected memory area 140 Wif you press INTERNAL MEMORY or EXTERNAL MEMORY the display changes to SONG LISI o a J FORCA FORCA MID Fes FRIDAYNI iFRIDAYNIMID GE HEREWEGO HEREWEGO MI FOUND found entries GLOBAL total number of songs in that memory area The SONG NAME ARTIST GENRE and fields allow you to sort songs in alphabetical order This sorting is determined by the selected category If the name of the song you want to use to is already displayed press its line 4 To display the next 5 songs press the field in the lower right corner You can press this field as many times as necessary or until it is no longer displayed To return to a previous group of 5 songs press You can also use the dial and the DECJ INC buttons to change pages 3 Nam Locating files with the Song Finder The following is not available for floppy disks a Choose a category Index The highest hierarchical level of the Song Finder database is called Index All search operations apply to the selected Index and therefore not necessarily to all files in the internal memory or on card e Press the field in the top left corner SONG KIUD Ge Ci paws 13 EDIT E COPY Ballads e Either press the field that corresponds to the desired song category or if you re not sure which category the song belongs to ALL This may
12. 0 000 50 COMMON xs neaesos4seesnseessanes 129 COMPANOCh cncceecanseamacenaeens 167 COMPOSE AA 52 COMPRESS 0 0 0005 43 COME S90 a ooo Kanan 43 95 106 CONES AA APA 109 CONNECTIONS sv 44404444446s44sseeens 20 OM ee eee ae 217 COMMGSE PP PP PP PA AA 14 21 Controls D Beaks paapasa waaa aaa ahah GA 65 Style COMPOSED Laan namana 181 Copy Diskk amp Media Aa 208 AA EE 174 178 201 Existing DING 425450000044 2a0nes 186 Lalo o AA 121 144 WO0G s2t0nsaeetdiddddddad 164 187 SGUN AA 164 Style ooo c cece cece anaana 187 DIVES AO 88 142 TIMES ag ag gg NG 188 User sa KOTO AA 119 COUNE ie apan eerie R ERE KANAN 73 SEQUENCE AAP 157 Style Composer 00 183 COMMU PASTE TEL PP 86 Cover S0 O ee PEP PP PP PP 41 sa CP eterna aati 77 E SETTES TETTA T T 197 Create Event anaana 177 201 Oie PEETTTTTTTT TIETEET 84 CUSTOMIZE ooreet 41 CUT RESO 44086haasaveascacdesacsusy 66 G 70 Music Workstation Index LUTO Naa AA teree AA NABANG 66 HAPPEE EE AA 94 Sound Edit 127 128 CUMING AA AA 64 D D BEAM un Aa a aaa KARL 64 NAL eas 223 D Modulation 00 66 BEN 0A acces eeaeecsoueteeetee 68 216 Data PEE AP 213 SUC Ade 2a O PAO 211 213 EG ceistean 163 165 170 193 196 DUO iageeeeceddenanaannanaan as 40 Database cece eee eee 86 87 DEC saa ATAT E YE 169 196 DECAY AA EE 94 127 AKA PAA 200 BA AA 97 98 102 129 DEO APP PP TPP 48 1
13. 1 02 043 Program Change p a 13 02 077 Note 65 F4 100 11 EAN 19 02 115 Note 83 18 EVENT 13 03 030 Note 67 G4 95 79 19 04 010 Note 69 4 4 31 65 PLACE EVENT a Note For this function you could take advantage of the VIEW filter to avoid selecting event types that should not be included in the copy See VIEW on p 173 e To select several consecutive events press the dial while turning it towards the left upward direction or the right downward direction All events selected in this way appear on a blue back ground e Press the COPY EVENT button icon The new selection will replace the previous one BI PLACE EVENT This function is only available if the sequencer s clip board already contains events that you copied using COPY EVENT For safety reasons it would be a good idea to use this function immediately after copying events Press the button icon The following pop up appears MINERO j Note Number 1 02 033 CC 121 Reset All Ctrl l PLACE EVENT TO odis lod had a execute 1 19 03 030 Note 67 G 4 95 79 19 04 010 Note 69 4 4 31 65 PLACE 3 EVENT amp e Specify the position where the first event of the group you copied with should be inserted by pressing the BAR and fields and entering the desired value for each unit using the dial or the DEC INC buttons Press the field to confirm your settings and add the new event s Pr
14. Copy the desired User Programs from the Userprg folder to your computer s hard disk using drag amp drop To copy User Programs from your computer to the G 70 drag amp drop them over the Put New User Programs Here folder To copy User Programs from your computer to the G 70 and immediately create associated Music Assis tant entries drag amp drop them over the Put New Music Assistants Here folder That folder is not available on memory cards because Music Assistant entries must always reside in the G 70 s internal memory Copy the desired text files from the Text folder to your computer s hard disk and vice versa using drag amp drop Note Never ever remove or rename files via USB use only the G 70 s functions to this effect 212 While data are being transferred the G 70 s display looks as follows and all buttons and keys are locked USB DATA STORAGE PC K 5 INTERNAL MEMORY py WANTING gii np ki A S qim UN at CONNECTED Note Never switch off the G 70 while this message is dis played because doing so would damage all data in the selected memory area Note Never sever the USB connection while the red WRIT ING message is displayed the message shown on the com puter screen may disappear earlier but should not be trusted in this case Doing so would damage all data in the selected memory area Cautions regarding folders a
15. M MIDI TX amp TX FILTER CHANNEL Use this parameter to assign a MIDI transmit channel to the Basic channel If you don t want these messages to be transmitted switch off the field PART SWITCH Whenever you mute or un mute a part on the Mixer pages Keyboard parts or on the STYLE MAKEUP TOOLS VOLUME page your G 70 sends an NRPN message that describes your action Filtering these messages may be useful to keep your external sequencer from recording them or the receiving GS module from muting the part assigned to that channel USER PRG PC This parameter is used to filter the trans mission of program change and bank select messages related to User Program selection EI MIDI RX amp RX FILTER CHANNEL Use this parameter to assign a MIDI receive channel to the Basic channel If you don t want these messages to be received switch off the field PART SWITCH Whenever you mute or un mute a part on the Mixer pages Keyboard parts or on the STYLE MAKEUP TOOLS VOLUME page your G 70 sends an NRPN message that describes your action You can keep the G 70 from responding to such messages to avoid that external instruments mute its parts USER PRG PC This parameter is used to filter the reception of program change and bank select messages relative to User Program selection 2 1 3 MASTER VOLUME This parameter allows you to enable or disable the reception of Master Volume messages that would change the
16. Sets the frequency at which modula tion will be applied Sens 0 127 Sets the amount of frequency modulation applied Polarity Determines whether the frequency modulation moves towards higher frequencies UP or lower frequen cies DOWN EQ Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range EQ High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Sets the volume balance between the direct and the effect sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W the effect sound will be output Level 0 127 Output level 52 Step Ring This is a ring modulator that uses a 16 step sequence to vary the frequency at which modulation is applied Step 1 16 0 127 Frequency of ring modulation at each step Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the rate should be synchro nized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the following parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Rate at which the 16 step sequence will cycle Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the v
17. to jump to the effect or tone controls If you press the field USE HE 2YN PART 1 9 PART 29 PART 39 PART 42 GENDER NT AU om om Gum Ou Om Gm VOLUME Om Om Gm Gm taj Back Press the field to select this page See also page 135 If you press the field the display looks as follows 5253 Shy PITCH PORTAM TIME RND TUNING Si Qm PITCHEEND See the explanations under Small settings e Press the field to leave this page If you press the field the display looks as follows SVS Sills Seu yl ZER PART 14 PART 2 PART 30 PART 42 ALL PARTS FREQUENCY HZ GAIN DB This page contains a simple equalizer for the four ENSEMBLE parts as well as an EQ band that applies to all four voices simultaneously for added flexibility e Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons EQUALIZER Press this field to switch all equalizers on this page on or off The equalizer can be used for two things a emphasizing a specific frequency range to create a special effect or make the part more distin guishable b to reduce the level of frequencies that mask other sounds or produce a boomy sound The ALL PARTS FREQUENCY Hz parameter affects the sound of all four parts 1 4 FREQUENCY Hz Use this parameter to select the fre quency whose level you wish to change with the GAIN
18. 1 For the sake of clarity first select a song see p 38 and press to start playback Pay attention to the song s key 2 Press again to stop playback and to return to the beginning 3 Press the button The display changes to MENW TUNING A A FOOT noens E SPLIT amp TOUCH a r lt o gt HARMONIST Lo s COMPOSER l P 4 4r PP m N ARRANGER SETTING FUNCTION k UTILITY i lt lt USB DATA STORAGE TONE EDIT a HAN EG 4 CONTROLLERS SN 75 o 4 5 6 7 8 9 Press the TUNING then the field TONING a n TRANS t SINGER POSE J KEY MASTER l tune I SCALE L FUNE f FACTORY PRESET Automatic Song MALE FEMALE transposition For KA Eh your voice range USER PRESET This page contains three presets means that the song is not transposed while and adapt the song s key to the typical range of a male or female voice Press the or field depending on whether you re a man or a woman Press the button to start playback The song may now be playing in a different key If it is not the melody falls within the typical range you have just selected Note This automatic transposition only works if track MIDI channel 4 of the song you play back contains the melody part Press again to stop playback and to return to the beginning That may still have be
19. BI FROM TO Enter the original data value i e the value that is being used right now by the selected track s in the FROM col umn For TO specify the new value that should replace the FROM value This is what we call absolute changes you don t add or subtract values you replace them with other values This system is only available for messages that allow you to select sounds or sound banks namely CC00 04127 ALL This control change is the so called MSB Bank Select message It allows you to select the Capital Tone select O of a sound address if you don t want to use variations or to select another varia tion level The TO value CC00 0 can be useful for ensuring GM compatibility which unlike GM2 or the GS format does not support tone variations Select if the current setting must not change In the Tone lists you will see that most sounds are varia tions The value 8 for CCOO is probably the most popu lar one as you would discover if you studied the list of 1596 Tones To change any value for CCOO to 8 for example enter CC00 ALL for FROM and CC00 8 for TO To change all occurrences of the CCOO value 8 to another value e g 16 enter 8 for FROM and 16 for TO Note To use a sound on the optional SRX series wave expansion board you installed set CCOO to 93 and see page 228 G 70 Music Workstation Roland Editing 16 track songs CC32 04127 ALL
20. MEBIAS CPT 1920 1920 This parameter sets the amount by which the dura tion or gate time of the selected notes is to change The shortest possible GATE TIME value is 1 used for all drum notes so that selecting 1000 for notes with a GATE TIME value of 1 in the specified time range still leaves you with the same value You can not use CHANGE GATE TIME to erase notes BI MAGNIFY 0 200 Use this parameter rather than BIAS to produce propor tional changes to the affected GATE TIME values Values below 100 decrease the duration while anything above 100 increases it Select 100 if you prefer to work with the BIAS CPT parameter see above BIFROM NOTE TO NOTE 0 C 127 G9 FROM NOTE refers to the lower limit of the note range you want to change TO NOTE represents the upper limit See also Fine tuning the note range on p 192 WE EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data 195 G 70 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer GLOBAL CHANGE dm bato Jemrerma enaner rocr Lener sinar FROM 1 TO INC DEC nase EA Ea o MODE EA o Gi This function allows you to make quick changes to certain settings They always apply to entire tracks you cannot use GLOBAL CHANGE for just a few mea sures You can apply global changes to the four edit able Style track parameters EXPRESS REVERB PAN POT and CHORUS when you notice that the effect is too pr
21. Modulation Wave TRI SOR SIN SAW1 SAW2 How the cutoff frequency will be modulated TRI triangle wave SOR square wave SIN sine wave SAW7 sawtooth wave upward SWA2 sawtooth wave downward Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the modulation rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Rate of modulation Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Attack 0 127 Speed at which the cutoff frequency will change This is effective if Modulation Wave is SOR SAWI or SAW2 Level 0 127 Output level G 70 Music Workstation Roland Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters 45 Step Filter This is a filter whose cutoff frequency can be modulated in steps You can specify the pattern by which the cutoff fre quency will change Step 1 16 0 127 Cutoff frequency at each step Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the rate should be synchro nized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the following parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note v
22. SPECMICAUIONS cc ccccesooasoncmeaaes 225 SPLIT STOUCH eee 60 1 2 Compressor 106 Split SES E anda nonenannneennannaene 57 Keyboard Mode 5 57 KO dg PARA aa 92 POINT occ kp paa KA 57 90 bas AA 90 SAV REE Ur Ka SNN NN 97 NMEN BAWAND IRA AA aha 32 227 pic POP PP PE 97 Standal caagnamaaamag ami 63 67 69 80 WIDI Hle AA 38 55 si AN 25 217 Start Stop noana 25 67 69 74 EE A EEE ener eee 65 Sia PE 65 Startup a 31 117 221 DUGG ee ees TPP AO 200 Stereo placement 124 127 128 SL AO 217 SOLCO 213 ARNON erer seeecananacceaanees 192 E ol AA 109 G 70 Music Workstation Roland Index Style a 24 179 Ko AA 129 Gale 179 Go PESTE AA 74 COVE omen enenenanasagssaneeaoade 77 Custom programming 84 Database ccc eee eee 86 Bala LL AA 74 Hala AAP AA 88 Discard recording 184 aaa aaa na 2 222222221 188 EUS AEE EEEE EEE 124 Eal sawa eeeeesee eateries 114 118 Makeup foolS apad adda 124 MAGO O ada Pare aaa AKA AA 198 MIDI parameters 218 Mode Select aga eases ee ANNA 180 Pieces ace ea anaes eae Ae 29 Parts on off 0ccc cece ee ee 96 PG audveseereannneeeancwereuwisd 218 Programming naasa aasa nasa 179 Quick location iss na a na ananunua 86 POONG ss ssasee05s255554 s 183 We VC Use AA stan eeucee ces 129 Schl eee ee ee 130 185 206 DEICCHING AE AA 2 Start amp NOP i scsacccceeseeennas 74 EL ALTELE LE aaa
23. The reason why we are talking about processors Is that most of them can be used in various ways by selecting a Type The MFX and IFX are the most versa tile processors because they can use one of 84 types while other processors provide 8 or 9 possibilities Only the Compressor and Gate processors are dedicated effects they only function as Compressor or Gate Note See page 132 for how to set the VOCAL HARMONIST equalizers Note The effects of the Harmonic Bars sections are covered In the section Using effects on p 34 Mixing Keyboard parts Here s how to set the balance and other mix related parameters of the Keyboard parts 1 Press the button you can also press CHORUS REVERB or PAN VOLUME EFFECT LEVEL The MUTE message means that the part in question is currently not available You can mute a part by pressing the instrument icon of the part you wish to mute To switch a muted part on press its instrument icon flagged with a MUTE message again 2 Press the button once or twice to assign the VOLUME parameter to the sliders The row of the on screen sliders is displayed in light gray Note The slider functions can also be selected by pressing any control in the desired row VOLUME PANPOT REVERB or CHO RUS 3 Move the sliders below the display to set the desired volume for the various Keyboard parts 16 5 1 3 8 4 2 2 3 2
24. e Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your area disconnect the power cord from the outlet e Should you remove screws make sure to put them in a safe place out of children s reach so there is no chance of them being swallowed accidentally G 70 Music Workstation Contents Contents KA AA AA erews 4 Recording your MUSIC sda a cues ee teeensed ni 52 Recording with Arranger backing from start to finish 52 MOr CA NO a manaa e H nG your ee naaa haa aaa Ahaha 52 Panel descriptions a 13 Recording without accompaniment 53 Mont oN ANA AA 13 Adding MOM PANS ttrrtereeewewereeeeu nnn nos nans 53 Rear panel oo 0 cece cece eevee eee eee eevee 18 SAVING VOU PP AA AA 55 Setting up and demo songs 20 About the Keyboard modes 56 GO Ada AA 20 Arranger Piano and Organ modes db Switching the G 70 on off o n cainin 21 Split and Whole MODES haaa ahaa kah Aa Nam G ae 57 Internal Memory Protect 21 Using the SPLIT Keyboard Mode 04 o7 Setting the display contrast 21 Using WHOLE mode aman o Switching off the G 70 cceeeeceeeeees 21 Switching parts on and off 000 ce eee 57 Interactive demo of the G 70 22 i Using the performance functions 58 The main page 0 eee cece eee eee 23 Pitch Bend and Modulation 000 58 Quick Start
25. memory card 4 Press the field of the User Program Set data you wish to load If the desired name is not displayed use the scroll bar to the right of the list if available to scroll further down Note A Set also contains all GLOBAL parameters see the list in the Parameter Reference booklet So be sure to save the current settings before loading a User Program Set see Save User Program Set 5 Press the field to load the data 2 04 W Load MIDI Set This is where you can load MIDI Set Sets i e groups of 8 MIDI Sets that overwrite the contents of the internal MIDI Set memories 1 Press the button 2 Press the field followed by the field 3 Select the source media INTERNAL MEMORY EXTERNAL MEMORY memory card or FLOPPY 4 Press the field of the MIDI Set whose data you wish to load If the desired name is not displayed use the scroll bar to the right of the list if available to scroll further down Note This function always replaces the contents of all 8 inter nal MIDI Set memories 5 Press the field to load the data Note The G 70 does not support MIDI Sets of other Roland instruments Saving data Note When saving files to floppy disk whose capacity is too small for the data you wish to save the G 70 will display a DISK ERROR message That does not necessarily mean that the disk is damaged Important remark If you select the media that contains the o
26. punch of bass signals Select OFF you don t need any filtering LPF cuts the frequency range above the Cut off Freq HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff Freq Cutoff Freq 200 8000Hz Basic frequency of the fil ter This has no effect if you select OFF as filter type Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard Rate Sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the modulation rate Should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the following parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Rate Note 1 64T 1 64 1 32T 1 32 1 16T 1 32 1 16 1 8T 1 16 1 8 1 4T 1 8 1 4 1 2 T 1 4 1 2 1 1 T 1 2 1 1 2 1 T 1 1 2 1 Specifies the modula tion speed This can be either a frequency Hz or a note value depending on how you set the Rate Sync param eter above T means triplet and a refers to a dotted note 2 1 means that each cycle takes two measures bars The advantage of working with a note value is that the chorus will undulate in syne with the current Arranger or Recorder tempo which can be used for musical purposes to emphasize a rhythmic groove for example Depth 0 127 This parameter sets the depth at which the chorus sound is modulated Higher values result in a mo
27. set to the internal memory memory card or disk Even if you do not program more than 8 MIDI Sets it is a good idea to make a backup copy of your MIDI Sets This function allows you to save all 8 MIDI Sets as a set Press the button Press the field followed by the field SAVE MIDI SET CJ ou tn mmo 9 Select the target area INTERNAL MEMORY FLOPPY disk or EXTERNAL MEMORY memory card Enter the name for the file See Save User Program Set Note The G 70 supports both upper and lower case letters for file names So choose whichever is more convenient or clear 5 Press the field to save the data Bl Save Song This page allows you to save the song that is cur rently in the G 70 s RAM memory Even if it is not a newly recorded song there are several reasons why you may want to use this function e to save the changes you made using the MAKEUP TOOLS and or COVER functions see page 124 and following e to save the newly programmed MARK JUMP loca tions see page 139 e to save a song under a different name or on a differ ent media Note The SONG MAKEUP COVER and MARK JUMP settings can only be read by the G 70 and are thus of no use to other sequencers or SMF players 205 G 70 Music Workstation Disk Media functions 1 Press the button 2 Press the field followed by the field LI ow dn sone mamm 3 Select the target media INTERNAL MEMORY
28. 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 70 MLT Tap DLY This effect provides four delays Each of the Delay Time parameters can be set to a note length based on the selected tempo You can also set the panning and level of each delay sound Delay Time 1 4 sync msec Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not msec the delay time should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a Speed or a note value Delay 1 4 Time msec 0 2600ms Adjusts the time until Delay 1 4 are heard Delay 1 4 Time note Musical Notes Delay times can be set as a note value of a tempo If you set the Sync parameter above to msec Specify the value of the desired note Delay 1 Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay 1 4 Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of Delays 1 4 Delay 1 4 Level 0 127 Output level o
29. 3 Press either or to make your choice This setting is memorized and used until you change it again Drumming on the keyboard The G 70 also allows you to play drums and percussion on the keyboard If you have ever worked with an older Roland arranger instrument you may remember that there used to be a part called M Drums for playing percussion phrases This part no longer exists because any of the following Keyboard parts can be used for drumming UP1 UP2 UP3 LW1 LW2 and MBS 1 Press the TONE ASSIGN button of the part you want to assign a Drum Set to the button lights 2 Press the TONE button E PIANO E GUITAR SRX PIANO KEYBOARD CHR PERC ORGAN ACCORDION A GUITAR BASS STRINGS EXPANSION SAX PAD PERCUSS HARMONIC VOCAL BRASS TRUMPET WIND SYNTH ETHNIC SFX DRUMS BAR 3 Press a field to select another Drum Set Wi Drums Anse UPPERI Y REB Room LZR Standard LZR Standard 1 Fiesta Standard 2 Power Room Y Rock1 PAGE4 PAGES G 70 Music Workstation Roland Using the Keyboard parts You may have to use the PAGE 1 PAGE 5 buttons to jump to the page that contains the desired Drum Set After installing an SRX series expansion board there may also be a gt field that allows you to jump to additioal pages 4 Play a few notes on the keyboard Every key is assigned to a different drum percussion sound Press the second C key from the left C2 to sound a bass drum kick and the white k
30. AGAPAN PEP PPT 82 po eee er 141 SIVIG FINGE fc cere paha 88 User Program panao adda asd dddad 118 IC AA AA 33 Oriental scale 71 2 56G Original 0 cee 48 129 CO OL NATN NANANA NANANA NA eee 41 Output a 214 SIREN PAA 103 kA PP PR PTR PTR PAT PERA TREE 43 OO aan AN ba daeee 214 OUTSIDE 0a 162 163 192 OVERDRIVE 2 a 34 P PO OM UUs ocsccesccasscasseuneenss 142 POU a a a a an 62 PAGE 184 a 27 kla AE 127 222 MEGA CA 126 Pan Delay 102 109 129 Keyboard parts 103 I err KAANAK APA Naa 96 HUE ON TETT 104 Panel descriptions n a aaa naaa aaa 13 Panpot 000 eee 96 124 127 Drum Instrument 128 Harmonist 0 00004 135 Style COMPOSER lt nne ancaaaass 189 NOCOOEL xr waahararabararabarataba hy ee bade 134 Paper AA 116 P cgarararararararatararataharatarahatatahia ad 219 Part Onfoff 0 cece eee eee 28 57 Aide AA 103 Switch aaa 218 219 PAGA NAN AAEAAEAA KANAN NA Gam 179 PBend aaa 163 165 170 KA 169 196 Pedal 000 eee 70 AnG CA 128 Percussion 0 02 31 34 35 Performance Memory see User Program Piano 63 sa 63 67 69 80 PITCH caad dd d664545064455040n005 as 132 Le a a Gapan 189 NA 2 eases wees sees esse 46 133 Bend 00 cee eee ee 58 BONO oerrerrrrrererri 133 134 136 DOWN 0 eee eee 62 Down D Beam 66 Drum Instrument 129 Drum Set NOTE 4
31. ARE YOU SURE You have three options here Be aware that a deleted Play List cannot be recalled deletes the list file out not the Standard MIDI Files it refers to leaves the list intact and takes you back to the PLAY LIST page leaves the list intact and takes you back to the PLAY LIST page where you could select another Play List to be deleted Note Even if you delete the selected list this only disposes of the play list The Standard MIDI Files assigned to the list are not deleted and can thus be used in isolation or assigned to new other Play Lists 149 G 70 Music Workstation Editing Lyrics Editing Lyrics Your G 70 contains functions that allow you to add Lyrics to a Standard MIDI File that does not contain them It is also possible to edit the Lyrics data of Standard MIDI Files that conform to the Tune 1000 format as well as other Lyrics for mats This may come in handy when you keep forgetting the words of a song you wish to use for your performances and want them to be included in the song file The G 70 only allows you to link synchronize Lyrics I 8 e 0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP data to the note messages of the loaded Standard MIDI RS8TUVWXYZ abedefghijklmnopqrs File The text data proper must be entered on a Windows FUv xy2 F fant to SeG 2 se wren NE compatible PC or a Mac and saved as TXT data for Win dows See right for the supported characters am E
32. Arranger I3Ss Copying existing Styles Another way of programming Styles is to use parts from other Styles The G 70 allows you to e Select the desired Style to the Style RAM memory and edit it e Copy the selected Division of one or all tracks e Copy Just a few notes of an existing part e Copy tracks or notes between Divisions This allows you to create new Styles by assembling tracks from different existing Styles Note You cannot copy an ADrums track to another track ABass Acc6 Likewise the bass part can only be copied to an A Bass track ACC tracks however can be copied to whichever ACC track you like Note If the Style RAM memory already contains new data save it before copying The G 70 has no Undo function Saving a Style before copying allows you to revert to the previous ver sion if something goes wrong See Saving your Style on page 185 Starting with all tracks of an existing Style The easiest way to do this Is by selecting an internal Style and edit it 1 Select the Style you want to work with see p 27 2 Press the button The display changes to MENW FOOT CONTROLLERS 4 tee J gt YOCAL Nag ARRMONtsT h T F STYLE 3 COMPOSER UTILITY TONE EDIT MIDI a HAND EG USB DATA f CONTROLLERS STORAGE i 3 Press the STYLE COMPOSER field STYLE COMPOSER Cool Live Band meas 0001 1 J 92 474 ADRUMS 4 POP
33. B3 Sermon sound on page 1 of the bank Note The C1 parameter is only available for Tones that are flagged with an asterisk in the separate Tone list If you are working with a sound of an optional SRX series expansion board you installed this parameter may affect other aspects We therefore suggest you experiment with the parameter to find out how it affects the sound and which setting sounds best EB Modulation Vibrato Vibrato is an effect created by modulating the pitch Pitch modulation adds a pleasant wobble to the notes you play Use the following three parameters if you think the part in question has too much or could use a little more vibrato Note Some Tones already contain natural sampled vibrato whose depth or speed cannot be changed DELAY 64 63 This parameter adjusts the time required for the vibrato effect to begin Positive set tings increase the time before vibrato will begin and negative settings shorten the time DEPTH 64 63 This parameter adjusts the intensity of the pitch modulation Positive settings mean that the wobble becomes more prominent while negative settings make it shallower RATE 64 63 This parameter adjusts the speed of the pitch modulation Positive settings make the preset pitch modulation faster and negative settings make it slower EI TVF TVA ENV elope The volume of an instrument changes over time from the moment the note begi
34. CPT 1 119 This is where you specify the CPT position of the beginning of the track excerpt to be copied Unless you do not need all notes within the last bar you Should keep the default setting WTO By default the TO position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 last measure of the track or song This is where you specify the bar position of the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat EB COPY MODE Replace Mix Allows you to specify how the data should be copied REPLACE The selected FROM TO range overwrites the data of the destination track in the area to which the selected range is copied Copy From 2 1 0 To 3 1 0 Into 4 1 0 SRC TRACK 1 DST TRACK 1 y J SRS as REPLACE MIX eee eS ee Sd MIX The data in the selected range of the source track are added to the data on the destination track In most instances REPLACE is probably a good choice when you set DATA TYPE to ALL or when you wish to substitute a given message cluster the use of the Modulation axis of
35. Change Velo Change Gate Time Merge Glo bal Change Shift Clock and Track XChange There is also a MICRO EDIT environment that allows you to add delete or change individual events See page 175 for details Here s some information that may help you decide whether to use a TRACK EDIT or the MICRO EDIT func tion If you don t need to see the events you want to change choose a TRACK EDIT function If the TRACK T GO EDIT level does not provide the function you need or if you want to see the notes MIDI messages etc choose the MICRO EDIT environment Here is how to select these Edit functions 1 Load the song you wish to edit if it does not yet reside in the G 70 s Song RAM memory See p 38 Press the RECORDER but ton 2 _ 3 Save your song before continuing by pressing the field That way you can always return to the original if your changes do not work out as expected See Sav ing your song on p 55 for details On the SAVE SONG page press the field to return to the 16 track Sequencer s main page 4 Press the field in the right column of the display IASC Sh ed cress Sorte sarenim ene Shaner crock acum T FROM booi lor looo iae A PT STRENGTH Da oa pao 5 Press a field in the top two rows to select the desired TRACK EDIT function If after selecting one of these functions and setting parameter values you decide not to execute the tra
36. Delay time from when the original sound is heard to when the high range flanger sound is heard High Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to spec ify whether Note or not Hz the high modulation rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value High Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Rate at which the high range flanger sound is modulated High Rate note Musical Notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note High Depth 0 127 Modulation depth for the high range flanger sound High Phase 0 180 deg Spaciousness of the high range flanger sound High Feedback 98 0 98 Proportion of the high range flanger sound that is to be returned to the input negative values invert the phase Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 63 Band Step Hg A step flanger that lets you apply an effect independently to the low frequency and high frequency ranges Split Frequency 200 8000Hz Frequency at which the low and high ranges will be divided Low Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Delay time from when the original sound is heard to when the low range flanger sound is heard 2 12 Low R
37. Editing song data using Microscope Edit Editing events Other edit operations The buttons in the right half of the MICRO EDIT page allow you to reduce or expand the number of events of the track you selected W Editing Pitch Bend messages Pitch Bend messages can be positive or negative the range is 128 128 The value O means that the pitch of notes being played in that area is not altered MIGRO EDIT If a Pitch Bend occurrence is not reset to 0 at some Note Hari stage all notes will keep sounding flat when you no ER Pan i on longer want them to 102038 CC 11 Expression 127 1 02 040 CC 7 Volume 80 1 02 041 Pitch Bend 1 MOVE EVENT COPY EVENT 0 02 042 CC 0 Bank Select MSB 0 74 Editing control changes and aftertouch messages too CoO Bak s These messages CC Poly Aftertouch and Channel 19 02 115 Note aa 18 Aftertouch can be set to the desired value 0 127 19 04010 Note OAs 8 8 when the corresponding effect is needed but they also need to be reset to O to avoid unpleasant sur prises WE CREATE EVENT The G 70 s keyboard does not generate Poly After Press this button icon to add a new event to the touch messages but its sound source understands selected track The following pop up appears them Poly Aftertouch messages are always related to a given note which is why you first need to tell the CREATE EVENT sequencer which note the event applies to
38. End of Data message then replace the inserted 00 with the value you which is probably not what you need need to insert e Press to close the pop up window without e Press the field to transmit the SysEx string in applying your changes its current state to the tone generator This allows you to check the result before confirming MCREATE EVENT t Press this button icon to add a new event to the l MASTER track The following pop up appears e Press the field to confirm your settings PERA ae LAAN AA Paa Press if you don t want to use the SysEx mes 7 sage after all pa CREATE EVENT Si sees By pressing or CLOSE you return to the k J pa ce IMASTER TRACK EDIT page rig gt race A SLATS ITEC SB ge d 01 000 Tempo Change Beat Change 0 01 020 Sys Ex FO 7E 7F 09 01 F7 01 031 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 00 7F 00 41 F7 01 037 Sys Ex FO 41 10 4212 40 01 38 06 01 F7 LE 0 0 0 e Press the button icon that corresponds to the kind of event you want to add to the list refers to tempo events to time sig nature changes and to SysEx strings 01 043 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 01 33 5432 F7 01 050 Sys Ex FO H 10 4212 40 01 34 5431 F7 01 056 Sys Ex FOH 1042124001 00 20 28 EYE 01 099 Sys Ex FO 41 10 4212 40 01 00 20 28 1 04 060 Tempo Change 2 02 000 Tempo Change 52 2 02 060 Tempo Change 46 2 03 000 Tempo Change 140 e Specify the position where your new event should b
39. If you are changing a static setting you can stop recording on the second beat 10 Press again to stop recording 11 Press the field to return to the STYLE COMPOSER page About the Mixer The STYLE MIXER functions can be used in three ways to try out settings without recording them during playback to record the events available on this page or to change some i e not all of them at a later stage For the first approach start playback of your Style then select the STYLE MIXER page then change the settings They are not recorded and reset when the loop returns to the beginning For the second approach stop Style playback select the STYLE MIXER page then proceed with step 3 above 139 G 70 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer For the third approach a kind of punch in select the STYLE MIXER page press RECORDER REC then press to start recording When you reach the place where you want to change an already recorded setting press the associated field and modify the value Recording will be deactivated at the end of the pattern even though playback goes on Changing the preset tempo Here is how to change the preset tempo of your Style 1 While on the STYLE COMPOSER page press the RECORDER button imes TRACK INSTRUMENT pa FM EPianol There is no need to select a Mode Division or track because the tempo value is shared by all tracks and patterns 2 Press th
40. If you don t want these messages to be received switch off the field STYLE PC Program change and bank select messages for Style selection Switch this button icon off if the G 70 must not select other Styles or patterns STYLE VOLUME Volume messages relating to the Music Styles Switch this button off if the G 70 must not receive them NTA Note to Arranger NTA notes are only received from an external MIDI instrument What you play in the chord recognition area of the keyboard to feed the Arranger is auto matically converted to the corresponding MIDI note numbers which are transmitted to external instru ments There is thus no need to transmit the note messages of what you play in the chord recognition area the NTA notes SUP Spy KEYBOARD J STYLE ASONG SYSTEM PARTS l BARTS Farts a NOTE TO ARRANGER RX 15T CHANNEL RE 2ND CHANNEL RE l a EA 15T CH LIMIT 2ND CH LIMIT WE 1ST CHANNEL RX 2ND CHANNEL RX CHANNEL NTA notes can be received on two MIDI channels so that you could control the G 70 s Arranger using a MIDIfied accordion FR 7 or FR 5 or any other instrument capable of sending note data or data used to control the accompaniment on two channels Either channel can be switched off using its field Note You cannot assign the same MIDI channel to 1 4 2 Channel Rx W 1ST CH LIMIT 2ND CH LIMIT C G9 These parameters allow you to set the note range to be received If
41. It creates repetitions that alternate between the left and right channels Press the field and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons This parameter specifies the output level of the Reverb processor Setting this parameter to 0 means that your no longer hear the effect in ques tion By contrast setting a REVERB parameter on the mixer page for Music Styles to 0 means that only the selected instrument Is no longer processed by the effect while the remaining instruments are Note See Mixing Song or Style parts on p 124 for details Press to return to the display page with the modules _OR Press the button to return to the main page Chorus for Style Song parts CHORUS LEVEL CHOREY SEND CHORUS TYPE bit fee mawcen Seime ot rox Chorus broadens the spatial image of the sound and creates a Stereo impression There are also other effect types you can choose here Press the field of the effect type you wish to use CHORUS1 CHORUS4 These are conventional Chorus effects that add spaciousness and depth to the sound TO FEEDBACK This is a chorus with a flanger like effect and a soft sound This type produces a flanger like effect and has a soft sound FLANGER This is an effect that sounds somewhat like a jet airplane taking off and landing SHORT DELAY This is a delay echo effect with a short delay time SHORT DLY FBK This is a short delay
42. Level 0 127 Output level 81 Step Pitch A pitch shifter in which the amount of pitch shift is varied by a 16 step sequence Step 1 16 24 0 12 semitones Amount of pitch shift at each step semitone units Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the rate should be synchro nized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the following parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Rate at which the 16 step sequence will cycle Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Attack 0 127 Speed at which the amount of pitch shift changes between steps Gate Time 0 127 Duration of the pitch shifted sound at each step PA G 70 Music Workstation Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters Fine 100 100 Pitch shift adjustment for all steps 2 cent units Delay Time sync msec Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not msec the delay time should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed or a note value Delay Time msec 0 1300ms Delay time from the original sound until the pitch shifted sound is heard Delay Time note Music
43. MEDATA TYPE Mi Fine tuning the setting range Allows you to select the data to be erased Before setting FROM NOTE and possibly TO NOTE or ALL All parameters listed below FROM CC and possibly TO CC it might be a good idea to decide how you want to use the note indications Depending on the option you choose TO NOTE or TO CC P Bender Pitch Bend data may not even be available so that setting it beforehand would be a waste of time Note Only note messages Control Control change messages Change EQUAL Only the selected note or value will change The note value can be set using the TO NOTE TO CC field All notes or values except the one you select will change The note value can be set using the TO NOTE TO CC field Only notes or values above the selected one will change The note value can be set using work like NRPN messages except that they are the THAN NOTE THAN CC field only understood by GM and GM2 compatible sound modules Only notes or values below the selected one Prog C Program change messages NRPN Non registered parameter number parameters These are parameter control functions of the GS GM2 format that are easier to use than SysEx messages but basically have the same function RPN Registered parameter number parameters They CAF Channel Aftertouch messages If you don t really PALAU The note value can be set using need them these messages should definitely be the THAN CC fie
44. Modulation frequency of the chorus effect Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity of the cho rus effect Chorus Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Modulation frequency of the flanger effect Flanger Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity of the flanger effect Flanger Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase 2 35 G 70 Music Workstation Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters Flanger Balance D100 0W D50 50W D0 100W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the flanger sound W Level 0 127 Output level 39 CHO Delay This effect connects a chorus and a delay in parallel Paral lel means that the input signal is processed by two effects that do not interact Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Chorus Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Delay Time 0 0 500 0m
45. O C E J 127 G9 Next specify the desired Aftertouch value l 5 00127 Me sew 5 W About the Note messages GG San iiba As stated above note messages comprise a note gacr D number a velocity value and a Gate Time value 9 cS ad Note numbers can be entered the usual way DATA ENTRY dial or DEC INC or by pressing the corresponding key on the keyboard This is also true of velocity values The range for note messages is O C 127 G9 Velocity messages can be set anywhere between 1 extremely soft and 127 The value O cannot be entered because it would effectively switch off the If the position for which you create a new event already contains other events the new event is added at the end of that group e Press the button icon that corresponds to the kind of event you want to add to the list Here are the default values that are assigned to note events you create After selecting the Gate Time entry pressing the i dial calls up the following pop up Note Note Number 60 C4 On Velocity 100 mikarej p Gate Time 60 NUMERIC PAD E Control Change CC01 Modulation value 0 Program Change Program Change Number 1 Pitch Bend 0 Poly Aftertouch Note Number 60 C4 Poly Aftertouch Value 0 Channel After 0 touch Ea a a eee A al l The maximum duration a note event can have is 65 535 clocks Drum parts usually use the Gate Ti
46. Press the field to save the data The G 70 returns to the STYLE COMPOSER page Programming other parts and divisions You can now record the second part probably the bass If you d like to do the guided tour again return to page 181 Do not forget to set the key for the bass part see Specifying the key for melodic parts on p 182 Once the first Division is finished you can record other Divisions Use the clone function page 182 to record several patterns in one go Do not forget to record the Fills and the Intro s End ing s to complete your Style Fill Ins are short transi tions usually one measure that announce new song parts There are two groups of three fills Up 1 3 and Dwn 1 3 Up fills are used when you switch on the button and then press a VARIATION but ton of a higher number to go from 1 to 2 for exam ple Dwn fills are used when you switch on the button and then press a VARIATION but ton of a lower number Intros are usually used at the beginning of a song and End patterns provide professional closing sections Note The ABass part is monophonic You can only record single note patterns G 70 Music Workstation Roland Auditioning your Style and adding more tracks Muting parts while recording others After programming a few tracks you may find that cer tain parts tend to confuse you Playing a steady organ part while listening to a previously recorded synco pated guitar lin
47. There is also a MICRO EDIT environment that allows you to add delete or change individual events See page 198 for details To select one of the STYLE TRACK EDIT functions pro ceed as follows 1 Load the Style you want to edit if it does not yet reside in the G 70 s Style RAM memory 2 Press the button then the STYLE COMPOSER field SLES Ee less Cool Live Band meas 0001 1 J 92 474 EDIT ADRUMS d 4 POP1 O BASS SLID INITIALIZE STYLE d 3 Press the TRACK EDIT field STYLE TRAGK EDIT jam eremm BEE REEL on a B Kada ia FROM 4 Press a field in the top two rows to select the desired STYLE TRACK EDIT function If after selecting one of these functions and setting parameter values you decide not to execute the transformation do not press the field 5 Select the track s Mode s and Division s you wish to modify 6 Select the range FROM and TO for the edit operation The FROM and TO parameters allow you to specify the positions measure beat clock of the track excerpt you want to change Example to change measures 1 4 of the selected track enter the following values FROM BAR 0001 TO BAR 0005 BEAT 01 BEAT 01 CPT 000 CPT 000 7 Specify what you want to change and how it Should change press one of the parameter fields to the right of the FROM TO section use the dial or the DEC INC buttons 8 Confirm the operation by pressing
48. This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels Compressor Post Gain O 6 12 18dB Adjusts the output gain Use this parameter to make up for a signifi cant volume loss due to extreme settings EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range 0 High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Level 0 127 Output level 23O 11 Limiter Compresses signals that exceed the specified level preventing distortion from occurring Unlike a compressor it does not boost the level of weaker signals Limiter Threshold 0 127 Adjusts the volume at which compression begins Limiter Release 0 127 Allows you to specify how long signal compression should remain in effect after the signal volume falls below the Threshold value Limiter Ratio 1 5 1 2 1 4 1 100 1 Allows you to spec ify how strongly volume peaks should be compressed Choose 100 1 if the Threshold level must never be exceeded which is a true limiting function Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels Limiter Post Gain O 6 12 18dB Adjusts the out put gain Use this parameter to make up for a significant volume loss due to extreme settings EQ Low Gain
49. blue red original clip color 4 D Beam Allows you to control several effects this depends on the function you assign to the D BEAM Vinyl RPM Fade to black playback speed Cutting Fade to back Harp Marimba Guitar Fade to white Chimes Lumin Seashore Sepia LoFi Color Sweep Post Scratch Color Blue Explosion Color Red Gunshot Color Violet Tempo Up amp Down Pitch Up amp Down Playback speed Note The G 70 does not support the Edirol DV 7PR s dual stream mode Press the INIT SINGLE VALUE field to reset the cur rently selected parameter to Its default value Press the INIT ALL VALUES field to reset all parame ters to their default values Press again to switch off this function the button goes dark Note V LINK messages are transmitted on MIDI channels 13 and 14 Note For details on clips palettes dissolve time color differ ence signals Cb Cr refer to the Edirol DV 7PR manual G 70 Music Workstation Roland General settings General settings Here are several functions that apply to the G 70 as a whole and haven t been covered elsewhere in this owner s manual Touch Screen Beep The G 70 s display generates a beep sound each time you press a field That way you know when you have selected parameter You can switch this beep off if you find it distracting 1 Press the button The display changes to MERLY A a FOOT f K TUNING H CONTROLLERS i
50. by playing chords In most instances you will probably do so with your left hand Each Music Style comprises several patterns so that you can vary the accompani ment by starting with an introduction using a simple accompaniment for the verses a more elaborate one for the choruses and by ending your songs with an Ending pattern Let us first look at the most important aspects for oper ating the Arranger 1 Connect and switch on the G 70 see pages 20 and 21 2 Press the EASY SETTING button aai mw ny The button s indicator lights and the keyboard is split into two halves The left half can be used to play chords while you can play melodies in the right half 3 If the SYNC button lights which is proba bly the case press it to switch it off 4 Set the knob to a reasonable level e g about 1 4 G 70 Music Workstation Roland Playing to an automatic accompaniment 5 Press the button it lights STYLE CONTROL INTRO MAIN END RIT INVERSION START STOP LJ CI LE AUTO FILL IN START STOP 6 Play a chord in the left half of the keyboard to the left of the C key below the USER PROGRAM button then press the STYLE CONTROL START STOP button START STOP lui The button lights and the Arranger Starts playing the accompaniment of the currently selected Music Style called Cool Live Band The accompaniment pattern is sounded in the key that corresponds
51. dial or the DEC INC buttons This is where you select the track that should supply the note information for the harmonies to be gener ated In most instances Auto is a good choice because that allows the Vocal Harmonist to pick the most useful track This only applies to Standard MIDI Files you play back using the Recorder Press the and or field if you want to use the melody you play on the keyboard The divide between LEFT and RIGHT follows the split point setting see p 57 If you press the field the display looks as follows PART 1 PART 2 PART 3 PART 4 2 ono om om OF OF Gm Gm Ga Ga Sj Back Press the field to select this page The note icons next to the PART 1 4 entries indicate the Vocoder parts that are currently playing This may help you to decide which part needs to be corrected TI 34 As a rule the Vocoder works as follows the lowest note played by the selected song part or yourself is assigned to PART 1 while the highest is assigned to PART 4 Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DECJ INC buttons GENDER Allows you to change the timbre of the part Negative values produce a masculine effect positive values add feminine qualities This parameter should be set in relation to the COARSE value if you want to achieve a realistic effect PANPOT Allows you to set the placement of t
52. disk or memory card Select or if you wish to take advantage of the Song Finder function page 38 4 Enter the name for the file See page 205 Note The G 70 supports both upper and lower case letters for file names So choose whichever is more convenient or clear 5 Press the field to save the data W Save Style This page allows you to save the Style that is cur rently in the G 70 s RAM memory Even if it is not a newly recorded Style there are other reasons why you may want to use this function e to save the changes you made using the MAKEUP TOOLS and or COVER function see page 124 and fol lowing e to save a Style under a different name or on a differ ent media 1 Press the button 2 Press the field followed by the field eli Ara Delete space OF insert 3 Select the target media INTERNAL MEMORY disk or memory card Select Or if you wish to take advantage of the Style Finder function page 86 4 Enter the name for the file See page 205 Note The G 70 supports both upper and lower case letters for file names So choose whichever is more convenient or clear ZOG 5 Press the field to save the data Rename functions Use the Rename functions to change the name of the selected User Program Set Style Song or MIDI Set Styles and Songs can also be renamed via their respec tive Finder User Program Sets and MIDI Set sets howe
53. jv YOCAL SPLITS TOUCH gt NARMONIST 53 ARRANGER T 4 STYLE Ps SETTING as COMPOSER UTILITY FUNCTION 3 D Hiii TONE EDIT HG MIDI HAND re USB DATA E CONTROLLERS o STORAGE 2 Press the field followed by the field OPCI PLAYER f KEYBOARD UPPER MF Link HARMONIST FX LINK _ FROM 1st NOTE 3 Press the field to switch this function on or off 4 Press the field to return to the menu or the button to return to the main page Da a m rao nm Info There may be times when you perform with a rented G 70 and a memory card that contains all your set tings in which case it is important to quickly confirm whether the G 70 contains the correct wave expansion board and which system version it uses You can also check the remaining capacity of the internal memory and memory card 1 Press the button 2 23 G 70 Music Workstation Miscellaneous 2 Press the field followed by the field WE BRY Car GT SRX Expansion Board SRX 05 SupDance Free Space Internal Memory 29472 Kb Free Space Memory Card 232380 Kb Version 0100 2004 November 09 159253 MG Back SRX Expansion Board Displays the name of the installed wave expansion board if available Free Space Internal Memory Informs you about the remaining storage capacity of the internal memory Free Space Memory Card Informs you about the rema
54. lt lt gt gt gt a DJ GEAR SFX INST CTRL D EXT SOURCE MASTER VOLUME knob Use this knob to set the G 70 s global output volume all sections The setting of this knob also determines the volume in the headphones you may have con nected BALANCE knob This knob allows you to set the balance between the Arranger or song parts ACCOMP and the solo sounds KEYBOARD EXT SOURCE knob Use this knob to set the volume of an audio source a synthesizer MP3 player etc connected to the EXTERNAL SOURCE sockets on the G 70 s rear panel RECORDER section button Press this button to access the display where you can select a list of songs to be played back edit existing lists program new ones etc When the indicator of this button lights I lt 4 gt gt are used to control playback of the current song Hold down while press ing to select the demo mode button You can already load a new song while the current Standard MIDI File is still play ing If you want the Recorder to start playback of the newly selected song automatically press this button If the button lights this button allows you to select the next song of the selected chain button Press this button to switch off the part you want to play or sing yourself The part to be muted is selectable page 41 G CD LIVE DISCO ACCOMP KEYBOARD 8 BEAT 16 BEAT BAND ROCK DANCE CONTEMP WORLD BALL JAZZ BOSSA ROOM BLUES 50 s
55. matically switched on so that the Arranger plays entire accompaniments including melodic parts If you only need a drum accompaniment here is how to proceed 1 3 4 5 6 G 70 Music Workstation Roland Using the Harmonic Bars Return to the main page by pressing the but ton Anazing Grace Cool Live Band St Slow Str The Grand OWER 2 Pad With The display now changes to AKKANGERSEN NANG YM ARRANGER BF Tions a ml Focu MELODY E INTEL TYPE TU ZONE TYPE MODE LEFT ME O Em RIGHT EERIE JERS T ARRANGER If your G 70 displays a different page press the field Press the field in the left column it turns blue Switch off the button icon This means that the Arranger no longer listens to the chords you play All melodic parts of the accom paniment are muted The drums however are still available Press the button to start Arranger playback Play along using the organ sounds you selected and perhaps modified See page 27 for how to select another Music Style If the accompaniment is too fast or too slow here is how to change the Music Style tempo Press to decrease the tempo in steps of one unit Press to increase the tempo in steps of one unit 35 G 70 Music Workstation Quick Start You can also press the button several times in the rhythm of the desired tempo 7 To quickly return to the default tempo hold
56. singer settings and sing to the next song Here s what you need to do to change the level of the background music and the amount of Reverb and or Delay that is added to your speaking voice 47 G 70 Music Workstation Quick Start 3 4 Note See page 107 for an in depth discussion of the effects settings Press and hold the button The display changes to VAIGAL HARMONIST lt F MIC INPUT VOICE HARHONY KTA sm SUSTAIN LEY THRESHOLD REVERB SEND T Om Gu Gm Om gt Gia om om om GATE Press the field and set the desired value with the dial The smaller the value the softer the song s and Key board parts volume will be Select O if you do not want the music to be any softer than it already Is The and fields allow you to add some reverb and or delay to your voice While some reverb values between 10 and 40 for example could be useful delay should probably only be used as effect because it tends to blur your announcements Note See page 107 for details about these effects Automatic transposition Singer Key Only available for Standard MIDI File playback Here s yet another revolutionary function of your G 70 based on information you select or input it can change the key of all songs you play back in realtime thus allowing you or a guest singer to sing all songs in a comfortable range This function is called Singer Key
57. the Arranger works like a drum machine because it uses accompa niment patterns Unlike a drum machine however you can easily select the desired pattern while playing play So you do not need to program the order in which you intend to use the patterns Furthermore the Arranger not only provides a rhythm section but also chords guitar and synthesizer riffs and so on The accompa niment can be transposed in realtime All you have to do is play a different chord usually with your left hand You can add vocals and harmonies to your music using the Vocal Harmonist function page 42 3 Recorder section That s how it s called on the front panel so we ll stick to it This section actually encompasses a 16 track sequencer a Straightforward MIDI recording func tion and a very sophisticated Standard MIDI File player with a host of all realtime control functions Playing to an automatic accompa niment Let us begin with the automatic accompaniment func tion which is called Arranger and often referred to as Style in the display and on the front panel The Arranger is an interactive playback sequencer that provides the accompaniments These accompaniments are called Music Styles because the musical phrases patterns they play concentrate on a given musical genre Rock Pop Dance Waltz etc The Arranger allows you to transpose the melodic accompaniment parts bass piano guitar etc simply
58. then press again A Operation successful message confirms the end of the operation 152 field The display changes to Go Gis Giz Gas 7 THT TLE NAME a om mabigkas pa one ace Jj 12 oa Yad as bag 4 Name the text file This is only necessary if you do not agree with the suggested name i e the one of the song in question See page 49 for how to enter the desired name 5 Press the EXTERNAL MEMORY FLOPPY INTERNAL MEMORY field to select the area O you want to save the text file 6 Press the field to save the file The G 70 returns to the LYRICS page 7 Press the button to return to the main page G 70 Music Workstation Using the 16 track sequencer 14 Using the 16 track sequencer Your G 70 contains a powerful sequencer with a host of edit functions We already showed you the basic procedure for recording songs and adding tracks see p 52 This time around we will get down to the nuts and bolts of the G 70 s 16 track sequencer Even so you will quickly notice that the 16 track sequencer is as simple to operate as it is powerful When you press the RECORDER button the display changes to 16 TRACK SEQUENCER TRACK EDIT MICRO EDIT EA A SA4 TRACK d T RASS eB OE INITIALIZE 3 d TRUMPET j SONG n 10 Pd juAz2 MM Jd Azz GT 12 d PIANO 2 J 13 d MUTED GT 14 d CLEAN GT J 15 PIANO 4 J 16 PIANO 4 J
59. whose setting you want to change 6 Press the button to return to the main page Note Portamento and POLY MONO are not available for the Harmonic Bar sounds Lower Hold The G 70 is an instrument that allows you to change many settings in realtime Because you can trigger the Lower 1 2 parts and the Arranger simultaneously selecting another Music Style pattern usually means that you have to lift your left hand from the keyboard If the LWR Hold function is not active in SPLIT mode the Lower LW parts stop sounding as soon as you release all keys in the left area If you press a field however so that is its displayed in blue the notes of the Lower parts go on sounding until you play other notes in the left keyboard area If both the LW1 or LW2 and MBS parts are active the selected LOWER HOLD function sustains the notes of both parts Note The LOWER HOLD functions are only available in SPLIT mode 1 Press the button The display changes to MENU SPLIT amp TOUCH et HE A ARRANGER 4 STYLE SETTING hy compose Y FUNCTION f TONE EDIT HAND KAN ec USBDATA po CONTROLLERS STORAGE 5 2 Press the field followed by the field Sep pelle LOWER UPPER 2 UPPER 1 LOWER 1 Zee PORTAMENTO TIME M HOLD mA oo 0 m o Ad x ae COARSE TUNE 7 SELA et aoe wah KANG 3 Switch on at least one LW part its PART ON OFF
60. you select This may help you identify the occurrence you want to edit Switch on the speaker icon and move the cursor to a note event to hear that note EVIEW Press this button icon if the list of track events has become so long that finding the events you wish to edit takes too long The following pop up appears VICH SELECT e Switch on the button icons of the events you want to see in the list the button icons in question must light in green The names of most available options are probably clear to you so we won t explain them Just one note also includes the bank select messages CC00 and CC32 that are used for selecting sounds See page 200 for the message type e Press to switch on all button icons or NONE to switch them all off in which case the STYLE MICRO EDIT list only contains the End of Data message which is probably not what you need e Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes W General procedure 1 2 3 4 To change information already available on the selected track proceed as follows Select the TRACK MODE and DIVISION by pressing the corresponding fields and using the dial or the DEC INC buttons Mana Note Message 01 000 CC O Bank Select MSB 0 CREATE 01 000 CC 32 Bank Select LSB 4 EVENT J 01 000 Program Change 4 01 000 CC 10 Pan 64 ERASE Se 01 000 CC 11 Expression 120 SBM Ces 0 CC 91 Reverb 8 0
61. 1 4 Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill Up 1 3 End 154 Bl FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or pattern Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the G 70 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a bar Change this setting only if your edit operation should start after the selected beat BI FOR Specifies how many bars beats and CPTs are to be inserted BAR BEAT CPT See above W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and insert the requested number of bars beats and clocks T94 TRANSPOSE e STYLE TRACK EDIT ane ed kasma hasaan bana EH a ka La a FROM e Transpose is used to change the pitch of the selected pattern the other non note data obviously cannot be transposed BTRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track you want to edit Select ALL to edit all tracks When combined with FROM NOTE and TO NOTE see below TRANSPOSE is also useful for the ADrums track It allows you to select another snare or kick sound for exam ple BI MODE Allows you to select the mode of the pattern to be edited Major minor or 7th
62. 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Level 0 127 Output level 12 Hexa Chorus Uses a six phase chorus six layers of chorused sound to cre ate a dense and Spatial effect Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Chorus Pre Delay Deviation 0 20 Adjusts the differ ences in Pre Delay between each chorus line there are six of them Chorus Depth Deviation 20 0 20 Adjusts the differ ence in modulation depth between each chorus sound Chorus Pan Deviation 0 20 Adjusts the distribution of the various chorus line in the stereo image 0 All chorus sounds are in the center 20 Each chorus sound will be spaced at 60 degree intervals relative to the center Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 13 Trem Chorus This is a chorus effect with added Tremolo cyclic modulation of volume Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Tremolo Rate 0
63. 184 Saving your Style eee cece eee 185 Programming other parts and divisions 185 Muting parts while recording others 185 KAU www neater peeenaas 185 Copying EXISTING SIYIES 1 kakasa aaah asaan 186 Starting with all tracks of an existing Style 186 Copying individual Style tracks 187 Editing on the fly by recording 188 Adding notes in realtime aa cared BADALA ALA 188 Adding controller data in realtime 188 Adding or changing settings of existing parts 188 Expression Panpot Reverb Chorus 189 Changing the preset tempo samaan 190 Style Track Edit functions 2 naaawa pda Kan DAA 190 G 70 Music Workstation Contents Editing individual Style events Style Micro Edit 198 General notes about STYLE MICRO EDIT 198 POLUMG CVGNNS ccceckeaneeeuweneedecueessotcaeedde 200 Other edi opero serrera rreren EEEL ERE 200 16 Disk Media functions a 203 TE NOW O S cesar sinepa 5G abaka risa anta 203 Loading data nnna a 204 Saving Cate dpiccteemeed sows acewesnwedeces os 204 Rename TuUNCTIONS 2 2 lt se0eedeeeeeeeseus 206 Halata AA et aues Gene ms 207 MG PAPER PE PP PA 208 ELA AA 209 17 Archiving data using a computer USB 211 Backing up all data of the G 70 213 SA PARAAN PA 214 INENOWAOG 2d ka ND Ga KA annn KAG ka oy 214 Accessing t
64. 29 MARK amp JUMP ai 39 139 Master VG ANAN 155 171 ADi cA 59 61 ia 25 28 218 Mastering Tools 105 NEGRA 60 MBass KBD Arranger 67 MBass Keyboard Arranger 63 MEASURE LENGTH 183 Md pagana RAANG 76 MELODY cose ns pte b44 hid dade ch ec ed 41 MELODY NEU 452449 5359 9595 050004 29 Melody Intelligence n n nnana 76 For Harmonist 0 136 Merge Koi AN 156 SCO PET 165 Metronome 2 2 0 000 0008 73 Alta HA Eee ee 73 Mode 2 eee eee 73 User lE EE APA 186 Lo os re 95 100 229 LW cae a eae ea aeons 101 IND Gs RAAARAAARAR Adee eee ee seeee en 100 ING aaa aes aes ree ee ee TS 42 INPUT maka na KA KAKAAAKAAAAAA KAN 107 KO EO AA 175 198 Miles pee aa 42 Nanana gamot 60 WOU ies ae cae eng ase AA 214 Basic channel awww e waka ass 218 Channel aaa 216 217 Napaan eee Naa 216 217 FUNCTIONS 3 ka 4444444ka need 214 Palame ters 4o 25000000e lt e0 216 219 DX tes EEE E 216 217 AA 220 Set Automatic selection 220 Set Link to User Program 116 Set Load ecocard aak 204 CAO CA 205 SOCKE AO AA 117 APAPAP PAA 217 SVOCHFONIZAUON aasa 217 TX totes eon sg aso see eh ah ahead LALA WA 216 User rOOl all Wiikis 2222446464542 116 ee rr 60 MINO ceo pa ec eh Berea 184 Minus One 41 66 68 70 NAA 44 134 135 164 RECOM PAPA PP PP PP 183 Style Copy AA 187 MIXO su sesceeacesessoreceenecan 95 18
65. 3 2 1 3 5 1 1 3 1 HARMONIC BAR SONG oN OU RWD O ka The display changes to a a NGI A ESE a i i Aaa ale Sails KE sge YOLUME in iN F KE sas OT STYLE MAKE UP TOOLS Pa le Sam ae i i i i Lyell sh FA PN IN ANA Each mixer channel on the displayed mixer page is assigned to the slider below it Thus the leftmost channel can be set with the slider the second from the left with the slider and so on TI 24 10 Song and Style Makeup Tools 2 If the icon of the instrument whose settings you want to change is not displayed press the MODE or button again The number of mixer pages depends on the number of sound being used in the selected song or Style In certain cases there may be only one page with fewer than nine channel strips 3 Press the row that corresponds to the setting you want to change CHORUS REVERB PANPOT VOL UME 0R Use the TYPE and buttons to the left of the slid ers to select the parameter you want to change The row of the selected parameter is displayed with a light background You can also press the control icon of the instrument whose setting you want to change and then use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set it In that case the next step is unnec essary The available parameters are relative changes that are added to or subtracted from the settings stored in the song or Music Style The parameters you can set
66. 70 search for names that contain the supplied information This would allow you to also locate a file called Ragga beat if you entered BEA 5 Press the field to start your search The display returns to the Music Assistant window and displays the entries that correspond to your search criteria 3 7 G 70 Music Workstation Quick Start Playing back songs Standard MIDI Files Your G 70 contains all kinds of functions for custom izing the songs you play back via easy to use routines Let us first look at the playback functions proper 1 Press the FINDER button You can also press the field on the main page to select songs one Ai lazing Grace The display changes to SONG LIST fu FEVER iFEVER MID DA Y H 3 FIRSTDAY MID fc re TE CT OPTIONS j 2 If it isn t already highlighted press the field in the upper right cor ner The G 70 is shipped with a few example songs that can be used for this example This function is also available for songs you record or save to the internal memory or a memory card The display shows a list of 5 songs Standard MIDI Files per page in the internal memory If you prefer to listen to one of your own songs on floppy disk insert it into the drive and press the field To listen to a song on memory card insert the card and select EXTERNAL MEMORY then continue with step 3 3 If the name of the song you want to listen to
67. COPY page only lists the Music Styles that match the last search crite ria you used for the STYLE FINDER On the other hand if you only need to copy certain Styles on memory card or in the internal memory area using the FINDER would be a good idea it helps you to avoid too many presses of the PAGE or field You can also use the dial and the DECJ INC buttons 4 5 On the STYLE OPTIONS page press the field FROM EINT MEMORY To INT MEMORY pak ed FLOPPY DISK IT EO FLOPPY DISK lamest MEMORY JESIERT MEMORY _ Start by specifying the source that contains the Style s you wish to copy Press the button icon once or twice to select the memory area INT MEMORY FLOPPY DISK The G 70 s internal SSD memory area The floppy disk in the G 70 s drive Do not forget to insert it before selecting this option EXT MEMORY The memory card in the G 70 s PCMCIA slot Do not forget to insert it before selecting this option Now specify the target you wish to copy the selected Style s to Press the button icon once or twice to select the memory area If the name of the Style you want to copy to Is already displayed press its line You can also select several Styles In our example Shuffle and YoSlow Rock 2 have been selected To display the next 5 files press the field in the lower right corner or use the dial You can press this field as many times as necessary or until it is no longer displayed
68. Choosing sounds manually The G 70 contains 1 596 Tones or sounds and 48 Drum Sets divided over 16 families 1 Specify the part you wish to assign another sound or Drum Set to e Press the TONE ASSIGN button of the desired part so that it lights TONE ASSIGN MBS LW2 LW 1 s s PART ON OFF UP 3 29 G 70 Music Workstation Quick Start e On the main page press the row of the part you wish 2 3 4 Nam Nam to assign a different sound to ons Amazing Grace Cool Live Band Gospel Love LIVE St Slow Str 2 The Grand X UPPER ower2 Pad With Vintage EP1 In this case the G 70 directly jumps to the TONE page that contains the currently selected sound The red arrow indicates which part is active for Tone selection its TONE ASSIGN button also lights Note It is also possible to select sounds for Keyboard parts that are currently switched off This allows you to prepare the next sound s while still playing another Keyboard part Press a TONE button to select a family and its best sound the sound already changes at this stage E PIANO E GUITAR PIANO KEYBOARD CHR PERC ORGAN ACCORDION A GUITAR BASS STRINGS SRX EXPANSION PE HARMONIC BAR SAX PAD VOCAL BRASS TRUMPET WIND SYNTH ETHNIC RUMS See page 33 for the sounds and page 32 for the button The display shows a list of Tones available in that family 3 Strings St Strings Acted I
69. Conventional gated reverb REVERSE Backwards reverb SWEEP1 The reverberant sound moves from right to left SWEEP2 The reverberant sound moves from left to right Reverb Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the reverb sound is heard Reverb Gate Time 5 500ms Adjusts the time from when the reverb is heard until it disappears 0 Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range 233 G 70 Music Workstation Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters Balance D100 0W D50 50W D0 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 27 OD Chorus This effect connects an Overdrive and a Chorus in series Series means that the output signal of the first effect is also processed by the second Overdrive Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the volume Overdrive Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the overdrive sound Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Chorus Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Level 0 127 Output level 28 OD Flanger This effect conne
70. DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 60 3D Step Hgr This applies a 3D effect to the step flanger sound The flanger sound will be positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right Filter Type OFF LPF HPF Type of filter OFF no filter is used LPF cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff value HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff value Cutoff Frequency 200 8000Hz Basic frequency of the filter Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound Is heard Step Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the modulation rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Step Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Frequency i e modula tion speed Step Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync param eter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase G 70 Music Workstation Roland Appendix MFX and IFX types and
71. Delay Sync msec Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not msec the delay time Should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the following parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value L R C Delay msec 0 1000ms L R C Delay Note 1 64T 1 64 1 32T 1 32 1 16T 1 32 1 16 1 8T 1 16 1 8 1 41 1 8 1 4 1 2T 1 4 1 2 1 17 1 2 1 1 2 1T 1 1 2 1 Specifies the delay time This can be either a time value msec or a note value depending on how you set the Delay Sync parameter above means triplet and a refers to a dotted note 2 1 means that each repetition comes after two measures bars The advantage of working with a note value is that the delay effect runs in sync with the current Arranger or Recorder tempo which can be used for musical purposes C Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS L R C Level 0 127 Volume of each delay sound there are three one for the left channel one for the center and one for the right channel 7 Press the button to return to the main page Note Do not forget to save your
72. Do not forget to save your settings to a User Program if you want to keep them Chorus for Keyboard parts Chorus broadens the spatial image of the sound and creates a stereo impression You can choose from 8 types of Chorus 1 Press the button EFFECTS O OO KEYBOARD gt gt gt o o Pa N Mrx com fy MEXPERT 1 s On this page you can switch the CHORUS processor on and off by pressing the button icon to the right of its display If you only want to select another chorus type press the CHORUS display and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select it If you also need to change certain aspects of that effect 2 Press the KEYBOARD EFFECTS CHORUS field to access the Chorus parameters The display changes to AFORAN Sr RU CHORUS LEVEL OUTPUT CHORUS TYPE GM2 CHORUS PARAMETER 3 Press the or OFF field to switch the proces sor on icon lights or off icon goes dark You can also do so on the EFFECTS page see above Press the field of the effect type you wish to use The options are Chorus1 Chorus3 These are conventional chorus effects that add spaciousness and depth to the sound Flanger This is an effect that sounds somewhat like a jet airplane taking off and landing GM2 Chorus This reverb effect is Roland s standard type for GM2 compatible tone generators Delay This is a full fledged delay effect that can be used Instead of
73. Dp noT AA EE 34 Additional Arranger Style functions 14 Using a beat box with the organ 35 Playback functions Style Control pa Working with the Music Assistant 36 Starting a MUSIC Style naasa aaa KAG AK KA KABA KAKA ds 14 If the desired registration is not displayed 36 Stopping Music Styles aaa aaa nananana 74 To save time APP PPPPPPPE 36 About Syne Start amp Stop eee eee eee 79 Using the Finder n aooaaeoa ceannann 37 Selecting other Style CIVISIONS patani sauwiewncues 75 Playing back songs Standard MIDI Files 38 Other ways of selecting Arranger patterns 75 Quick location of the song you need 38 Bass INYO Naan P EPE ERE Epe SAAANA 75 Starting playback wp meee e ep atone cent ce utero tenuate 39 VECO IETEN Cee AA Aa 76 Other practical playback functions 39 Using Ine style COVE TUNCLION saa cceatusesanews 11 Using the Song Cover function 0e 0e 41 Saving a Music Style with a COVER alteration 11 HILA AA 41 One TOUCh ca saka ape AD BEA KG NAB AKA GA DAMLAMAHAG 78 Vocal Harmonist function aaa 42 Ignoring certain One Touch settings Hold 79 naia AA AA AAP AAP 42 Programming your own One Touch settings WRITE 79 Adding harmonies to your singing 44 More refined Arranger settings 80 Who specifies the harmonies a a kk AB EH K
74. EQUALIZER COMPRESSOR TG JA E z A w PAR RT OUTPUTS On this page you can switch the REVERB processor on and off by pressing the button icon to the right of its display If you only want to select another reverb type press the REVERB display and use the dial or the DECJ INC buttons to select it If you also need to change certain aspects of that effect Reverb for Keyboard parts 1 Press the KEYBOARD EFFECTS REVERB field to access the Reverb parameters The display changes to KEYBOARD REVERB i REVERE LEVEL REVERB TYPE TIME 41GH 4 ISIQ D i i PARAMETER 2 Press the or OFF field to switch the proces sor on icon lights or off icon goes dark You can also do so on the EFFECTS page see above 3 Press the field of the effect type you wish to use The options are SRV Room TIhis effect simulates the reverb characteris tics of a room The name SRV refers to Roland s SRV 3030 a stand alone reverb processor which is also used by certain Fantom series synthesizers SRV Hall Digital simulation of a metal plate that is sometimes used for creating Reverb effects Works well for percussive sounds SRV Plate Digital simulation of a metal plate that is sometimes used for creating reverb effects Works well for percussive sounds GM2 Reverb This reverb effect is Roland s standard type for GM2 compatible tone generators G 70 Music Workstation Roland Editing the
75. G 70 Music Workstation Quick Start 3 4 5 6 7 You have just selected the more detailed recording function the sequencer The display changes to The colored bars in the right part of the display indi cate the tracks that already contain data Press the RECORDER button The display changes to RECORDING SELECT PROGRAM CHANGE 5 AFTERTOUCH a PITCH BEND CONTROL SYSTEM CHANGE EXCLUSIVE Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the track you want to record to For our example select 11 Alternatively press the field and use the dial or the DECJ INC buttons to select LW1 This sets the recording track to 11 and allows you to use the LW1 part for playing an organ line using the harmonic bars or to assign a Tone of an optional SRX series expansion board to the LW1 part Assign the desired sound to the track selected for recording See Selecting sounds for the Keyboard parts on p 29 You can play on the keyboard to check whether the sound matches the mood of the part you wish to record Specify what should be recorded by activating the corresponding RECORDING SELECT button icons For this example switch on NOTE CONTROL CHANGE PROGRAM CHANGE and PITCH BEND See page 157 for an explanation o4 8 _ 9 Press the RECORDER button The sequencer returns to the beginning of the song measure 1 Press the button
76. GAIN DB 15 15dB Use this parameter to set the level of the selected MID frequency Positive values boost increase the volume of that frequency Negative values cut attenuate it LO FREO HZ 200 400 This parameter allows you to set the cutoff frequency of the low band this is a shelv ing filter LO GAIN DB 15 15dB Use this parameter to set the level of the selected LO frequency Positive values boost increase the volume of that frequency Negative values cut attenuate it To save the settings you have just made in order to use them again at a later stage press the WRITE USER field 105 G 70 Music Workstation Using the mixer functions 8 effects There is only one USER memory By saving your new settings you therefore overwrite the previous ones 8 Press the field if you want to set the compres sor or the button to return to the main page Compressor This is in fact a multi band compressor limiter that allows you to specify the amount of signal compression for three frequency ranges A compressor reduces high levels peaks and boosts low levels smoothing out fluctuations in volume 1 On the EFFECTS page see above press the COM PRESSOR field to access the parameters of the same name The display changes to HIAST ERI IS KOY LS BC LEVEL BC GAIN DE Gu Gm 2 Press the or OFF field to switch the com pressor on icon lights or off icon goes dark You can also do s
77. Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 23 2 Pitch Shifter A Pitch Shifter changes the pitch of the original sound This 2 voice effect contains two pitch shifters and adds two trans posed copies to the original sound Pitch Shift Mode 1 5 Higher settings of this parameter will result in slower response but steadier pitch Pitch A Coarse 24 0 12 semitone Adjust the pitch of Pitch Shift A in semitone steps 2 1 octaves Pitch B Coarse 24 0 12 semitone Adjust the pitch of Pitch Shift B in semitone steps 2 1 octaves Pitch A Fine 100 0 100 cent Make fine adjust ments to the pitch of Pitch Shift A in 2 cent steps 100 100 cents One cent is 1 100th of a semitone Pitch B Fine 100 0 100 cent Make fine adjust ments to the pitch of Pitch Shift B in 2 cent steps 100 100 cents One cent is 1 100th of a semitone Pitch A Pre Delay 0 0 500 0ms Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the Pitch Shift A sound is heard Pitch B Pre Delay 0 0 500 0ms Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the Pitch Shift B sound is heard Pitch A Panpot L64 0 63R Adjust the stereo location of the Pitch Shift A sound L64 is far left O is center and 63R is far right Pitch B Panpot L64 0 63R Adjust the stereo locati
78. JAZZ Selects sounds suitable for jazz combos ETHNIC Selects sounds suitable for world music gt f you want to set everything yourself jump to Preparing your own settings below Mi Time signature Before recording your first track you must specify the time signature of your accompaniment Select 4 4 for 8 or 16 beat patterns 3 4 for waltzes 2 4 for polkas and 6 8 or 4 4 for marches You can also select more complex time signatures 5 4 7 4 etc This value needs to be set when you initialize the Style RAM memory i e now AIl Divisions and Modes use this time signature You could however edit the patterns at a later stage see TIME SIGNAT on p 197 and specify that MAIN 1 should use 4 4 MAIN 2 6 8 etc 5 Set the time signature e Press the first field the numerator and enter the desired number of beats using the dial or the DEC INC buttons G 70 Music Workstation Roland Recording User Styles from scratch e Press the second field the denominator and g Press the second field the denominator and enter the duration of each beat using the enter the duration of each beat using the dial or the DEC INC buttons dial or the DECI INC buttons You can also set the tempo 20 250 here or leave See Time signature above You can also set the tempo that for later 20 250 here or leave that for later Continue with step 6 below 6 Press the field M Preparing your own settin
79. KN ANAKAN NANANG 79 E 2ccnacerancanenaweanes 105 106 User ino rams a6445645445440600 111 LONG aoaaa naana nananana 80 219 For EU Countries This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89 336 EEC and LVD 73 23 EEC For the USA FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help This device complies with Part 15 of the FC
80. Keyboard and Style parts MODE Local On Local Off These settings allow you to establish or remove the connection between the G 70 s keyboard Arranger Recorder and the internal tone gen erator If you select default playing on the G 70 s keyboard or playing back a song Style causes the corre sponding notes to sound If you select Local Off the corresponding MIDI messages are no longer sent to the G 70 Music Workstation Roland The how to s internal tone generator but they are still transmitted to the MIDI OUT socket or USB port and hence to external MIDI instruments i MIDI OUT MIDI OUT sade LOCAL OFF reo When you press one of these fields the number of the currently selected MIDI Set is indicated with an asterisk to signal that the current settings no longer corre spond to the written settings See p 220 for details about the MIDI Sets Editing procedure After performing step 7 below the display changes 7 Press the field on the first MIDI page EASY SETTING SELECT OUTPUT MODE ext oes 8 On the page that appears now select the section whose parameters you wish to edit HUG ENT KEYBOARD STYLE SYSTEM Ei Synchronization general settings Refers to the Recorder sequencer parts Refers to the Style parts Keyboard parts including MELODY INTELL 9 Use the PAGE buttons to select the part you want to edit 10 Press the field of the paramete
81. Minus One function Is on Keyboard Exchange UP2 1 Allows you to switch off the UP1 part and activate the UP2 part and vice versa Note If neither UP1 nor UP2 are on when you first press the footswitch one of them is activated Keyboard Exchange LW2 1 Allows you to switch off the LW1 part and activate the LW2 part and vice versa Note If neither LW1 nor LW2 are on when you first press the footswitch one of them is activated 4 Press the button to return to the main page a ae a Expression Foot Pedal An optional EV 5 EV 7 or BOSS FV 300L expression pedal connected to the FOOT PEDAL socket allows you to control the volume of all parts by foot You can reverse the expression pedal s effect and specify that certain parts are not to be controlled by the expression pedal 1 Press the button JO The display changes to MENU F j FOOT K TUNING i CONTROLLERS YOCAL HARMONIST Press the field followed by the field BOP GOV IROLU Ses 3 Use the ARR PART and KBD PART fields to select the Arranger or Keyboard part whose setting you want to change 4 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select Expression Select Off if the part in question should not respond to movements of the expression pedal 5 Press the or field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the value You can also press the dial to cal
82. Note The Vocoder can be used alongside SINGER or AUTO PITCH Again there are several parameters for customizing the Vocoder s behavior Press and hold the button The display changes to VOCAL PIEUDO NINE VOCODER TYPE GENDER These button icons MALE FEMALE MIX allow you to change the timbre of the effect so as to create a masculine feminine or mixed character The GENDER choice determines which 8 preset settings are available There are thus 24 Vocoder presets 8 for Male 8 for Female and 8 for Mix The 8 fields in the middle e g OPERA MY VOICE etc specify the voice character These presets are based on the parameters you can change on the Edit page which is unnecessary if you are happy with one of the presets Set the desired TRACK value with the dial G 70 Music Workstation Roland Vocal Harmonist function The VOCODER ASSIGN section s current default setting is AUTO This means that song files indi cated as With MIDI Harmony for Your Vocal Har mony Processor with harmony note information on track 5 automatically switch on the Vocoder If you like you can still add additional chord information by playing on the keyboard If you stop song playback and then play a chord on the keyboard the note information thus generated is used If you are using a Standard MIDI File set the TRACK value to select a song part 1 16 As the melody is usually monophonic 1 no
83. On the 16 track main page press the field The display now responds with oa Oe osc E KIES ar oe po 2 Specify where you want to save your song e Press the field to select the G 70 s internal memory as target this is a 50MB storage area similar to a hard disk Insert a floppy disk into the drive and press the field Press the field This option is only available if you insert a memory card into the G 70 s PCMCIA slot If your floppy disk or memory card does not seem to work try formatting it then try again See Format on p 209 Note If you want to save the song under its current name or the name assigned by default New Song you can skip steps 4 5 You need to give your song two names a SONG NAME and a FILE NAME The FILE NAME is the name the G 70 uses for locating the song The SONG NAME on the other hand Is displayed in the Song Finder Col oe mac E joe 9 KIES a Be oe cn 3 Press the button icon 4 Enter the name G 70 Music Workstation Roland Recording your music e Move the cursor to the desired position using and gt e Enter the character for that position using the alpha numeric keypad In many instances you will have to press the desired field several times to select the desired character e Use the field to alternate between capitals and small letters e Press the field to delete the character indi cated by the cursor Press an
84. Panpot L64 0 63R Panning of the reverse delay sound Rev Delay Level 0 127 Volume of the reverse delay sound Delay 1 Time sync msec Note Delay 2 Time sync msec Note Delay 3 Time sync msec Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not msec the delay time Should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a Speed or a note value Delay 1 Time msec 0 1300ms Delay 2 Time msec 0 1300ms Delay 3 Time msec 0 1300ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay 1 Time note Musical Notes Delay 2 Time note Musical Notes Delay 3 Time note Musical Notes Delay times can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to msec Specify the value of the desired note Delay 3 Feedback 98 0 98 Proportion of the delay sound that is to be returned to the input of the tap delay negative values invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Frequency at which the low frequency content of the tap delay sound will be cut BYPASS no cut Delay 1 Panpot L64 0 63R Delay 2 Panpot L64 0 63R Panning of the tap delay sounds Delay 1 Level 0 127 Delay 2 Level 0 127 Volume of the tap delay sounds EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the h
85. Play List UNCON kano kwa Gad Lhasa kd h CR ERA 145 Programming PlaWUStSiy2ecreececeeeedeentaaeeeds 145 Editing Play LISTS 2s essesssoeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeewwsas 146 Using Play USSE EEEE 148 Managing Play LISS vsscsseeuesesounnes nesana 148 EANO EVINCS ee eraen ER ENEE EE 150 Adding Lyrics to a SONU ck oceencededivende ads 150 Exporting Lyrics data as text file 152 Using the 16 track sequencer 154 About the sequencer s main page 154 General considerations 155 Example 1 Recording a song from scratch 155 PIANO AA anAnASSRAAARAASASEAARARE Gees os 156 Example 2 Adding tracks ix aa snes ox ears 158 SAVING YOU SONG 44 444444s44544seeseeene0enewwn 159 Editing 16 track SOngs n nnna nunana annann 160 Easy editing and useful functions 160 Editing one or several tracks TRACK EDIT 160 Editing song data using Microscope Edit 175 General notes about MICRO EDIT 220gaaaaaaaaaaaa 175 Editing EVEN ES 1 aaa NANGKA LAAL aaa 177 ilgla M01 8 HC LO 4C PPRPPPPT PEPPER AE 177 Programming Styles Style Composer 179 LONG Cc pala teen AKNG Ga KG 179 Recording User Styles from scratch 180 Staring the Style COMPOSE 202 cde aaeseeeeeyeeees 180 Clearing the RAM memory Initialize Style 180 Getting ready for the first track as oes aed ee eee ees 181 ECORI AA a Baybee nt 184 Auditioning your Style and adding more tracks
86. Portamento Control Effect 1 Depth Effect 3 Depth 98 99 NRPN LSB MSB 100 101 RPN LSB MSB 1 1 Program 1 4 System Exclusive Ha Ce Song Position Pointer 0 32 Control Change 76 77 78 84 91 93 4 4 4 Reverb Chorus 4 ba oooo0oo0oo0oo0o0000000000000000000 O oliooooooooo0oo0oo0oo0o00000000000000 O O O O O System O 1 s RA Song Sel X X Tune X X System Clock O 1 O 1 Real Time Commands O O 4 All Sounds Off X O 120 126 127 Reset All Controllers X O 121 Aux Local On Off O 4 O Messages All Notes Off X O 123 125 Active Sensing O O Reset X X 2 Recognized as M 1 even if Mz 1 Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO O Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO X No 2 50 G 70 Music Workstation Roland Appendix Chord Intelligence Chord Intelligence TON RN AN NTN a LETT CM7 C M7 DM7 Eb M7 EM7 FM7 TUBYBAN ELLE ESET CELTE PE UE TAPA CPR PITS Test oF C7 C 7 D7 Eb7 E7 F7 YA EYA CEPT PP Ler Pee eer LPT Lette Lette ft LLP ett it Cm C m Dm Ebm Em Fm AMELE LASON LTT CETE CTRL STOTT OBB BE tT Cm7 C m7 Dm7 Eb m7 Em7 Fm7 AMHER EN ESTP BP PED ET DT COE ME EN PEPE Ly CmM7 C mM7 DmM7 Eb mM7 EmM7 FmM7 PEDDLE EELE LAPP TY ETEN NS BAN PA HAYATE Cdim C dim Ddim Eb dim Edim Fdim ME RE TPSET PA TF PAIDA CEE CAE Cm7 b5 C m7 b5 Dm7 b5 Ebm7 b5 Em7 b5 Fm7 b5 ATUTI LEE LER MLPN CELIE ET UP
87. Program Finder database is called Index All search opera tions apply to the selected Index and therefore not necessarily to all files internal memory or on a mem ory card After performing step 2 press the field in the upper left corner OSS PROGRAM INDEX Top 40 Either press the field that corresponds to the desired User Program category or if you re not sure which category the User Program belongs to press ALL This may be a safer bet Now return to the previous page by pressing BACK The display returns to the page shown under step 1 above This time however only the User Programs belonging to the selected Index are displayed Continue with step 3 to select the User Program you want to use Milo directly locate the desired User Program 4 Press the field Qi UU UU Qi KIA Se ea at a wara Ema 5 Decide what you want to look for by pressing the USER PRG STYLE LINK GENRE or SONG LINK button icon 6 Decide how the Finder should look for files G 70 Music Workstation Roland Selecting User Programs e Press the field to search for all Press and hold the button entries that start with the characters you entered BEA for example Names that match the specified criteria will be displayed at the top of the list Press the field to have the G 70 search for names that contain the supplied informa tion This would allow you to also locate
88. Start playing with the newly selected Style The selection of the DISK USER Style will be written to a User Program page 111 The User Program in question refers to the name and memory area Next time you recall such a User Program the G 70 will therefore use the referenced Style If the Style in question cannot be found an error message appears and the G 70 goes on using the previously selected Style Press the button return to the main page The name of the selected Style appears in the field Style Finder quickly locating Styles The G 70 allows you to have a great many Music Styles handy in its internal memory on a memory card and on floppy disks For the internal memory and the mem ory card in the PCMCIA slot there is a powerful Finder function for quickly locating the Style you need Here is how to use this function 1 Press the FINDER button The display changes to l ZSLROCK1 i 60 i SLROCK2 64 SLSWNGI 60 _ OPTIONS FOUND found entries GLOBAL total number of songs in that memory area 2 Specify the memory area that contains the Style you need EXTERNAL MEMORY or INTERNAL MEMORY The G 70 is shipped with several Styles that reside in its internal memory The display shows a list of 5 Styles in the selected memory area internal memory card or floppy disk 3 If the name of the Style you want to use to is already displayed press its line In our ex
89. Stereo headphones RH 25 RH 50 or RH 200 Note Try to use dynamic microphones whenever possible You can also connect a condenser microphone however provided you use a DI box with power supply Note Except for the power cable all other items shown above are optional See your Roland dealer for detalls Note There is no absolute need to connect the Vocal Harmonist OUTPUT sockets If you don t your singing and the Harmonist effects will be transmitted via the main MAIN sockets ONLY if you don t connect anything to the Vocal Harmonist OUTPUT sockets If you use these connec tors the Vocal Harmonist signals are no longer transmitted to the headphones 2 O G 70 Music Workstation Roland Front panel Switching the G 70 on off After connecting the G 70 to the other devices proceed as follows Internal Memory Protect VIDEO VIDEO After unpacking your G 70 and before switching it on you aves dii need to defeat the protection of its internal memory a solid INTERNAL MEMORY INTERNAL MEMORY state hard disk if you intend to save data in the internal gmg ome memory al le el le e Use a philips screwdriver to loosen the screws and remove the plastic cap Note Be sure to store the cap and the two screws in a safe e Slide the INTERNAL MEMORY PROTECT switch to the gg Placein case you need them again at a later stage position to unlock the memory To once again lock the internal memory slide the switch back
90. TOUCH settings for the selected Music Style if none of the four One Touch memories contains the settings you need This may come in handy for CUSTOM Styles see page 84 for which there are no presets These customized One Touch settings are stored in a special memory area inside the G 70 that is saved to card or the internal memory whenever you use the Save User Program Set function page 205 1 Press and hold a ONE TOUCH 1 4 button The display changes to eee ioe SITE gyen ENTA ONE TOUCH HOLD Bil on 2 Press the field it lights in red 3 Press the 1 4 field that should contain your new One Touch settings The display now shows the following message WRITE Te P 1p0 oe OK i OneTouch settings The One Touch memory you chose for writing is automatically selected 4 Press the button to return to the main page TO G 70 Music Workstation Additional Arranger Style functions More refined Arranger settings Chord recognition area ZONE Telling the G 70 that you want to use the Arranger is a matter of pressing the EASY SETTING button That however means that the key of the Music Style patterns is controlled by the chords you play in the left half of the keyboard You can also tell the Arranger to scan another part of the keyboard for usable chords Though LEFT is proba bly the most popular setting you can also select RIGHT to have the Arranger scan the right half of
91. The Recorder allows for simultaneous multitrack recording which is not possi ble with the 16 track Sequencer where you can only record one track at a time While you are working with the 16 track Sequencer the Arranger is not available Tracks and MIDI channels Tracks are assigned to MIDI channels on a 1 1 basis i e Track 1 MIDI channel 1 Track 12 MIDI channel 12 etc Since the Keyboard parts have been assigned to the MIDI channels in such a way as to allow for easy Minus One playback using the Recorder page 38 you Should take a minute to study the table below Obviously if you record a song with Arranger backing the respective parts ADR ABS etc are recorded onto the tracks that are assigned to their MIDI channels Track SMF part ER channel Arranger 1 Piano a ll s Accomp 1 2 Bass a s A Bass 3 Chords a po Accomp 2 4 Solo Melody Upper1 5 Harmony EJ s Accomp 3 6 Counter melody 6 Uppe2 Upper2 7 Not specified a a Accomp 4 8 Not specified a fF Accomp 5 9 Not specified a oz Accomp 6 10 Drums A Drums 11 Not specified Lower 12 Not specified M Bass 13 Not specified Upper3 14 Not specified Lower2 15 Not Specified Melody Intell 16 Not specified EN a The MIDI channel of these parts depends on whether you are working with the Arranger page 52 or the Recorder There is yet another track called MASTER that is used for recording the time signature the
92. This control change is the so called LSB Bank Select message Select if the cur rent setting must not change Note References to the sounds of an SRX wave expansion board can be changed by setting CCOO to 93 and CC32 to the value that lets you access the desired group of sounds See page 228 for details PC 1 128 ALL Use this parameter to change the address a k a program change number of a sound e g from 1 to 2 Select if the current setting must not change MINC DEC These are so called relative changes the positive or nega tive value you set here will be added to or subtracted from the original values of the selected track s Use these fields to increase or decrease the existing values for the entire selected track s Volume Expression Panpot Reverb Chorus 127 127 These parameters allow you to add or subtract a given value to from the current Volume Expression Pan Reverb Send or Chorus Send values This may come in handy if the realtime changes you recorded turn out to be too high or too low WE EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data 169 G 70 Music Workstation Using the 16 track sequencer SHIFT CLOCK a ia a ESP 5 a TA Hs ROM Execute SHIFT CLOCK allows you to shift the notes within the selected FROM TO range It can be used for two things To correct slow notes due to a slow er attack You may want
93. To return to a pre vious group of 5 Styles press or use the dial If you need to copy all Styles that are currently dis played on all available pages from the FROM to the TO area press the field Note In some cases working with the field may yield an error message at some stage because a 2HD disk can only hold 1 44MB worth of data while a memory card and the internal memory area are a lot bigger Note If the target media memory card or floppy disk is not formatted a message will be displayed that allows you to for mat it before the Styles are copied If you chose EXT MEMORY or FLOPPY DISK disk for TO enable the disk s card s write protection and insert it into the PCMCIA slot or disk drive To enable the write protection of a floppy disk open the little window see p 11 See the owner s man ual of the memory card for how to disable its write protection Press the field Press if you do not want to proceed or to select other files G 70 Music Workstation Roland Style Finder quickly locating Styles You are asked whether it is OK to overwrite all files on the destination media TO that have the same file names as the files you are about to copy SRAL ojana J Replace files of the same name 6 Press the field if it is OK to overwrite files with the same names on the destination media Press the field if files on the source FROM media that have the same name as existing
94. User Program Finder Your G 70 also allows you to load any User Program from the internal memory or a memory card which is as fast as working with a User Program Set List As Stated above any registration you write is saved as a separate User Program file in the memory area that contains the currently active Set List All User Programs referenced by a Set List therefore necessarily reside in the same memory area as the list itself There may be times however when somebody from the audience asks you to play a given song for which you did prepare a User Program but maybe in a com pletely different Set List Rather than loading another 113 G 70 Music Workstation Working with User Programs list with 143 references you may not need at all you can simply use the Finder to load Just that specific User Program A User Program loaded with the Finder resides in a tem porary memory buffer and will be overwritten when you select another User Program You can however decide to save it using WRITE so as to include it in the active Set List The Finder can therefore also be used for creating best of compilations from various User Pro gram Set Lists 1 Press the FINDER button The display changes to C e 2 Specify the memory area that contains the User Program you need EXTERNAL MEMORY or FLOPPY The display shows a list of 5 User Programs in the selected device internal memory card or
95. Vibrato Chorus Switch Off On Turns the Vibrato Cho rus on off Vibrato Chorus Type V 1 V 2 V 3 C 1 C 2 C 3 V 1 V 2 V 3 This applies vibrato pitch modulation Increasing the value will produce a deeper effect C 1 C 2 C 3 This applies chorus to add depth and spa ciousness to the sound Increasing the value will produce a deeper effect Vibrato Chorus Vintage 50 60 70 Tonewheel sounds of the 1950s 60s and 70 Vibrato Chorus Level 0 127 Level of the Vibrato Cho rus effect Overdrive Switch Off On Turns the Overdrive on off Overdrive Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Overdrive Level 0 127 Sets the Overdrive output level Rotary Switch Off On Turns the Rotary on off Rotary Speed Slow Fast Rotational speed of the rotat ing speaker Rotary Woofer Slow Speed 0 05 10 00Hz Low speed rotation speed of the woofer Rotary Woofer Fast Speed 0 05 10 00Hz High speed rotation speed of the woofer Rotary Woofer Acceleration 0 15 Adjusts the time it takes the rotor woofer to reach the newly selected speed Fast or Slow Lower values correspond to slower tran sistions Rotary Woofer Level 0 127 Sets the woofer level Rotary Tweeter Slow Speed 0 05 10 00Hz Low speed rotation speed of the tweeter Rotary Tweeter Fast Speed 0 05 10 00Hz High speed rotation speed of the tweeter Rotary Tweeter Acceleration 0 15 Adjusts t
96. WE DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division or pattern you want to edit Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill Up 1 3 End 154 BVALUE 127 127 This parameter is used to set the transposition interval in semi tone steps Select 2 for example to transpose pat tern in C to D Note Be careful when applying Transpose to the ADrums track Transposing all notes of this track leads to dramatic changes BI FROM NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the note or lower limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range The note can also be selected by pressing the corresponding key after selecting the FROM NOTE field WTO NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the upper limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range This note can also be selected by pressing the corre sponding key after selecting the TO NOTE field It is not displayed when you select EQUAL UNEQUAL HIGHER or LOWER See also Fine tuning the note range on p 192 W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data EQUA uneguA HIGHER ow CHANGE VELO SHALES VAS Shy a a Lana a snd ee e kaa ba TO The CHANGE VELO function allows you to modify the dynamics called velocity of a track or excerpt See p 167 for details Only note events can be changed BTRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to sele
97. a natural range If it is off some notes may sound too high or too low PITCH BEND Press this field so that it lights if you want to influence the pitch of the voice effect using the G 70 s Pitch Bend lever OCTAVE This parameter allows you to transpose the Vocoder in octave steps e Press the field to leave this page If you press the field the display looks as follows KOTO NEE Sey yt pes PART 1 PART 2 PART 4 Om Om Om Om ALL PARTS FREQUENCY HZ GAIN DE mo This page contains a simple equalizer for each sepa rate Vocoder part as well as an EQ band that applies to all four voices simultaneously for added flexibility These are connected in series e Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons EQUALIZER Press this field to switch all equalizers on this page on or off The equalizer can be used for two things a emphasizing a specific frequency range to create a special effect or make the part more distin guishable b to reduce the level of frequencies that mask other sounds or produce a boomy sound FREQUENCY HZ Use this parameter to select the fre quency whose level you wish to change with the GAIN parameter The smaller the value the lower the fre quency that will be boosted or cut The ALL PARTS FRE QUENCY Hz parameter affects the sound of all four parts 1 4 GAIN
98. a chorus or flanger As you will see there are a lot of parameters to program just the effect you need 4 _ If you don t want to edit the effects parameters con tinue with the next step otherwise jump to step 6 5 Press to return to the display page with the modules 0R Press the button to return to the main page 6 After selecting a chorus type you may want to fine tune some of its parameters If so proceed as follows Press the field of the parameter you wish to change the number of fields and their meaning depend on the selected chorus type Parameter values can be set by turning the dial by pressing the DEC INC but tons or by pressing the dial and using the on screen numeric pad CHORUS LEVEL allows you to set the output level of the Chorus processor Setting this parameter to 0 means that you no longer hear the effect in question allows you to specify where the processor s output signal should go to the MAIN outputs Main the Reverb processor Rev or both Main Rev The latter two options mean that the chorus signal i e a mix of direct and effect signal is also processed by the reverb effect you select Chorus 1 3 and Flanger parameters Filter Type Off LPF HPF This allows you to specify whether or not the incoming signal should be filtered before being processed by the chorus This may be help ful to avoid a cluttered sound image or to preserve the
99. a file called Raggabeat if you entered BEA The display changes to 7 Enter only as many characters as you think are necessary to find the User Program you are after BUD BEINN The character string you enter can be used in two CD z ways see below e e See page 49 for how to enter names aes opr Note There s is no field here because the Finder makes nia no distinction between upper and lower case letters 3 a To enter numbers without cycling through the char acters first press the button icon After entering the numbers switch it off if you need to enter characters again 3 Press the fields that correspond to the settings you do not want to recall 8 Press the field to start your search Style Press this field if the settings related to the 9 Press the field of the User Program you need and Arranger Style and Division should no longer be loaded start playing Song Press this field if the song see Song Link on Note If no User Programs were found the following message page 116 should no longer be loaded appears and no file names are displayed in which case you MIDI Set Press this field if the linked MIDI Set need to press the USER PRG STYLE LINK or page 116 should not be recalled This allows you to use field to display all songs again a User Program that you originally programmed for a given MIDI setup with a different MIDI setup The cur rent MIDI channe
100. after As you see there are three button icons NAME and GENRE e Press the field to sort the Music Assistant entries alphabetically by musical genre This reshuf fles the list e Press the field to sort the Music Assistant entries alphabetically by artist name This reshuffles the list The genre names disappear and are replaced by the artists names right column which are displayed in alphabetical order e Press the field of the registration you want to use e Press the button to start playback of the automatically selected Music Style G 70 Music Workstation Roland Working with the Music Assistant Using the Finder Note If no Music Assistant setting were found the following Yet another way of locating the desired registration message appears and no songs are displayed in which case goes like this you need to press the Or field to display all l songs again 1 On the Music Assistant page press the field MUSIG ASSISTANT LIST 057G oe ele on doe nod BE pa peo No Match Found 6 Press the field of the Music Assistant registration you need and start playing l baa 2 Press NAME registration name ARTIST artist sa ln i EH field eee NIHOL name or GENRE musical genre to specify which Note To once again display all file names after a search entry you want to look for which causes only matching entries to be displayed press one 3 Enter only as many
101. all settings the way you want to save them 2 Press the USER PROGRAM button The display changes to factory UBERPROGRAM nm MIDI HOLD SONG f WR SETTINGS LINK y LINE WRITE 1 i Blue Berry 1 Swear Ballad Celebrating J f Blue Shoes f Fame Rock i Know Him Hands Up Party Misty Jazz pa p5 ET factory UBERPROGRAM mi HOLD SONG fli MIDI SETTINGS LINK S LINE Swear B Blue Berry Celebrating Fame Rock i i Know Him Hands Up Party P Misty Jazz pa p5 ET 4 Use the P fields and to select the page 1 18 where you want to save your registration 5 Press a big field 1 8 to select the destination memory 111 G 70 Music Workstation Working with User Programs The display changes to WRITEUSERPRUGRAN PUTA aaa lab 2j aef 3 KIES Care Da a mer occu ewer The blue field indicates the name of the User Pro gram settings originally assigned to that memory here Rainbow If you do not want to overwrite that memory press the field and continue with step above 3 to select another memory 6 Enter a name for your new User Program in the black field At first the black field contains the name of the set tings you are about to save If you don t want to use that name start by pressing the field See page 49 for how to enter names You only need to do this the first time you save new settings to a User Program Y
102. amp 60 s SAMBA T MAX aaa LUZ MARK amp JUMP 1 2 3 4 button Press this button to access the G 70 s sequencer MIDI recorder This sequencer goes way beyond anything you may know from previous Roland arranger instruments see p 154 I lt gt PLAY STOP m These buttons allow you to return to the beginning of the current song rewind or fast forward in one measure steps and to start and stop playback of the selected song Press the button to record a new song see p 52 STYLE section These buttons allow you to select one of the twelve Music Style families The button of the selected fam ily lights D Beam controller This controller allows you to influence the timbre of the notes you play to control song playback and to create some unique effects All you need to do Is move your hand up down or left right above the two eyes The buttons below it allow you to assign the desired function to the D Beam controller See p 64 MARK JUMP section These buttons 1 4 4 allow you to jump to one of four stored locations inside the currently selected song You can program the desired locations for songs that do not yet contain them T3 G 70 Music Workstation Panel descriptions ASSIGN SW STYLE CONTROL BASS INTRO MAIN END RIT INVERSION SYNC START STOP VARIATION AUTO 2 3 1 gt gt 1 4 FILL IN FADE IN 2 OUT ASSIGN SW section and are assignable buttons You ca
103. are added to the melody you play using the UP1 part You cannot play that part yourself That explains why its button not part of the KEYBOARD PART pad it is one of the two TONE EFFECTS buttons You can choose from among 18 harmony types page 76 G 70 Music Workstation Roland Using the Keyboard parts Selecting sounds for the Keyboard parts El One Touch 2 3 4 5 The easiest way to select suitable Tones for the Key board parts while working with the Arranger is by using the ONE TOUCH feature The One Touch memo ries are in fact small User Programs See p 78 for details Press the desired ONE TOUCH button There are four One Touch memories per Music Style for the 285 internal Styles and 120 CUSTOM memo ries Note One Touch memories usually switch on the SYNC START function If you don t want the Arranger to start as soon as you play a note or chord switch off the button Select a Music Style page 27 and start Arranger playback by pressing the button Start playing to the accompaniment You will notice that the sounds of all Keyboard parts match the mood of the selected Music Style Select a different Music Style and again play a solo line The active Keyboard part probably UP1 now uses a different sound even Keyboard parts that are off change sounds Press another ONE TOUCH button to use that reg istration Press the same button again if you no longer need the One Touch setting Mi
104. are shared by all three organ sections It therefore doesn t matter on what page you press the field HARMONIG BAR EFFECTS lt LEAKAGE SOFT a HARD MIN MARK MIN MAK ROTARY SOUND IBRATO CHORUS LI ta ka w A c z X C 3 4 2 4 1 c 1 SLOW FAST HARMONIC BAR OVERDRIVE This effect distorts the sound giving it an edge and making it suitable for hard rock and similar musical genres Press the field to switch this effect on or off To change the setting press the display icon and rotate the dial or use the DEC INC buttons LEAKAGE On tone wheel organs the sound of the note that was pressed is slightly contaminated by audio signals from tone wheels not related to that note Formerly this was seen as a problem but today this idiosyncrasy is considered an important element of the distinctive sound of a traditional instrument This parameter allows you to set the level of the noise To change the setting press the display icon and rotate the dial or use the DEC buttons PERCUSSION By selecting HARD you strengthen the percussion sound That s because the organ sound specified with the harmonic bars becomes softer Conversely you can select SOFT in which case the volume of the real organ sound is raised to its normal level Press the switch icon to select your preferred setting ROTARY SOUND This section contains an on off switch for activating or switching off the
105. area is automatically set to WHOLE Furthermore the KBD MODE button is switched on and the Upper 1 part is activated if it was off Half Bar on Fill In The footswitch allows you to switch the Half Bar function on and off Certain pop songs in 4 4 contain bars that only last two beats The usual place for such a bar is between the first and the second verse This does not change Style playback right away Only when a Fill In starts will the Half Bar function be acti vated and play half the number of beats of the fill you selected Arranger Hold Allows you to switch the Arranger Hold function on and off See p 80 Dynamic Arranger Allows you to switch the Dynamic Arranger function on and off See page 81 for details Rotary HB S F Allows you to select the slow or fast speed of the Rotary effect This only works if the Har monic Bars are being used by UP1 LW1 and or MBS Rotary HB On Off Allows you to switch the Rotary effect on first time and off second This only works if the Harmonic Bars are being used by UP1 LW1 and or MBS Scale Upper Allows you to assign the selected Scale Tune see p 71 setting to the three Upper parts Scale Lower Allows you to assign the selected Scale Tune see p 71 setting to the three Lower parts Arr Chord Off Allows you to switch the Arranger s chord recognition off in which case only the drum per cussion of the selected Music Style keeps playing or can be
106. be a safer bet Note The remaining options on this page RENAME EDIT and COPY are only available for the specified category e Press Back The display returns to the page shown under step 1 above This time however only songs belonging to the selected Index are displayed b Select the Finder The powerful part starts as soon as you press the FINDER field O oe maa a oer 3 KIES 8x ota Ep mon c Search the database The next step is to decide how the Song Finder should look for the files e Press the field to search for all entries that start with the characters you entered BEA for example Files that match the specified criteria will be displayed at the top of the list The order depends on the button icon you activated SONG NAME ARTIST GENRE or FILE NAME e Press the field to have the G 70 search the selected column for files that contain the sup plied information This would allow you to also locate a file called Raggabeat if you entered BEA Note See p 38 for how to use the Play amp Search function d Decide what you want to look for e Press the field if you want the G 70 to look for song names then enter the name or part of it e Press the field if you want to look for an art ist s name then enter the name or part of it e Press the field to locate a specific genre Rock n Roll 16 Beat etc then enter the desired characters e Press the field if you happ
107. bigger the room becomes Hall1 These types simulate the reverb of a small Hall2 1 or large 2 concert hall and thus sound much bigger than the Room types above Plate Digital simulation of a metal plate that is sometimes used for creating Reverb effects Works well for percussive sounds Delay A Delay effect no reverb Works a lot like an echo effect and thus repeats the sounds Pan Delay This is a stereo version of the above Delay effect It creates repetitions that alternate between the left and right channels The Original setting means that the song or Style uses its own programmed reverb settings G 70 Music Workstation Roland Using the Makeup Tools CHORUS TYPE Chorus broadens the spatial image of the sound and creates a stereo impression You can choose from 8 types of Chorus Chorus These are conventional chorus effects that 1 4 add spaciousness and depth to the sound Feedback This is a chorus with a flanger like effect and a soft sound Fanger This is an effect that sounds somewhat like a jet airplane taking off and landing Short This is a full fledged delay effect that can Delay be used instead of a chorus or flanger As you will see there are a lot of parameters to program Just the effect you need Short DLY This is a short delay with many repeats FBK Original means that the song or Music Style uses its own programmed chorus settings REVERB LEVEL 8 CHORUS LEVEL The
108. but the drum bass and organ lines of the MAIN 2 level are often identical to those of the 1 level Therefore always start by recording the most com plex accompaniment e g MAIN 4 while cloning all other looped divisions page 182 If you then move to the MAIN 3 Division and delete the bells and whistles page 192 that division already sounds sim pler The next step would then be to select the MAIN pattern and delete both the bells and whistles and the distorted guitar 135 G 70 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer Metronome In Style Composer mode the metronome sounds during recording unless you switch it off using the TEMPO button If you also need the metronome when listening to what you have just recorded select another metronome mode See Metronome settings on p 73 Playback in Arranger mode If during playback in Arranger mode i e normal G 70 mode the Style stops unexpectedly try differ ent chord modes Chances are that you only pro grammed the major division so that the Arranger selects an empty pattern when you play a minor or seventh chord Remember to always set the Mode parameter to M m 7 until you have come to grips with the possibilities of the G 70 s Arranger That way those three patterns will sound alike but at least you are sure that the Arranger does not stop when you play a minor or seventh chord Note Save your Music Style before trying it out with the
109. button to rewind more rapidly p3 FWD allows you to fast forward one measure at a time You can also press and hold this button to advance more rapidly These buttons are available both during playback and while playback Is stopped Mi Next Song While the current song is still running you can already select the next one to be played back If you want it to start automatically proceed as follows e Press the button e Select the desired song using the Song Finder page 38 e As soon as the current song finishes the next one Starts automatically There is thus no need to press again You could now select another song e Press the button again to switch off this function Note Your G 70 also provides a PLAY LIST function for pro gramming sequences of several songs page 145 MPlayer Data Update and Quick Start 1 Press the button The display changes to MENU CONTROLLERS ie HARMONIST sg STYLE COMPOSER l ir o T lt iz gt g UTILITY HRAM TONE EDIT HAND s53 ec USBDATA i A CONTROLLERS STORAGE 2 Press the UTILITY then the field DTN mr PLAYER A KEYBOARD i UPPERI gt j MPF X LINK _ FROM 1st NOTE 3 Use the button icon next to the field to specify whether on or not off SysEx messages contained in the song you play back are updated while you fast forward rewind or use the M
110. characters as you think are of the alphabetical sort icons NAME ARTIST GENRE on necessary to find the registration you are after the Music Assistant page Note See Music Assistant Mark on p 119 and Music Assis tant functions on p 121 for how to create or edit Music Assis tant data The character string you enter can be used in two ways see below e Use the and fields to select the position for which you wish to enter a new character e Use the alohanumeric keypad to enter the desired characters This keypad works exactly like the keypad of a cellphone you may have to press an alphanu meric field several times to select the desired charac ter or number Note The Finder makes no distinction between upper and lower case letters e The field allows you to delete the selected character Press and hold it to clear all characters e Press to insert a blank or the number O e f you forgot to insert a character use or to select the position where the missing character should be inserted Then press Insert followed by the character you wish to insert e f you only want to enter numbers activate the field 4 Decide how the Finder should look for the files e Press the field to search for all entries that start with the characters you entered BEA for example Names that match the specified criteria will be displayed at the top of the list e Press the field to have the G
111. dealer e Memory cards you purchase must meet the following conditions e Power supply voltage 3 3 V e Capacity 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512MB 1GB 2GB 4GB 2GB and 4GB only with Microdrive e The G 70 cannot use cards of types other than the above Liability and copyright e Unauthorized recording distribution sale lending public perfor mance broadcasting or the like in whole or in part of a work musical composition video broadcast public performance or the like whose copyright is held by a third party is prohibited by law Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a copy right held by a third party Roland assumes no responsibility what soever with regard to any infringements of third party copyrights arising through your use of this unit SmartMedia is a trademark of Toshiba Corp Compact Flash and are trademarks of SanDisk Corporation and licensed by CompactHash association Roland Corporation is an authorized licensee of the CompactFlash and CF logo trade marks All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners G 70 Music Workstation Roland Front panel ER Panel descriptions Front panel Note You can press and hold most buttons to Jump to an associated display page MASTER M VOLUME PLAY NEXT MINUS 16 TRACKS or LIST SONG ONE SEQUENCER a AA pr D BEAM ll DEMO 4 TOP BWD FWD PLAY STOP REC Y la
112. desired song into the slot or drive 7 Press the line that contains the name of the text The display changes to file you want to use If you don t see the desired file name use the scroll Sea OT 160 APA bar the dial or the DECJ INC buttons to select another group of 8 files If you still can t find the file it may not end in TXT or not be a text ASCII file 5 Press the field followed by the field T 35O 8 Press the field to load the text file you 9 selected GANON The Kia rg Tea will be lost Do you want to continue Qves Ono It means that the lyrics of the previously selected song will be erased If that s OK with you press the field If not press the field to return to the TXT IMPORT page where the previous lyrics are dis played Now you re all set for the synchronization work BARIS DAO NE TENS CER Lyrics Synchronization M0001 gt ees SEX BOMB AW Q 0 PRESS REC TO START THE SYNC SESSION This page can also be selected with the field This display page should contain the first line of the text you imported The function can also be used to correct the synchronization of Lyrics data contained in a song you loaded Here s what we re going to do every line of the text you imported can be associated with a given quarter note of the song We ll do this while the song is play ing back Synchronizing text lines is a matter of pressing th
113. display the notes of the selected part as a score Ta START STOP 13 2 Fis J 2 FE 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 USER PROGRAM SET LIST HOLD DOWN UP C CANCEL J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 USER PROGRAM section These buttons allow you to select the desired User Program registration memory You can also select the previous DOWN or next UP User Program By pressing these two buttons simultaneously you leave the User Program environment The button allows you to ignore several set tings of subsequently loaded User Programs see p 115 COVER HARMONIG BARS ss UPPER EB Es EX ES CO HE EB 8 2 3h C Smed MAKEUP TOOLS 3 m E TF C Sreo 4 3 2 1 MENU E 8 x NWA T EFFECTS button This button provides access to the display pages where you can set the effects parameters of the G 70 s parts DISK amp MEDIA button Press this button if you wish to save load data from a the internal memory a floppy disk or PCM CIA card You will also find data management functions here like deleting files formatting floppies or cards etc page 203 COVER button This button provides access to pre programmed tem plates that allow you to quickly modify a song s or Music Style s character Press it once or twice to select the Song or Style level See pages 41 and 77 MAKEUP TOOLS button Press this button to modify the settings of the cur rent song or Music Style if the pre
114. displayed in which case you need to press the STYLE NAME COUNTRY GENRE or TEMPO field to display all songs again E a few HE No Match Found OPTIONS 4 8 5 42 8S e Press the field of the Style you need and do your thing If the G 70 did find one or several matches the FOUND number will be smaller than the GLOBAL number Editing the Style Finder information The Finder information is based on search criteria that needs to be added to Style files Normal Style files do not contain them Adding information to a file is a pro cess we call editing Options As you know after pressing the FINDER but ton the display looks as follows STYLE LIST Gia On On SAMBA ing SLR0OCK1 i 6o SLR0CK2 i 64 i 6a 2SLSWNG1 3 3 Eal E The field in the lower left corner provides access to a display page where you can add database information This also works for Styles that already contain entries you wish to modify 1 First select the Style whose database information you wish to change or edit by pressing its field 2 Press the field APAEZ GALON rons row ware 3 Now do one of the following SS Bl Rename This function allows you to change or supply the STYLE NAME COUNTRY and or GENRE information of the selected Style the TEMPO value is fixed but could be changed using a STYLE COMPOSER function p 190 e Press the STYLE N
115. down and simultaneously press FAST gt 8 If necessary use the VARIATION 1 4 buttons to vary the drum accompaniment 9 Press again to stop your beat box Working with the Music Assistant The G 70 s Music Assistant is also related to the Arranger Style section It is a collection of registrations for given songs that select the most appropriate Music Style and sounds for the Keyboard parts along with a whole bunch of other settings The G 70 ships with 500 pre programmed Music Assis tant registrations and also allows you to program new ones 1 Press the button The display now looks as follows MUSIC ASSISTANT LIST Air On G Mone Alex Ragtime None Alfie Song All at One Time All But Myself All My Love All OF Myself __ All Shaken Up Almost Like Love Aloha Hawaii Alone Once Again Als Sterrenhemel i i i i i H i vone H yone i t i i YO YO e 1e 2 If the name of the registration you want to use is already displayed press its field In the example above Crocodile Twist has been selected The G 70 now recalls the settings for this registration 3 Press the button to start playback of the automatically selected Music Style to start playback If the desired registration is not displayed e Press the Gf fields in the display or rotate the dial to scroll through the list To save time There are other ways of locating the registration you are
116. ea am Gm Gu Sm Gm Press the field to select this page The lowest note played by the selected song part or yourself is assigned to Part 1 while the second is assigned to Part 2 e Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons GENDER Allows you to change the timbre of the part Negative values produce a masculine effect positive values add feminine qualities This parameter should be set in relation to the COARSE value if you want to achieve a realistic effect PANPOT Allows you to set the placement of the corre sponding part in the stereo sound image This is only meaningful if you connect the G 70 to a stereo ampli fier L64 corresponds to hard left O to dead center and R63 to hard right VOLUME Allows you to set the level of the correspond ing part Be aware that even the highest value produces no audible effect if the knob is set all the way to OFF 135 G 70 Music Workstation Editing the Vocal Harmonist parts Press the field to jump to the fol lowing page SHALE Shy PITCH PORTAM TIME RND TUNING PORTAM PITCHBEND e Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons e Press the field to switch this effect on Portamento means that the pitch doesn t change in clearly defined steps it produces g
117. ec USBDATA A CONTROLLERS STORAGE i G 70 Music Workstation Roland Editing User Program Finder information 2 Press the field followed by the field UTILITY STARTUP E GLOBAL Factory i USER PROGRAM RECALL es MIDI SET RECALL Ti SOUND SET MODE pr E ee 3 Press the field and use the dial to select the User Program to be recalled when the G 70 is switched on 4 Switch on the field Switch off this button icon if no User Program should be recalled when the G 70 is switched on If the User Program contains and song and or MIDI link the paper clip and or MIDI socket icon are dis played 5 Press the button to return to the main page Editing User Program Finder infor mation You already know the main aspects of the User Pro gram Finder so let s have a more detailed look at it The User Program Finder is used for quickly locating the User Programs you in a given situation Some informa tion is added automatically to User Programs you save while other information needs to be supplied by hand Here we will concentrate on how to prepare that infor mation for real life use 1 Press the FINDER button The display changes to Othe Qar Qr Ore 2 Specify the memory area that contains the User Program whose information you want to change or expand EXTERNAL MEMORY or FLOPPY 117 G 70 Music Workstation Working with User P
118. gt DLY This effect connects a flanger and a delay in series Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Flanger Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Flanger Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flanger Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the flanger sound W Delay Time 0 0 500 0ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that Is sent through the delay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Level 0 127 Output level 38 CHO Flanger This effect connects a chorus and a flanger in series Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz
119. icons to enter the desired value Use to delete the last figure you entered ri de p E NUMERIC PAD pea paa 2 e Press the or field to Increase or decrease the current value by 10 e Press to confirm the value _or Press to close the numeric pad window with out changing the value 6 Press the DATA ENTRY gt button to select the next value and change it 7 When you re done press the field to return to the main STYLE COMPOSER page then save your Style The parameters you can change are Note and velocity messages These messages always come in pairs The first value Note Number 127 G9 refers to the note itself and the second On Velocity 127 to the velocity playing dynamics The MICRO EDIT page adds a third message to that pair It describes the duration of the note in question You may remember this value from the TRACK EDIT environ ment where it is called Gate Time Control Change These messages usually add some thing to the notes being played like modulation a dif ferent volume setting a new stereo position The G 70 recognizes and allows you to edit all control change numbers the Arranger uses CCO1 10 11 91 93 and displays their official name Note CC64 Hold events generated by a footswitch con nected to the HOLD FOOTSWITCH socket are converted into the equivalent GATE TIME values at the time of recording You therefore need to change the
120. in question au tomatically switches to that sound as well 9 _ Assign the desired sound to the recording track you selected See Selecting sounds for the Keyboard parts on p 29 You can play on the keyboard to check whether the sound matches the mood of the part you wish to record 10 Specify how the data will be added to the track during recording REC MODE Select Replace if a track contains data you wish to replace with new data This erases all data of the selected track from the place where you start record ing until the end Replace is selected by default for empty tracks Select Mix to add new notes to the ones already recorded on the selected track This recording mode is particularly useful for recording the rhythm track 10 because you can first record the bass and snare drums then add a few tom hits here and there and record the HiHat for example Mix is selected by default for tracks that already contain data 11 If you don t want to start and stop recording man ually use the PUNCH fields Press the field and use the dial or the DECJ INC buttons to specify the measure where recording should start If you start playback a few bars before this position the sequencer will activate recording as soon as it reaches this measure Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the number of the measure where recording should start Recording is d
121. is already displayed press its line To display the next 5 songs press the gt field in the lower right corner You can press this field as many times as necessary or until it is no longer displayed You can also use the dial or the DEC INC buttons To return to a previous group of 5 songs press e or use the dial or the DEC INC but tons 4 _ Quick location of the song you need There are several ways of quickly locating the song you are after W Sorting files Press the SONG NAME ARTIST or field to sort the song files according to artist names kind of music Genre or file name which is usually rather incomprehensible The right column now contains the selected entry only one of them can be displayed along with the song name Continue with step 3 to select the song you want to listen to W Using the Index function 5 6 After performing step 2 press the field in the upper left corner The display changes to SONG INDEX UldnGold Top 40 Ballads Latin Celebration Press one of the displayed field names to narrow down your search to songs that belong to the selected category Index The display now returns to the page shown under step 1 above This time however only the songs belonging to the selected Index are displayed Continue with step 3 to select the song you want to listen to Note Press the field to display all
122. keyboard By using V LINK com patible video equipment visual effects can be easily linked to and made part of the expressive elements of a performance By connecting the G 70 to an optional Edirol DV 7PR or V 4 you can switch images in synchronization with music or use the G 70 s per formance functions or right most keys to switch clips control playback speed etc ATENG L BENDER MODULATION lever When pushed towards the back of the G 70 this lever will add modulation to the notes of the Key board parts you are playing at that time Move it to the left or right to temporarily lower or increase the pitch of the Keyboard part notes you are playing For the HARMONIC BAR sounds and the sounds of the TONE family you can use the Modulation axis to alternate between the fast and slow Rotary speeds G 70 Music Workstation Roland Front panel ma a a _ lt NEN A Floppy disk drive This is where you can insert 2DD or 2HD floppy disks for external storage of your Music Styles User Pro grams Recorder songs and MIDI Sets Press the eject button to remove the disk from the drive Note Do not remove the floppy disk while the G 70 accesses the disk to load save data etc Doing so may damage both the floppy disk and the drive s head PHONES socket The G 70 comes with a headphone socket Be sure to connect high quality headphones to this socket Roland RH 200 RH 50 or RH 25 optional 1
123. little use to other SMF players or arranger instruments 3 Specify the memory area that contains the a Or song you need EXTERNAL MEMORY FLOPPY INTERNAL MEMORY 4 Press the or field 5 Enter the name page 49 6 Next press one of the following fields if necessary and enter the following information SONG ARTIST GENRE FILE NAME STYLE COUNTRY GENRE 7 Press the field T 3 O If you selected the drive that contains the original version with the same name the following message is displayed SAVE SIYLE ja 3 FEE SAED paras exists Overwrite jel Cg e Press the field to overwrite the old version Press the field if you don t want to overwrite this song or Style and return to the previous page Then enter a different name or select a different media If the song doesn t yet exist in the selected memory area the data are saved and the following message is displayed Pens EXECUTE Apart from the effect settings discussed earlier there are also other VOCAL HARMONIST settings that can be customized All Vocal Harmonist Parts except the TALK option provide additional parameters Procedure for selecting these pages 1 Press the button The display changes to MENW 00T CONTROLLERS K TUNING SPLIT amp TOUCH HARMONIST P COMPOSER l al ira libo 29 m par ARRANGER SETTING FUNCTION UTILITY HAND E5 lt lt USB D
124. much the same way as on an oriental keyboard The G 70 contains three memories where you can store your favorite tunings These are three global memories that apply to all User Programs 1 Press the button The display changes to a SPLIT amp TOUCH PF 2 SETTING ng RS LB an FUNCTION HARMON IST ii UTILITY iB to Oro USB DATA CONTROLLERS EY STORAGE 2 Press the field followed by the field IRONING NA Lj ipans JENGER UN NSGALE ee Jag TUNE mid TONE EDIT add Se 3 Press a MEMORY 1 MEMORY 3 field to select a Scale Tune memory This will change the pitch of the following notes 50 means that the note in question is tuned a quarter tone down Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 E 50 E 50 C 50 B 50 A 50 F 50 The pitch of the other notes is left unchanged The button icons corresponding to the notes whose pitch is changed light for easy identification You will notice that every note can be selected only once That is because the value you specify applies to all notes of the same name If you change the tuning of the C that value is added to or subtracted from all Cs C1 C2 C3 etc G 70 Music Workstation Using the performance functions If you now returned to the main page you would notice that the G 70 alerts you to the fact that the Scale Tuning function has been switched on Off On Me
125. numeric keypad In many instances you will have to press the desired field several times to select the desired character e Use the field to alternate between capitals and small letters e Press the field to delete the character indi cated by the cursor Press and hold it to clear all characters e Press to insert a space e Press to insert a character at the current posi Editing 16 track songs Easy editing and useful functions After recording a track you may want to do some touching up Here are some easy things you can do See Editing one or several tracks TRACK EDIT on p 160 for more elaborate functions W Muting tracks Sometimes when recording rhythmically intricate parts it may be necessary to mute already recorded parts that might distract you To do so return to the 16 track Sequencer s main page press the field and then the tracks you don t want to hear Such tracks are flagged with an M SWEET Pil ueas 0023 2 J 130 474 SoLo MUTE EDIT MICRO lel MASTER TRACK INITIALIZE SONG d 1 PIA 2 FINGERED Bs 5 d OVERDRIVE GT 8 bd SALTO SAK 5 a TRUMPET 10 pd Jazz M jd Jazz GT 12 d PIANO z 15 d MUTED GT 14 d CLEAN GT 15 PIANO 1 16 PIANO 1 Pas Ar aaa Kamara AA praan eed aaa This setting is not saved Press the field again to switch off the function Note The MUTE function is not available while the SOLO func tion is switch
126. of these buttons lights to signal that the Iranspose function is active The transposition interval is indicated on the main page ONG Amazing Grace Cool Live Band Lower 1 5t Slow Str DILLER ET Ts Pas LoweR2 Pad With Vintage EP1 XY Ac Bass Jazz Scat UPPERS The 1 refers to a semitone decrease of the pitch so that you hear a B every time you play a C It also means that rather than the A you press you will hear G sharp or A flat The above setting corre sponds to pressing once Note Any interval you set here automatically resets and thus overrides the SINGER KEY transposition see p 48 In fact the latter is first reset to ORIGINAL after which the new transposi tion value is used Setting the transposition interval via the display If you prefer to set the transposition interval via the touch screen with a nice graphic here is how to 1 Press and hold the TRANSPOSE or button or press the field on the main page ROTI Gs LI SINGER KEY 2 In the display press the key that corresponds to the note you would like to hear every time you play a C Note Selecting 0 means that the transposition is off Your setting can however be written to a User Program page 111 3 Press the and or field to switch it on These fields allow you to specify which parts should be affected by the Transpose setting KEYBOARD The Keyboard parts are transposed Since the Arranger s key d
127. of these buttons to quickly locate songs SONG Music Styles STYLE or User Programs USER PRGJ in the internal memory SSD on floppy disk or an external memory card See pages 38 86 and 113 KBD MODE section Press the button if you want to play different sounds with your left and right hands page 56 It is even possible to add a second split point see page 90 15 G 70 Music Workstation Panel descriptions Press the button to assign one or several sounds to the entire keyboard without a split See page 56 VOCAL HARMONIST section The buttons and knobs in this section are used to set the Vocal Harmonist function the microphone level and the effects applied to the signals received via the Vocal Harmonist MIC INPUT socket See page 42 TONE section The TONE buttons allow you to select one of 16 inter nal Tone families You can then use the display to specify the desired sound within that family KEYBOARD PART TONE ASSIGN MBS LW2 LW1 PART ON OFF UP3 UP2 UP 1 KEYBOARD PART section The TONE ASSIGN buttons are used to specify the Keyboard part you wish to assign a different sound to page 29 Keyboard parts are the parts you can play yourself The G 70 contains many other parts that are played automatically by the Arranger or Recorder The PART ON OFF buttons allow you to switch the desired Keyboard parts on and off ONE TOUCH section These buttons allow you to select the desired
128. on this page are i Instrument on off MUTE Press the instrument icon at the top of the channel strip to switch the corresponding instrument on no MUTE message or off a MUTE message appears W REVERB and CHORUS effect balance The CHORUS and REVERB parameters allow you to specify how strongly the instruments should be pro cessed by the Reverb and or Chorus effect The effects parameters kind of reverb and chorus etc can be set on the COMMON see p 129 and STYLE SONG REVERB amp CHORUS pages see p 101 EB PANPOT stereo placement Allows you to change the stereo placement of the instrument assigned to the slider you are using BVOLUME Allows you to set the volume of the instrument assigned to the slider you are using 4 Use the sliders to change the settings of the instru ments that are currently displayed Note Please bear in mind that these changes apply to the instruments Tones Drum Set in question not to the entire track they belong to 5 Press the button to return to the main page Using the Makeup Tools In addition to the Cover functions for songs and Styles see pages 41 and 77 that allow you to change song or Style playback by selecting presets the G 70 also boasts a mode where you can customize playback of the currently selected song or Style Changes you per form here must be saved if you want them to be per manent Important remark The MAKEUP settings of Standard MIDI Files
129. open back enclosure 12x2 dynamic mic BUILT IN 2 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser mic BUILT IN 3 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser mic BUILT IN 4 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser mic BUILT IN 5 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser mic BG STACK 1 sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser mic BG STACK2 large sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser mic MS STACK 1 large sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser mic MS STACK 2 large sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser mic METAL STACK large double stack 12x4 condenser mic 2 STACK large sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser mic 3 STACK large sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser mic Mic Setting 1 2 3 Adjusts the location of the mic that s capturing the sound of the speaker This can be adjusted in three steps from 1 to 3 with the mic becoming more distant as the value increases Mic Level 0 127 Volume of the microphone Direct Level 0 127 Volume of the direct sound Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels Level 0 127 Output level 67 Gate Cuts the reverb s decay according to the volume of the sound sent into the effect Use this when you want to create an arti ficial sounding decrease in the reverb s decay Threshold 0 127 Volume level at which the gate begins to close Mode Gate Duck Type of gate GATE The gate will close
130. own references to Music Styles Programming CUSTOM assignments The G 70 comes with several Music Style examples in internal memory you could use to try out the following Once you start working with your G 70 you will proba bly copy external Music Styles to the internal memory and establish CUSTOM links to those Note Use the Copy function see p 88 to copy all Styles to the same card or the internal memory 1 Press a button of the STYLE pad to select a Music Style family STYLE LIVE DISCO 8 BEAT 16 BEAT BAND ROCK DANCE CONTEMP BALL JAZZ BOSSA ROOM BLUES 50 s amp 60 s SAMBA LATIN WORLD That button lights and the display looks as follows DISK S World user O Orchestr SI Fox Country Ballad Pop Fox Country Rock Nice Fox Country Beat Fox Band Easy Country Slow Country Country Fox PAGE4 CUSTOM 3 Press the field of the memory you wish to assign another Style to EDIT CUSTOM 4 Press the field STYLE LIST ClubPian i108 Corrido i12 Country1 i152 Country2 13 e ee GLOBAL 553 68 5 Press the Or Field This is necessary to specify whether you want to link a Style in the internal memory or on a card in the PCMCIA slot 6 Press the field that contains the name of the Music Style you want to assign to the selected CUSTOM memory If necessary use the PAGE fields or the dial the DECJ INC buttons to select a
131. pad that appears in the display CREATE EVENT ERASE EVENT Moy EVENT Me Ne PAG BG ee 555555555555 f a o If you choose to work with the numeric pad proceed as follows e Press to clear the currently selected figure e g the 7 of 127 e Press the Or field to increase or decrease the current value by 10 e Press to confirm the value _or Press to close the numeric pad window with out changing the value The parameters you can change are Mi Tempo Change BPM 20 250 Specifies the song tempo If necessary you can insert tempo changes anywhere within the song This could even be done in real time using the TEMPO REC SW parameter so as to obtain a more natural result See page 157 172 Beat Change Numerator Denominator Numerator SLATS AEC SUT t Chang 1 000 Tempo Change 100 J 1 000 Beat Change 4 1 020 Sys Ex FO 7E 7F 09 01 F7 1 031 Sys Ex FO 41 10 4212 40 00 7F 00 41 F7 1 037 Sys Ex FO 41 10 4212 40 01 38 06 01 F7 EVENT 1 043 Sys Ex FO 41 10 42 12 40 01 33 5432 F7 1 050 Sys Ex FO H 10 4212 40 01 345431 F7 move gt 1 056 Sys Ex FO 41 10 4212 40 01 00 20 28 event APP 1 099 Sys Ex FO 41 10 421240 01 00 20 28 CREATE EVENT 4 060 Tempo Change 60 02 000 Tempo Change 52 EVENT 02 060 Tempo Change 46 03 000 Tempo Change 140 PLACE 3 EVENT amp Deer Numerator 1 32 Denominator 2 4 8 16 Specifies the song s time si
132. parame ters themselves can be edited on an Effect page see below Note At this stage the EFFECT slider far left can be used to set the output level of the Chorus processor Setting this parameter to 0 means that you no longer hear the effect in question By contrast setting the CHORUS control of a Key board part to 0 means that only the part in question is no longer processed by the effect Volume and status of the Style parts When you press the button below the display the following page appears w III aaa ee ae ee a oo oe MEENET A S e Use the assignable sliders below the display to set the volume of the Arranger parts See Arranger parts on p 74 for the function of the Arranger parts e se the fields to mute Arranger parts you do not need These settings can saved to a User Program see p 111 Note You can also use the MAKEUP TOOLS functions for more detailed mixing functions see p 124 Editing the Keyboard effects pro cessors After setting the above parameters you may find that even sensible Reverb Chorus Send values for the Key board parts do not yield the expected result In that case you should edit the Reverb and Chorus settings by pressing the button 3 o z eee CHORUS EDIT Wa EDIT b a z i KC mayo aT CHORUS EDIT EDIT j o _ mei 9 MASTERING TOOLS
133. parameters Step Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the step rate should be syn chronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the following parame ter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Step Rate Hz 0 10 20 00Hz Rate period of pitch change Step Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync param eter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Output Mode Speaker Phones Adjusts the method that will be used to hear the sound that is output to the OUTPUT jacks The optimal 3D effect will be achieved if you select SPEAKER when using speakers or PHONES when using headphones EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 61 Band Chorus A chorus effect that lets you apply an effect independently to the low frequency and high frequency ranges Split Frequency 200 8000Hz Frequency at which the low and high ranges will be divided Low Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Delay time from when the original sound is heard to when the low range chorus sound is heard Low Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to speci
134. parts Switch it off to leave the last effect settings you made intact then go on changing them T O83 And now the Vocal Harmonist effects 1 Press and hold a button to the right of the VOICE knob or of the knob MEAC ARSO VOICE FX TYPE This takes you to the page of the selected Vocal Har monist function 2 To be able to edit the effect parameters press the field YOGA PIEUDO NINI VOICE EFFECT HARMONY EFFECT REVERB DELAY _ REVERB DELAY WALL TYPE Gia REYERB SEND REVERB TIME F2 6m Gm 3 Decide which effect processor you wish to edit e To edit a VOICE effect press the Or field below VOICE EFFECT e To edit a HARMONY effect press REVERB CHORUS or below HARMONY EFFECT Only the HARMONY parts Vocoder Small Ensemble have a Chorus processor The parameters and presets for the Reverb and Delay processors differ between the VOICE EFFECTS and HARMONY EFFECTS sections 4 Press the VOCAL HARMONIST button for which you want to program the effect and talk sing into the microphone while setting the following parame ters VOICE VOICE TALK FX AUTO PITCH SINGER HARMONY VOCODER SMALL ENSEMBLE If necessary you can use the Or knob to temporarily set the volume of the part you don t want to hear to 0 OFF MAX Reverb W Reverb for VOICE EFFECT YO HAMON Gomy m eam VOICE EFFECT HARMONY EFFECT REVERB DELAY REV
135. phono Output for headphones LEVEL control L Mono R 1 4 L Mono R 1 4 Composite PAL amp NTSC Independent lyrics and chord display PCMCIA slot CompactFlash Memory Stick Smart Media Microdrive USB port data storage amp MIDI communication W General specifications Power supply Dimensions mm Weight Supplied accessories Options 100 240V universal 29W 1294 5 W x 158 H x 437 D 20 5kg Owner s Manual power cord metal music stand CD ROM PK 5A Dynamic MIDI Pedal FC 7 Foot Controller MSA MSD MSE series floppy disks Roland amp third party RH 25 50 200 Headphones DP 2 Pedal switch DP 6 Pedal switch piano type BOSS FS 5U Foot Switch EV 5 7 Expression pedal BOSS FV 300L Foot Volume Expression Pedal KC 150 350 550 Keyboard Amplifiers Memory cards third party manufacturers Note Specifications are subject to change without prior notice 21 Appendix Installing a wave expansion board Cautions when installing a wave expansion board e To avoid the risk of damage to internal components that can be caused by static electricity please carefully observe the following whenever you handle the board e Before you touch the board first grasp a metal object such as a water pipe so you are sure that any static electricity you might have been carrying has been discharged e When handling the board grasp it only by its edges Avoid touching any of the electronic
136. reading the MSE Style format the G 70 uses so compatibility is no issue 2 Use the fields in the lower right corner to select the instrument you want to edit If you select a Drum Set the display changes to gum G Pa i a u E See page 128 for an explanation of the and fields 126 The field disappears because transposing the drum part in octave steps doesn t make sense 3 Press the field to jump to the location where the instrument you are about to change Is used Playback starts automatically from that point If you can barely hear the Tone Drum Set press the field indicator icon must light then use to jump to the first note of that instrument Then press again to switch this function off 4 Use the field to switch the selected instru ment off The corresponding part is no longer played back Just as a reminder this setting only applies to the selected instrument and thus not necessarily to the entire track Note In the case of the drums you can mute two Instrument groups separately 5 Press the long sound name field next to the instrument icon and use the TONE buttons and the display to select another Tone or Drum Set E Piano Keyboard 1 Pro Stagel FM EPiano2 Pro Stage2 Wurly 2 Phase EP Clav Vintage EP2 Harpsichord3 PAGE4 PAGES 6 Press the button to return to the SONG MAKEUP TOOLS or STYLE MAKEUP TOOLS PALETTE page Press the field of another
137. right half Pa Left hand Right hand LOWER 1 UPPER 1 Both parts are assigned a HARMONIC BAR sound This is important to remember because there are also sampled organ sounds that do not provide timbre control via the sliders By pressing the EASY SETTING button you also activate the MODE button which means that the 9 sliders now act as drawbars 16 5 1 3 8 mama 4 mama 2 2 3 maam 2 maa 1 3 5 1 1 3 1 _ MODE OND NA WN O EFFECT DBEAM M INT MBS LW 2 7 LW 1 UP 3 UP2 UP 1 2 Press the MODE button This is optional if you want to confirm your settings in the display and save your changes eros HARMONIG BARS sco UPPER Da SBE EX ES ES aun FAST Yy j i 3 He i Vs i 6 6 5 4 E 2 1 mm NG kad e N ra OO ue 3 Note the UPPER 1 message in the upper right hand corner It means that by moving the sliders below the display you change the sound of the right hand organ assigned to the UP1 part 33 G 70 Music Workstation Quick Start 4 5 _ 6 Nam 7 This information is confirmed by the TONE ASSIGN button it lights Play a few notes with your right hand and move the sliders below the display to change the organ registration The numbers appearing on the harmonic bars allow you to rapidly set the bars to the desired setting If you push a virtual harmonic bar inward until no number is visible it
138. see below ABass On Off This setting allows you to switch the ABass part on and off using the D Beam Controller Accomp On Off This setting allows you to switch the Accompaniment parts ACC1 6 on and off using the D Beam Controller ABs ADr On Off This setting allows you to use the D Beam for switching on and off the ABass and ADrums parts ABs Acc On Off This setting allows you to use the D Beam for switching on and off the ABass and ACC1 6 parts ADr Acc On Off This setting allows you to use the D Beam for switching on and off the ADrums and ACC1 6 parts Tempo Up Select this option to increase the current Arranger or Recorder tempo By moving your hand out side the D Beam s range you return to the previous tempo value Tempo Down Select this option to increase decrease the current Arranger or Recorder tempo By moving your hand outside the D Beam s range you return to the pre vious tempo value Note Options marked with a only apply to the currently active Keyboard parts Pitch Up By moving your hand over the D Beam you can generate a value between 64 no Pitch Bend and 127 maximum upward bend As soon as you move your hand outside the D Beam s reach higher than 40cm above the eyes or further to the left or right the value returns to 64 no Pitch Bend The maximum bend interval is two semi tones G5 G 70 Music Workstation Using the performance functions
139. songs are ignored by the G 70 s 16 track Sequencer While edit ing a made up song you will thus hear and change the original version which may sound different once you play it back Before you begin There are two sets of MAKEUP functions one for songs Standard MIDI Files and another for Music Styles Because of the striking similarities we will discuss each item only once and only point out aspects that behave differently Both environments can be selected via the same button on the front panel which is why we recommend you always look at the information in the top line SONG MAKEUP TOOLS or STYLE MAKEUP TOOLS before making any change whatsoever Here is how to tell those two environments apart STYLE MAKEUP Light blue bar at the top of the page SONG MAKEUP Orange bar at the top of the page Mi Before changing the MAKEUP TOOLS settings of a song e Press the FINDER button You can also press the field on the main page to select songs sona A 1azing Grace G 70 Music Workstation Roland Using the Makeup Tools The display changes to SONG LIST Ole Qr Or One Dem con Ew d FIRSTDAY FIRSTDAY MID RH km CCT Ew HEREWEGO HE REWEGOLNT E HEREWEGO HEREWEGO MI e Select the memory area that contains the song you want to change press INTERNAL MEMORY or EXTERNAL MEMORY If you press FLOPPY or EXTERNAL MEMORY insert the memory card or floppy disk with the desire
140. that the power cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING e Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord nor place heavy objects on it Doing so can damage the cord producing severed elements and short circuits Damaged cords are fire and shock hazards O e This instrument either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss Do not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears you should immediately stop using the unit and consult an audiologist Do not allow any objects e g flammable material coins pins or liquids of any kind water soft drinks etc to penetrate the unit In households with small children an adult should pro vide supervision until the child is capable of following all rules essential for the safe operation of the G 70 Protect the unit from strong impact Do not drop it Do not force the G 70 s power cord to share an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices Be espe S cially careful when using extension cords the total power used by all devices you have connected to the extension cord s outlet must never exceed the power rat ing watts amperes for the extension cord Excessive lo
141. the field 9 Save your Style G 70 Music Workstation Roland Style Track Edit functions QUANTIZE ram Cee ee aaa aaa aaa ase Gere This Quantize function can be used after recording a part if you don t feel comfortable with the timing of what you played If only certain notes in a given time range need to be quantized you should narrow down the edit range using the FROM TO parameters BTRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track you want to edit Select ALL to edit all tracks BI MODE Allows you to select the mode of the pattern to be edited Major minor or 7th EI DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division or pattern you want to edit Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 143 Fill Up 1s 3 End 154 BI FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or pattern Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the G 70 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a bar Change this setting only if your edit operation should start after the selected beat BIO By default the TO position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last even
142. the UP1 part is automatically switched on and assigned to the entire keyboard That is because the G 70 starts up in EASY SETTING PIANO mode The KBD MODE button also lights 1 Press the PART ON OFF button if it does not light TONE ASSIGN __EEEEeEeseseseseseseses MBS LW2 LW 1 UP3 UP2 UP 1 UU PART 9 42 2 Play a few notes on the keyboard 3 4 _ _ The UP1 part s sound is assigned to the entire key board To assign it to the right half press the KBD MODE button You could also press the TONE EFFECTS button to add an appropriate effect to the Keyboard parts you are using here UP1 See page 100 for details Use the knob to set the G 70 s output volume Use the knob to set the balance between the song and your live playing Turn it towards KEYBOARD if the notes you play yourself are too soft Turn it towards ACCOMP if your playing is too loud with respect to the Arranger or song Note See page 95 for how to set the balance between the Keyboard parts 5 Press the PART ON OFF buttons of other Keyboard Parts you want to add by layering them Alternating between sounds The G 70 allows you to use several sounds simulta neously using the Keyboard parts Other parts are played by the Arranger Styles and are called Style parts And finally there are the Song parts that are controlled by the Recorder function The Keyboard parts can be used
143. the button The display now looks as follows Puy erp ej VOLUME LEVEL Siem fi O 23 DA UI n COUNT IN Go Lay 1 METRONOME rec A INTERNAL Note When neither the Arranger nor the Recorder 16 track sequencer is running the button flashes to indicate the current tempo 2 Set the available parameters to your liking MVOLUME LEVEL Press the LOW Or field to specify the metronome s basic level The default setting is HIGH You probably only need to change this setting after switching METRONO ME INTERNAL off See below BI COUNT IN This parameter allows you to switch the Count In function on to 1 BAR or 2 BAR or off When on the metronome will count in the specified number of measures bars before the Arranger starts playing Note This count in is also available when you are using the Sync Start function In that case playing a chord means that the Arranger only starts after 1 or 2 measures OFF The count in function is off 1 BAR 2 BAR Whenever you start Arranger play back the metronome counts in 1 or 2 bars before the selected Music Style pattern starts playing Note The Count In function can be used independently of the metronome There is thus no need to activate the metronome in order to hear the count in G 70 Music Workstation Roland Metronome BI MODE Yet another option on the above display page is to specify when the metronome should sound ALW
144. the field to save your Style to disk see page 185 for details or if you think that is not necessary Starting the Style Composer 1 Press the button The display changes to Cr AKI 2 Press the STYLE COMPOSER field STYLE COMPOSER so MUTE ADRUMS v POF4 DAKO BA TI SO Clearing the RAM memory Initialize Style The first thing we need to do is clear the G 70 s Style RAM memory because it is not empty when you select the STYLE COMPOSER To record a new User Style you must first clear the Style RAM memory 3 Press the field in the right col umn INITALIZESTIYLE TEMPLATES SETTINGS pa TEMPO AND TIME SIGNATURE Baki y The ct Style will be pana e N Are you sure The warning alerts you to the fact that pressing EXECUTE see below may have disastrous conse quences See Saving your Style on p 185 if you still need to save your previous Style 4 If you want the G 70 to select suitable sounds for you press one of the TEMPLATES fields Here is what the options mean ORCHESTR Selects orchestral sounds suitable for classi cal music and film scores BAROQUE Selects orchestral sounds suitable for cham ber music ROCK Selects sounds suitable for rock music FOLK Selects sounds suitable for folk music COUNTRY Selects sounds suitable for country music ELECTRONIC Selects classical sounds suitable for dance music POP Selects sound often used in pop arrange ments
145. the key board You can even select WHOLE which means that the Arranger scans the entire keyboard for usable chords If you don t want the Arranger to listen to the chords you play choose OFF In that case you will only hear the drum patterns of the Music Styles you select The range of the LEFT or RIGHT keyboard area depends on the main split point see Setting the split point on page 57 1 On the main page press the field zing Grace Cool Live Band SF P 1 1 Gospel Love Lower 11St Slow Str The Grand X Lower2 Pad With Vintage EP1 UPPER XY Ac_Bass You can also select this page by pressing MENU but ton gt ARRANGER SETTINGS gt ARRANGER CHORD The display changes to See Cee Gar Ge ZONE TYPE MODE LEFT Mm JE Je Ea 2 Press the ZONE LEFT WHOLE or field to select the chord recognition area 3 Press the button to return to the main page Note When you press the EASY SETTING button the setting is selected Note OFF can also be assigned to an ASSIGN SW button page 63 and an optional footswitch page 67 SO Arranger Type chord mode Another important choice is how you want to transmit note information to the Arranger 4 Press the STANDARD PIANO STYLE or Field STANDARD This is the normal chord recognition mode The melodic accompaniment uses the chords you play in the chord recognition area ZONE of the keyboard If you play on
146. the lever for example for other mes sages of the same type thus creating a perfect repro duction of a given control string MIX on the other hand may be useful for adding data to a number of beats or bars that were not there before while keeping the original notes in those places You can choose the kind of data to be copied using DATA TYPE Note The G 70 has no Undo function Saving your song before copying will allow you to load the previous version if something goes wrong E COPY TIMES 1 999 Sets the number of copies you wish to make The value 3 means that you will end up with 3 contiguous copies whereby the second copy is placed immediately after the first etc BDATA TYPE Allows you to select the data to be copied ALL All parameters listed below Note Only note messages P Bender Pitch Bend data Control Control change messages Change Prog C Program change messages NRPN Non registered parameter number parameters These are parameter control functions of the GS GM2 format that are easier to use than SysEx messages but basically have the same function RPN Registered parameter number parameters They work like NRPN messages except that they are only understood by GM and GM2 compatible sound modules CAF Channel Aftertouch messages If you don t really need them these messages should definitely be erased because they use a lot of memory When you select Note a FROM NOTE and TO NOTE fi
147. to W to hear what you are doing 1 Press and hold a button to the right of the knob or of the knob YOTICE FX TYPE This takes you to the page of the selected Vocal Har monist function 2 To be able to set the effects press the field MIC INPUT VOICE HARHONY VOICE FX SMALL SUSTAIN LEY THRESHOLD REVERB SEND GT Gm Gua Gum ED DELAY SEND La es You can also select this page by pressing the button gt VOCAL HARMONIST field gt field The parts affected by the VOICE section are SINGER VOICE FX and AUTO PITCH Processors Reverb Delay Now look at the front panel VOICE VOICE TALK FX HARMONY VOCODER AUTO PITCH SINGER SMALL ENSEMBLE Only one button of these two sections can be on at any one time It therefore makes sense to use one set of effects processors for the VOICE section and a sec ond for the HARMONY section The parts affected by the HARMONY section are VOCODER SMALL and ENSEMBLE Processors Reverb Chorus Delay G 70 Music Workstation Roland Voice and Vocal Harmonist part mixing Note When you switch on the TALK function the display looks a little different because there is also a parameter See page 47 for details 3 Press the field of the parameter you wish to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DECJ INC buttons VOICE column Reverb Send Allows you to specify how strongly the currently selected VOICE part sh
148. to select the pattern you want to change If you set DIVISION to Fill Dwn or Fill Up there are only three button icons You can switch on several or all button icons if you like But you cannot switch off all four or three W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm the new time signature and resize the selected pattern s 197 G 70 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer Editing individual Style events Style Micro Edit Select this mode if you need to change fust one aspect of an otherwise perfect Music Style In this section we will use the word event for any kind of message identical to MIDI messages that cause the Arranger to play or set something An event is thus a command or instruction for the Arranger You can only view and edit one track at a time There fore be sure to check the TRACK setting before editing the events displayed on this page 1 Select and load a different Style This is not necessary if you want to edit the Style you have Just recorded See Selecting Music Styles on p 27 or Style Finder quickly locating Styles on p 86 for how to load a Style 2 Press the button The display changes to MEND fC TUNING l i CONTROLLERS lt o ES SPLIT amp TOUCH HARMONIST COMPOSER i e 4 ir lt m UTILITY lt lt USB DATA STORAGE gt HAND SA CONTROLLERS
149. to temperature extremes e g direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle near a heating duct on top of heat generating equipment or are e Damp e g baths washrooms on wet floors or are a e Humid or are e Fxposed to rain or are e Dusty or are e Subject to high levels of vibration e This unit should be used only with a rack or stand that is recommended by Roland e Make sure you always have the unit placed in such a way that it is level and sure to remain stable Never place it on stands that could wobble or on inclined surfaces e The instrument should only be connected to a power supply of the type described in the operating instruc tions or as marked on the G 70 About the Symbols The A symbol alerts the user to important instructions or warnings The specific meaning of the symbol is determined by the design contained within the triangle In the case of the symbol at left it is used for general cautions warnings or alerts to danger The symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out are forbidden The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the unit must never be disassembled The symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried out The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means
150. to the position Switching on the 6 70 1 Insert the included power cable into the AC inlet and then plug it into an electrical outlet 2 Press the G 70 s button located on the rear panel to switch it on 3 If you connected the G 70 to a mixing console switch it on now 4 Switch on the amplifier your active speakers or the keyboard amplifier s 5 Use the MASTER knob to set the G 70 s output volume Setting the display contrast The information in the LCD display may be difficult to view after turning on your G 70 or after extended use Your viewing angle or the current lighting conditions can also affect the appearance of the display In such cases use the knob to the left of the display to adjust the contrast Switching off the G 70 1 Switch off all external devices 2 Use the G 70 s button to switch it off G 70 Music Workstation Setting up and demo songs Interactive demo of the G 70 Your G 70 contains an interactive demo that introduces all of its highlights It might be a good idea to try it out now The demo is self explanatory so we ll just show you how to start and stop it 1 Simultaneously press the and 5 To stop the demo and leave the G 70 s Demo func buttons tion press the RECORDER or the button Wa PLAY NEXT MINUS LIST SONG ONE The G 70 uses Roland s most powerful sound engine ever With a huge internal wave memory it boasts the best sounds f
151. to the G 70 internal memory area floppy disk memory card 203 G 70 Music Workstation Disk Media functions Loading data The LOAD functions allow you to load Songs Music Styles User Program Sets and MIDI Sets Songs and Styles can also be loaded via dedicated functions which are explained elsewhere page 140 86 The behavior of those pages is identical to that of the LOAD function so we won t explain those operations again Note Never remove the floppy disk or memory card while the operation is in progress Wait for the confirmation to appear before returning to business as usual Mi Load User Program Set This is where you can load User Program Sets As stated on page 111 such Sets do not contain the registration data but only references to them Please bear in mind that a User Program Set can only refer to User Programs that reside on the same media as the Set itself The name of the selected Set is dis played next to a folder icon on the USER PROGRAM page that appears when you press the but ton All User Programs and the songs they refer to need to be on line That explains why the field is not available here Note The G 70 cannot read User Programs or Performance Memories of older Roland Arranger instruments 1 Press the button 2 Press the field followed by the field BO AY USE PRSH SS Nam Live 2004 My User Program 3 Select the source media INTERNAL MEMORY or EXTERNAL MEMORY
152. to use SHIFT CLOCK after assigning a Tone to a track that has a considerably slower attack than the Tone you used for recording the part in question This technique is frequently used in pop music to time 1 16 note string arpeggios played with a slow pad sound Rather than have the notes begin at the mathematically correct time e g 2 1 0 you could shift them to the left e g to 1 4 110 of the previous measure so that the peak volume of the attack is reached on the next downbeat Original positions slow attack so Shift 5 timing seems off timing sounds OK dear ALLA LP LE LE KR OF To correct the timing of notes recorded via MIDI without quantizing them You could use sequences etc as raw material for your songs Recording such excerpts via MIDI may cause a slight delay e g 5 CPT If that is not acceptable use SHIFT CLOCK to push all notes to the left select 5 That allows you to tidy up the timing and still keep any irregularities music the original may contain because it was not quan tized BTRACK ALL 1 16 Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks BI FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or song Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of sel
153. used See also page 80 User Prg Up User Prg Down Allows you to select the next Up or previous Down User Program Punch In Out The footswitch can be used to activate and switch off punch in out recording using the G 70 s sequencer page 157 Portamento Switches the Portamento function page 91 on and off 69 G 70 Music Workstation Using the performance functions Soft Sostenuto Hold The footswitch can be used as a Soft Sostenuto or Sustain Hold pedal Note that Hold can also be controlled using a dedicated but optional DP 2 DP 6 or BOSS FS 5U footswitch connected to the HOLD FOOTSWITCH socket Hold Lower1 The footswitch does the same as the LOWER 1 HOLD function see also p 92 Hold Lower2 The footswitch does the same as the LOWER 2 HOLD function see also p 92 Hold Lower 1 2 The footswitch allows you to switch the LOWER 1 2 HOLD functions on and off Talk The footswitch performs the same function as the button in the VOCAL HARMONIST section Harmony On Off The footswitch allows you to switch the currently selected HARMONY function VO CODER or ENSEMBLE on and off Select this function if you want to switch the harmonies on for the choruses and off for the verses for example while playing on the keyboard Minus One The footswitch allows you to switch the Minus One function on and off See page 41 for how to select the option that will be used when the
154. when the original sound is heard to when the high range flanger sound is heard High Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to spec ify whether Note or not Hz the high modulation rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value High Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Rate at which the high range flanger sound is modulated High Rate note Musical Notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note High Depth 0 127 Modulation depth for the high range flanger sound High Phase 0 180 deg Spaciousness of the high range flanger sound High Feedback 98 0 98 Proportion of the high range flanger sound that is to be returned to the input negative values invert the phase High Step Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the high step rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value High Step Rate Hz 0 10 20 00Hz Rate at which the Steps will cycle for the high range flanger sound High Step Rate note Musical Notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter a
155. when the volume of the original sound decreases cutting the original sound DUCK Ducking The gate will close when the volume of the original sound increases cutting the original sound Attack 0 127 Adjusts the time it takes for the gate to fully open after being triggered Hold 0 127 Adjusts the time it takes for the gate to start closing after the source sound falls beneath the Threshold Release 0 127 Adjusts the time it takes the gate to fully close after the hold time Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 2 A3 G 70 Music Workstation Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters 68 Long Delay A delay that provides a long delay time Delay Time sync msec Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not msec the delay time should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed or a note value Delay Time msec 0 2600ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Time note Musical Notes Delay times can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to msec Specify the value of the desired note Phase Normal Inverse Phase of the delay VORMAL non inverted NVERT inverted Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sou
156. you start recording 18 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the desired setting The setting range is 1 136 or more depending on the time signature and Off Select Off if you haven t decided how long the pattern should be In that case its length is set when you stop recording It is perfectly possible to specify a different length value for each track and division Note Even one shot patterns are looped in STYLE COMPOSER mode That is not the case however during Arranger playback i e everyday use of the Styles There is one last thing we need to set 19 Specify how long the count in should be before recording starts by pressing the field and using the dial or the DECI INC buttons to select one of the following options Off No count in recording starts as soon as you press the button while flashes 1 Meas Recording starts after a 1 bar count in 2 Meas Recording starts after a 2 bar count in Wait Note Recording starts as soon as you play a note on the keyboard There will be no count in 133 G 70 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer Recording 7 20 Press the button Depending on the Auditioning your Style and adding count in setting the metronome now counts more tracks down then recording starts 1 Press the button again to listen to your performance The STYLE COMPOSER page contains two fie
157. 0 Pan 72 aa 1 02 036 CC 20 1 02 037 CC 91 Reverb 74 1 02 038 CC 11 Expression 127 SALINAN 1 02 040 CC 7 volume 80 1 02 041 Pitch Bend 1 0 MOVE ga 02 042 CC 0 Bank Select MSB 0 SAN 1 02 043 Program Change 74 19 02 077 Note 65 F4 100 11 19 02 115 Note 65 F 4 83 18 EVENT 19 03 030 Note 67 G 4 95 79 19 04 010 Note 69 4 4 31 65 PLACE 3 EVENT Ko 3 Modify the value e Rotate the dial to set the desired value or e Set the value using the DEC INC buttons or e Press the dial and enter the value using the numeric pad that appears in the display If you choose to work with the numeric pad proceed as follows T G e Press the numeric button icons to enter the desired value Use to delete the last figure you entered wi P40 p F NUHERIC PAD a a owe Co a cos at ot ot e Press the Or field to increase or decrease the current value by 10 e Press JENTER to confirm the value 4 5 Press to close the numeric pad window with out changing the value Press the DATA ENTRY gt button to select the next value and change it When you re done press the field to return to the main Sequencer page and save your song The parameters you can change are Note and velocity messages These messages always come in pairs see the illustration of step 2 above The first value Note Number 127 G9 refers to the note itself and the sec
158. 0 0W D50 50W DO 100W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Level 0 127 Output level 34 EH Flanger This effect connects an enhancer and a flanger in series Enhancer Sens 0 127 Sensitivity of the enhancer Enhancer Mix Level 0 127 Level of the overtones gen erated by the enhancer Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Flanger Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Flanger Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flanger Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the flanger sound W Level 0 127 Output level 35 EH gt Delay This effect connects an enhancer and a delay in series Enhancer Sens 0 127 Sensitivity of the enhancer Enhancer Mix Level 0 127 Level of the overtones gen erated by the enhancer Delay Time 0 0 500 0ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If
159. 0 comes with a full color touch screen and a user interface that walks you through anything you may want to do with your G 70 To get the most out of the G 70 and to ensure many years of trouble free service we urge you to read through this Owner s Manual thoroughly To avoid confusion let s agree to use the word button for all keys on the front panel and use key only when refer ring to the G 70 s keyboard To save space and time let us agree to use the word song when referring to Standard MIDI Files Before using this instrument carefully read the Important notes on p 11 They provide information concerning the proper operation of the G 70 Be sure to keep this manual in a safe place for future reference Copyright 2004 ROLAND EUROPE All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of Roland Europe S p a G 70 Music Workstation Features Features Roland s most comprehensive arranger instru ment ever The G 70 is quite simply a superlative instrument with the most advanced and best sound generation technol ogy Roland has to offer It combines Rooland s Virtual ToneWheel technology derived from our successful VK series with a superb internal sound source based on the acclaimed Fantom X series and the possibility to expand your sound arsenal using a wave expansion board of Roland s SRX series New interface concept The G 70 was designed from the grou
160. 0 immediately after it has been moved to a location with a level of humidity that is greatly different than its former location Rapid changes in the environment can cause con densation to form inside the drive which will adversely affect the operation of the drive and or damage floppy disks When the unit has been moved allow it to become accustomed to the new envi ronment allow a few hours before operating it To insert a disk push it gently but firmly into the drive it will click into place To remove a disk press the EJECT button firmly Do not use excessive force to remove a disk which is lodged in the drive Never attempt to remove a floppy disk from the drive while the drive is operating the indicator is lit damage could result to both the disk and the drive Remove any disk from the drive before powering up or down To prevent damage to the disk drive s heads always try to hold the floppy disk in a level position not tilted in any direction while inserting it into the drive Push it in firmly but gently Never use excessive force To avoid the risk of malfunction and or damage insert only floppy disks into the disk drive Never insert any other type of disk Avoid getting paper clips coins or any other foreign objects inside the drive Handling floppy disks Floppy disks contain a plastic disk with a thin magnetic coating Microscopic precision is required to enable storage of large amounts of data on such a sm
161. 00 Bypass Basic frequency of the Post Filter EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 78 LoFi Radio In addition to a Lo Fi effect this effect also generates radio noise LoFi Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Degrades the sound quality The sound quality grows poorer as this value is increased Post Filter Type OFF LPF HPF Type of filter OFF no fil ter is used LPF cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff value HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff value Post Filter Cutoff 200 8000 Bypass Basic frequency of the Post Filter Radio Detune 0 127 Simulates the tuning noise of a radio As this value is raised the tuning drifts further Radio Noise Level 0 127 Volume of the radio noise EO Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range G 70 Music Workstation Roland Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 79 Telephone This effect simulates the tonal character of a telephone trans mission Voice Quality 0 15 Audio qua
162. 05 10 0Hz Modulation frequency of the tremolo effect Tremolo Separation 0 127 Allows you to set the level of the tremolo effect with respect to the chorus modula tion Tremolo Phase 0 180 deg Spread of the tremolo effect Balance D100 0W D50 50W D0 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 14 Space D This is a multiple chorus that applies two phase modulation in stereo It gives no impression of modulation but produces a transparent chorus effect Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation speed Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Chorus Phase 0 180deg Spatial spread of the sound EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 15 St Chorus This is a stereo chorus A filter is provided so that you can adjust the timbre of the chorus sound Filter Type OFF LPF HPF Type of filter OFF no filter is used LPF cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff value HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff value Cutoff Frequency 200 8000Hz Basic frequency of t
163. 07 109 TE wata ANAN Aa NAG 109 Time Vibrato 45 132 133 VB a 128 Vocal Harmonist 109 Delete i cx acta pu cee ica ta ada ded sence ane 160 CA etre iiss daddies 207 Last NO eccaveveeeeancucanax 39 142 NE CA APA 139 NE ane AA 55 160 KEN AA 149 kaaa SA AY 164 DONG NOE sama anaamA ANA 142 VC Attddedoaddddbeddaaeeenanaas 88 Style COMPOSE 252 nananana 193 User NOON sewwers2 44442554442 118 DEMO ee eee 22 DOU scecseccesssssesessso4 132 133 VD cub SAASOMMRE OMAR ROAR ROR Ree 128 Vibrato ee 45 DESUNALION acca cesta kaa k kana 187 DELUNGO xa ata as man 110 Bigaa AA 19 103 DISCONMCCL MA AA 212 Disk Media sce anna ha 203 USE APP 84 85 187 Display Beep SOUN uera 223 Ge ee AA 21 Dissolve TIME reenn ere 222 DIVISO AA 182 184 BIKE AAP APOS 64 Be hace eaeec ee eeheadoueeeeees 113 Ki 33 DIUM cece ees 41 74 G Bass lt 2arvesaaraeraereessancakens 41 ASUMEN cesses 0h daka 128 MUS antananesannee nade DANAYA 128 Two tracks 2 00 000 156 Drum Set NOGNOG 189 Select User Stl 188 Sound Edit onanan nnana 128 2 54 DrUMMING cece eee eee ee eee 31 DNGSG KAN TAK TATA DIN yey ANAN asses 15 Dynamic PTA AG AA GE 63 81 EIEEEI STITT T T 81 Be e EELEE LEE ees ee 60 E EASY SETTING onnnnnnnananaanaan 28 33 Edit IN dEX anaana aaan 120 144 NIPA TIETEET 215 lt i CA 188 EAE S EE E EEE 95 Vie ed JO EPEPP TPP PEPE PET EE 104 COMMPTESSO vaararcccrestaaaaaoss
164. 0W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the flanger sound W Level 0 127 Output level 32 DST Delay This effect connects distortion and a delay effect in series Distortion Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the volume Distortion Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the distortion sound Delay Time 0 0 500 0ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Balance D100 0W D50 50W D0 100W Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Level 0 127 Output level 33 EH Chorus This effect connects an enhancer and a chorus in series Enhancer Sens 0 127 Sensitivity of the enhancer Enhancer Mix Level 0 127 Level of the overtones gen erated by the enhancer Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation speed Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Chorus Balance D10
165. 106 HANAP OO 105 Harmonic Bars 00000 34 Keyboard 0 dee 97 Multi FX oaan eee 100 OVEIWEW 2 2 4444454444440n6cn0c0c 95 SONG SIVIES 3 coe cove corea evans wa 101 UN AA 108 PEPE AA 43 107 END Rerrera rir nera 26 PAM AA 26 62 67 69 74 EMSCWIOIC mamang 44 107 136 Env AE CAP 94 Dey PEEPEEES SE EFE PEP 94 NA ee te ees ere 94 ENNVElOpe 23 3a gaga aasa gagaan 93 127 maU AA 162 163 192 Equalizer 105 132 135 136 137 01800 dina NIEREN 135 Erase EVEN eedi 178 201 O OT ama Paan AGA 162 Style Composer 0008 192 AA 177 201 Filter occas nnenennnnnne nnd ee 216 AA ee are ae 171 EXECUTE a sees 160 DA APP PREP PT re TTT Terr rere rc EE 30 EXPANSION 000 eae 32 Expansion Doai eessen aag 227 Expression yo OPAPP PEP PEE TETEP TETERE 70 Style Composer 0 008 189 Ea ANA 30 EX Eka SOUE wwe mwa dawa BIGKAS 104 F Factory NE pA AA NAAN ANA NA MA AAO 224 AA PAA 63 65 138 FAST a 28 35 AANO APO 40 PG iestetecaseeeasecaeceranaueaeas 67 AA eae 187 Feedback 102 109 129 Pele OPPA 44 45 48 134 135 File Ra AA 20 NAMIC t2tcccaccccsceeastoaseaaate 38 AA 26 75 NG AA cence cate ceen eee ae 62 65 75 D PEREPERE EEEE EE EEEE 184 Gell bal PPT 63 67 69 REMAIN ee eee ees 62 KIRA 83 Ritardando a 83 aaa 62 65 75 Filter MIDI 0 eee ee 216 217 o eo EEEIEE EEEE EE 51 a AE 94 Uo DAWN aaa nA 62 Papag a ERE ARE E EEH EEEEEHEEEHAAE
166. 129 183 Pack Edes AA EE 190 E EEEIEE PEPPER PP PIER EEEE 25 WOMWIMC 2 a2e0eeeae eeeuuuenn 129 218 Sustain 24444454400 hana maana 68 92 PN eee eee eee e NE ke UNA 43 Switch on off aaa 21 PP 25 75 Synchro AA 151 SYMENFONZALON aaa mama mananahan 217 SVS EXCUSE a aaah dana aaaanaa 219 IB C o a a LAAN bess KAG 40 TILED aaa a aa a EEEREN 216 SYSIEN E 217 T I oe rere 47 68 70 107 Bak ol 0 eae een oe ee ee AA 109 eee eee eee ea ae ee 28 67 AA 28 183 a O EEEE EEEE T EETEEN 82 DIE AA 82 DONG tamana ein de 129 156 Style 35 129 Style COMPOSE oceans 190 Synchronization 217 EB 67 UB 65 User PA 183 Threshold 4a aan PhD R RAR A AA 43 76 Milig E E NLNG eee 106 Time me AA AA 138 Wiese os 441s4ehseeroaaeaccsccsaaans 138 OU yaa ee eae eee 138 Ct es ee E 197 ON vecgeeeeceeeeeeeee 156 180 UMMC Sic eaeenuannnenndgeeseesaageaas 188 G 70 Music Workstation Index LA AA 187 TONG AA AA 29 Ce ee ee ee eee 93 GPa tesentiaaaceunaaneines 169 196 Select User Stl 188 Sound POI ayamgaha 4444545555455 127 TODS AA AA 40 Touch Screen Beep 223 Wa diene ete eee ees 179 182 PU ll pugeetecereasccaaeud asus 160 190 Instrument 181 182 188 Kala AA 197 Cg PR 171 CS te ae ee ee 23 58 59 AUM UC Na aaa 48 MIDI parameter daanan 216 Octave SIES taanaameseeeeerreesus 59 NA AA 219 DOQUENCE naaa KAKAAAAAAAAAA NG 166 DONG EEEE 129 Sle COMPOSE 2 cancccccceeeeees
167. 16T 1 32 1 32T 1 64 This parameter sets the resolution of the Quantize func tion Be sure to always select the value that equals the shortest note you recorded Otherwise your part no longer sounds the way you played it because shorter notes are shifted to the wrong positions E STRENGTH 00 0 1000 0 Use this parameter to specify how precise the timing cor rection should be 0 means that the selected RESOLU TION value is not applied 0 correction while 100 means that all notes are shifted to the mathematically cor rect positions Maybe first try values between 50 and 85 to pre serve at least part of the original feel If that does not pro vide the expected degree of correctness repeat the oper ation with the same settings or select a higher value W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data T G2 ERASE ERASE allows you to selectively delete data either within a specified range of measures beats or clocks or from the entire track s When DATA TYPE is set to ALL ERASE substitutes the required number of rests for the data you delete so that you end up with the equivalent number of blank measures If you also want to eliminate the measures themselves use DELETE see below WETRACK ALL 1 16 Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks except the MASTER track The MASTER tra
168. 194 TE MOO ec tecceeceev ow ha aen ane eens 64 TA AA 61 91 Blend AN PAPA eee 90 T AA 48 59 61 IV SO PP PP PP PP PEP AA AA 50 TVF IVA aooaa 93 EE EEEE EE DETE DOPE 94 MONO GARO 94 POP 216 BE aaa 216 DENG a es a een 219 PAPA 217 WOOO AA 219 AP 80 U UNDO CHANGES 126 UNFOUA co s atassteessne se 162 163 192 NN SANA PP PP PEPE PAPA 75 113 HARA EEEE 33 UP3 e 8 ee naka 90 OG AU sate eesti ae 40 Upper1 M FX Link 101 Hk AAP PP PP PEPE 211 213 WW AA AABANG 214 cl napisa BABABA ABNER BBAANNANA 105 106 Mints OME dah hra magana ga ag dada 41 LO PEDRO PEP PP PP PRA 118 205 HA AAP 218 User Program cee eae 111 AA 112 COPY aaaa aa 119 DE E rras LLELLE i eE 118 Edit Finder waaa GG 117 Filter KBD Mode 0 aa 115 MIDI SET cccccecccecccawovede 115 O ea 115 Style a 115 1 0 APP PPO EEE EERE 115 TONEBE ECION awa ma ha D Ahh ANA 115 Transpose settings 115 Transposition n annann nnana llo ALL REEE 113 FO e SESSI ITIITI TAATA 115 LOC E 204 Name 2 aeaa 112 De a EE 118 Program Change 218 Quick IGCALION AA 114 BOCA AA atawai 117 PONG nawa MG AG 118 HELECL sccccduddddcdddudidscunwan 112 select Manual aaccacnennxenes x 113 Set Save 00cceeeeee 205 Song MIDI Set Link 116 Al AP PAP AA 111 User Style see Style V NYS rth oreo oar oe AO ee os AA AG 166 194 196 Variat 194 eee 67 69 NW OMIA T
169. 2 x 1 SysEx messages always start with FO to signal the beginning of such a message and end with F7 end of exclusive message Some manufacturers like Roland use a figure that allows the user to check whether the SysEx message is correct That number is called the checksum If you don t know how to calculate it press the button icon to have the G 70 insert it for you G 70 Music Workstation Roland Editing 16 track songs This is a very important step for Roland tone genera The following pop up appears tors If the checksum is wrong or missing the entire string will be ignored Note The checksum is only calculated for SysEx strings of a certain length more than 7 bytes Use the 0 9 and A F fields to enter the value for the selected white on blue byte A stands for 11 B for 12 C for 13 D for 14 E for 15 and F for e Switch on the button icons of the events you want to 16 see in the list the icons in question must light green e Press the field to remove the selected byte refers to tempo events to time sig All subsequent bytes will move one position to the nature changes and to SysEx left strings e Press the field to insert a 00 at the current e Press to switch on all button icons or to position The originally selected byte and all subse switch them all off in which case the MASTER TRACK quent bytes move one position to the right You can EDIT list only contains the
170. 4 4g 189 aaa 62 UoD Beam aaa aaa 65 Place Event 174 178 202 PG cosuucuuneauswensmecsaes 102 129 Play AA 39 142 Stop a 68 69 EE PEPE 145 MEIFONOME 1 cwe err xr rr rr KK hha 73 POM ARR PEPE TIE 92 BOI marry NANANA et 134 136 Portamento a 69 Wer nagana aaa sya EETL EGG 91 PEE paaa 82 TTI Ole AA 190 Punch In Out anaana 157 Footswitch 0 0ee eae 68 69 Q Quantize SEQUENCE nnaman pna 161 Style KOMON wegesuueuees 183 191 Quarter LONG HARANA NAAN AAANA NANANA 71 DUCK STAP Upa acetone aerate 40 R Rate aaa 131 133 VB cece eens 128 Vibrato ee eee 45 Ai ppeeeeeenusieeseegeeseaeese 106 REC Mode User Stl 183 TYPE a 156 159 Alat PAA 117 221 User PEOG daa esnneeesssnseous 117 Record e e eee eee 158 160 ee ee ee ee 183 FSI AAP 183 RECOMUEl s6445445545445445445545550 52 RECON LA AA 52 DEICC AAAAKAAAAAAAAKABAKAGAAAGA 157 KO ON AA 30 32 KC ee ee eee eee eee rere ee 184 Reflections 0e0e ee 109 110 NEY ITANONG 44 42 a4eenceasenceeaans 111 elds P POP POP PUP UP PIPE PP 219 Release 0c eee eee aes 94 106 127 REMOTE aaa ka 218 Remove 147 Rename Diskk amp Media 0 000 206 Dao e AP PEP GP ee 120 144 so E GE APP PP PPPPEPPPMANA 149 SONG PIE cacceecegocessasd 88 142 User Prg Genre 005 118 NG ELA PAANAN 164 oO NEE PA PET PP PEPE PEPE 164 RECOV AAO 183 User o 6 lt a PAPA 187 RESET
171. 7 G 70 Music Workstation Panel descriptions Rear panel left side FC7 PEDAL HOLD FOOT FOOT MIDI FOOTSWITCH SWITCH PEDAL TTHRU OUT e e 1 FC7 PEDAL socket This is where you connect an optional FC 7 foot switch unit that allows you to start stop and select Style divisions by foot The functions of this foot switch unit are programmable and apply to the entire G 70 2 HOLD FOOTSWITCH socket An optional DP 2 DP 6 or BOSS FS 5U footswitch connected to this socket can be used for holding the Keyboard part notes The Melody Intell part can also be sustained in this way This function is also referred to as Sustain or Damper 3 FOOT SWITCH socket Connecting an optional DP 2 DP 6 or FS 5U to this socket allows you to control an assignable function by foot 4 FOOT PEDAL socket Connect an optional EV 5 EV 7 or BOSS FV 300L expression pedal to this socket to control the volume of one or several parts or another parameter by foot 5 MIDI THRU OUT IN sockets These sockets allow you to connect the G 70 to external MIDI devices for a variety of applications receiving song data in realtime from an external sequencer transmitting your playing and the data of the song you are playing back to an external sequencer using the G 70 as master keyboard in your MIDI setup etc right side D 2 METRONOME EXTERNAL SOURCE VOCAL HARMONIST OUTPUT LEVEL OUT ar aia AT INPUT
172. 8 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 75 Tape Echo A virtual tape echo that produces a realistic tape delay sound This simulates the tape echo section of a Roland RE 201 Space Echo Mode S M L S M S L M L S M L Combination of playback heads to use Select from three different heads with different delay times S short M middle L long Repeat Rate 0 127 Tape speed Increasing this value will shorten the spacing of the delayed sounds Intensity 0 127 Amount of delay repeats Bass 15dB 0 15dB Boost cut for the lower range of the echo sound Treble 15dB 0 15dB Boost cut for the upper range of the echo sound Head S Pan L64 0 63R
173. 9 G 70 Music Workstation Index Mode GOD ss2tacneeeeeseseanaacaaanes 164 MERE NGA AA 92 OES EITT AA 184 Modulation 58 62 93 Eaa E MED 50 a aa E EA E TEES 92 Move Event 174 178 201 Multi band compressor 106 NBP sgaaaonaaaaaaaann adda 100 Music Assistant a cee eee ee 36 Create NeW 2 00005 121 212 Delete registration sasa 122 FORME GIST AMON 24455 a oe 122 PUINCHONG APR 121 Rename registration 122 Save TECISU ANON se eseese ee a 122 MUSE TOC aksi banana ana a RANA 48 Music Style see Style Ni AA 124 Ai AA 128 Makeup 006r daanan AA 126 HIGA 95 Per CUSSION aaa paaa annn 128 SEQUENCE aaah mhARARAAAAAA DANG 160 NO CAO OS 185 SUNG alts A EEEE EEE EEEE 185 My Setup 181 N NaMe AA 36 49 Pile reeeereeeereereeseseceneeccses 55 Eo ne eee ee 55 User Progra x asa0csssseseneeses 112 NG EN ana AA aaa 200 Net SOG AKA 40 OGG AA PAANAN 163 165 170 IO AM ANGCr t2n2ctecncaaackankant 218 Wi e A E E E 134 NAG E NN 163 165 170 AA AY 200 DIUM getty eee eee 44454544455 189 NTA NANA PAP PAP PPPPRP PAAANO 218 NGA EO PAA 87 115 141 O Der ck 23 59 66 127 133 AUO PI O heen eee eee eee 46 MG KAG speaeeedeneeeaacaaaaras 135 SOVENTE aa Ada EERE 157 saan es eGceesacucuaesaanaanens 219 User Style eee eee 182 WOCOUE waeeeeeoentiesssancnsses 134 AAP eats 40 One Touch 0 0 ee eee 29 78 One shot patterns 179 Options
174. AA 39 142 224 eel PEREEEEEEE EE EP 63 67 GD MARA BASAKABAAAARAGA ANI 127 128 RESOLUTION mamana anG AGANG NG 192 RESONANCE 5255455455455455555555455 94 D PE hA AA EAA AA AEA AAHON 66 Naal KADPPPP PEPE TPP PE EER ERASE 127 Drum Instrument 128 Keyboard PANTS kaa AKA AKBAR KAKA KAG 97 Level ch th ech ANAN ce ch ch om A 129 Send 0 08 48 104 107 109 SOMO SOO 2 cacure ered as 124 129 Style Composer a 189 SUG SONG AA 102 TWN soit eu bet ie eg ee 109 Vocal Harmonist 107 109 Revolving Bass 69 75 User Program Set SONG 2 a 38 39 DalaNiCC neacerececaseceescascee 124 Category cece eee eee 38 So PPO P PET PP PATO D REY 129 COVED AA 41 Data Changes 220 EFFECTS POP PP PPO PP PP PP PPO 124 ROG maana 140 PIK EEEE 116 118 Link to User PrOOhalll 4435554 44 2 116 UNG ETETEN TEETE EEREEEEET 150 Makeup TOUS aa 124 Name annann 38 55 Options 141 mala sal OW PEEROEEE TANK ae 215 Position POINTEls2ccacc0scesaee0n 217 Reverb PEE PPPPP PP PNP PP PDA PT OY 129 SAVE canada a EaaRAaL 55 130 159 205 SCANNING a annnannnazanacnnne reese 40 ae ee eee 217 WWMNCs ORE PREP APAPAP PA AA 129 Track Edit nonn a 160 LIGA 59 129 VIME e aaa recess 129 Sse AEE EEE TT 68 70 Sound BOL O 127 128 IPA EEEE ECEE eee 64 65 Set Mode a 30 Source PI EO 164 Space 55 109 110 141 160 aKT ICOMsaccesaneennnenseeeanes 198
175. AA 80 AS APP 68 Fade In Out aaa 138 Footswitch 00 c cece eee eee 68 LOWE oo eee eee eee 92 LON AA 70 OWE PA 68 70 One TOUCH aaa Anda hb aah 79 PCC el AA 92 DC RINGS 44454 444 944 4400 ire 115 User Program 0 0c eee 115 AA AT 95 104 229 WDCC MATPPPT TPP PF P PP PP PP PP PPO 104 ASAN AA eee 65 Ea NAAN 169 196 aaa aaa ade 38 87 140 CODY ama 121 144 Bale ee SG NN 120 143 ALE AA 120 USIMUO CC PEEPPPPE sees she 114 AA 223 Init All WANES AA 93 Single VAG preeeeeeeconuee a 93 216 e EEEE EEE EEEE 169 196 WANA 7G AA 224 NGO sannaneanaananacaneanaacece 209 DU Cuan cnn ln dndaga dada tandaan ada coos 180 KG aaa 34 35545252572525454555 55 160 aolblc leo YY AY 165 le COMPOSE go55ss5esecedes 194 INSIDE 162 163 192 Instrumentation 00 00 8 41 INSTRUMENTS naaa aan paawa 64 Int Mid aaa 219 Intelligence Threshold 76 INTELLIGENT ama nak hannah ahy ar wa 80 Internal 0 ee eee 218 219 MIENON PP PANAPAAN AO 224 MEMO PO aman a NGA 21 METONOME AA 73 Interval transposition 58 A a ieee 165 188 NCO AA 26 62 67 69 74 Halaga EWG AA 79 PA ae an 81 AG AA 75 J JUMP TO 1st NOTE onanan 126 K Kara PP ee ee eee 50 KBD MOE cc cccccucuceaseeueeees 28 56 FONG a erore ece s s o e e ereee sss ety ees st 79 KEV ESEAS EEEE SETE ETEEN 182 Se UPON ARE PEE TETE T TUPE TON 51 OUCH ccacctcetaacueadusadauasace 60 Keyboard amp Style Part
176. ABE h Ehh LG 44 Chord recognition area ZONE ics asana naan anna A NAAN 80 Not convinced so far aaa 44 Arranger Type chord mode 000200 0 80 VOICE a PAPA PA 45 Arranger Hold ac 348 24 at nnd oo ANNA RAARA BARRA ALS 80 AN AA AA 46 intro amp Ending AILGPAION vase soca eee eee eas 81 Using THE VOCOUGl sscsssresnesserse n 46 Dynamic ANING 2ass20 22524uedessec anasesesaea 81 e ESOS EE EEEE EEEE EEE E 47 Tempo related settings Arranger Options 82 Automatic transposition Singer Key 48 Style TEMPO 0 aaa 82 Displaying Lyrics and chord information 49 TEMPO CHANGE RITARD and ACCELER 82 Displaying SCORES ma mata Kaka 51 Working with external Music Styles 84 Using the CUSIOM MemOnes 2 c0 esisesereeereewe ys 84 Programming CUSTOM assignments 84 Baa AA 85 Style Finder quickly locating Styles Quick location or the Style YOU NEE DL waa ma NANA NG Editing the Style Finder information Advanced Keyboard part functions Usiela gee AAP PP Tuning Upper 2 Coarse Tune and Fine Tune Portamento for UP1 and UP2 Portamento AAP Portamento Mode Mono Poly 00 KONG GINO Hasan tma Ama ES Tone Edit editing Keyboard parts Using the mixer functions amp effects Mixing Keyboard parts aaa Volume and status of the Style p
177. AGES e Use the TONE buttons on the front panel and press the field of the desired sound If you don t like it press another field e f you are still not happy with the Tone use the PAGE 1 x PAGE 5 and gt fields to select the corre sponding page if available Note The and buttons are not available for Music Style tracks The ADrums track can only use Drum Sets so that only the button of the TONE pad is available Play a few notes on the keyboard to check whether the sounds of the selected Drum Set are suitable for the accompaniment you are going to record Try other Drum Sets until you find the one that sounds right Note See Drum Instrument amp Pitch on p 189 for details abut the NRPN DRUM and PITCH parameters These are only available for ADrum tracks Specifying the key for melodic parts If you want to use the accompaniment in a musically meaningful way you need to tell the G 70 what key you are recording in This is to ensure that the chords you play during everyday use of your Style with the G 70 s Arranger lead to the correct realtime transpo sitions of the selected Division The G 70 allows you to record Styles in any key But do set the KEY parameter to the right value before recording Note The key of the ADrums part cannot be set because that doesn t make sense 13 Press the field and use the dial or the DECJ INC buttons to set the key If you want to record in F set thi
178. AME COUNTRY or field and enter the desired characters see p 49 You can also rename all three of them Note If you select a Style on floppy disk only the SONG NAME and FILE NAME can be edited e Press the field W Delete This function allows you to delete the selected Style from the internal memory area memory card or floppy disk You should use this as sparsely as possi ble and probably never for the internal memory Once a Style is gone there is indeed no way to restore it So please be careful and try to forget this function even exists e Press the field Deleting a Style cannot be undone which is why the following question is now displayed BAET GALE A This File will be DELETED from Memory Card Style Name SHUFFLE Country International by ma Genre Standard Tempo 153 ARE YOU SURE deletes the Style file leaves the file intact and takes you back to the initial Style Finder page with the song list leaves the file intact and takes you back to the STYLE LIST page WE Copy This function allows you to copy the selected Style to another memory area Note It is perfectly possible to use older Music Styles with the G 70 They will be converted automatically to the new VARIATION i 4 system Even though you can select the files you wish to copy on this page there is no need to select a Style prior to pressing the field on the STYLE LIST page Be aware however that the
179. ARK JUMP buttons 4 Press the SONG PLAY QUICK START field and use the dial to specify where and how song playback should begin FROM SECOND BAR This function causes playback to start from measure 2 of the selected Standard MIDI File This is often useful because the first bar of most Stan dard MIDI Files contain SysEx and control change data that configure the G 70 s sound source Playing back that measure on stage may lead to a rather long blank which you probably want to avoid FROM FIRST NOTE This is basically the same as the above except that playback is started on the first note of the selected song OFF Playback start at the very beginning of the song file and may thus contain a few silent bars Using the Song Cover function The COVER function provides masks that change the instrumentation of the selected song or Music Style Simply by selecting another preset you can cause a Viennese waltz to be played back by a heavy metal band etc Even though the arrangement rhythm riffs does not change the songs character can be modified beyond recognition 1 Press the button once or twice to select the display page shown below Pa BAND sla J 106 4 oO Fa 1 HI R g Fal 2 Select the parts whose instrumentation you want to change Press the field if all instruments should be replaced Press the field if only the drum and percus sion instruments should change Press the field if you r
180. ATA po CONTROLLERS f STORAGE TONE EDIT Hii i 2 Press the field The display changes to MOEA FIA ies SHALL TYPE rm am bom ral ever SON Boer mr seo x a bo cnsbi 3 Press or to specify which sec tion you wish to edit 4 In the second row press the field that corresponds to the VOCAL HARMONIST part you wish to edit You could also press and hold the corresponding but ton on the front panel We suggest connecting a microphone and to sing talk while making the following settings G 70 Music Workstation Roland Singer settings 11 Editing the Vocal Harmonist parts Singer settings When the indicator lights your solo singing is output Press and hold the button to jump to the following page C GE GENDER VOICE INPUT MALE i FEMALE Dr 1 Press the or field This is an important clue for the HARMONY processor Vocoder Small or Ensemble It does not change the character of your live singing though Press the field that corresponds to your voice type That way the added harmony voices will sound even more convincing 2 Press the field to add an automatic Vibrato effect to your singing Note that this is probably only useful as gimmick your natural vibrato no doubt sounds far more nat ural The Vibrato parameters can be set on the EDIT page 3 When you are done either press the button to return to the main page
181. AYS The metronome even counts when play back is stopped Press this field if you want to hear the metronome at all times which is probably only useful when practising a new song PLAY Press this field if the metronome should only sound while the Arranger or Recorder is playing REC Press this field if the metronome should only sound during song or Music Style recording see pages 154 and 179 BI METRONOME INTERNAL The metronome signal transmitted to the OUTPUT MAIN and PHONES sockets The metronome signal is always sent to the G 70 s METRONOME OUT socket rear panel You can con nect headphones to this socket and set the metro nome s volume using the LEVEL knob This option may be useful as click track for a drummer 3 Press the button to return to the main page TI G 70 Music Workstation Additional Arranger Style functions 6 Additional Arranger Style functions Before telling you even more about the Music Styles allow us to explain the difference between Music Styles and the Arranger The Arranger is a kind of sequencer that plays back the accompaniments you select Those accompaniments are always related to a given musical genre or style and are therefore called Music Styles The G 70 s accompani ments are a lot more than just one pattern that goes on playing until you stop it they comprise several patterns or divi sions Arranger parts Each accompaniment or Music Style cons
182. C Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit For Canada NOTICE This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations AVIS Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Reglement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada
183. E TIME Allows you to set a swell for the vibrato effect This parameter specifies how long it takes before the DEPTH value is reached once the Delay Time IS Up Vibrato DELAY TIME Allows you to set a delay between the moment you start singing and the moment the vibrato effect kicks in e Press the field to leave this page Note If you select another preset the Pitch and Vibrato parameters on the EDIT page are reset to their factory values If you press the field the VOCAL EQUALIZER page appears It contains a simple equalizer for the Voice FX Auto Pitch and Singer parts See p 132 Auto Pitch settings When the indicator lights only the words you say are used The melody added to these words is generated by the Vocal Harmonist This is similar to the Vocoder part except that Auto Pitch is monophonic and thus meant as solo voice AUTO PITCH ASSIGN ACID GD 1 Press and hold the button 2 Press the field to add an automatic vibrato effect to the generated voice The Vibrato parameters can be set on the EDIT page OCTAVE If you are not happy with the register of the generated voice you can transpose it up or down by up to 2 octaves 3 Set the desired TRACK value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons This is where you select the track that should supply the note information for the melody to be generated In most instances 4 is a good choice because that track us
184. E mode Whole means that all keys trigger the same part s There is thus no split You can assign up to six parts to the entire keyboard MBS LW1 LW2 UP3 UP2 and UP1 1 Press the KBD MODE button Switching parts on and off 2 Press the PART ON OFF buttons of the parts MBS LW2 LW1 etc you want to play via the keyboard and switch off the parts you do not need KEYBOARD PART TONE ASSIGN kz MBS LW2 LW 1 UP3 UP2 UP 1 fl ON OFF If a part is on its button lights Note If none of the PART ON OFF buttons lights the notes you play on the keyboard will not be audible It would how ever be possible to go on controlling the Arranger By the way selecting WHOLE does not mean that the Arranger is automatically switched off or can no longer be used See Arranger Type chord mode on p 80 for details Note Your settings can be written to a User Program and recalled at a later stage See p 111 5S 7 G 70 Music Workstation Using the performance functions Let us now have a look at the G 70 s performance functions Also called controllers they allow you to add expression to your playing which is a very important aspect for simulating glissando s bendings and other changes that will make your melodies even more con VINCING Pitch Bend and Modulation The BENDER MODULATION lever to the left of the G 70 s keyboard can be used to add two kinds of effects to the Keyboard part notes Up
185. E settings on the following page ARRANGE Sarre TEMPO CHANGE FILL IN HALF BAR aE FILL RIT FILL RITARDANDO Press the field of the parameter part whose value you wish to change Parameter fields can also be selected using the DATA ENTRY lt gt buttons Set the desired value with the dial or the DECJ INC buttons ACCELER RITARD allows you to set the degree ratio by which the tempo changes when the ACCELER or RITARD function is triggered Example if the tempo is currently J 100 the value 20 means that the tempo falls to J 80 Press the first field ACCELER RITARD and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the ratio by which the tempo should increase decrease CPT 15 3825 Use this parameter to specify how long a Ritardando Accelerando should take In most cases one measure 480 CPT i e one measure is probably the most musical choice Mi Using the Ritardando Accelerando functions 4 For general applications any Style division pro ceed as follows e Assign the RITARD and ACCELER function ASSIGN SW buttons Arranger RIT Tempo amp Arranger ACC Tempo on p 63 FC 7 footswitches Arranger RIT Tempo Arranger ACC Tempo on p 67 e Press the button to start Style play back e Press the assigned button or footswitch If you assign two controls can increase ACC and decrease RIT the tempo 5 For Ritardandos that apply to Ending patter
186. ENT o V Pop1 Now select a pattern Let s start with MAIN 1 10 Press the field and use the DATA ENTRY dial to select Main 1 BI Working with clones On this page you can use two clone functions that allow you to record one part and copy it to up to four divisions and three modes each The sign means that more than one pattern will be recorded 11 Use the field to select the mode s This parameter allows you to specify whether you are about to record the accompaniment for major minor or seventh chords If you listen to the Music Styles prepared by Roland you will notice that there are slight differences in the looped patterns and some times striking differences for Intros and Endings with completely different phrases Such variations can be prepared using the REC DIVISION MODE parameter Let us use the following settings which mean record the major pattern and copy it to all MAIN Divisions Thus by programming one pattern you will obtain 3 Major minor 7th x 4 MAIN 1 2 3 4 12 identical drum patterns l Accomp1 132 Tone selection Another important aspect is Tone selection because the addresses of the sounds and Drum Set you select are recorded at the beginning of each division 12 Press the field and select a Drum Set HEPiano Keyboard 27 Pro Stagel FM EPiano2 Yintage EP1 Pro Stage2 Wurly 2 Phase EP Clay Vintage EP2 Harpsichord3 PAGE4 P
187. EO 32 DST Delay 62 Band Hanger 3 Overdrive 33 EH Chorus 63 Band Step Flg 4 Distortion 34 EH Hanger 64 VS Overdrive 5 Phaser 35 EH Delay 65 VS Distortion 6 Spectrum 36 Chorus gt DLY 66 GT Amp Simul 7 Enhancer 37 Flanger gt DLY 67 Gate 8 Auto Wah 38 CHO Flanger 68 Long Delay 9 Rotary 39 CHO Delay 69 Serial Delay 10 Compressor 40 Flanger DLY 70 MLT Tap DLY 11 Limiter 41 CHO Flanger 71 Reverse DLY 12 Hexa Chorus 42 Isolator 72 Shuffle DLY 13 Trem Chorus 43 Low Boost 73 3D Delay 14 Space D 44 Super Filter 74 Long Time DLY 15 St Chorus 45 Step Filter 75 Tape Echo 16 St Flanger 46 Humanizer 76 LoH Noise 17 Step Flanger 47 Speaker Sim 77 LoFi Comp 18 St Delay 48 Step Phaser 78 LoFi Radio 19 Mod Delay 49 MLT Phaser 79 Telephone 20 3 Tap Delay 50 Inf Phaser 80 Phonograph 21 4 Tap Delay 51 Ring Modul 81 Step Pitch 22 Time Delay 52 Step Ring 82 Sympa Reso 23 2 Pitch Shifter 53 Tremolo 83 VIB OD Rotary 24 FBK Pitch 54 Auto Pan 84 Center Canc 25 Reverb 55 Step Pan 26 Gate Reverb 56 Slicer 27 OD Chorus 57 VK Rotary 28 OD Hanger 58 3D Chorus 29 OD Delay 59 3D Flanger 30 DST Chorus 60 3D Step Flgr To avoid confusion and too much leafing through pages we decided to explain the available parame ters elsewhere See page 229 Here s how to edit the parameters 6 Press the field of the parameter you wish to change the number of fields and their me
188. ER PART SWITCH TH FILTER VELOCITY RE FILTER Mi PARAMETER OCTAVE TX The OCTAVE TX parameter can be set to Absolute or Relative You may have noticed that if you assign a bass sound to the UP1 2 3 part in SPLIT mode the notes are transposed to allow you to play meaning ful bass lines using the UP1 2 3 part Relative means that this internal and automatic transposition is trans lated into note numbers In Absolute mode however the MIDI note number sent to other instruments will be the one assigned to the key you press The advantage of Absolute is that you can play a bass line using an UP part for example and dou ble it with a trumpet of an external instrument PART SWITCH This parameter allows you to specify whether or not a muted part should go on sending MIDI messages Internal A muted part can no longer be played via the G 70 s keyboard or Arranger Recorder but continues to send MIDI messages Selecting Internal and muting a part thus has the same effect as selecting Local Off see p 216 Int Mid A muted part can no longer be played via the G 70 s keyboard or Arranger and no longer sends MIDI messages TRANSPOSE RX On Off Use this parameter to spec ify whether note messages received via MIDI should be transposed MVELOCITY VELO TX VELO RX On 1 127 Your G 70 is equipped with a velocity sensitive keyboard and a tone generator capable of responding to velocity me
189. ERB DELAY WALL TYPE init ma nes CG Ka jas karga lain REVERB SEND REVERB TIME ETC 6m Gm e Press the field of the Reverb type you wish to use Note The preset you choose affects the settings of the param eters below Always start by selecting the type and then set the programmable parameters The names of these types STUDIO CHURCH are probably self explanatory You may notice that the reverb character changes as you select different types e Press the field of the parameter you wish to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons The three knob icons allow you to alter the selected reverb type WALL TYPE Allows you to specify the surface of the walls in the simulated location This parameter deter mines the brightness and liveness of the effect Car pet Wood Brick Concrete Marble REVERB SEND This parameter reflects the setting on the Vocal Effect page It was provided so that you do not need to switch pages while editing the Reverb pro cessor REVERB TIME Allows you to set the length duration of the reverb effect if you do not agree with the pre setting W Reverb for HARMONY EFFECT PO VOCALHARMONIST C a amp VOICE EFFECT HARMONY EFFECT REVERB DELAY REVERB DELAY WALL TYPE o ma bans anns kanaman REYERB SEND REVERB TIME FIN Gam ome Except for the presets this processor works exactly like its VOICE namesake G 70 Musi
190. EROGRKAM INDEX RENAME 5 COPY HC C i a The Index Edit functions are only available for real Index categories so 4 Press the field of the Index category you wish to edit USER PROSE INDEX Cr maa RENAME 12 EDIT Bs COPY Old amp Gold i T 2 O 5 Select the edit function you need by pressing its field W Rename This function allows you to change the name of the selected Index e Press the field e Enter the new name 16 characters See Entering names on p 49 Note The field allows you to switch between uppercase and lowercase characters e Press the EXECUTE field to confirm the new name E Edit This function allows you to assign the desired User Programs to the selected Index or to remove existing User Program assignments e After performing step 4 above press the field PHOS AM IIa e Use the FINDER USER PRG STYLE LINK GENRE and fields to locate the desired file See page 113 Press the fields of all User Programs you wish to assign to the selected Index category Selected User Programs are displayed on an orange background To remove a User Program from the selected cate gory press its orange field so that it turns gray If necessary use the PAGE fields to go to previ ous or Subsequent list pages Press to confirm your changes and return to the USER PROGRAM LIST page Press to return to t
191. ETTING 4 Pa UTILITY MIDI 3 ag Db E tone coir HAND KE ec USBDATA E CONTROLLERS f STORAGE 2 Press the field followed by the field SPLIT amp TOUGH Ce Noe KO LOWER UPPER 2 _ UPPER 1 LOWER 1 Sie PORTAMENTO TIME J HOLD he d Cana Put c 0 z FINE TUNE EEE Portamento means that the pitch doesn t change in clearly defined steps it produces glides from one note to the next Portamento Time 0 Rough pitch changes in semitone steps normal Portamento Time 1 127 Pitch glides from one note to the next Instead of jumping in semitone steps as you would expect the pitch glides from one note to the next whenever the Portamento time is higher than 0 The higher the value you set the slower the glide This effect is particularly useful for synthesizer sounds 3 Press the field of the Upper UP1 or Upper2 UP2 part to select it 4 Set the desired value with the dial or the DECJ INC buttons 91 G 70 Music Workstation Advanced Keyboard part functions Portamento Mode Mono Poly The G 70 also allows you to set the Upper1 and Upper2 parts to mono phonic mode MONO means that you can only play one note at a time You could select this mode to play a trumpet or woodwind part in a more natural way POLY on the other hand means that you can play chords using the selected part 5 Press the or field of the Upper part
192. Editing the Master Track The G 70 s sequencer uses one track called MASTER for each song It is used for recording the time signa ture the tempo as well as general SysEx messages that apply to all song tracks Note You can only edit the MASTER track of songs that already exist so be sure to load a song before attempting to edit its MAS TER track 1 If necessary select and load a different song This is not necessary if you want to edit the song you have just recorded or played back See Working with the Song Finder on p 140 or page 38 for how to load a song 2 Press the button NS 16 TRACK SEQUENCER G 70 Music Workstation Roland Editing 16 track songs The display changes to A MASTER 6 bd BARITONE SAK HEN TRACK T7 La EGEE 3 JdlaLTO GOUTA Paa DOTE mot KE PJ INANG GOTTE 15 IPIanNO1 16 PIANO 4 3 Press the field in the right col umn MINEA GO SBT b 10 01 000 Beat Change 01 020 Sys Ex FO 7E 7F 09 01 F7 01 031 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 00 FF 00 41 F7 01 037 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 01 38 06 01 F7 01 043 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 01 33 5432 F7 01 050 Sys Ex FO H 10 4212 40 01 34 5431 F7 mo 01 056 Sys Ex FO H 10 4212 40 01 00 20 28 01 099 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 01 00 20 28 04 060 Tempo Change 02 000 Tempo Change 52 02 060 Tempo Change 46 Tempo Change This page lists all events already present on the MAS TER track It al
193. G 70 for multi track recording or if a given part should be processed using an external effects device you may want to take advantage of the DIRECT sockets The parts assigned to the DIRECT sockets are no longer processed by the G 70 s effects nor controlled by the knob on the front panel Except for the Vocal Harmonist and Audio In parts all of the G 70 s parts can be freely assigned to the desired OUTPUT socket s Here is how to assign a part to the desired output 1 Press the button sa REVERB DIRECT EVERE _ o E LHORUS 2 Press the PART OUTPUTS field The display changes to 3 First decide which group contains the part whose assignment you want to change then press the corresponding PART SELECT field KBD The Keyboard parts D Beam and Melody Intel ligence part STYLE The Arranger parts SONG The Recorder parts G 70 Music Workstation Roland Using the individual outputs and audio inputs The display changes accordingly Though the part names vary the basic behavior is the same for all three pages Let us therefore use the page that con tains the Arranger parts activate the field PARI OUTPUTS 4 Press the or field of a part to assign it to the corresponding output MAIN refers to the main outputs which are stereo and DIRECT to the sockets of the same name which are also stereo As you see both output pairs are stereo which Is convenient for the MA
194. G 70 s overall volume This is an exclusive message common to all newer MIDI devices STYLE parameters The STYLE channel is used for receiving and transmit ting program change and bank select messages that select Styles and volume messages that change the Style s volume These two message types can only be filtered in the RX column i e you can specify whether or not to receive them HUE Sey geo Cemi J CERS Style MIDI TX MIDI RX CHANNEL Re FILTER 5 YLE f STY Po The MIDI address of a Music Style consists of three elements a CCOO number a CC32 number and a program change number The values assigned to CCOO and CC32 define the Style whereas the pro gram change number defines the pattern Intro End ing etc See also the Parameter Reference booklet supplied with your G 70 Sending only a program change number selects another pattern of the currently active Style Be aware however that only sending CCOO and CC32 messages without a program change has no effect Note When you select another Style on your G 70 it trans mits a CCOO CC32 PC cluster on the Style channel which you could record using an external sequencer EB MIDI TX CHANNEL Use this parameter to assign a MIDI transmit channel to the STYLE function If you don t want these messages to be transmitted switch off the field W MIDI RX CHANNEL Use this parameter to assign a MIDI receive channel to the STYLE function
195. GE 2 Press the field followed by the field FOOT CONTROLLER ERA ET ASSIGN 2 Half BarOnFilln 3 Press the field that corresponds to the function you wish to assign to the footswitch G 70 Music Workstation Roland Using optional footswitches If necessary use the PAGE 1 PAGE 3 fields to go to another page Start Stop Starts and stops Arranger playback Same function as the button Play Stop Starts and stops the Recorder and 16 track sequencer Same function as the but ton ntro Selects the Intro of the current Variation level 1 4 during Arranger playback Same function as INTRO Ending Selects the Ending of the current Variation level 1 4 during Arranger playback Variat 1 4 The footswitch can be used to switch to the VARIATION level you select here That Music Style pat tern is used from the next downbeat onward Bass Inversion Allows you to switch the Bass Inversion function on and off page 75 Arr M Bass Allows you to set the Arranger Chord parameter to Off chord recognition plus ABS recogni tion off see p 80 and at the same time activate the KBD MODE button and the MBS part and vice versa Piano Standard You can alternate between Standard and Piano Style Arranger Chord modes When the former is selected the chord recognition area page 80 is automatically set to LEFT When you switch to Piano Style the chord recognition
196. Head M Pan L64 0 63R Head L Pan L64 0 63R Independent panning for the Short middle and long playback heads Tape Distortion 0 5 Amount of tape dependent distor tion to be added This simulates the slight tonal changes that can be detected by signal analysis equipment Increas ing this value will increase the distortion Wow Flutter Rate 0 127 Speed of wow flutter com plex variation in pitch caused by tape wear and rotational irregularity Wow Flutter Depth 0 127 Depth of wow flutter Echo Level 0 127 Volume of the echo sound Direct Level 0 127 Volume of the original sound Level 0 127 Output level 76 LoFi Noise In addition to a lo fi effect this adds various types of noise such as white noise and disc noise LoFi Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Degrades the sound quality The sound quality grows poorer as this value is increased Post Filter Type OFF LPF HPF Type of filter OFF no fil ter is used LPF cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff value HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff value Post Filter Cutoff 200 8000 Bypass Center frequency of the filter W P Noise Type White Pink Switch between white noise and pink noise W P Noise LPF 200 8000 Bypass Center frequency of the low pass filter applied to the white pink noise BYPASS no cut W P Noise Level 0 127 Volume of the white pink noise Disc Noise Type LP E
197. IFX types and parameters 1 Thru The effect processor is bypassed 2 Stereo EO This is a four band stereo equalizer low mid x 2 high Stereo signals like certain piano sounds are thus not combined to a mono signal before being processed EQ Low Frequency 200 400Hz Frequency of the low range you wish to boost or cut EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range Negative values reduce the level EQ High Frequency 2000 4000 8000Hz Frequency of the high range you wish to boost or cut EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Negative values reduce the level EQ Mid 1 Frequency 200 8000Hz Gain of middle range 1 This is a parametric EQ band EQ Mid 1 Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 Width of the middle range 1 Set a higher value for O to narrow the range to be boosted or cut EO Mid 2 Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of middle range 2 EQ Mid 2 Frequency 200 8000Hz Gain of the middle range 2 This is a parametric EQ band EQ Mid 2 Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 Width of the middle range 2 Set a higher value for O to narrow the range to be boosted or cut EO Mid 2 Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the middle range 2 Level 0 127 Output level Use this parameter to com pensate for exaggerated level differences resulting from the settings you made 3 Overdrive Creates a soft distortion similar to that produced by vacuum tube amplifiers Drive 0 127 Degree of di
198. IN signals If you wish to send only one signal to each of the DIRECT outputs you may also need to change the following Pan for Keyboard parts e Press the button e Press the button to assign the PANPOT parameter to the sliders The display changes to EYB Po heme 4 EFFECT LEVEL MA BEAM JM i e Use the 9 sliders below the display to change the ste reo placement of the available parts CHORUS REVERB PANPOT ON OUR WN O m VOLUME EFFECT DBEAM M INT MBS LW 2 LW 1 UP 3 UP2 UP 1 TOST G 70 Music Workstation Using the mixer functions 8 effects Especially after assigning a part to a DIRECT output it is important to select L63 for the DIRECT L socket and R63 for the R socket All other values mean that the part in question is connected to both DIRECT outputs which may not be what you want In other instances of course this may Just be what you want such as when you wish to create an alter nate mix of certain parts and transmit their signals in stereo to an external processor or mixing console Pan for the Style and Song parts The Pan setting of the Style and Song parts needs to be set using the Makeup Tools function See page 124 5 Press the EXIT button to return to the main page Note The PART OUTPUTS settings are written to a User Pro gram thus providing even greater flexibility Using the audio inputs Your G 70 sports two EXTERNAL EXTERNA
199. IST N ARRANGER TF STYLE SETTING ly COMPOSER Who FUNCTION B UTILITY Mini HAND EB ec USBDATA t Ae CONTROLLERS f STORAGE 2 Press the field followed by the field SALE 2 aa Cua LOWER UPPER 2 UPPER 1 E PORTAMENTO TIME 3 HOLD 3 LOWER 2 F j Di 3 Press the field if you want to change the UP2 part s pitch in semitone steps That field now lights 4 Set the desired value with the dial or the DECJ INC buttons means that UP2 s pitch is lowered while values without a minus sign mean that UP2 s pitch is shifted up A very popular setting for UP1 UP2 layers is 12 for UP2 so that it sounds one octave above Upper or any other active Keyboard part The setting range for this parameter is 24 24 5 Press the field to change UP2 s pitch in small steps cents 6 Set the desired value with the dial or the DECJ INC buttons FINE TUNE can be set between 99 almost a semi tone down and 99 almost a semi tone up 7 Press the button to return to the main page Pa ji PEEN TONE EDIT G 70 Music Workstation Roland Portamento for UP1 and UP2 Portamento for UP1 and UP2 Here are two functions that may come in handy for even more impressive solos involving the UP1 and UP2 parts Portamento Time 1 Press the button The display changes to MERLY HE rmnm 2 Enon FUNCTION f SPLIT amp TOUCH ARRANGER S
200. Keyboard effects processors Room1 Room2 These types simulate the reverb char acteristics of a room The higher the number 1 or 2 the bigger the room becomes Stage1 Stage2 These types simulate the reverb char acteristics you get when you perform on a concert stage The higher the number 1 or 2 the bigger the stage becomes Hall1 Hall2 These types simulate the reverb of a small 1 or large 2 concert hall and thus sound much big ger than the Room types above Delay A Delay effect no reverb Works a lot like an echo effect and thus repeats the sounds Pan Delay This is a stereo version of the above Delay effect It creates repetitions that alternate between the left and right channels REVERB LEVEL allows you to set the output level of the Reverb processor Setting this parameter to O means that you no longer hear the effect in question If you don t want to edit the effects parameters con tinue with the next step otherwise jump to step 5 4 Press to return to the display page with the modules 0R Press the button to return to the main page 5 After selecting a reverb type you may want to fine tune some of its parameters If so proceed as follows e Press the field of the parameter you wish to change the number of fields and their meaning depend on the selected reverb type e Set the desired value Parameter values can be set by turning the dial by pressing
201. L 86 BN AA AA ee 37 141 LG AA 87 Music Assistant 0005 37 NOO re 38 140 Sg AA 86 User Program 00 0 ee 113 Fine JUNC AA 91 Ulol ola AP PRRRRREEPEPEPE eda a TSS 90 Vocal Harmonist 132 BE LA 98 102 129 Foot Pedal a 70 SWIC dcctesvereceereeeveeaeunine 69 FOOISWIUCH sccc40caeene0eennach0005 lt 92 KO PP PRA AA 165 194 PO HARA AAAH BAKA BANA ANANAAS 209 PReQUEIICY NZ Camia 132 135 136 137 PO la aB AA ARA AnAB AA STTTS 187 FIRS NOE 26s20020 nesnewess sec 40 SECOND BAR c55 5A ABABAKAAAAKAKA NG 40 Hi el AA AA 13 Pakana BADA AA BAN AAAANAHABAA BARAS 51 AA PP 187 PU EE EERE EE EEEEEEELEEEEEENL 40 DAL aaa 108 G Gain 106 132 135 136 137 Gate cc aaa 43 95 Gender 132 133 134 135 NOON Urs crece casesaseusess NA 45 GENE des ceeeceewe 36 38 114 118 140 Style AA 86 GE Waves ceseeeeeeeeeaxes 85 116 187 ION AA 223 Mj ACE APAPAP PA PAA 169 196 TranSpOS 2 eee eee 59 GM2 REVeIO ion hahahahha 98 H Half Bar aaa 63 67 69 KEI PPRPPPPPEPESE 97 102 109 129 HARD samo a heh LA LLALIha ALL handa a5 AONE Dale eescrcececseeeseeecss 33 Harmonist a 42 115 FX LINK oo eee ee eee 108 Harmony aa 76 107 ASAN PP PP PEP PP PEP PP PEPE 44 47 135 OnOff nananana naaa 68 70 AA 217 Kae AA 60 HIGHER ccunenneanusaueuss 162 163 192 MORE Sl snancananananaeaacaceseaeeus 48 Alaala 199 PALI
202. L SOURCE SOURCE AUDIO IN sockets to which you AUDIOIN can connect an external instrument sound module or a CD MD player These RCA phono sockets accept 10dBu line level signals i e you cannot con nect a microphone here The balance of the audio signals can be set with the knob on the front panel The signals received via the AUDIO IN sockets can be enhanced by means of a separate effects processor 1 Press the button O EFFECTS 3 Uu uu gt KY sen 85 z REVERE CHORUS Cc df o Mrx MP PART oN EDIT ASSIGN On this page you can switch the AUDIO EFFECTS pro cessor on and off by pressing the button icon to the right of its display If you only want to select another effect type press the IFX display and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select it If you also need to change certain aspects of that effect 2 Press the AUDIO EFFECTS field to access the IFX parameters T O4 3 4 5 The display changes to gt REVERB SEND CHORUS SEND a omS 16 CONPRESSOR Press the or OFF field to switch the proces sor on icon lights or off icon goes dark You can also do so on the EFFECTS page see above Press the field below IFX that displays the name of the currently selected type Select the desired type with the dial or the DECJ INC buttons The available types are 1 Thru 31 DST Hanger 61 Band Chorus 2 Stereo
203. Level of the overtones generated by the enhancer EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Level 0 127 Output level Use this parameter to com pensate for exaggerated level differences resulting from the settings you made 8 Auto Wah This effect controls a filter to create cyclic change in timbre an automatic wah effect Auto Wah Filter Type LPF BPF Type of filter LPF the wah effect is applied over a wide frequency range BPF the wah effect is applied over a narrow frequency range Auto Wah Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modula tion speed 2 29 G 70 Music Workstation Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters Auto Wah Depth 04127 Modulation intensity Auto Wah Sens 0 127 Adjusts the sensitivity with which the filter is controlled Auto Wah Manual 0 127 Adjusts the center fre quency at which the effect is applied Auto Wah Peak 0 127 Adjusts the amount of the wah effect that will occur in the range of the center frequency Set a higher value to narrow the range to be affected Level 0 127 Output level Use this parameter to com pensate for exaggerated level differences resulting from the settings you made 9 Rotary This effect simulates the sound of the rotary speakers often used with the electric organs Since the movement of the high range and low range rotors can be set independently th
204. Music Style Variation i e to go from MAIN 4 to 3 This time however no Fill In is played before the next Variation starts You can use this function up to three times to jump to the simplest level Variation 1 Intro The Aftertouch can be used to select the INTRO pattern of the active Music Style This selects the Intro of the currently active Variation level 1 4 Ending The Aftertouch can be used to select the END ING pattern of the active Music Style This selects the Ending phrase of the currently active Variation level 1 4 5 Press the button to return to the main page si ASSIGN SW buttons The ASSIGN SW buttons 1 and 2 allow you to quickly access a function you would normally have to select via the display which may involve several steps At first ASSIGN SW 1 is used to start a Fade In while ASSIGN SW 2 starts a Fade Out See page 138 for details FADE FADE f IN OUT As Holding 1 or 2 down for more than a second takes you to a display page where you can assign other func tions to these buttons The ASSIGN SW functions can be written to a User Program PARIY SONY ULE y SWITCHES ASSIGN 1 2 The display of the button you pressed and held already lights To assign a function to the other button press its display Use the dial or the DEC INC but tons to select one of the following functions Off The ASSIGN SW button in questi
205. N 1 4 Press a ONE TOUCH button There are four One Touch memories per Music Style for the 285 internal Styles and 120 CUSTOM memo ries Select a Music Style page 27 and start Arranger playback see p 74 Play a melody to the accompaniment You will notice that the sound of the UP1 or any other Keyboard part matches the style and mood of the selected Music Style Select a different Music Style and again play a solo line the active Keyboard part now uses a different sound Press another ONE TOUCH button 6 Press the same button again if you no longer need the One Touch setting As you see the One Touch memories apply to all Key board parts which is not the case on older Roland instruments Note If a One Touch memory is being used while you recall a User Program the One Touch function is switched off Wif you select a One Touch memory while another one is already active In that case the G 70 immediately selects of the set tings of that memory and thus changes the G 70 s registration etc Ignoring certain One Touch settings Hold The G 70 provides several HOLD options that act as filters for the functions supported by the One Touch facility 1 Press and hold a ONE TOUCH 1 4 button The display changes to Ca Cem Gar Gee ONE TOUCH HOLD sx onon sc any ome 2 Press the field corresponding to the settings that should not be loaded when you select another One Tou
206. NDER MODULATION lever SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE SysEx messages of the MASTER track 1 8 17 Select a the desired sound for your new track 18 Select the bar where playback and or recording Should start e Press the RECORDER button to return to the beginning of the song measure 1 or e Use the RECORDER gt or button to select a measure slightly ahead of where you want to start recording if the and but ton icons are off 19 Press the button or play the first notes if you selected COUNT IN Wait Note Note The Play Stop function can also be assigned to the D Beam controller or an optional footswitch see Start Stop Song on p 65 Play Stop Song on p 68 Play Stop on p 69 157 G 70 Music Workstation Using the 16 track sequencer 20 Play the new part i 21 Press the RECORDER button to Example 2 Adding tracks stop recording Here s how to add a track to a song in the G 70 s Song RAM memory This is only meaningful after recording a song using the Recorder or after playing back a song on disk See page 155 for how to start a new song Though the following may seem confusing at first you will find very quickly that the 16 track Sequencer uses a very logical structure Please bear with us and per form all indicated steps to get a feel for the way the 16 track Sequencer ticks Besides what you learn here will also come in handy for recording your own Music Styles Note See a
207. NDER MODULATION lever you can change the pitch modify the volume intensify the modulation etc In the G 70 s case however you can also control the Arranger and even the Vocal Harmonist Aftertouch data are only received by the following parts Upper 1 2 3 Lower 1 2 and the Arranger 1 Press the button The display changes to i MENYU Ria FOOT VA TUNING Vege CONTROLLERS TA a YOCAL ad HARMONIST N ARRANGER amp SETTING ie STYLE uy COMPOSER FUNCTION ig UTILITY SPLIT amp TOUCH i i a FE TONE EDIT Ao HAND bd CONTROLLERS lt lt USB DATA 7 STORAGE 2 Press the field followed by the field SALA TOUGH iton JJ TYPE Pitch Up SPLIT PONT PA IKEYBOARD 5Prions RTS O Ceaune lp Modulation a 7 A 3 Press the field of the part whose Aftertouch response you want to change it lights 4 Press the field that corresponds to the function or parameter that should be influenced by the After touch Note Aftertouch only works in one direction i e it generates either positive or negative values Off The part in question does not respond to After touch messages G 70 Music Workstation Using the performance functions Filter Up The cutoff frequency of the Tone assigned to the selected part can be raised so that the sound becomes brighter Note Dep
208. NE 6 cece eevee kha as 41 On Off 00 cece eee cease 65 Accompaniment 005 25 74 ACV csaaysanananannaqananennss 199 200 Adaptive Chord Voicing 200 PDD sanqaasauananaseasnaeasasaaeane 74 ADrum On Off 2200000ee 65 ATCHOUGH sacaunuaewsaanaeooeonncat 61 Arranger control 75 paaa a aanaDADAUBADAAAUBADDDAD AAO 41 HLE eeren 209 Alphabetic Order 37 87 115 141 PCPA GI AA 81 Intro Ending APAPAP 81 Mode 0 0 000 199 200 PE rea tee 73 APEJO NAA 66 NG aaa santa eee ae 80 Arr M BaSS 00G NALANG 69 BUO aaa ka kakatok kak EEEE 25 CHORD Oi CE PEP PREP PP PEP PAA 67 Hold 0 eee ee eee 63 AR RANG cece ceveceueeeunteeseene 62 Arranger a YA 24 52 74 ANETOU eee ceueecuuere atin ihe 75 Ca aaaasananaeaanneenanaeaccas 80 VOU ox cox E E E EEEE EEA 63 80 ODUONS a2cnnagagagaaaaananaqeseH 82 Parts cece cee eee eee 74 HP TCMIDOnaaaae4eneenannaueeoes 63 SING PEER PAYAPA 25 POW hee 30 32 PRIS e asec seston cea aan ccavg non marae 36 38 PRS SION AA 44 47 DI EEEE 62 Asterisk 0 0 113 215 ALLICK c0 pak AA nanana 94 106 127 Audio AA 104 AUO eseese EAE 140 AA AA 82 GA 26 65 MG MAAGA PERERE PA PA PAPA PAA 44 Harmony ASSIGN a 47 Naawa aaa 46 107 133 SA 217 TUNE taeprtcagecesdaccaadcoudace 107 B DACKOOUNG sawaan AKA REEF KA SR 50 Backup 0 cece eee eee eee eee 213 SEE CA 28 Keyboard parts 00 95 Song M
209. NG FUNCTION TONE EDIT HAND ec USBDATA Pa CONTROLLERS STORAGE 2 Press the UTILITY then the field UTILITY PLAYER Z KEYBOARD UPPER1 MF LINK 3 Press the field to switch it on if the G 70 should choose a suitable MFX type for each Tone you assign to the UP1 part or off if you do not want the MFX to change automatically 4 Press the button to return to the main page G 70 Music Workstation Roland Effects for songs and Styles Effects for songs and Styles The Arranger and Recorder 16 track Sequencer share the same effects processors which is not problem because Style playback is impossible while a song is running and vice versa When you start playback of a song or Music Style the Recorder or Arranger sends SysEx data to the two pro cessors thus reconfiguring within a split second Here is how to select different effects for the selected song or Music Style 1 Press the button ERECT S CHORUS TE O of 4 J MAS RING ele gt If EQUALIZER COMPRESSOR LTE T E _ e 3 lt IDIC N PAR ODU PU 7 DIRE man AP ia oe ll The effects to look out for are in the STYLE SONG EFFECTS row On this page you can switch the REVERB and or CHORUS processor off by pressing the but ton icon to the right of its display If you only need to select another effect type press the REVERB or CHORUS display and use the dial or
210. O MUTE ADRUMS dJ 4 POP1 ABASS J BAS DE G 70 Music Workstation Roland Editing on the fly by recording The display changes to Cool Live Band meas 0001 1 J 92 4 4 enaz 7 197 oe T FU SOLO MUTE r ADRUMS ABASS CHORUS SEND 3 Select the track by pressing its line in the table The name of that track appears on a yellow back ground 4 Select the MODE and DIVISION whose settings you want to change 5 Press the field of the parameters whose set tings you want to record Only switch this on for settings you want to change For safety reasons you might consider recording one change at a time 6 Press the EXPRESSION PANPOT REVERB SEND or CHORUS SEND field depending on the parameter you want to set 7 Use the dial or the DEC INC but tons to set the desired value The REVERB SEND and CHORUS SEND settings repre sent Send values and indicate how strongly the track in question should be processed by the reverb or cho rus effect The effect settings Type Character etc can only be saved to a User Program You can create interesting panning effects by slowly shifting the selected track from left to right or vice versa in the course of a pattern This is especially effective for synthesizer or guitar riffs Continuous changes mean that you have to keep recording until the end of the pattern 8 Press the RECORDER button 9 Press the button to start recording
211. ODY INTELL part page 76 so that the automatic harmonies are only added when you really want to hear them 5 Press the button to return to the main page Master Tune This is not really a performance function but it allows you to tune your G 70 to acoustic instruments that cannot be tuned 1 Press the button The display changes to MENU TYL h 5 F i jv YOCAL SPLIT TOUCH bbe A ARRANGER 4 STYLE SETTING ly COMPOSER FUNCTION tay UTILITY PRAN TONE EDIT Z USB DATA STORAGE HAND i E CONTROLLERS f i 0 mm 2 Press the field followed by the field IRONING 4 SINGER SCALE Jef Fine 4400 Hz j 3 Use the dial to set the desired tun ing The default value is 440 0 You can return to this value by pressing the field 4 Press the button to return to the main page See page 59 for the Global Transpose parameter GLOBAL TRANSPOSE ri G 70 Music Workstation Roland Master Tune Aftertouch The G 70 is equipped with an Aftertouch sensitive key board Like most instruments supporting Aftertouch it generates channel Aftertouch messages which means that one Aftertouch value will be transmitted by each MIDI channel or part Aftertouch is generated when you press a key even fur ther down after playing a note The effect obtained is usually similar to the one you can achieve with the BE
212. ON aasaran ak 26 DOWN ee eee 62 MA 62 VB di AA 128 Pan NAA 128 KG AA es 128 a oe PAA 127 Drum Instrument 128 Melody Wilelliicuncuus ssencuennceds 76 MIDI aa 219 RX TX 0 cece cece e ee eeeees 219 SENSITIV Y 2 waa kaaa Ka beads 60 DONG kanaananananananuna naga mnga 167 AAP AO 195 a AA 224 Vibrato eee eee eee 35 45 93 POO PWG a ccaea araracarararara ary eee 133 SIME s ddo466eeeeeeeeeeeceuas 45 131 VOICES Na codec eee eeeeeg eased LA 132 NIG CO ANA 50 Mia RE 64 ABE KATAGA TALATA LALALALA ee ee 33 V LINK 0 eee 219 222 VOCAL EFFEC 0020 NA KAHA E KAWAN 43 Vocal Harmonist lt c lt 2220cc2eee06 42 107 a AP NP 131 HAKA 108 FING a4 42445044 SAAS TTEN 115 Vocoder 00 eee aee 46 107 134 OP PP PP PNP 43 107 PAK eee ene BEBE 45 107 132 ipo P PE AA 45 VOIE 4 ae ose see 25 127 Drum Instrument 128 KNOb 0 ee ee eee eee 21 28 Makeup Tools aaa aaa 124 Heb PP 218 WIXElis s eveeeeeweeweeeeeweeeeenes 95 PEC dl AA 70 SGI nueva eenaeenreeenneeanwes 135 SONIC 455 Asa R AA AA AA AA AA AA AA NAA 129 Song WMakeUGect2cccccccccnncaces 124 Style Ll cece cece ee eeeeeeeeees 129 Style MIDI 0 aa 218 ae AA 134 W Wait Note anaana 183 Wall OC PPPFPPET EP PE 109 Wave expansion 22 WAOE a nn NA ABA 28 57 67 80 WdE ite anata daasnaw nee ea eens 49 Write E NADAAN NANANA NANA 139 WIDVSOls os cae A GEN KAKA RARE NGG KA 220 One LOU KABAN ANNA
213. OUCH a d Sow Cano PARTS Z TYPE Fill Up Variation Down Fill Fill Down Gn Back Note Selecting ARRANG does not cancel the Aftertouch set tings you may have made for the Keyboard parts Note Even Aftertouch messages generated outside the chord recognition area see below will trigger the selected switching function Off The Arranger does not respond to Aftertouch mes sages Fill Up Triggers the Fill In that takes you to the next Variation i e from MAIN 1 to 2 You can use this function up to three times to jump to the most complex level Variation 4 If you then use the Aftertouch again however nothing happens You cannot cycle back to the lowest level Variation 1 Fill Remain This also starts a Fill In but does not switch to another MAIN pattern G2 Fill Down Triggers the Fill In that takes you to the pre vious Variation i e from MAIN 2 to 1 You can use this function up to three times to jump to the simplest level Variation 1 If you then use the Aftertouch again however nothing happens You thus cannot cycle back to the highest level Variation 4 Variation Up You can cause the Arranger to select the next Music Style Variation i e to go from MAIN 1 to 2 You can use this function up to three times to jump to the most complex level Variation 4 Variation Down You can cause the Arranger to select the preceding
214. One Touch memory There are four memories per internal Music Style and the 120 Link memories They work a lot like the User Programs because they assign dif ferent sounds and effects settings to the Keyboards parts and carry out some other changes See page 78 TRANSPOSE section These buttons allow you to transpose the G 70 up or down b in semitone steps You can also specify which parts are to be transposed page 58 If neither button lights no manual transposition is used TONE EFFECTS section Press the button to add a different effect to the Keyboard parts page 100 This processor is also available for the D Beam and the MELODY INTELL parts Press the button so that it lights to add an automatic counter melody second and third voice to your solos or melodies see p 76 1G ONE TOUCH 1 2 3 4 The button is only available after you install an optional wave expansion board into the G 70 Note SRX sounds can be assigned to the following Keyboard parts UP1 2 3 LW1 2 and MBS Press the button to activate the Harmonic Bar section whose sound can be set using the assignable sliders 0 that double as virtual drawbars 2 TRANSPOSE TONE EFFECTS MULTI MELODY 4b o FX INTELL cance G2 V LINK button Press this button to take advantage of the G 70 s V LINK functionality for controlling video material via certain performance functions and the right most keys on the G 70 s
215. P SP RND Type of record noise The frequency at which the noise is heard depends on the selected type Disc Noise LPF 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter applied to the record noise If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Disc Noise Level 0 127 Volume of the record noise Hum Noise Type 50Hz 60Hz Frequency of the hum noise Hum Noise LPF 200 8000Hz Bypass Center frequency of the low pass filter applied to the hum noise BYPASS no cut Hum Noise Level 0 127 Volume of the hum noise EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W D0 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 77 LoFi Comp This is an effect that intentionally degrades the sound quality for creative purposes Pre Filter Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 Selects the type of filter applied to the sound before it passes through the Lo Fi effect LoFi Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Degrades the sound quality The sound quality grows poorer as this value is increased Post Filter Type OFF LPF HPF Type of filter OFF no fil ter is used LPF cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff value HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff value Post Filter Cutoff 200 80
216. PPERT Orchestra St Slow Str_ JP8 StringsB Harp x Violin St Pizzicato Warm Strings 5 Str Choir OrchestraHit PAGES PAGES Entries with an icon to the right of their name are sounds that reside on the SRX series expansion board you installed Their names are automatically assigned to the correct families and displayed on the last page of the selected family Press the field of the desired sound If you don t like it press another field The last sound you select in each family is memorized temporarily and will be recalled every time you press the corresponding TONE button That selection can then be changed by pressing another field If you are still not happy with the Tone use the PAGE 1 PAGE 5 and fields to select the cor responding page if available 3 O 5 6 The field is only displayed if there are more than five pages Other Tone families have fewer than five pages This depends entirely on the Tone family you select Press the field of the desired sound Press the button to return to the main page Next time you select this TONE family the G 70 automatically jumps to the page that contains the last sound you selected and activates it About the G 70 s sounds Try playing the Tones you select at different velocities strengths to discover the rich nuances that can be obtained See page 60 for details about how to set the velocity sensitivity There is a J
217. Pitch Down By moving your hand over the D Beam you can generate a value between 64 no Pitch Bend and O maximum downward bend As soon as you move your hand outside the D Beam s reach the value returns to 64 no Pitch Bend D Modulation Select this function if you want the D Beam to duplicate the modulation function of the Bender Modulation lever Cut amp Reso Up Only for Upper1 2 and or 3 By moving your hand over the D Beam you can vary the current TVF Cutoff value see also p 127 of the Upper1 2 3 part The Resonance parameter will be set to 63 maximum while the Cutoff frequency can be controlled between O no change and 63 maximum increase This allows you to create some nifty filter effects that are particularly useful for Dance Techno music When you move your hand outside the D Beam s range both Reso nance and IVF Cutoff return to their original values O no change Note If TVF Cutoff is already set to 63 you cannot increase it using the D Beam Controller In that case the fol lowing option is probably more useful Also note that some Tones already use the highest possible TVF Cutoff value by default in which case you cannot add more overtones by opening the filter even further Cut amp Reso Down Only for Upper1 2 and or 3 By moving your hand over the D Beam you can vary the current TVF Cutoff value see also p 127 of the Upper1 2 3 part The Resonance param
218. Press the SONG LINK field SUSE Ul Song Name FIRSTDAY Agho 390 BO FileName FIRSTDAY Era C 1G If the User Program already contains a link to another song which you no longer need press the field This is not necessary to establish a new link it is meant to cancel a link 3 Press MAKE NEW SONG LINK The display changes to SONG LIST Ora Br a Orm E DONTTELL IDONTTELL M SZ FEVER iFEVER MID TE IFIRSTDAY MID FORCA FORCA MID NEL FRIDAYNI FRIDAYNI MID 46 FLY Note Songs that also contain lyrics information are flagged by means of an JH icon The note a means that the file in question also contains Play amp Search information See Locating files with the Song Finder on p 140 Bear in mind that the song data are not loaded into the User Program memory 4 Press the field of the song you want to link to the currently selected User Program 5 Press the field to establish the link to the song whose name appears on an orange back ground This takes you back to the User Program page The selection field now contains a small SONG message On the main page User Programs with a link to a song are indicated by means of a paper clip icon Linking a MIDI Set to a User Program MIDI Sets are User Programs for MIDI parameters There are eight such memories page 220 If you regularly use the G 70 in diff
219. Program to which the Music Assistant entry is referring The User Program can be selected via the User Program Finder if you like Even though the display page is very similar to the RENAME page see above it thus serves an altogether different purpose This is useful for the following suppose you started out with a Music Assistant registration and then switched on the UP2 part changed the mixer settings and selected a different Music Style If you like the new ver sion better than the previous one you will probably want to keep your new version Hence the SAVE func tion 1 On the MUSIC ASSISTANT LIST page press the SAVE field MUMGASSISTANIIAVE oe U a ETET EPE PE KI ra as Baa G 70 Music Workstation Roland Music Assistant functions 2 Press the NAME or field and enter the desired characters See Entering names on p 49 The field allows you to switch between uppercase and lowercase characters 3 Enter names for the remaining button icons if you like 4 Press the field to save settings If you are saving your Music Assistant registration under a new name the operation is confirmed Completed and the G 70 returns to the MUSIC ASSISTANT LIST page A new User Program is created along with your Music Assistant registration If the Music Assistant database already contains a registration entry of the name displayed for NAME the following warning appears POSTE ASSIA SMe U f Same f
220. REWEGO MI 5 Locate the song you wish to assign to the inserted step e If it is already displayed continue with step 6 below e f it is not yet displayed use the PAGE fields in the lower right of the display to change pages e You can also use the following fields for narrowing down your search if you are overwhelmed by the number of songs and pages you need to scroll and FINDER See page 140 6 Select the song you wish to assign by pressing its field so that it is displayed in orange 7 Press the field W Editing a step You can also decide to assign another song to a step than the one you have been using up to now To do so press the field of the step that needs correcting press and continue with step 5 above W Deleting steps On the PLAY LIST EDIT page see left select the step you wish to delete and press the field All subsequent steps now move up one entry Exam ple if you delete step 04 of a list that contains 10 steps step 05 becomes 04 step 06 becomes 05 etc G 70 Music Workstation Roland Play List function 8 Press the field to save your edited chain Cia da eed pore If the new Play List has the same name as an existing one the following message appears PLAY LISIISAVE pana EXTERNAL INTERNAL Saturday Live MEMORY MEMORY Same file on disk rie Press to replace the old file with your new ver sion Press if you want t
221. RIATION 1 4 buttons to activate the End ing function The Ending or coda pattern will start at the beginning of the next measure next down beat Note Do not play chord changes while the Ending is running Unlike the MAIN accompaniments Ending patterns usually contain chord changes Chord recognition is not deactivated during Intro or Ending playback so that the ending of a song may jump from one key to another in a rather unnatural way This recognition can be switched off however so that you do not have to worry about it see p 81 _OR Press SYNC and release all keys in the chord recognition area of the keyboard The accompani ment stops immediately There is no need to restart Style playback manually if you also activate SYNC see above Note You can also use a Fade Out See page 138 for details About Sync Start amp Stop If you ve never used an arranger keyboard before the status of the SYNC button is the single most important function to look out for after switching on your instrument If it is on playing just one note on the keyboard may cause the Arranger to start playing when you don t want it to STYLE CONTROL BASS S INTRO MAIN END RIT INVERSION START STOP OO BO O pE VARIATION Once you get to know the G 70 a little better you will appreciate this function though SYNC START means that the Arranger starts as soon as you play a note or chord in the chord recognition are
222. RO MAIN END RIT INVERSION START STOP ibi aa a AUTO FILL IN START STOP The fill in that is played between the current and the next VARIATION pattern depends on where you come from Each transition from one VARIATION pattern to another e g from 1 to 2 is different from the others from 2 to B from 3 to 4 and from 4 to 1 There are three Fill Ins for the upward direction called Up by the Style Composer and three for downward moves Dw Note You can also press in the middle of a performance In that case the indicator flashes until the end of the current bar and then lights on the next downbeat to indicate that the Arranger is playing the introductory pattern Other ways of selecting Arranger patterns You can also switch among Music Style patterns using the keyboard s aftertouch function the ASSIGN SW buttons or a footswitch Here are the pattern selection functions you can assign Aftertouch Fill Up Fill Down Fill Remain Variation Up Variation Down Intro Ending page 61 ASSIGN SW Half Bar on Fill In page 63 D Beam Fill Up Fill Down page 65 FC 7 PEDAL Start Stop Intro Variat 1 Variat 2 Variat 3 Variat 4 Ending page 67 Foot Switch Intro Ending Variat 1 4 Half Bar on Fill In page 69 Note Even aftertouch messages generated outside the chord recognition area see p 80 trigger the selected switching func tion Bass Inversion The Bass Inversion function allows yo
223. Roland is 4 L MUSIC WORKSTATION Owner s Manual WARNING To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock do not expose this device to rain or moisture CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN kh A ATTENTION RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral tri angle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to per sons The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to f i alert the user to the presence of important operating and mainte nance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the product INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS WARNING When using electric products basic precautions should always be followed including the following eae ye Read these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instructions Do not use this apparatus near water Clean only with a dry cloth Do not block any of the ventilation openings Install in accor dance with the manuf
224. Rotary effect This effect simulates the typical sound modu lation generated by a cabinet with rotating loud speakers You can also push the BENDER MODULA TION lever towards the rear of the G 70 to change between the SLOW and FAST speeds of the Rotary effect Or press the lever icon to alternate between the SLOW and FAST rotation speeds Note The on off function and alternation between the slow and fast rotation speeds can be assigned to an ASSIGN SW button see p 62 and or to a footswitch see p 67 VIBRATO CHORUS The vibrato effect cyclically mod ulates the pitch of organ sounds which is not the same as the Rotary effect The chorus effect mixes the normal sound of the organ with a sound to which vibrato has been applied adding richness and spa clousness to the sound Press the field to switch this effect on or off To select another effect press the display icon and rotate the dial or use the DEC buttons The possibilities are V 1 V 2 V 3 This applies vibrato pitch modulation Increasing the value will produce a deeper effect C 1 C 2 C 3 This applies chorus to add depth and Spaciousness to the sound Increasing the value will pro duce a deeper effect 2 Press the field to return to HAR MONIC BARS page Using a beat box with the organ The only thing that may be missing now is a drum accompaniment Whenever you press the EASY SETTING button the G 70 s chord recognition is auto
225. S UNAY EN AA Caug C aug Daug Eb aug Eaug Faug ALTELE EELAM Laro LTT LA APA PERLE EELEE a Csus4 C sus4 Dsus4 Eb sus4 Esus4 Fsus4 sre EEE AA ON ECU SET UA ATON LELEM PH area C7sus4 C 7sus4 D7sus4 Eb 7sus4 E7sus4 F7sus4 TLEN EME AN Te eT E TET C7 13 C 7 13 D7 13 Eb 7 13 E7 13 F7 13 AEEA ETT ET AAHON EPEAT CST O NI 251 G 70 Music Workstation Appendix Chord Intelligence BAAS mo aw F m7 b5 Gm7 b5 Abm7 b5 Am7 Bb m7 b5 Bm7 b5 PO n BET CET CPE F aug Gaug Abaug Aaug Bb aug Baug AYIEL LEELEE LOAN AYA RETEST LOAN EE LEE EEIN F sus4 Gsus4 Absus4 Asus4 Bb sus4 Bsus4 PETITE LOAN AP Cm Ar CUT PREIS PAO ANA F 7sus4 G7sus4 Ab7sus4 A7sus4 Bb 7sus4 B7sus4 ETEEN N PATAY AY EEE ae ee E ETN F 7 13 G7 13 Ab7 13 A7 13 Bb 7 13 B7 13 CLIPS EY LLANA ATAT ANA AN AAO UA IA Index Numerics 1 Ch Limit a 219 1 STAFF a 51 1 2 Bar 73 1 2 MeaS 0 ccc cece cece cece eee 183 16 track Sequencer 53 154 1st Channel RX 2 ma 64 45 444444eeuws 219 PAGA APAPAP 219 2 STAVES cucu nee cannnvnnannnnnnienes 51 2nd Channel Rx 0 0005 219 TWiisennnsiienranneeneenerronrnrni 184 A SALE ee PAPA 75 OVO oe PP APP PPPPP AAP PEREDP 65 nee kaaa nRRARRRRRRRRRRAAAAAG 55 160 AD oye ANAN ARNAN eee ee 74 75 ABs amp ADr On Off 20005 65 Absolute ee 219 ACU es 67 O eo 5G BALAG eee c cree AA AA 74 ACG cunnsannpaanaaannnanaaanaanaare 82 Acc amp ABs On Off 22200000e 65 Accomp MINUS O
226. SS field so that it lights in blue 11 If you also want to use the gate press the field it must light in blue 12 Press the parameter field whose value you want to edit and set the desired value with the DATA ENTRY dial Note Parameter fields can also be selected using the DATA ENTRY lt gt a buttons It is very important that you keep singing while set ting the following parameters SUSTAIN LEV Use this parameter to specify how fast the compressor stops working once the microphone level drops below the compressor s threshold This Should be set in such a way as to avoid unpleasant level jumps between notes Set it in combination with the following parameter to obtain the best possible result OUTPUT LEV The compressor reduces the dynamics level differences of your singing This parameter serves two purposes it allows you to specify how strongly your voice should be compressed and as you increase the value it raises the compressor s output volume to make up for the resulting lower level Note The value 0 means that the compressor is not working THRESHOLD This parameter allows you to set the level the microphone signal must have in order to be audible Softer signals will be muted suppressed by the gate 13 Press the field to jump to a page where you can select different presets etc see below 14 Press the button to return to the main page 43 G 70 Music Workstation Qu
227. Style If you like you can now try out the remaining three Intro patterns by pressing and 1 4 The number refers to the degree of complexity Note Do not play while the Intro is running Most Intro pat button terns indeed contain chord changes so that playing different chords may lead to highly annoying results AUTO FILL IN START STOP con A 4 Press a VARIATION 1 4 button to select another MAIN pattern The button and the selected VARIATION 1 4 button flash What happens now depends on when you press this ee 2 6G During Arranger playback the button flashes red on the downbeat and green on the remaining beats of the bars to indicate the tempo While the Arranger is stopped this visual tempo indication is provided by the button that only flashes in red though 5 Press one of the VARIATION 1 4 buttons to select the pattern that should be played after the Intro is finished the button flashes By pressing at this stage you leave the Intro pattern on the next downbeat i e before the Intro phrase is finished 6 Wait until the selected MAIN pattern is playing then press the button STYLE CONTROL BASS SY a INTRO MAIN END RIT INVERSION START STOP AUTO FILL IN START STOP At the end of the current pattern cycle the Arranger Starts playing the Ending pattern and then stops Again there are four Ending phrases to choose from If you don t press a numeric bu
228. TONE EDIT settings can be saved to a User Program 1 Press the button The display changes to FOOT VA TUNING gt CONTROLLERS Ra OCAL SPLIT amp TOUCH n gt HARMONIST ma ARRANGER T STYLE x SETTING ee COMPOSER PF FUNCTION PN UTILITY lt lt USB DATA STORAGE ii PAG Tone epit HAND CONTROLLERS 2 Press the field ci_ KC VIBRATO DEPTH _TVF T A ENY YF ATTACK DECAY RELEASE RESO CUT ese EE i THREE 3 Press the field of the Keyboard part you wish to edit Note Rather than performing steps 1 3 you could also press and hold the corresponding TONE ASSIGN button RATE 4 To quickly reset all parameters press the field 5 To reset only the selected parameter press the field 6 To edit one of the displayed parameters press its field Its display is now surrounded by a red frame G 70 Music Workstation Roland Tone Edit editing Keyboard parts 7 Set the desired value with the dial or the DECJ INC buttons You can also use the assignable sliders below the display to directly edit the parameters above them Here are the parameters you can edit C1 The function of this parameter depends on the sound you assigned to the selected part It may influence the filter and resonance setting switch between the organ sample with the fast and slow Rotary modula tion see the TONE bank etc Here s an example select the
229. The Play List function is only available for songs on memory card only one such card at a time and in the internal memory You may therefore have to copy all desired songs to that area before proceeding See page 208 for details Press the button The display looks more or less as follows The names refer to Play Lists already available in the selected memory area Specify the memory area you want to work with Or INTERNAL MEMORY Note This is your last chance to select the memory area Be aware that all songs you wish to assign to a Play List must reside in the selected memory area Play Lists can only access the memory area where they are saved Press the field in the upper right cor ner You have just created a new Play List which is still empty and therefore looks like this PILAY CS Soy EXTERNAL INTERNAL MEMORY MEMORY Play Lists consist of steps up to 99 to which you can assign one song each Press the field or the dial to jump to the SONG LIST page 145 G 70 Music Workstation More refined song functions The display looks more or less as follows an T on yg Ng LL a 7 HEREWEGO 5 Locate the song you wish to assign to step 01 e f it is already displayed continue with step 6 below e f it is not yet displayed use the PAGE fields in the lower right of the display to change pages You can also use the dial or the DEC INC buttons You can also use t
230. The sequencer now counts in one measure after which recording starts Note See page 73 for setting the Count In function 10 Play the new part 11 Press the RECORDER button to stop recording RASS 1 m MA JALTO a NO jdjvAz2 ile Bot KO cea BN 1 16 IPiano1 The track that contains your new part is highlighted left column for easy identification It also contains a horizontal bar to signal that it is no longer empty 12 Listen to your song page 52 If you like it save it if you re not happy with your part go back to Adding more parts on p 53 In step 3 press the field and use the dial or the DECJ INC buttons to select Replace if that option is not yet selected Note See p 160 if you want to change just single notes or other aspects of your song which is called editing Saving your song A song you save to becomes a Standard MIDI File that can be played back with the G 70 but also with any other SMF compatible sequencer There are two ways of saving new or edited songs e Via the button and the related menu see p 204 e By pressing the field on the 16 track page Note Whenever you leave the 16 track Sequencer page by pressing the button the display shows a Song has been changed message that asks you whether you want to save your changes Press the field and proceed Here we will show you how to save your song using the field 1
231. X UPPER wer2 Pad With Vintage EP1 PERS Scat See Using Play Lists on p 148 for how work with your list If you need to return to the Play List either press the PLAY LIST field in the upper left corner or press and hold the button Editing Play Lists If while programming or using a Play List you notice that one song is missing from the list or if you decide not to use a given song after all you need to edit your Play List Steps 1 3 below are only necessary if you want to edit a different chain than the one you have just programmed 1 Press and hold the RECORDER button to jump to the PLAY LIST page 2 Press the field of the chain you wish to edit Depending on the number of lists already present in the selected memory area you may have to use the scroll bar or dial or the DECJ INC buttons Saturday Live 3 Press the field or the dial ALE EIS Sul Ayan GTA aa EXTERNAL SORRYSEE HEYMAMA SWEETPOT MISREAD ISITCOSI LADY LOVEISON 4 Proceed as follows to edit your Play List Winserting Chain steps To add a step and assign a song to it select the step that should follow it then press the field Example to insert a step before step 04 press the field This takes you to the following display page SONG LIST sence RB on ae J NG en T Tag hl FEER O O oO ce E A FIRSTDAY FIRSTDAY MID FORCA iFORCA MID fu FRIDAYNI FRIDAYNI MID JE HEREWEGO IHE
232. X and RX channel numbers for a part Note Assigning the same channel to two or more parts is usu ally not a very good idea BI LOCAL This is where you can disconnect the part from the internal sound source Off or re establish that connection On You can also change the LOCAL setting of all parts simultaneously using MODE Local On Local Off on the first MIDI page which is a lot faster 21G MESHIFT 48 48 This parameter allows you to transpose the note messages before they are transmitted to an external MIDI instrument or computer The maximum possible transposition is four octaves up 48 or down 48 Each step represents a semi tone TX EVENT FILTER The TX section provides a number of filters that allow you to specify whether the messages in question should be transmitted ON or not OFF Press the field to open the fol lowing pop up window f erir i f 4 cone f _ i TX FILTER EVENT PROGRAM f f f F 7 F F NONEX Hr Press the field to switch all filters on those messages are no longer transmitted Press to switch all filters off Press to return to the page where you came from PROGRAM CHANGE Program Change and Bank Select CC00 CC32 messages These messages are used to select Tones and Drum Sets as well as User Programs see below Bank Select messages are control change messages which were added when it became clear that the number of sounds
233. Y oemy e Os 77941070 Pw MKS Adding Lyrics to a song Here s a step by step tour of how to add Lyrics data to a Standard MIDI File 1 Prepare the text file with the lyrics you wish to associate with a given song Use a word processor program on your computer taking care to type a return after every line or word you wish to synchronize separately The synchroniza tion function see below always works with entire lines of text i e until the following return In any case no line should contain more than 28 characters Importing a text file for Lyrics synchronization or editing Lyrics data is only possible while song play back is stopped If you forget to stop playback by EXTERNAL A MEMORY 2 Export the file as TXT file and save it to a floppy disk a memory card the G 70 or transfer it to the G 70 via USB see p 211 pressing RECORDER PLASTO PEA a Can t exe 3 On the G 70 load the song you wish to add Lyrics cute Song is running error message is displayed to Now we re going to import the text file you created See Playing back songs Standard MIDI Files on earlier p 38 for details about selecting songs 6 Select the memory area that contains the text file 4 Press the button you wish to associate with the Standard MIDI File in the G 70 s RAM memory press INTERNAL MEMORY or EXTERNAL MEMORY If you press FLOPPY or EXTERNAL MEMORY insert the memory card or floppy disk with the
234. YPE is set to ALL ERASE substitutes the required number of rests for the data you delete so that you end up with the equivalent number of blank measures If you also want to eliminate the measures themselves use DELETE see below BTRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track you want to edit Select ALL to edit all tracks EMODE Allows you to select the mode of the pattern to be edited Major minor or 7th W DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division or pattern you want to edit Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 153 Fill Up 1 3 End 154 FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or pattern Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the G 70 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a bar Change this setting only if your edit operation should start after the selected beat WTO By default the TO position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 last measure of the track or pattern This is where you specify the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 number of beats p
235. a This new system is called Adaptive Chord Voicing The notes of the melodic Style tracks are compared with the chords played in the chord recognition area If the next chord you play contains the note a given part is already sounding based on the previous chord that note is main tained If the new chord does not contain that note the Style part in question uses the closest Nearest note In the exam ple above the G is closer to the A sounded by the strings part than the C This produces a more musical behavior than any other system on the market Both Degree and Nearest allow you to specify the note range Limit Low and Limit High the selected part may play Notes that would fall outside that range during Arranger playback are automatically transposed to values inside the selected range Rather than specifying two note values you can also choose Std which means that the G 70 decides automatically when extremely high or low notes need to be shifted down or up by one or several octaves Wi gig r MUMERIC PAD Em m Cl el Gite ase Co Le pa Use the pad to enter the desired duration Drum parts usually use the Gate Time value 1 for all notes Increasing it to 20 for example has no audible effect on the sounds EBE About Alteration Mode messages This message type is only available for melodic Style tracks i e not for ADrums tracks and needs to be inserted by ha
236. a of the keyboard If the EASY SETTING button lights this area is the left half of the keyboard See p 80 for details The G 70 also provides a SYNC STOP button That function causes the Arranger to stop playback as soon as you release all keys in the chord recognition area This is great for songs where you need breaks i e one or several beats of silence Note When you use ONE TOUCH to configure the G 70 SYNC is switched on Selecting other Style divisions You can professionalize your performance with the Arranger by selecting different accompaniment pat terns Here s a quick overview of how the G 70 s Music Styles are structured MAIN VARIATION The simplest of the four basic accom paniment patterns This pattern is ideal for the first verse of a song MAIN VARIATION A slightly more complex pattern Con sider using it for the second and third verses MAIN VARIATION This pattern could be used for the first chorus es MAIN VARIATION This is the most complex pattern that could be used for the final choruses and or the bridge The numeric button you press flashes until the new pattern is used after which the button lights steadily G 70 Music Workstation Roland Selecting other Style divisions You can use fill ins transitions to go from one MAIN VARIATION pattern to the next by switching on the button before pressing another or the same MAIN VARIATION 1 4 button STYLE CONTROL INT
237. a high value here RELEASE 64 63 This parameter adjusts the time over which the sound will decay after the note is released until it is no longer heard The cutoff frequency will also fall according to this setting MIVF filter By modifying the filter settings you can control the timbre tone of the sound The G 70 uses Low Pass Filters LPF that allow only frequencies below the Specified frequency to pass The frequency where the filter starts cutting off harmonics or overtones is called the Cutoff Frequency By modifying the set ting of the cutoff frequency you can make the sound brighter or darker The cutoff frequency can change over time controlled by the envelope RESO 64 63 This is a parameter one invariably associates with a synthesizer When the Resonance value is increased the overtones in the area of the cutoff fre quency will be emphasized creating a sound with a strong character Note For some sounds negative RESO settings may pro duce no noticeable change because the Resonance is already set to the minimum value CUTOFF 64 63 This filter parameter allows you to make the selected sound darker or brighter Positive Cut off settings mean that more overtones will be allowed to pass So that the sound becomes brighter The further this value is set in the negative direction the fewer over tones will be allowed to pass and the sound will become softer darker Character
238. a using Microscope Edit Select this mode whenever you need to change just one aspect of an otherwise perfect Standard MIDI File In this section we will use the word event for any kind of message identical to MIDI messages that cause the Recorder to play or set something You can only view and edit one track at a time There fore be sure to check the TRACK setting before editing the events displayed on this page 1 Select and load a different song This is not necessary if you want to edit the song you have just recorded or played back Otherwise see Working with the Song Finder on p 140 or page 38 for how to load a song 2 Press the button 16 TRACK SEQUENCER 2 d FINGERED ES 3 pd OVERDRIVE GT QUARE WAN 85 pd ALTO SAX 3 d TRUMPET NO dj vAzz i JJlunz2G 12 d PIANO 2 N13 d IMUTED GT 14 d CLEAN GT j 45 JPIanNo1 j E 16 PIANO 1 ABA KAPA 31 Reverb 11 Expression 7 volume Pitch Bend CC O Bank Select MSB Program Change Note Note Note 19 04 010 Note 69 AA 91 4 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the track you want to edit 5 Press the white field with the events to be able to select events using the dial and al v buttons G 70 Music Workstation Roland Editing song data using Microscope Edit General notes about MICRO EDIT Position indications The G 70 s sequencer translates all known mus
239. aa 4 Same file on disk i m N Overwrite l E ee eee reetje Qema e Press the field to overwrite the file This replaces the User Program in question with the new version Be aware that the new version will be used by any list that contains a reference to that file e Press the field to return to the WRITE USER PROGRAM page change the name then press EXECUTE again Note See Load User Program Set on p 204 for how to load another User Program List The data are saved and a message confirms the end of the operation Selecting User Programs Cancel For song or Style playback without any customized set tings or whenever you want to start anew you should select the Cancel User Program This allows you to leave User Program mode i e no longer work with the settings of the last User Program you may have loaded These settings can be recalled any time i e even after selecting a regular User Program Simultaneously press USER PROGRAM and UP Note Unless you specified a User Program for the Startup function page 117 you can also load the original Cancel set tings by powering off your G 70 and turning it back on again Choosing User Programs manually The procedure for selecting User Programs does not fol low the usual routine for selecting Music Styles or sounds So please carefully read the following 1 Press the field on the main page Cool Live Band gospel Love Th
240. ack you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks BI FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or song Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the G 70 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation should start after the selected beat BI FOR Specifies how many bars beats and CPTs are to be inserted BAR BEAT CPT See above MIME SIGNATURE If TRACK ALL you can use these fields to set the time signature of the new measures 1432 4 2 4 8 16 EB Execute Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data 165 G 70 Music Workstation Using the 16 track sequencer TRANSPOSE reer emanates jest kman EED Sorte Jemrerme menor Stoner crock utamwsr This function allows you to transpose the notes of the selected track non note data obviously cannot be transposed BTRACK ALL 1 16 Allows you to select the track you wish to transpose You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks When used with the o
241. acturers instructions Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat reg isters stoves or other apparatus including amplifiers that pro duce heat Do not defeat safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet 10 11 12 13 14 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched partic ularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufactur er Never use with a cart stand tripod bracket or table except as specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus When a cart is used use caution when moving the cart apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip over Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or hen unused for long periods of time Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is re quired when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normal ly or has been dropped F
242. ads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and eventually melt through G 70 Music Workstation Roland Using the unit safely WARNING e Before using the G 70 in a foreign country consult with your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an N authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Informa tion page A CAUTION e The G 70 should be located so that its location or posi tion does not interfere with its proper ventilation e This unit for use only with Roland keyboard stand KS 12 Use with other stands may result in instability and cause possible injury gt e Always grasp only the plug on the power supply cord when plugging into or unplugging from an outlet or this unit O e Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entan gled Also all cords and cables should be placed out of the reach of children gt e Never climb on top of nor place heavy objects on the unit O e Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet hands when plugging into or unplugging from an outlet or this unit B e f you need to move the instrument take note of the pre cautions listed below Make sure to have a firm grip to protect yourself from injury and the instrument from damage e Disconnect the power cord e Disconnect all cords coming from external devices e Remove the music stand e Before cleaning the unit turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the outlet
243. age by pressing MENU gt SPLIT amp TOUCH field gt SPLIT POINT field The display changes to MAIN SPLIT UPPER3 SPLIT eee edie UPPER 3 SPLIT 2 Press the field so that it lights The keyboard is split at the G5 with the UP1 and UP parts to the left orange and the UP3 part to the right blue of this second split point 9 O See p 29 for how to assign the desired sound to the UP3 part Note UP3 SPLIT only works if the UP1 or UP2 part is active It is impossible to use an Upper 3 split without using the Upper1 or Upper2 part If UP1 2 3 are off the UPPER 3 SPLIT function is not used If you don t agree with this split point G5 you can change it to any note between the F 1 and G7 Possible range for UPPER 3 SPLIT 3 Use the UPPER 3 SPLIT POINT fields to set the desired split point Note If you are satisfied with your split point you should save it to a User Program see p 111 4 Press the button to return to the main page The UPPER 3 SPLIT function can be cancelled in sev eral ways e Press the field again so that it goes dark e Switch off UP1 and or UP2 e Switch off the UP3 part Tuning Upper 2 Coarse Tune and Fine Tune The UP2 part can be used as full fledged solo or melody sound or to fatten the sound of UP1 or UP3 By layering we mean that every time you press a key in the right half of the keyboard in SPLIT mode p 57 or anywhere o
244. akeup Tools 124 Bank Select aaa 220 BASO aaa NLA 218 BASS eroaa a ra aeae Aaa d 41 74 INVErSION 0 eee eee eee 69 75 BC AA 106 KAYE PAA 106 oe AA 223 Best SClECUION lt saccecsaaasaneeeeeea 30 BIAS ceetebtenreuseeeeereeeeeeeens 195 BUGUE ou e5n000500000600804000468 109 PV OEE EEEE EET ETETETT 40 C AA 93 MIDI oo ee eee eee 216 eaa o EEEE 112 User Program 00 0a 112 COU Goo ora AA 48 0 0 4 AE 38 140 CCOO ee aaa 169 196 220 PONG a 44 rrai AAA 216 CUJ AA 169 196 220 Kaka CA AA 110 Chain aana nananana aaa 145 Change Gate Time 168 195 GA 167 195 ia APP 216 217 DAG Naa 218 CHOP AA 25 BASA 49 AGA AA 136 OG saw nea eee anes 66 80 Chord TECOQGHINION gt oocccceraroroaocaae 80 G 70 Music Workstation Roland Index CHOMSS a mana maana aag 127 Drum instrument c c ca 128 Harmonic Bars 0 Aa 35 Harmony ETTEEL casaaaaaa na waaa 110 Keyboard parts 98 Ka AA 129 DEN AR 104 107 110 Song Style 102 124 129 Style Composer 00 189 Vocal Harmonist 107 TE ig sc ste ste sa cet ce totale ned 109 Cear ALE maaagapan 147 Clip nananana nanara 222 CONTO eerst PP EP Y 219 Bk caaamaawamaaaaAAAALAAAAAL 217 CONES PRRPPRRPP PT PEPE PEPE PEE 182 Coarse Ii AA 91 B10 ee ea eee 90 Vocal Harmonist 132 Color CONTIG a 4544544554an4aeuaeed 219 Colour Preset
245. al Notes Delay times can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to msec Specify the value of the desired note Feedback 98 0 98 Proportion of the pitch shifted sound that is to be returned to the input negative values invert the phase 0 Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 82 Sympa Reso On an acoustic piano holding down the damper pedal allows other strings to resonate in sympathy with the notes you play creating rich and spacious resonances This effect simu lates these sympathetic resonances Depth 0 127 Depth of the effect Damper 0 127 Depth to which the damper pedal is pressed controls the resonant sound Pre LPF 16 15000Hz Bypass Frequency of the filter that cuts the high frequency content of the Input sound BYPASS no cut Pre HPF 16 15000Hz Bypass Frequency of the filter that cuts the low frequency content of the input sound BYPASS no cut Peaking Freq 200 8000Hz Bypass Frequency of the filter that boosts cuts a specific frequency region of the input sound Peaking Gain 15dB 0 15dB Amount of boost cut produced by the filter at the specified frequency region of the input sound Peak
246. all surface area To preserve their integrity please observe the following when handling floppy disks e Never touch the magnetic medium inside the disk e Do not use or store floppy disks in dirty or dusty areas 7T G 70 Music Workstation Important notes e Do not subject floppy disks to temperature extremes e g direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle Recommended temperature range 10 50 C 50 122 F e Do not expose floppy disks to strong magnetic fields such as those generated by loudspeakers e Floppy disks have a WRITE tab which can protect the disk from accidental erasure It is recommended that the tab be kept in the PROTECT position and moved to the WRITE position only when you wish to write new data onto the disk Rear side of the disk WRITE you can save data to the disk Protect tab PROTECT you cannot save data e Disks containing important performance data for this instru ment should always be locked have their write protect tab slid to the PROTECT position before you insert them into the drive of another device e The identification label should be firmly affixed to the disk If the label comes loose while the disk is in the drive it may be difficult to remove the disk e Put the disk back into its case for storage Memory Backup e f the power to this unit is not switched on for an extended period of time about months the contents of memory will be lost and the unit will r
247. alue Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Rate of modulation Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Attack 0 127 Speed at which the cutoff frequency changes between steps Filter Type LPF BPF HPF NOTCH Filter type Fre quency range that will pass through each filter LPF fre quencies below the cutoff BPF frequencies in the region of the cutoff HPF frequencies above the cutoff NOTCH frequencies other than the region of the cutoff Filter Slope 12 24 36 dB Amount of attenuation per octave 36dB extremely steep 24dB steep 12dB gentle Filter Resonance 0 127 Filter resonance level Increas ing this value will emphasize the region near the cutoff frequency Filter Gain 0 12 dB Amount of boost for the filter output Level 0 127 Output level 46 Humanizer Adds a vowel character to the sound making it similar to a human voice Drive Sw OFF ON Turns Drive on off Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the vol ume Vowel 1 a e i 0 u Vowel 2 a e i o u Selects the vowel Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the rate should be synchro nized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the following parameter refers t
248. alue of the desired note Attack 0 127 Speed at which the modulation fre quency changes between steps EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level G 70 Music Workstation Roland Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters 53 Tremolo Cyclically modulates the volume to add tremolo effect to the sound Modulation Wave TRI SOR SIN SAW1 SAW2 Modu lation Wave TRI triangle wave SOR square wave S N sine wave SAW1 2 sawtooth wave Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the modulation rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Depth 0 127 Depth to which the effect is applied EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Level 0 127 Output level 54 Auto Pan Cyclicall
249. am You can also add a musical phrase to your songs if you wish to take advantage of the Play amp Search facility See page 38 for how to use that facility in a real life situation Here s how to program the phrase Note This information cannot be entered for files that reside on a floppy disk Be sure to copy them to the SSD area or a memory card see p 142 and to edit that copy On the SONG OPTIONS page press the field Play the melody on the keyboard to be assigned sPlay amp Search signature 7d 4 ugagao0000000000 Play the notes of the most characteristic theme the one you ll most likely play when using Play amp Search for locating this song The key and rhythm are of little importance you must get the intervals right though The boxes will display a quarter note for every note you played Five note boxes thus mean that you played five notes If you make a mistake proceed as follows to cor rect it Press the field if you only wish to correct the last note you entered Press to erase all notes you have played so far Then play the notes again Press the field to save this information i e the selected song file in the internal memory or on memory card Songs for which there is Play amp Search information are flagged with a note symbol JF to the left of their names W Copy This function allows you to copy the selected song to another memory area You could use for q
250. ame note num ber will change The note can be set using the TO NOTE field All notes except the one you select will change The note can be set using the TO R LOWER E E NOTE field HIGHER Only notes above the selected one will change The note can be set using the THAN NOTE field HIGHER Only notes below the selected one will change The note can be set using the THAN INSIDE NOTE field INSIDE Only the notes between FROM NOTE and TO NOTE will change Only the notes above FROM NOTE and below TO NOTE will change See Fine tuning the note range on p 162 for an illustra tion E RESOLUTION 1 4 1 8 1 8T 1 16 1 16T 1 32 1 32T 1 64 This parameter sets the resolution of the Quantize func tion Be sure to always select the value that equals the Shortest note you recorded Otherwise your part no longer sounds the way you played it because shorter notes are shifted to the wrong positions E STRENGTH 0 100 Use this parameter to specify how precise the timing cor rection should be 0 means that the selected RESOLU TION value is not applied 0 correction while 100 means that all notes are shifted to the mathematically cor rect positions W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data T92 ERASE ERASE allows you to selectively delete data either within a specified range of measures beats or clocks or from the entire track s When DATA T
251. ample Shuffle has been selected 4 To display the next 5 Styles press the PAGE field in the lower right corner You can press this field as many times as necessary or until it is no longer displayed To return to a previous group of 5 Styles press You can also select the dial and the DECJ INC buttons to switch pages Quick location of the Style you need There are several ways of quickly locating the Style you are after W Sorting files Press the COUNTRY or field to sort the Music Style files according to country kind of music Genre or tempo value The right column now contains the selected entry only one of them can be displayed along with the Style name Continue with step 3 to select the Style you want to USE If you pressed the field these options are not available and the display looks as follows STYLE LIST STYLE COUNTRY GENRE TEMPO f NAME w O IDANCE10 IBLUES2 i IBLUES3 i IR amp B2 7 FOUND 16 i 2 Back 2x2 roc BE Le Ps The information in these columns are supplied by a special file in the internal memory or on a memory card that is called Database You can supply the above information for your own Styles or change the information of the Styles on the supplied memory card Note Music Styles you load from floppy disk and then save to a card or the internal memory are not automatically modified to include this Database information Yo
252. and or FILE NAME infor mation of the selected song e Press the SONG NAME ARTIST GENRE or field and enter the desired characters You can also rename all four of them e The field allows you to switch between upper case and lowercase characters Note If you select a song on floppy disk only the SONG NAME and FILE NAME can be edited e Press the field The Operation Successful message appears to confirm this operation W Delete This function allows you to delete the selected song from the internal memory area memory card or floppy disk You should use this as sparsely as possi ble Once a song is gone there is indeed no way to restore it So please be careful and try to forget this function even exists e Press the field Deleting a song cannot be undone which is why the following question is now displayed 4 This File will be DELETED from Memory Card Song Name FIRSTDAY Artist Manek RY S Genre Rock FIRST DAY MI D p EA E ARE YOU SURE deletes the song file leaves the file intact and takes you back to the initial Song Finder page with the song list leaves the file intact and takes you back to the SONG LIST page Note If a song you delete here is assigned to a 146 Note an error message File not found is displayed during playback of that Play List and playback stops at that step So be careful 142 1 2 3 4 WPS Input Nam N
253. and suddenly notice that the Arranger lags one or two beats behind the singer soloist lap Tempo Same function as the button Bass Inversion Allows you to switch the Bass Inversion function on and off page 75 Melody Intelligent Same function as the button on the G 70 s front panel it allows you to switch Melody Intelligence on and off Scale Upper Scale Lower Allows you to assign the selected Scale Tune see p 71 setting to the three Upper parts G7 G 70 Music Workstation Using the performance functions Scale Lower Allows you to assign the selected Scale Tune see p 71 setting to the three Lower parts Keyboard Exchange UP2 1 Allows you to switch off the UP1 part and activate the UP2 part and vice versa Note If neither UP1 nor UP2 are on when you first press the footswitch one of them is activated Keyboard Exchange LW2 1 Allows you to switch off the LW1 part and activate the LW2 and vice versa Note If neither LW1 nor LW2 are on when you first press the footswitch one of them is activated Punch In Out The footswitch can be used to activate and switch off punch in out recording using the G 70 s sequencer page 157 Portamento Switches the Portamento function page 91 on and off Soft Sostenuto Hold The assigned footswitch can be used as a Soft Sostenuto or Sustain Hold pedal Note that Hold can also be controlled using a dedicated but optional DP 2 DP 6
254. anger for example and you start playing 2 Recording each track separately This approach means that you first record a drum part for example then a bass line followed by a plano part etc For this approach you need to select the 16 track Sequencer mode see p 154 It is also possible to combine these two approaches by first recording most of the parts using approach O and then adding other or replacing existing parts using approach Let us begin with the easier approach Recording with Arranger backing from start to finish In this example you will learn how to record your solo playing to a Music Style accompaniment which is also recorded 1 Press the button it flashes Note Whenever you press the button and start recording see below the song RAM memory is erased Be sure to save the current song data before recording a new song see p 55 2 Press the EASY SETTING button 3 Select a Music Style see p 27 and a sound for your right hand see p 29 You can also press a ONE TOUCH button and select a Music Style In that case there is no need to select a sound for your right hand in step 3 because that is done automatically See also p 29 Switch on additional Keyboard parts by pressing their PART ON OFF buttons if you want to double your melody by one or several instruments You can even work with a second page 90 split Note Rather than performing the above steps you could recal
255. aning depend on the selected type If the required parameter is not displayed press the PAGE fields to jump to another page then press the appropriate display Some effects have only one parameter page 7 Set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons REVERB SEND and CHORUS SEND allow YOU to specify how strongly the multi effect s output signal should be processed by the Reverb and or Chorus processor If you feel that is unnecessary set both parameters to 0 8 Press the button to return to the main page Using the Mastering Tools The G 70 contains two effects processors that apply to all sections and parts whose signals are transmitted to the OUTPUT MAIN sockets These processors are collectively called the Mastering Tools because they allow you to perfect the signal mix output by the G 70 so as to adapt It to the sound sys tem you are using Though they are not meant to be changed for every song you intend to play switching settings Is relatively easy and could therefore be used to great effect Note The settings of the MASTERING TOOLS effects are global parameters that are not saved to individual User Programs You can however archive them by saving the current User Program Set to the internal memory or a memory card Press the button ie eet a pu EEE aan EDIT EDIT On this page you can switch the MASTERING TOOLS processors on and off by pressing the OFF ON
256. ar Cid i Sang iama Nama ag cade ims Timo Se 7 brunir Lox here bg pag nee LA Ha Te lr E Am YOU SABAK Gaj 2 7 u DELETE MIDI SET Ho F piy Taga Fihi TA ANU YOG AA If you selected the DELETE page by accident press Back This takes you back to the previously selected page 8 Check again whether you really selected the file you wanted to delete then press the field to delete the selected file Press the field to return to the DELETE list with out deleting the file You can also press to return to the DELETE list 9 Press the EXIT button to return to the main page Note The DELETE operation cannot be undone 2 O3 Copy The G 70 allows you to copy one several or all files from one media to another Files on the selected source media FROM cannot be copied onto the same desti nation media TO Consider using the USB functionality see p 211 when you need to copy from a memory card in the G 70 to another memory card connected to the computer for example 1 Press the button 2 If you intend to work with a floppy disk or memory card insert it into the drive or slot 3 Press the field 4 Select the data type you want to rename by press ing its field 1 wl EA J L Jee PROGRAM aj The display changes to COPY 5IYLE OE E sat EEF LOPPY DISK COFLOPPY DISK F BEDEXT MEMORY EET MEMORY SLROCK2 ool Live Band New Style mile Pop Groo
257. are recorded to the MASTER track 15 Press the field and set the desired resolution G 70 Music Workstation Roland Example 1 Recording a song from scratch Quantize corrects the timing of your notes by shift ing them to the nearest grid mark Use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to spec ify the number of grid marks per measure i e the Quantize resolution Here is an example 1 2 3 4 1 This is how you HI played it i 1 2 3 4 1 po 1 2 3 4 1 The setting range is Off 1 4 1 8 1 8T 1 16 1 16T 1 32 1 32T and 1 64 As this Quantize function changes the way in which your notes are recorded you may want to select Off here The 16 track sequencer has a second Quantize function that you can use more selectively i e for notes that are defi nitely late early See p 161 16 Specify what should be recorded by activating the corresponding RECORDING SELECT button icons RECORDING SELECT Meaning NOTE Only note messages are recorded Pitch Bend modulation etc data are ignored AFTERTOUCH Aftertouch messages are recorded This option should only be activated if you really wish to record After touch messages CONTROL CHANGE Control change messages including modulation CC01 expression CC11 etc CCOO and CC32 mes sages also belong to this group PROGRAM CHANGE Program change messages Only necessary If a track should use dif ferent sounds PITCH BEND Left right movements of the BE
258. arts Editing the Keyboard effects processors Revera Tor keyogard 807 1k PPRRRR ER RA RAR RAR Chorus for Keyboard parts aaa Using the multi effects processor Multi FX Selecting another MFX type and editing it Linking Multi FX type selection to the Upper part Upper 1 M FX Link a Effects for songs and Styles Reverb for Style Song parts 00 cece eee Chorus for Style Song pants cc sriisisiciisiicisses Using the individual outputs and audio inputs Output assign PART OUTPUTS 05 Using THE audio INDUS ce n anaana anaana nnana Using the Mastering Tools FOUAIZE eere COMPrESSOT sssi Ka KG AA NA AA NAGAN ENERE Voice and Vocal Harmonist part mixing Reverb Delay and Chorus effects 04 wah Eh aNGSSASA Working with User Programs Saving your settings to a User Program Selecting User Programs Eie AA Choosing User Programs manually Selecting User Programs with DOWN UP Working with the User Program Finder Quick location of the User Program you need Selectively loading User Program settings User Program Hold Automatic functions for User Programs DONO MMIC E ean KAPA anh a ace areas ir Linking a MIDI Set to a User Program User Program Recall cc cece eee eee Editing Us
259. as your velocity becomes softer You could use extreme positive negative ACCOMP pairs i e 127 and 127 to alternate between those two lines simply by varying your velocity One part would then only be audible when you strike the keys softly while the other would only be triggered by high velocity values Subtler settings i e 20 and 20 for a pair can also be effective of course Choose O for parts whose volume should not be affected by your veloc ity values Press the field to return to the ARRANGER CHORD page Press the button to return to the main page G 70 Music Workstation Additional Arranger Style functions Tempo related settings Arranger Options The G 70 also provides two parameters to allow you to play with the Music Style tempo 1 Press the button The display changes to MENW F FOOT f K vbi P CONTROLLERS i i EES jm YOCAL SS SPLITeTOUCH ai a 2 ARRANGER T STYLE r SETTING Paes COMPOSER FUNCTION UTILITY m ec USB DATA j STORAGE 2 Press the field followed by the field ARRANGE 3EFFING TEMPO CHANGE FILL IN TEMPO HALF BAR MF 0 J FILL RIT PE Tone evit HAND g CONTROLLERS FILL RITARDANDO Style Tempo Before telling you what this parameter is for let us briefly summarize everything that has already been said about the tempo e Each Music Style has a preset tempo that is recalled whenever you sel
260. at Static settings are always written at the beginning of the track in question so there is no need to record an entire cycle 133 Mi Tone Drum Set selection To select another Tone or Drum Set for an existing Style track proceed as follows 1 Press the RECORDER button STL COMPOSER REG STANDBY TRACK INSTRUMENT pa FM EPianol NPUT QUANTIZE 2 Press the field and use the dial to select the desired the track you wish to assign another Tone or Drum Set to If you select the ADrums track the display looks Slightly different SIL SGONirOss KET IPE TRACK INSTRUMENT 3 Select the DIVISION and MODE whose settings you wish to change and possibly also all clones page 182 4 Press the field and use the DEC INC buttons to select Mix Let us assume that your part already contains data 5 Select the new Tone or Drum Set to be assigned to the selected track and division by pressing the field and using the on screen fields and TONE buttons Finally press to return to the page shown above Note See Drum Instrument amp Pitch for the additional parameters for the ADrums track you may want to set them before performing step 6 6 Press to start recording 7 Press again after the first or second beat but wait until the count in if any is fin ished This completes sound selection The new Tone address replaces the old one M Drum Instrument amp Pitch ace um
261. at steps 2 3 to program new locations for the remaining MARK JUMP buttons 4 Press the field to clear the measure indication of the selected MARK JUMP button G 70 Music Workstation Roland Programming MARK 8 JUMP locations The indicators of MARK amp JUMP buttons for which a location has been programmed light Pressing a MARK JUMP button for which no measure location has been entered and whose indicator therefore does not light has no effect Want to save time Here s the quickest way to program MARK JUMP locations e Select the song you want to program MARK locations for Select the MARK amp JUMP page see above Press to return to the beginning of the song then to start playback Press the 1 field to select it Press the field where you want the first marker to be This position is memorized Press the field where you want the sec ond marker to be Repeat the previous two steps for memories 3 and 4 Continue with step 5 The MARK JUMP locations are additional information for song files that need to be saved 5 Press the field 6 7 8 oe Oe j es ee Press the INTERNAL MEMORY or field to select the save desti nation If you choose FLOPPY or EXTERNAL MEMORY do not forget to Insert floppy disk or card If necessary change the song s name You only need to do this if you want to preserve the Original version of your song The MARK JUMP infor mation can on
262. ate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the low modulation rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Low Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Rate at which the low range flanger sound is modulated Low Rate note Musical Notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync param eter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Low Depth 0 127 Modulation depth for the low range flanger sound Low Phase 0 180 deg Spaciousness of the low range flanger sound Low Feedback 98 0 98 Proportion of the low range flanger sound that is to be returned to the input negative values invert the phase Low Step Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the low step rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Low Step Rate Hz 0 10 20 00Hz Rate at which the Steps will cycle for the low range flanger sound Low Step Rate note Musical Notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note High Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Delay time from
263. ate line noise such as an electric motor or variable lighting system Before connecting the G 70 to other devices turn off the power to all units This will help prevent malfunctions and or damage to speakers or other devices Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the POWER switch is switched off this does not mean that the unit has been completely disconnected from the source of power If you need to turn off the power completely first turn off the POWER switch then unplug the power cord from the power outlet For this rea son the outlet into which you choose to connect the power cord s plug should be one that is within easy reach Placement Using the G 70 near power amplifiers or other equipment con taining large power transformers may induce hum To alleviate the problem change the orientation of this instrument or move it further away from the source of interference This instrument may interfere with radio and television reception Do not use it in the vicinity of such receivers Observe the following when using the unit s floppy disk drive For further details refer to Before using floppy disks handling the floppy disk drive e Do not place the unit near devices that produce a strong mag netic field e g loudspeakers e Install the G 70 on a solid level surface e Do not move the unit or subject it to vibration while the drive is operating Do not expose the G 70 to direct sunlight place it nea
264. ault the TO position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 last measure of the track or song This is where you specify the bar position of the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data T 64 COPY The COPY function allows you to copy one track to another or excerpts of one or all tracks to a different location The latter is useful if you need to repeat the chorus several times at the end of the song but do not feel like recording all those notes IASC SUIT goma do bato earen nee Saner tock Jena ST ESRC TRACK ALL 1 16 Allows you to select the track whose data you wish to copy WE FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or song Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the time signature in the selected area
265. ay you can ask the G 70 to display them on screen 1 Select a song page 38 2 Press the button 3 Press the field if it doesn t light The display changes to Song HEYMAMA M 030 3 3 100 474 a 4 Start song playback and watch the display 5 Press the button if the notes are difficult to read Press to select the normal size again Now maybe the way in which the notes are displayed is not quite right In that case 6 Press the button SETTINGS STAFF 1 J y papa pn y PITCH There are several things you can decide here G 70 Music Workstation Roland Vocal Harmonist function e Do you want see the notes of one song part or of two If you only need one activate 1 STAFF To see two parts activate 2 STAVES In the latter case the display changes to GEET GAO SETTINGS STAFF 1 o STAFF 2 z paan pan PITCH KEY 4 FILTER FULL a Back e Select the track s whose notes should be displayed Press the corresponding field and use the dial to select the track STAFF 1 is the upper staff STAFF 2 the lower one e f you happen to know the key your song is in press the field and use the dial to select the correct setting This is only necessary to avoid that the score is clut tered up with accidentals sharps and flats that alter the notes pitch ad hoc e Use the gj and pag fields to specify what clef should be
266. ay be hard to distinguish Level 0 127 Output level 43 Low Boost Boosts the volume of the lower range creating powerful lows Boost Frequency 50 125 Hz Center frequency at which the lower range will be boosted Boost Gain 0 12 dB Amount by which the lower range will be boosted Boost Width Wide Mid Narrow Width of the lower range that will be boosted EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Level 0 127 Output level 44 Super Filter This is a filter with an extremely sharp slope The cutoff fre quency can be varied cyclically Filter Type LPF BPF HPF NOTCH Filter type Fre quency range that will pass through each filter LPF fre quencies below the cutoff BPF frequencies in the region of the cutoff HPF frequencies above the cutoff NOTCH frequencies other than the region of the cutoff Filter Slope 12 24 36 dB Amount of attenuation per octave 36dB extremely steep 24dB steep 120B gentle Filter Cutoff 0 127 Cutoff frequency of the filter Increasing this value will raise the cutoff frequency Filter Resonance 0 127 Filter resonance level Increas ing this value will emphasize the region near the cutoff frequency Filter Gain 0 12 dB Amount of boost for the filter output Modulation Sw Off On On off switch for cyclic change
267. azzScat sound VOCAL family for exam ple with three dynamic levels that allow you to sound Doo Bub or Daow simply by hitting the keys softer or harder Various guitar Tones provide hammering on bending sounds when you strike the keys as hard as you can Transposing the keyboard to the lowest octave using the OCTAVE parameter sometimes allows you to play some typical noises scraping over the strings hitting the body of an acoustic guitar etc W Choosing the sound selection system Sound Set 1 Press the button Mode The Roland engineers figured that you might feel overwhelmed by the number of Tones available in each TONE family That is why the G 70 does not dis play all the sounds it contains when you switch it on for the first time This restricted display mode Is called BEST SELECTION In this mode only the new sounds can be selected You may have grown fond of older sounds from the G and VA series and wish to select them In that case select EXTENDED The display changes to MENW f VA aida gt CONTROLLERS SPLIT amp TOUCH We FUNCTION HARMONIST 5 COMPOSER m XIA n lt 4 S Fr m pase UTILITY Hii TONE EDIT MIDI HAND ec USBDATA A CONTROLLERS f STORAGE 2 Press the and the field WERE agp USER PROGRAM RECALL Pia Gospel Love NG MIDI SET RECALL SOUND SET MODE ma po SELECTION EXTENDED
268. be edited in this way See pages 116 and 116 for how to do that Note In the case of a floppy disk you can only change the USER PRG entry e Press the USER PRG or GENRE field and enter the desired characters e The field allows you to switch between upper case and lowercase characters 18 What happens when you execute Before performing the next step we d like to inform you about the consequences of renaming a User Pro gram USER PRG From the illustration on page 111 you may remember that each User Program available to you is in fact a separate file You can bundle 144 such files into a User Program Set List whose members can be recalled using the buttons in the USER PROGRAM pad on the front panel Each time you select a memory 1 8 on page P1 18 the G 70 therefore loads the settings of the file in question So here s what happens e f you rename a User Program that is referenced by the currently active Set List the Set List is updated and therefore finds the User Program despite its new name If you rename a User Program that is referenced by other Set Lists which you didn t load those lists no longer find the User Program you renamed Conse quently when you select the memory in question after loading the Set List nothing happens because that ref erence no longer works Renaming a User Program that doubles as Music Assis tant registration with the MA label see below also aff
269. bout major volume changes MID Medium velocity sensitivity The keyboard responds to velocity changes but the maximum vol ume can be obtained more easily than with HIGH This is the default setting HIGH Select this setting for maximum expressive ness Even small variations of the force with which you strike a key produce audible changes The trade off is however that you have to strike the keys forcefully to achieve the maximum volume Velocity switching Min and Max You can also specify the smallest MIN and highest MAX velocity values with which you can trigger the selected part This is probably only useful when applied to two Keyboard parts Do not change these values If you have no intention of using a comple mentary part because otherwise you may start wondering why the LW1 part for instance only sounds at high or low velocity values MIN and MAX can be used effectively for switching between two Tones simply by striking the keys harder or softer Doing so allows you to alternate between two sounds Consider the following example Part Bandoneon 2 ACCORDION P1 Both parts must be on These settings allow you to trigger the Bandoneon sound with velocity values between 1 and 105 low to relatively high velocity while velocity values above 106 only trigger the vio lin Try it it sounds spectacular There are countless other possibilities such as using MIN 80 MAX 127 for the MEL
270. bove to Note Specify the value of the desired note Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 64 VS Overdrive This is an overdrive that provides heavy distortion Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the vol ume Tone 0 127 Sound quality of the Overdrive effect Amplifier Sw Off On Turns the Amp Simulator on off Amplifier Type Small Built In 2 Stack 3 Stack Type of guitar amp SMALL small amp BUILT IN single unit type amp 2 STACK large double stack amp 3 STACK large triple stack amp EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels Level 0 127 Output level 65 VS Distortion Produces a more intense distortion than the above The parameters are the same as for 64 VS Overdrive 66 GT Amp Simul This is an effect that simulates the sound of a guitar amplifier Pre Amp Sw Off On Turns the amp switch on off Pre Amp Type JC 120 Clean Twin Match Drive BG Lead MS19591 MS1959II MS1959I II Sldn Lead Metal 5150 Metal Lead OD 1 OD 2 Turbo Distortion Fuzz Type of
271. bove to msec Specify the value of the desired note Delay 1 Feedback 98 0 98 Proportion of the delay sound that is to be returned to the input of delay 1 negative values invert the phase Delay 1 HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Frequency at which the high frequency content of the delayed sound of delay 1 will be cut BYPASS no cut Delay 2 Time sync msec Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not msec the delay 2 time should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Delay 2 Time msec 0 1300m5s Delay time from when sound is input to delay 2 until the delay sound is heard PAA Delay 2 Time note Musical Notes Delay times can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to msec Specify the value of the desired note Delay 2 Feedback 98 0 98 Proportion of the delay sound that is to be returned to the input of delay 2 negative values invert the phase Delay 2 HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Frequency at which the high frequency content of the delayed sound of delay 2 will be cut BYPASS no cut Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels EQ Low Gain
272. but ton icons to the right of the EQUALIZER and COM PRESSOR displays If you only want to select another effect type press the EQUALIZER or COMPRESSOR display and use the dial or the DECJ INC buttons to select it If you also need to change certain aspects of that effect Equalizer 1 Press the EQUALIZER field to access the parameters of the same name The display changes to MASI EI IN Gta tos EQ LEVEL E GAIN DE Ch Ka Ci Ga Ga Ge LO GAIN DB B G m Goo U E An equalizer has the same function as the BASS MID and TREBLE buttons on an amplifier it allows you to color the sound or to apply tonal corrections that help you avoid saturating the speakers 2 Press the or OFF field to switch the equal izer on icon lights or off icon goes dark 3 4 5 6 7 G 70 Music Workstation Roland Using the Mastering Tools You can also do so on the EFFECTS page see above Press the field below EQUALIZER that displays the name of the currently selected preset Select the desired equalizer preset with the dial or the DEC INC buttons The available presets are 1 Flat 4 Jazz 6 Standard 2 Rock 5 Classic 7 User 3 Pop The settings you make on this page can be saved to a User memory and recalled as and when necessary Here s how to edit the parameters Press the field of the parameter you wish to change Set the desired value with the dial or t
273. button must light 4 Press the or field to switch it on You can also switch both HOLD fields on 5 Play a short note in the left half of the keyboard and release the key This note goes on sounding until you press another note or chord in the left half of the keyboard Note These parameters can also be switched on and off using the Hold pedal see p 68 or an optional footswitch see p 70 6 Press the button to return to the main page Tone Edit editing Keyboard parts Your G 70 allows you to edit certain parameters that affect the way a Keyboard part sounds when you play it These parameters will help you modify the parts by adjusting their brilliance their modulation speed Vibrato Rate and so on The parameters discussed here only apply to the fol lowing Keyboard parts Upper1 Upper2 Upper3 Lower1 Lower2 M Bass Be sure to select the part you wish to change before actually editing it The Harmonic Bar section cannot be edited here see page 33 for how to do that Assigning another Tone to a Keyboard part resets the TONE EDIT parameters Parts are in fact containers in which you can put a Tone and whose sound can be modified using the parameters described below Note All TONE EDIT parameters are relative parameters whose values are added to or subtracted from the preset Tone parameter values That is why you can specify both positive more and negative less values Note The
274. c Workstation Roland Voice and Vocal Harmonist part mixing Delay Mi Delay for VOICE EFFECT D VOCAL HARMONIST Gomene VOICE EFFECT HARMONY EFFECT REVERB DELAY REVERB DELAY WALL TYPE mg aa bag kre DELAY SEND DELAY TIME Om Om DLY REYSND DELAY FBACK Om Gum e Press the field of the delay type you wish to use Note The preset you choose affects the settings of the param eters below Always start by selecting the type and then set the programmable parameters The names of these types SLOW SPACE are prob ably self explanatory You may notice that the Delay character changes as you select different types Also note that some delays are stereo and are special effects you probably only need every so often e Press the field of the parameter you wish to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons The four knob icons allow you to alter the selected Delay type WALL TYPE This parameter determines the brightness and liveness of the effect Carpet Wood Brick Con crete Marble DELAY SEND This parameter reflects the setting on the Vocal Effect page It was provided so that you do not need to switch pages while editing the Delay processor DELAY TIME Allows you to set the time lag between the original and the effect signal Combined with the DELAY FBACK parameter it sets the speed of the repe titions echoes DLY REV SND Th
275. cesses MIDI data by selecting a value above 100 you increase the differences between high and low velocity values in the selected range Values below 64 are lowered while values above 64 are increased The result is therefore that the difference between pianissimo and fortissimo becomes far more pro nounced MAGNIFY values below 100 have the opposite effect they push all velocity towards the imaginary center of 64 thus reducing differences in playing dynamics G 70 Music Workstation Roland Style Track Edit functions BI FROM NOTE TO NOTE 0 C 127 G9 FROM NOTE refers to the lower limit of the note range you want to change TO NOTE represents the upper limit See also Fine tuning the note range on p 192 W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data CHANGE GATE TIME SHALE URASC ED lt l l en ress Sotto karenni nance rocr tenera sinar The CHANGE GATE TIME function allows you to mod ify the duration of the notes in the selected time FROM TO and note FROM TO NOTE ranges See page 168 for details BTRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track you want to edit Select ALL to edit all tracks BI MODE Allows you to select the mode of the pattern to be edited Major minor or 7th EI DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division or pattern you want to edit Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 153 Fill Up 1 3 End 154
276. ch cri teria FILE j No Match Found OPTIONS FOUND 0 i gat EE e o In that case all song names are listed the xx of yy entry lists twice the same number of files If the G 70 did find one or several matches the xx number will be smaller than the yy number e Press the field of the song you need and do your thing Editing the Song Finder information The Finder information is based on search criteria that needs to be added to Standard MIDI Files Normal Stan dard MIDI Files files do not contain them Note Some of the following information cannot be entered for or read from files on floppy disk Song Options After pressing the FINDER button the display looks as follows a Ka CI F gang en ARTIST oie GENRE an RHE AT FORCA FORCA MID EF FRIDAYNI IFRIDAYNI MID u HEREWEGO HEREWEGO MI FE Poe FOUND ET GLOBAL Aa The field in the lower left corner provides access to a display page where you can add database information This also works for Standard MIDI Files that already contain entries you wish to modify First select the song whose database information you wish to edit by pressing its field 141 G 70 Music Workstation More refined song functions 2 Press the field a 2o Aber 4 Cece ou db ened ta paa sme Ol cent 3 Now do one of the following Bl Rename This function allows you to change or supply the SONG NAME ARTIST GENRE
277. ch memory or Music Style As soon as you change a setting the One Touch field that corresponds to the last memory you selected is indicated by means of an asterisk Button icons in the HOLD column whose indicator lights refer to set tings that are not updated TEMPO The preset tempo of the selected Music Style KBD PART The current status of the Keyboard parts UP1 2 3 LW1 2 and MBS no longer changes The on off Status of the Keyboard parts is one of the parameters that can be saved to a One Touch memory as you may remember Furthermore the Split and Upper 3 Split no longer change INTRO ENDING The INTRO or ENDING pattern is no longer selected when you select Music Styles even if its on status has been saved to a One Touch registration MAIN VAR When you select another Music Style the G 70 no longer loads the selection of the MAIN VARIA TION 1 4 pattern but goes on using the current pat tern Press the field to switch on all HOLD options Press to switch all options off Note The One Touch function Is switched off whenever you select a User Program Note The SYNC page 75 and button are not automatically switched on when you select a One Touch mem ory or Music Style while Arranger playback is stopped G 70 Music Workstation Roland One Touch 3 Press the button to return to the main page Programming your own One Touch settings WRITE The G 70 also allows you to save your own ONE
278. ch off the G 70 or load another Style Be aware that selecting a CUSTOM Style also overwrites the last Disk User Style you selected Note Unlike the CUSTOM memories the reference to the selected Music Style is not remembered and therefore not fixed 1 If necessary insert the memory card or floppy disk with the desired Music Style into the slot or disk drive 2 On the STYLE page see above press the DISK USER field 3D G 70 Music Workstation Additional Arranger Style functions 3 4 Nam 5 6 7 The display changes to STYLE LIST Press the EXTERNAL MEMORY or field to select the memory area that contains the desired Style Note It is perfectly possible to use older Music Styles with the G 70 They will be converted automatically to the new VARIATION 1 x 4 system Press the field that contains the name of the Music Style you want to load If the desired Music Style is not displayed use to select another group of 5 Styles You can also use the dial and the DECJ INC buttons for selecting other pages with dif ferent Music Styles Note The G 70 contains a powerful search engine for quickly locating the desired Music Style on a card or in the internal memory page 86 It is not available for Styles on floppy disk however The display page does not change when you select another Style This was done to allow you to select another Music Style
279. chords etc Professional Vocal Harmonist Another highlight of the G 70 Is its Vocal Harmonist that adds automatic harmonies to your singing com plete with several modes for transforming your or someone else s voice This implies of course that you can connect an optional Roland DR 10 or DR 20 microphone to the G 70 Other signal sources synthesizers etc can also be connected Note that a separate EXTERNAL AUDIO IN part with its own effect section is also provided allow ing you to add external Ine level signals of a sound module CD player etc to your playing The signals generated by your singing and or the Vocal Harmonist can either be added to the signals of the MAIN OUTPUT sockets or transmitted directly to one or two mixer channels or additional amplifiers via the dedicated VOCAL HARMONIST OUTPUT sockets Superfast Recorder and comprehensive 16 track sequencer The G 70 provides two approaches for recording new song material a Recorder function with a straightfor ward REC START STOP approach and a fully featured 16 track sequencer with track based and detailed microscope editing functions Like many other functions on the G 70 the Recorder interacts with other sections you can link a song to each User Program you can cause any Standard MIDI File to be transposed automatically to a range that allows you to sing with ease the chords of the songs you play back are recognized automatically and dis played
280. chorus sound 241 G 70 Music Workstation Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters Balance D100 0W D50 50W D0 100W Volume bal ance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Level 0 127 Output level 62 Band Flanger A flanger that lets you apply an effect independently to the low frequency and high frequency ranges Split Frequency 200 8000Hz Frequency at which the low and high ranges will be divided Low Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Delay time from when the original sound is heard to when the low range flanger sound is heard Low Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the low modulation rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Low Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Rate at which the low range flanger sound is modulated Low Rate note Musical Notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync param eter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Low Depth 0 127 Modulation depth for the low range flanger sound Low Phase 0 180 deg Spaciousness of the low range flanger sound Low Feedback 98 0 98 Proportion of the low range flanger sound that Is to be returned to the input negative values invert the phase High Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms
281. ck can only be selected and edited in isolation There is also a separate page for editing the MASTER track see p 171 E FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or song Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the G 70 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation should start after the selected beat Erase NOTE From 2 1 0 To 4 1 0 gh Byki eee ETO By default the TO position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 last measure of the track or song This is where you specify the bar position of the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat G 70 Music Workstation Roland Editing 16 track songs
282. components or connectors e Save the bag in which the board was originally shipped and put the board back into it whenever you need to store or transport it e Use a Phillips screwdriver that is suitable for the size of the screws If an unsuitable screwdriver is used the head of the screws may be stripped e o remove a screw rotate the screwdriver counter clockwise To tighten the screws rotate the screwdriver clockwise loosen tighten e When installing wave expansion boards remove only the specified SCrews e Be careful that the screws you remove do not fall into the interior of the G 70 e Do not leave the bottom cover removed After installation of the wave expansion board be sure to replace the cover e Be careful not to cut your hand on the opening for installing the board e Do not touch any of the printed circuit pathways or connection terminals e Never use excessive force when installing a circuit board If it doesn t fit properly on the first attempt remove the board and try again e When circuit board installation is complete double check your work e Always turn the unit off and unplug the power cord before attempting installation of the circuit board e Install only the specified circuit board s Roland SRX series Remove only the specified screws G 70 Music Workstation Roland Installing a wave expansion board How to install a wave expansion board 1 2 3 4 Before installi
283. copy Press the but ton icon to select the memory area INT MEMORY The G 70 s internal memory EXT MEMORY The memory card in the G 70 s PCMCIA slot Do not forget to insert it before select ing this option The floppy disk in the G 70 s PCMCIA slot Do not forget to Insert it before selecting this option FLOPPY Now specify the target you wish to copy the selected song s to Press the button icon to select the memory area If the name of the User Program you want to copy Is already displayed press its line You can also select several User Programs To display the next 5 files press the field in the lower right corner You also use the dial and the DECJ INC buttons You can press this field as many times as necessary or until it is no longer displayed To return to a pre vious group of 5 songs press If you need to copy all User Programs that are cur rently displayed on all available pages press the ALL FILES field Note If the memory card or floppy disk is not formatted a message will be displayed that allows you to format it before the User Programs are copied If you chose EXT MEMORY or FLOPPY DISK for TO enable the card s disk s write protection and insert it into the PCMCIA slot or disk drive This is also true of a floppy disk you want to work with See the owner s manual of the memory card for how to disable its write protection Note Not all cards have a write protection
284. ct the track you want to edit Select ALL to edit all tracks BI MODE Allows you to select the mode of the pattern to be edited Major minor or 7th EI DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division or pattern you want to edit Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 153 Fill Up 1s 3 End 154 BI FROM TO FROM refers to the position where the edit operation is to begin That position is specified as Bar Beat CPT values TO designates the position where the edit operation is to end Bar Beat CPT value See page 191 for details BIBIAS 99 99 The BIAS parameter allows you to specify by how much the velocity values should change Select a positive value to increase the velocity the value is added to the velocity value of the affected notes or a negative value to decrease the velocity values that value is subtracted Select 0 if you prefer to work with the MAGNIFY parame ter see below Note Even the highest positive or negative VALUE doesn t allow you to go beyond 1 or 127 There is a reason why O is impossible that value is used to indicate the end of a note note off 127 on the other hand is the highest velocity value the MIDI standard can muster Selecting a high positive velocity value may thus lead to all notes being played at 127 BI MAGNIFY 0 200 This parameter works like a compander effect a dynamics processor that simultaneously acts as compressor and expander although it pro
285. ction is ignored if the MIDI SET button is on 5 Press the button to return to the main page G 70 Music Workstation Miscellaneous 19 Miscellaneous Using V LINK WE About V LINK 1 V LINK MV is a function that provides for the integration of music and visual material By using V LINK compatible video devices i e an Edirol DV 7PR visual effects can be easily linked to and made part of the expressive elements of a perfor mance By using the G 70 with an Edirol DV 7PR you can Use the G 70 s keyboard highest octave to switch images clips Press and hold a key for longer transi tions fades Briefly press a key for fast transitions Use the BENDER axis of the BENDER MODULATION lever to change the playback speed of the picture material or to select a different color Use the D Beam controller to control several effects this depends on the function you assign to the D Beam see below V Link signals can be transmitted via MIDI OUT or the USB port Connect the G 70 s MIDI OUT socket or USB port to the MIDI IN socket or USB port of the external video processor or to a UM 1 interface gj MIDI OUT i Edirol DV 7PR Projector Monitor Note You don t need a UM 1 interface for a USB connection Simply connect the G 70 s USB port to the DV 7PR s USB port Then switch on the OUTPUT field on the MIDI page see p 214 2 3 Press the button it lights
286. cts an Overdrive and a Flanger in series Overdrive Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the volume Overdrive Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the overdrive sound Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Flanger Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Flanger Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flanger Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the flanger sound W Level 0 127 Output level 29 OD Delay This effect connects an overdrive and a delay in series Overdrive Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the volume Overdrive Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the overdrive sound Delay Time 0 0 500 0ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Balance D100 0W D50 50W D0 100W Adjusts the volume bala
287. d if it was off Half Bar on Fill In The assigned footswitch allows you to switch the Half Bar function on and off Certain pop songs in 4 4 contain bars that only last two beats The usual place for such a bar is between the first and the second verse Another favorite position for halved bars isat the end of a chorus or the bridge This does not change Style playback right away Only when a Fill In starts will the Half Bar function be activated and play half the number of beats of the fill you selected Arr Chord Off Allows you to switch the Arranger s chord recognition off in which case only the drum per cussion of the selected Music Style keeps playing or can be used See also page 80 Arranger Hold Allows you to switch the Arranger Hold function on and off See p 80 Dynamic Arranger Allows you to switch the Dynamic Arranger function on and off See page 81 for details Arranger RIT Tempo Arranger ACC Tempo The assigned footswitch performs the same function as the RIT or ACC parameter page 82 Arranger Default Tempo The assigned FC 7 footswitch allows you to reset the Arranger tempo to the preset value contained in the Music Style itself Reset Start Tempo This function allows you have the Arranger start on the first beat of the currently selected Music Style pattern when you press the assigned foot switch Use it when you are accompanying a singer or soloist whose timing is a little shaky
288. d hold it to clear all characters e Press to insert a space e Press to insert a character at the current posi tion All characters behind this position move one position further to the right 5 Press the field and enter the file name See p 86 for details Here you can only enter 8 char acters All characters will be capitals 6 Press the field to save your song The display tells you that the data are being saved after which it returns to the SAVE SONG page 7 Press the button to return to the main page or the RECORDER button to add even more tracks DD G 70 Music Workstation About the Keyboard modes 4 About the Keyboard modes The KBD MODE setting is the singlemost important parameter of your G 70 because it determines which parts or Tones and sections are available Though the EASY SETTING buttons set these parameters automatically you should familiarize yourself with the KBD MODE concept e SPLIT mode with the split point at the C4 The KBD Arranger Piano and Organ modes MODE EPIT button lights The G 70 has three major keyboard modes ARRANGER PIANO and ORGAN They can be selected using the EASY SETTING and buttons The third mode ORGAN configures the G 70 like a virtual drawbar organ page 33 In many instances pressing ARR or provides a nice starting point for further fine tuning Select ARR or ORG when you need the automatic accompaniment function and wish to activat
289. d press ASSIGN SW it flashes The volume gradually increases As soon as the volume has returned to normal ASSIGN SW 1 goes dark Mi Fade Out e Start song or Style playback and press ASSIGN SW it flashes The volume gradually decreases until it reaches zero the button goes dark Song or Style playback stops Fade outs are extremely popular in pop music If you think the Fade In or Fade Out takes too long here s how to change it 1 Press the button 133 More refined song functions The display changes to MENW i K TUNING NAA SPLIT TOUCH m CONTROLLERS a lt o gt fe HARMONIST TF STYLE 3 COMPOSER sx ARRANGER SETTING p NG nini UTILITY O sase TIMEOUT O ima ETET 7 TIME HOLD BOR eS ios Nad tne cat A HS Co 3 Press the field of the parameter you wish to change Press to change the Fade In duration 0 20 seconds Press to change the Fade Out duration 0 20 seconds Press to set how long it takes for the volume to return to the setting O 10 seconds after completing the fade out 4 Set the desired value with the dial or the DECJ INC buttons 5 Press the button to return to the main page Programming MARK amp JUMP loca tions The supplied songs in the internal memory come with four locations already memorized that can be selected by pressing MARK 8 JUMP 1 4
290. d right channels 0 Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 25 Reverb A nice Reverb effect Reverb Type Room 1 Room 2 Stage 1 Stage 2 Hall 1 Hall 2 Type of reverb Room 1 Dense reverb with short decay Room2 Sparse reverb with short decay Stage1 Reverb with greater late reverberation Stage2 Reverb with strong early reflections Hall 1 Reverb with clear reverberance Hall2 Reverb with rich reverberance Reverb Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the reverb sound is heard Reverb Time 0 127 Time length of reverberation Reverb HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 26 Gate Reverb This is a special type of reverb in which the reverberant sound is cut off before its natural length Reverb Type Normal Reverse Sweep 1 Sweep 2 Type of reverb NORMAL
291. d song into the slot or drive See Playing back songs Stan dard MIDI Files on p 38 for details about selecting songs e Select the song by pressing its field BBefore changing the MAKEUP TOOLS settings of a Music Style e Press a button of the STYLE pad to select a Music Style family STYLE LIVE DISCO 8 BEAT 16 BEAT BAND ROCK DANCE CONTEMP BALL JAZZ BOSSA ROOM BLUES 50 s amp 60 s SAMBA LATIN WORLD e Use the PAGE 1 PAGE 4 fields to switch pages CUSTOM The number of pages depends on the selected family e Press the field of the Music Style you want to use See pages 27 and 86 for details about selecting Music Styles 125 G 70 Music Workstation Song and Style Makeup Tools General procedure 1 Press the MAKEUP TOOLS button once or twice This should depend on whether you want to change the settings of the selected song or Style The display changes to STYLE MAKEUP TOOLS Ca gano La No TE EDIT Ceman ma TANAY mi S OF SRI Ba INIS si A a ec Halo Pad ti oc B Hawa E If this page is not displayed press the field in the upper left corner All modifications on this page and the related pages are SysEx data that alter the actual song data with out replacing them Only the G 70 can read these data Other SMF players and the 16 track Sequencer ignore these newly added SysEx data There is cur rently no other instrument capable of
292. d when you select EQUAL UNEQUAL HIGHER or LOWER 1G1 G 70 Music Workstation Using the 16 track sequencer Mi Fine tuning the note range Before setting FROM NOTE and possibly TO NOTE it might be a good idea to decide how you want to use the note indications Depending on the option you choose TO NOTE may not even be available so that setting it before hand would be a waste of time EQUAL Only the selected note note name note num ber will change The note can be set using the TO NOTE field UNEQUAL All notes except the one you select will gia The note can be set using the TO NOTE field HIGHER Only notes above the selected one will change The note can be set using the THAN NOTE field LOWER Only notes below the selected one will change The note can be set using the THAN INSIDE NOTE field NSID Only the notes between FROM NOTE and TO NOTE will change OUTSIDE Only the notes above FROM NOTE and below TO NOTE will change ed 0111 pila phrase TO NOTE 69 A4 E KS J To NOTE 69 Qi p FROM NOTE 7 ci TO ola 76 5 FROM NOTE 72 C5 OUTE EEE TO NOTE 76 E5 E THAN NOTE 72 C5 COEN eo THAN NOTE n i HIGHER o P ec 27L Ga kaa FHH go BI RESOLUTION 1 4 1 8 1 8T 1 16 1
293. dB This parameter sets the level of the selected frequency 0 means that the frequency s level does not change no difference between equalizer on and off The ALL PARTS GAIN dB parameter affects the sound of all four parts 1 4 e Press the field to leave this page Small settings When the indicator lights two part harmonies are added to your singing Press and hold the button to select the following page where you can specify what kinds of voices will be used for these harmonies lt oe VOCAL EFFECT GENDER YOCODER SMALL ENSEMBLE czs SHALL TYPE 1 Press and hold the button 2 In the GENDER column right press the field that corresponds to the kind of choir you want to add to your singing G 70 Music Workstation Roland Small settings Press for a man s choir or for female voices Press to create a mixed choir The field you press here determines what presets are available The preset sets the number of voices 1 or 2 that will be added Note For an optimum effect be sure to set the GENDER VOICE INPUT parameter to match your voice type See page 131 3 Set the desired HARMONY ASSIGN value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons See Who specifies the harmonies on p 44 OCTAVE 1 1 This parameter allows you to transpose the harmony voices one octave up or down Use it if you think the arrangement becomes a bit cluttered or to achieve a special effect If you press the field
294. delay and the right delay sound into the right delay CROSS The left delay sound will be fed back into the right delay and the right delay sound into the light delay Delay Left 0 0 500 0ms Adjust the time from the direct sound until when the left delay sound is heard Delay Right 0 0 500 0ms Adjust the time from the direct sound until when the right delay sound is heard FBK Phase Left Normal Invert Select the phase of the left delay sound NORMAL Phase is not changed INVERT Phase is inverted FBK Phase Right Normal Invert Select the phase of the left delay sound NORMAL Phase is not changed INVERT Phase is inverted Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 19 Mod Delay This effect adds modulation to the delayed sound producing an effect similar to a Flanger 231 G 70 Music Workstation Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters Delay FBK M
295. djusts the rate at which the woofer rotation speeds up when the rotation is switched from Slow to Fast 2 4O Woofer Trans Down 0 127 Adjusts the rate at which the woofer rotation speeds up when the rotation is switched from Fast to Slow Woofer Level 0 127 Volume of the woofer Tweeter Slow Speed 0 05 10 0Hz Low speed rotation speed of the tweeter Tweeter Fast Speed 0 05 10 0Hz High speed rotation Speed of the tweeter Tweeter Trans Up 0 127 Adjusts the rate at which the tweeter rotation speeds up when the rotation is switched from Slow to Fast Tweeter Trans Down 0 127 Adjusts the rate at which the tweeter rotation speeds up when the rotation is switched from Fast to Slow Tweeter Level 0 127 Volume of the tweeter Spread 0 10 Sets the rotary speaker stereo image The higher the value set the wider the sound is spread out EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Level 0 127 Output level 58 3D Chorus This applies a 3D effect to the chorus sound The chorus sound will be positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right Filter Type OFF LPF HPF Type of filter OFF no filter is used LPF cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff value HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff value Cutoff Frequency 200 8000Hz Basic frequency of the filter Chorus Pre D
296. duration of the notes themselves Program Change These messages are used to select sounds within the current bank As there are only 128 possibilities these messages are usually preceded by control changes CCOO and CC32 That s why the G 70 inserts all three when you use the CREATE EVENT func tion Note The CCOO value of ADrums tracks cannot be edited Pitch Bend These messages are used for temporary changes to the pitch of the notes being played at that time Pitch Bend messages can be positive higher or negative lower Setting range 128 128 Alteration Mode This is a new event that allows you to specify how the notes recorded for a Style track will be used during Arranger playback See below for details Note This parameter is not available for ADrums tracks 199 G 70 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer NRPN Dr This NRPN command is only available for ADrums tracks It inserts CC99 value 24 CC98 37 as well as CC06 64 While the CC99 value cannot be changed the CC98 value can be set to 37 38 40 41 52 56 57 or 65 these are note numbers of the drum sounds whose pitch can be changed The CC06 value which changes the pitch can be set to 0 127 whereby 64 means that the pitch remains unchanged Editing events W Editing Pitch Bend messages Pitch Bend messages can be positive or negative the range is 128 128 The value O means that the pitch of notes being played in t
297. during this operation Press the field to return to the USER PRO GRAM LIST page The message Executing appears Note Press the button to return to the main page and cancel your changes G 70 Music Workstation Roland Music Assistant functions Music Assistant functions The Music Assistant environment provides several functions for editing existing and creating new regis trations Creating new Music Assistant registrations Music Assistant registrations are always based on a User Program In a way they behave like User Program Set Lists with only one entry each Consequently they are only references to data that reside elsewhere 1 Press the FINDER button The display changes to USEI 2 Select the internal memory by pressing INTERNAL MEMORY Music Assistant registrations must reside in the G 70 s internal memory To use registrations based on User Programs that are stored on a memory card or on floppy disk first copy the User Programs to the G 70 s internal memory see p 119 3 Press the field followed by IMUSIC ASSISTANT MARK W3 B Hocu OPLE KE Brr Qr DNA WG Know Him i ipallat bb Jahre Foor UNKNOWN 99 Ballons UNKNOWN non torda UNKNOWN zum sueden UNKNOWN 4 Use the Finder functions to locate the desired User Program see p 113 5 Press the field of a User Program that should appear in the Music Assistant window It is flagged with an MA symbol If you
298. e cross over frequency i e the frequency where two bands are separated As the compressor has three bands there are two cross over frequencies you can set 1 between the low and mid ranges and 2 between the mid and high ranges Lo Mid Hi Because the remaining parameters are the same for each band we will only discuss them once As you see each of the three frequency ranges has its own set of parameters that allow you to specify their behav ior The width of the three band can be set with ATTACK 0 100ms Use this parameter to specify how fast the compressor of the band in question should start compressing the signal once the level of that band exceeds the THRSHLD level Choose a smaller value if you prefer a compression similar to that of FM radio stations Higher values may yield a snappier or funkier sound RELEASE 50 5000ms This parameter allows you to specify how fast the compressor of the corresponding band should stop working when the signal level drops below the THRSHLD value The right setting for this parameter depends on the RATIO value you select If the level jumps between notes are too abrupt a phenome non known as pumping increase the value until the transitions seem a little smoother THRSHLD 36 0dB This parameter allows you to set the level the frequency band in question must have in order to trigger its compressor The lower the value the more noticeable the compression wi
299. e ia c Play a few notes on the keyboard to audition the sound pos TT Usa d If necessary change the CONTROLS settings by pressing asal Paa a their fields and using the dial or the DEC SIGE RANA ABG PS buttons The four fields refer to the following aspects EXPRESS Temporary volume changes CC1 1 be SINE POLL REVERB Reverb Send CC91 i e how strongly the selected track should be processed by the reverb effect PANPOT The track s stereo placement L63 0 R63 CHORUS Chorus Send CC93 i e how strongly the selected track should be processed by the cho rus effect These settings may come in handy to ensure that all ACC1 parts for example use the same amount of reverb and are always located in the right half of the stereo image You can also change them later see p 189 e Repeat steps a d for the remaining tracks modes and patterns f Press the first field the numerator and enter the desired number of beats using the dial or the DECJ INC buttons 131 G 70 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer 9 Selecting the track the Mode and the Division To keep things easy let s start with the drums of the MAIN 1 pattern Press the field and use the dial to select the track you wish to record to Select ADrums This causes the display to change as follows because there are more options for drum parts Pace Drums maja Maint INPUT QUANTIZE TRACK INSTRUM
300. e entry that says something to the effect of Stop USB disk G70_SSD or Stop USB disk 670 CARD You should now see a window that says something to the effect of The USB device XX can now be safely removed from the system Click on the OK button THEN Disconnect the USB cable from your computer and the G 70 14 Press the field in the G 70 s display to return to the CONNECTION MODE page 15 Press the button to return to the main page Backing up all data of the G 70 You can make a backup copy of all of the G 70 s inter nal data or the contents of a memory card by pro ceeding as follows Connect the G 70 to your computer On your computer create a folder named Backup or any other name Double click the icon assigned to the G 70 s internal memory or memory card to open its window Select its entire contents Ctrl A or Command A Drag the selected files to your Backup folder icon and drop them there Wait until all files have been copied To send the files back to the G 70 or its memory card Open the Backup folder on your computer hard disk Open the window of the G 70 s internal memory or memory card Arrange the two windows in such a way that you can drag files from Backup to G70_SSD or G70_CARD Return to the Backup folder and select its entire contents Ctrl A or Command A Drag all selected folders to the G70 SSD or G70 CARD window a
301. e inserted by pressing the field and entering the Press to return to the 16 track Sequencer s desired value using the dalarahe main page or bear with us for there are still a few DECI IINC buttons ERA Lg COD Nola MUA e Press the field to confirm your settings and add the new event Other edit operations Press to close the pop up window without You probably noticed the buttons in the right half of applying your changes the MASTER TRACK EDIT page They allow you to reduce or expand the number of events of the MAS TER track BVIEW Press this button icon if the list of MASTER track events has become so long that finding the events you wish to edit takes too much time for comfort 173 G 70 Music Workstation Using the 16 track sequencer E ERASE EVENT e se the dial to select the event you want to delete e Press the field to erase the selected event Note Tempo and time signature events located at 1 01 00 cannot be erased BI MOVE EVENT This function allows you to move one or several events e Select the event you want to move If you want to move several events it would be a good idea to select the first or last event of the series Note For this function you could take advantage of the VIEW filter to avoid selecting event types that should remain where they are See VIEW on p 173 Note Tempo and time signature events located at 1 01 00 cannot be moved e To select several consecutive events pre
302. e page 41 Rotary Slow Fast Allows you to select the slow or fast speeds of the Rotary effect This only works if the Rotary effect is currently assigned to the Multi FX to return to the main p age Using optional footswitches FC7 PEDAL The G 70 allows you to connect an optional FC 7 Foot Controller to the FC7 PEDAL socket FC 7 PEDAL HOLD FOOT FOOT FOOTSWITCH SWITCH PEDAL o o At first the switches of this pedal board are assigned Arranger control functions You can however assign other functions to these switches Note The FC 7 assignments apply to the G 70 and are not writ ten to individual User Programs Selecting another User Program is therefore not enough to reconfigure the FC 7 The assignments can however be saved along with all User Programs using Save User Program Set on p 205 1 Press the button The display changes to MENW i ty G z o om oo zo fee m J LU YOCAL SPLIT amp TOUCH sg ARRMONIST 7 STYL ARRANGER E Z COMPOSER SETTING mg Ui La yo CEO Ae HAN f CONTROLLERS STORAGE 2 Press the field followed by the field EVO TONY LE Note The assigned functions apply to the G 70 as a whole and are not written to individual User Programs 3 Press the pedal field of the footswitch you wish to assign another function to Example to change the assignment of the second pedal from the right press th
303. e G 70 understands G 70 Music Workstation Roland Using the Style Cover function Note You can also modify the COVER settings yourself see p 124 Bl Saved Version The STYLE COVER page contains a field that works as follows There can be three different versions of each Music Style you use 1 The original Music Style without COVER settings This version can be selected by pressing the field on page 1 x The same Music Style with one of the COVER presets already applied This version can be saved using the field If you save this version the Music Style in question will use the COVER settings whenever you select it using the standard procedure see p 27 or the Style Finder see p 86 A Music Style saved with the field which you recall and then alter by selecting another COVER pre set without saving this setting In case 3 the field on the STYLE COVER page temporarily restores the original version with no COVER data To return to state 2 after selecting a different COVER press the field Doing so restores the original COVER setting you saved Note Saving a Music Style with a COVER settings affects all User Programs that refer to this Style 3 Saving a Music Style with a COVER alteration As stated above you can decide to change any Music Style on a more or less permanent basis by saving It with the last COVER or STYLE MAKEUP TOOLS p 124 1 On the STYLE COVER page select the desir
304. e Grand X PER Vintage EP1 Note If the currently displayed User Program was loaded with the User Program Finder the G 70 now displays the USER PROGRAM FINDER page where you can select another regis tration in the internal memory or on a card a card To work with User Programs of the currently active Set List Alternatively press the USER PROGRAM button The display changes to factory USERPROCRAM ps fa HOLD NG MIDI so m SETTINGS LINE lu LINE WRITE 1 Blue Berry Swear Ballad Celebrating a Blue Shoes i Fame Rock d Know Him Hands Up Party Misty Jazz pa p5 Il ip 2 Use the P fields and to select the page 1 18 where you want to save your registration 3 Press a big field 1 8 to select the destination memory _OR Press a numeric button 1 8 to select the corre sponding memory the button you pressed lights You can also use these buttons without first pressing to select one of the User Programs on the last page you selected If you only press a numeric button the page shown above does is not displayed _OR G 70 Music Workstation Roland Selecting User Programs Press the dial and enter the number shown at the right edge of a field using the on screen numeric pad You will notice that each User Program also has a fixed number that allows you to select it without turning pages Sometimes an asterisk is displayed This happens
305. e TEMPO button on the beats where the currently selected line should appear during nor mal playback of the Standard MIDI File Each press of the button associates the text line below the arrows B with the quarter note where the but ton was pressed The preceding line automatically scrolls above the B section while the next line appears below the arrows Press to return to the beginning of the song or use or to jump to a measure that lies a little ahead of the place where the first line should be displayed during normal operation Note If the song already contains Lyrics they will follow the measures indicated in the upper right hand corner when you press or FWD G 70 Music Workstation Roland Adding Lyrics to a song 10 Press The RECORDER button its indicator flashes If you now press or FWD you can go to another measure without causing the text to follow 11 Press the button START STOP LULA Playback and Lyric synchronization recording starts and the button lights 12 On the beat where the first text line should be dis played press the button front panel VET DAO Lyrics Synchronization Aw baby gt Yeah ooh Yeak huh listen to this Spy on me baby use Back Back PRESS PLAY TO START THE INTERNAL SONG ig PRESS TAP TO SYNCHRONIZE EACH LYRICS LINE 13 Repeat this at the quarter note where the second line should be displayed Lyrics Sync
306. e dial or the DEC INC but tons to select the function Hold Assign Auto means that the part in question only responds to Hold messages if it is assigned to the right half SPLIT or the entire keyboard WHOLE On means that the part in question always responds to Hold messages even If it is assigned to the left half of the keyboard Off finally means that the part does not respond to Hold messages 5 If necessary press another PART field and change the HOLD ASSIGN setting for the selected part 6 Press the button to return to the main page my gee SS Ha Foot Switch An optional DP 2 DP 6 or BOSS FS 5U footswitch con nected to the FOOT SWITCH socket can be used to per form various functions If you do not change the fac tory setting this footswitch allows you to start and stop Arranger playback The footswitch assignment can be saved to a User Program The default setting is Start Stop which allows you to start and stop Arranger playback Note also the Soft and Sostenuto options as well as the possibility to select one of several Hold functions The footswitch can only perform one function at a time though 1 Press the button The display changes to 1 FOOT VA Teea gt CONTROLLERS M VOCAL RN SPLIT TOUCH AA oe PUSA GN ARRANGER T a STYLE SETTING ly Composer RR FUNCTION NG ER UTILITY RSE tone evi AO HAND as USB DATA Me EONTRoLLeRsS GC STORA
307. e effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Panpot A L64 0 63R Panpot B L64 0 63R Stereo location of Delay A B Level A 0 127 Level B 0 127 Volume of delay A B EO Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 73 3D Delay This applies a 3D effect to the delay sound The delay sound will be positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right Delay Left Time sync msec Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not msec the left delay time should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the following parameter refers to a speed or a note value Delay Left Time msec 0 2600ms Adjust the time from the direct sound until when the left delay sound Is heard Delay Left Time note Musical Notes Delay times can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to msec Specify the value of the desired note Delay Right Time sync msec Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not msec the right delay time should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setti
308. e field and set the value 20 250 using the dial or the DECJ INC but tons 3 Press the button to record one or two beats then press it again to stop recording Do not play on the keyboard or use any controllers connected to the G 70 though Note The last tempo value you record becomes the Style s preset tempo TDIO Style Track Edit functions All display pages of the Style Track Edit mode have a field that allows you to jump to the STYLE COM POSER page The STYLE TRACK EDIT functions are very similar to those of the 16 track sequencer If you know how to use those you will have little trouble understanding how the STYLE TRACK EDIT functions work Here are a few guidelines for editing your User Style a Save your Style before continuing That way you can always return to the original if your changes do not work out as expected See Saving your Style on p 185 for details b Select the track s and pattern s you wish to mod ify c Select the range FROM and TO for the edit opera tion d Enter what should be changed and how it should be changed Press the desired field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons e Execute the operation by pressing the field f Save your Style again The STYLE TRACK EDIT level of the STYLE COMPOSER provides 12 functions Quantize Erase Delete Copy Insert Transpose Change Velo Change Gate Time Glo bal Change Shift Clock Track Length and Time Signat
309. e happy with everything but the bass line s sound 3 Press one of the six fields in the lower half of the display to select another preset After selecting a preset you can press page 1 to return to the original orchestration 4 If none of the displayed presets appeal to you use the PAGE fields at the right to jump to another page with more presets 5 Try out various presets to see how fast this con cept works 6 If you like the new version better than the original one you can press the field to save the song to the internal memory a memory card or floppy disk with this information page 130 Note The COVER information is part of the data only the G 70 understands You can still play back the newly saved version of this song on another sequencer or SMF player but the COVER information will be ignored Note You can also modify the COVER settings yourself see p 125 G 70 Music Workstation Roland Playing back songs Standard MIDI Files Minus One Minus One means that at least one part of a song is not played back There are at least two applications for this function e it allows you to play the muted parts yourself on the keyboard e it allows you to sing without doubling by the song which may sound odd 1 Press and hold the button The button light and the melody part track 4 is muted If you want to mute other parts or use another preset proceed as follows 2 Press and
310. e its chord recognition in the left half see page 80 for details Select PIANO to activate PIANO CHORD recognition EASY SETTING ARR ORGAN PIANO Note Pressing one of these buttons not only selects the desired Keyboard Mode but also sets a series of other parame ters In some cases the parts you may have been using up to that point are suddenly muted Another important aspect is that the split point see below will be set to C3 when you press or ORGAN In ARRANGER mode the keyboard is split into two halves The eft half is used for playing chords that the Arranger uses for transposing the Music Style patterns in realtime The right half on the other hand can be used for adding a live melody to the Arranger s automatic accompaniment This melody can be played using the Upper1 UP1 part Feel free Only the UP1 part is active in the right half of the keyboard see page 29 for an explanation of this con cept ZONE LEFT page 80 INTELLIGENT chord recognition TYPE page 80 One button here ARR therefore allows you to pre pare the main parameters for working with the auto matic accompaniment called Arranger Except for the addition of the LW1 part the EASY SETTING button has the same effect In PIANO mode the Upper1 part UP1 is assigned to the entire keyboard Upper 1 UP1 using a piano sound Later on you will discover that this way of using the keyboard is also called Whole and
311. e last but one pedal field 4 Use the dial or the DEC INC but tons to select the desired function G 70 Music Workstation Roland Using optional footswitches Start Stop Intro Variat 1 Variat 2 Variat 3 Variat 4 Ending These are the default functions of the FC 7 s footswitches 1 7 They duplicate the functions of the STYLE CONTROL buttons MBass KBD Arranger Allows you to set the Arranger Chord parameter to Off chord recognition as well as ABS recognition off see p 80 and at the same time select the SPLIT Keyboard mode and activate the MBS part and vice versa Note Pressing the footswitch you assign this function to does not mean that the Arranger stops If you switched on the Arr Hold function page 80 the last recognized chord will go on sounding so that your MBS part may drown in the accompaniment We therefore suggest you assign the Arranger Hold function to an ASSIGN SW button or another FC 7 footswitch and use it to switch off the Arranger Hold function so that the Arranger only plays the drum pattern of the selected Music Style Piano Standard You can alternate between Standard and Piano Style Arranger Chord modes When the former is selected the chord recognition area page 80 is automatically set to LEFT When you switch to Piano Style the chord recognition area is automatically set to WHOLE Furthermore the KBD MODE button is switched on and the Upper 1 part is activate
312. e may indeed be difficult That is why the G 70 allows you to mute parts that you do not want to hear during recording 1 On the STYLE COMPOSER page which should be displayed now the field and the lines of the Style tracks you don t want to hear Such tracks are flagged with an M SLES aoj MAar F 2 474 2 Press the field again to switch off the func tion of the same name Note The on off status only applies to the STYLE COMPOSER page During normal Arranger playback all tracks that contain data are played back Use the Erase function to remove parts that should not appear in your accompaniments see p 192 W Solo If you need to listen to a track in isolation press the field and the field of the track you want to solo and start playback This mutes all other tracks while the selected track is flagged with an S You can also select the track to be soloed using the 4 v buttons Press the field again to switch off the func tion of the same name Remarks EB Working from top to bottom programming hints If you listen carefully to the factory Styles you will notice that most divisions are very similar to one another and that the element of evolution or amplification between the various levels is usually derived from adding instruments to otherwise identi cal parts The MAIN 2 division may for instance add an electric guitar to the drums bass and organ lines of the MAIN 1 level
313. e unique type of modulation characteristic of these speak ers can be simulated quite closely This effect is most suitable for electric organ sounds of the bank the Har monic Bar section has its own Roary effect Tweeter Slow Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Woofer Slow Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Slow speed SLOW of the high or low frequency rotor Tweeter Fast Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Woofer Fast Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Fast speed FAST of the high or low frequency rotor Rotary Speed Slow Fast Simultaneously switches the rotational speed of the low frequency and high frequency rotors SLOW Slows down the rotation to the Slow Rate FAST Speeds up the rotation to the Fast Rate Tweeter Acceleration 0 15 Woofer Acceleration 0 15 Adjusts the time it takes the rotor in question to reach the newly selected speed Fast or Slow Lower values correspond to slower transistions Tweeter Level 0 127 Woofer Level 0 127 Volume of the rotor in question Separation 0 127 Spatial dispersion of the sound Level 0 127 Output level 10 Compressor Reduces high levels peaks and boosts low levels smoothing out fluctuations in volume Compressor Sustain 0 127 Allows you to specify how strongly incoming signals should be compressed which results in a longer sustain Compressor Attack 0 127 Sets the speed at which compression starts Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound
314. eactivated when the sequencer reaches this position Playback will continue however and needs to be stopped using the but ton To take advantage of the PUNCH IN OUT function you need to switch on the and button icons Note The Punch In Out function can also be assigned to an optional FC 7 pedal unit see p 68 or a footswitch see p 69 For those applications there is no need to set the PUNCH IN amp OUT positions beforehand To this end you need to press the field 12 If necessary press the field and set the required octave transposition 4 4 This allows you to record special noises usually assigned to the lowest notes numbers like the ones of fingers sliding over guitar strings etc if the sound assigned to the track provides them 13 Specify how long the count in should be before recording starts by pressing the field and using the dial or the DECI INC buttons to select one of the following options Off No count in recording starts as soon as you press the button while flashes 1 Meas Recording starts after a 1 bar count in 2 Meas Recording starts after a 2 bar count in Wait Note Recording starts as soon as you play a note on the keyboard There will be no count in 14 If you want to record tempo changes press the field and use the DEC INC switches to select On This option allows you to use the TEMPO buttons and or to vary the tempo while recording Those changes
315. eam Controller can be used for add ing scratch noises You know what that is don t you Tape Rewind Allows you add the sound you hear when you rewind a cassette tape without stopping playback the music plays backwards and at high speed Sound EFX Here you can select various noises to be added to your music simply by moving your hand over the D Beam We will not try to describe them Just try them out D BEAM Boeeeen Bubble If necessary use the PAGE 1 PAGE 3 fields to go to another page Instrum In this case the D Beam will play musical notes The pitch and chords of those patterns depend on the notes you play on the keyboard Please try out the options on offer It s the quickest way to find out how they sound and work DY BEAM DJ GEAR SOUND EF L J INSTRUM E Bass Drum Drum F CONTROLS If necessary use the and fields to switch pages Controls The options on this page allow you to control one of the G 70 s functions D YEA D Modulation Modulation asan Cut Cut Reso Down Down Chord 1 Octy 1 Octy Chord 2 Octy If necessary use the PAGE 1 PAGE 4 fields to go to another page Note If you plan to use the D Beam Controller while control ling the Arranger it is probably a good idea to activate its Hold function page 80 G 70 Music Workstation Roland Using the D Beam Controller Start Stop Style Depending on the current c
316. ect that Style or when you take advantage of the One Touch function page 78 The One Touch function however allows you to filter the tempo setting by activating TEMPO which means that the preset tempo is no longer loaded automati cally On the other hand you are free to change a Music Style s tempo any time See Changing the tempo on p 28 That value can be written to a User Program and will then be set every time you select that User Program The Style and also song tempo is displayed on the main page PRESET AUTO and LOCK allow you to specify what happens when you select another Style If Arranger playback is stopped when you select another Style PRESET AUTO The Arranger loads the preset tempo of the new Style LOCK The preset tempo of the new Style is not If the Arranger is run ning when you select another Style The Style s preset tempo is loaded The new Style is played back at the tempo of the previous Style loaded Instead the Style will be played at the current tempo TEMPO CHANGE RITARD and ACCELER 1 2 3 Nam _ _ The ACCELER RITARD parameter allows you to speed up or slow down the Arranger tempo by the amount you set here To use them you must assign them to the ASSIGN SW buttons or an optional FC 7 There are three Ritardando functions one for all Style divisions one for Ending patterns and one for Fill Ins They all use the TEMPO CHANG
317. ectable beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the G 70 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation should Start after the selected beat BIO By default the TO position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL TI TO BAR 1 lt last measure of the track or song This is where you specify the bar position of the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat BDATA TYPE Allows you to select the data to be shifted ALL All parameters listed below Note Only note messages P Bender Pitch Bend data Control Control change messages Change Prog C Program change messages NRPN Non registered parameter number parameters These are parameter control functions of the GS GM2 format that are easier to use than SysEx messages but basically have the same function RPN Registered parameter number parameters They work like NRPN messages e
318. ects that registration s name which changes accord ingly e Press the field W Delete This function allows you to delete the selected User Program from the internal memory area or memory card You should use this as sparsely as possible e Press the field Deleting a User Program can not be undone which is why the following question is now displayed 4 This File will be DELETED from Memory Card Know Him o User Prg Style Link NGBEATS I Genre Ballad Song Link FIRST DAY pe Ee ARE YOU SURE deletes the User Program file leaves the file intact and takes you back to the initial User Program Finder page with the list leaves the file intact and takes you back to the USER PROGRAM LIST page Note If a User Program you delete here is assigned to a Set List the memory in question no longer refers to a file Note Deleting a User Program that doubles as Music Assistant registration also discards the Music Assistant entry For safety reasons an error message Is displayed in that case W Music Assistant Mark Note This function is not available for User Programs that reside on floppy disk This option allows you to add an MA label to the selected User Program which means that its registra tion settings appear in the Music Assistant list see p 36 Press the field Oo On ON Que Know Him UNKNOWN 99 Ballons UNKNOWIN UNKNOWN iUNK NOWN FOUND 538 Seje KJ A gt Use the familia
319. ed COVER preset see above 2 Press the field a aa zN BAND 4a 1 924 924 DANCE oO Fa 11H ernie y The display changes to SAVE a a _ a Cool Live Band Pa ae oe meses TI G 70 Music Workstation Additional Arranger Style functions This page allows you to save the current Style to the internal memory a memory card or a floppy disk It will be saved along with the COVER settings you selected Press the EXTERNAL MEMORY FLOPPY or INTERNAL MEMORY field to select the area where you want to save the Music Style 3 Nam Enter the name for the file See page 49 If you are sure you will always use the selected Style with the COVER preset you selected proceed with the next step 4 Nam Note The G 70 supports both upper and lower case letters for file names Choose whichever is more convenient or clearer Press the field to save the data If the selected memory area already contains a Music Style of that name you are asked whether it is OK to overwrite it Y A file of this name ei A already exists Overwrite 5 _ Press the field to overwrite the file This replaces the Music Style in question with the new version Press the field to return to the SAVE STYLE page change the name then press again The data are copied and a Operation Successful message confirms the end of the operation Note To reassign the origi
320. ed on tion All characters behind this position move one position further to the right 5 Press the field and enter the file name See p 86 for details Here you can enter 18 charac ters All characters will be capitals BI Solo If you need to listen to a track in isolation press the field and the field of the track you want to solo and start playback This mutes all other tracks while the selected track is flagged with an S You 6 If you also want to add Finder information press can also select the track to be soloed using the a v the and fields and enter the buttons desired characters Press the field again to switch off the func See Working with the Song Finder on p 140 for anG details about the Song Finder Note These two indications are not available for files you save to floppy disk 7 Press the field to save your song The display tells you that the data are being saved after which it returns to the SAVE SONG page 8 Press the or the RECORDER button to return to the main page Bl Song Cover and Song Makeup Tools The G 70 does not recognize changes made to a song using the SONG MAKEUP TOOLS function The 16 track Sequencer only sees the original song data not the changes introduced by the SONG MAKEUP TOOLS functions Editing one or several tracks TRACK EDIT The TRACK EDIT level of the 16 track Sequencer pro vides 12 functions Quantize Erase Delete Copy Insert Transpose
321. ed while the MUTE function is on Soloed tracks are flagged with an S while muted tracks use the letter M The remaining indications in the second column from the left are J note symbol The track is currently playing If you look at the example above you will notice a white ver tical line on top of several horizontal bars The white line refers to the current position within the song which is also indicated in the MEAS field The bars indicate that a track contains musical data in that posi tion Now look again at the illustration only the tracks that contain note data at the current position and that are not muted have the J symbol If while the page above Is displayed you press the RECORDER button track 1 which is currently selected will be flagged with an R for Record Note that you can only record one track at any one time The button icons in the right most column are TRACK EDIT MICRO EDIT MASTER TRACK see page 171 INITIALIZE SONG see page 156 see page 160 see page 175 General considerations The 16 track sequencer can be used to record sequen tially onto 16 tracks one track after the other Since the 16 track sequencer and the Recorder share the same RAM memory they are in fact different incarna tions of the same concept you can lay down your first tracks using the Recorder with or without Arranger and then select the 16 track sequencer to add new tracks or change existing ones
322. elay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the modulation rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound Output Mode Speaker Phones Adjusts the method that will be used to hear the sound that is output to the OUTPUT jacks The optimal 3D effect will be achieved if you select SPEAKER when using speakers or PHONES when using headphones EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 59 3D Flanger This applies a 3D effect to the flanger sound The flanger sound will be positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right Filter Type OFF LPF HPF Type of filter OFF no filter is
323. eld appear that allow you to set the upper and lower limit of the notes to be copied See also Fine tuning the setting range on p 163 MIDST TRACK This is where you select the track to which you want to copy the selected data If you set SRC TRACK to ALL the DST TRACK setting cannot be changed INTO The bar beat and CPT values of the position the first data of the source track will be copied to W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and copy the data Note Though you can also copy data from track 10 the main Drum track to a music track and vice versa this is only use ful if you assign a Drum Set to the selected destination DST track A drum track indeed sounds odd when played by a piano for example and a piano part is not necessarily suited for drumming G 70 Music Workstation Roland Editing 16 track songs INSERT n asa Sento sarene Ne Chance Gece _ uenanee FROM TIME SIGNATURE om o1 boo INSERT allows you to insert new data and shift data that lie behind the FROM position further towards the end of the song this is the exact opposite of DELETE These empty measures can be filled using the COPY function or by recording new phrases in that area using PUNCH IN OUT for example page 164 Note The Insert function does not provide a TO pointer Instead you have to specify the length of the insert using the FOR values BTRACK ALL 1 16 Allows you to select the tr
324. en the My Computer window Windows 9 Check whether your computer found a G70_SSD G70_CARD or just Removable Disk drive 10 Open that drive by double clicking on its icon 11 Open the folder you need This depends on whether you want to delete rename add songs Music Styles User Programs or text files Chain gt Only to computer and only copy 166 X p gt Please ignore ema Please ignore Midiset X Please ignore CJ Puk New Music ssistants Here gt To and from computer Put New Songs Here gt To and from computer Put New Styles Here To and from computer Puk New UserPrograms Here gt To and from computer IROMStyle X p gt Please ignore Sang BM ccp Only to computer and only copy Istye uy p gt Only to computer and only copy CI Text B To and from computer kai Update ____y__y Please ignore __ Userprg x p Only to computer and only copy 12 Do one of the following e Copy the desired Music Styles from the Styles folder to your computer s hard disk using drag amp drop To copy Styles from your computer to the G 70 drag amp drop them over the Put New Styles Here folder Copy the desired songs from the Song folder to your computer s hard disk using drag amp drop To copy songs from your computer to the G 70 drag amp drop them over the Put New Songs Here folder
325. en to know the usually cryptic name of the song file then enter the desired characters Entering characters Enter only as many characters as you think are nec essary to find the song you are after The character string you enter can be used in two ways see below e Use the and fields to select the position for which you wish to enter a new character e Use the alohanumeric keypad to enter the desired characters This keypad works exactly like the keypad of a cellphone you may have to press an alphanu meric field several times to select the desired charac ter or number Note There is no field here because the Finder makes no distinction between upper and lower case letters e The field allows you to delete the character indicated by the cursor Press and hold it to clear all characters e Press to insert a blank or the number 0 1 G 70 Music Workstation Roland Working with the Song Finder e f you forgot to insert a character use or to select the position where the missing character should be inserted Then press Insert followed by the character you wish to insert e To enter numbers without cycling through the char acters press the field so that its indica tor icon lights After entering the numbers switch it off if you need to enter characters again e Press the field to start your search If the following message appears the G 70 was unable to locate any files that match the sear
326. en too high or too low for com fort So here comes the best part Press one of the USER PRESET fields and then EDITI SINGER R ETEDI LOWEST 9 Sing or 22 Play Mg HIGHEST the HIGHEST note G2 43 of your voice D3 62 B User 1 AI hh all Gf Back Note The field only appears after pressing one of the USER PRESET fields The latter are four memories where you can store your own range settings Press the field if it is not already selected 10 Sing the highest note you can muster effortlessly you can sing it several times If you connected a microphone a field appears Press that field to confirm the note you want the G 70 to recognize This field does not appear if you enter the pitch via the keyboard If you have no microphone handy you can also play this note on the keyboard The G 70 recognizes the pitch and displays the name of the corresponding note 11 Press the field and repeat step 10 tak ing care to sing your lowest possible note 12 Press to store these settings if you wish to use them at a later stage The display briefly confirms that your settings have been stored BINGER KET GUI PEUNESI 3 Sing or 229 Play low the HIGHEST note m Operation complete 13 Press the field to return to the page of the same name 14 Press the field to assign a name to your settings SING KEY HEN ANE maga N E 3 IG on don nod Care Bt ee ie Ente
327. ending on the value you set for TVF Cutoff page 127 this parameter may have no audible effect That is also the case of Tones whose cutoff frequency is already preset to the maximum value Filter Down The cutoff frequency of the Tone assigned to the selected part can be lowered so that the sound becomes mellower Note Depending on the value you set for TVF Cutoff page 127 this parameter may have no audible effect That is also the case of Tones whose cutoff frequency is already preset to the minimum value Modulation Select this function if you want the After touch to duplicate the modulation function of the BENDER MODULATION lever Pitch Up By pressing a key even further down you can bend the notes up to two semi tones up Pitch Down By pressing a key even further down you can bend the notes up to two semi tones down Volume Up This setting allows you to increase the vol ume of the selected part using the Aftertouch Volume Down This setting allows you to decrease the volume of the selected part using the Aftertouch Note The Aftertouch settings apply to the Keyboard part in question so that selecting another sound for such a part does not mean that the values will be reset to O Wif you press ARRANG You can also use the Aftertouch functionality for controlling Arranger playback If you press the field on the SPLIT amp TOUCH AFTER TOUCH page the display looks as follows SPLIT amp T
328. epends on the notes you play on the keyboard the Arranger parts are also transposed Note Parts that play Drum Sets are never transposed SONG During Recorder playback only the song parts during Recorder playback are transposed Though it is perfectly possible to switch on both options at least one of them must be on KEY BOARD could be useful for transposing only the Key board parts so that you can play to a song in your key but sound in the song s key Note If you also want note messages received via MIDI to be transposed you must set TRANSPOSE RX On Off on p 219 to ON 4 Press the button to return to the main page Global Transpose There is also a master transpose control that alters the pitch of all sections of the G 70 Its value is added to the current transposition interval and the Singer Key as well as User Program transposition until you reset it to O or until you switch off your G 70 1 Press the button 00T CONTROLLERS r i o 1 lt o gt i HARMONIST ARRANGER tg STYLE r SETTING Pag COMPOSER 4 FUNCTION UTILITY MIDI ec USB DATA STORAGE TONE EDIT i a 73 o pr HAN CONTROLLERS G 70 Music Workstation Roland Octave 2 Press the field followed by the field 440 0 Hz KT i 3 Use the and fields to transpose the G 70 s pitch The setting range is 6 0 5 sem
329. er Program Finder information Editing the User Program Finder information Eung aN INER Asics ie yee newer eres Music Assistant functions 0 Creating new Music Assistant registrations Editing Music Assistant registrations Saving a Music Assistant entry Song and Style Makeup Tools Mixing Song or Style parts Using the Makeup Tools 20005 Cai Ba CA see ya SOUND EDITTO aho o AA SOUND EDIT for Drum DON kama e eee BAGAN DRUM INSTR EDIT nonan nnana nananana aaan COMMON ATA CEEECEE ESES CEECE EEESC 11 12 13 14 15 G 70 Music Workstation Roland Contents Saving your modified song or Style 130 Editing the Vocal Harmonist parts 131 SNIE ENGE a eers kinat rare RER E ENERE R 131 VOICE FA ENS anudaxecudtadeendiaeedaoees 132 Auto Pitch settings a cc cece eee ee 133 vocoder SELIINGS resid rreri nirun EE NAG ees 134 Small Settings s naanakan GA Na kk Potudeaeesens 135 EVISCIMOIE SETUNG Ss snus xedasbetviexcetedeenis 136 More refined song functions 138 Using the Fade In Out function 138 Programming MARK amp JUMP locations 139 Working with the Song Hnder 140 Locating files with the Song Finder 140 Editing the Song Finder information 141 Editing an MOEX APAN PP PAP PARAS RARE 143
330. er bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat Note If you only need to edit one event or message we recommend using the STYLE MICRO EDIT page page 198 BIDATA TYPE Allows you to select the data to be edited ALL All parameters listed below Note Only note messages Modulat CCO1 messages usually use for adding vibrato i e use of the BENDER MODULATION lever PanPot CC10 messages that specify the stereo posi tion Express CC11 messages that are usually used for tem porary volume changes This parameter can also be edited on the MIXER page see p 189 Reverb Reverb Send messages how strongly the part should be processed by the reverb effect This parameter can also be edited on the MIXER page see p 189 Chorus Chorus Send messages how strongly the part should be processed by the chorus effect This parameter can also be edited on the MIXER page see p 189 Prog C Program change messages used to select sounds or Drum Sets Note by deleting pro gram change messages you also dispose of the related CCOO and CC32 bank select mes sages P Bender Pitch Bend data i e use of the BENDER MOD ULATION lever NRPN Dr Changes to the pitch o
331. er for editing something you can also do by pressing the corresponding display field While the main page is displayed the dial and DECJ INC buttons also allow you to set the tempo TALK AUTO PITCH SINGER SMALL ENSEMBLE G 70 Music Workstation Roland Front panel EXIT button Press this button to return to the previously selected display page or the G 70 s main page SONG C pace po bo SLOW FAST gt STYLE C DEFAULT Crnace a The TYPE buttons finally are used to select the parameter that can be changed using the sliders reverb or chorus send level stereo position or vol ume TEMPO section button Press this button to switch the internal metronome on or off The remaining buttons allow you to set the tempo of the metronome the Arranger or the recorder sequencer Note You can press and hold most buttons to jump to an associated display page VOCAL HARMONIST VOICE FX HARMONY VOCODER EFFECTS INPUT GAIN OVER OFF MAX OFF MAX MIN MAX TONE E PIANO E GUITAR SRX PIANO KEYBOARD CHR PERC ORGAN ACCORDION A GUITAR BASS STRINGS EXPANSION PERCUSS HARMONIC BAR SAX PAD BRASS TRUMPET WIND SYNTH ETHNIC SFX DRUMS 3 EASY SETTING section This key pad allows you to reconfigure the G 70 by pressing just one button use the Arranger in split mode the name says it all and assign a piano sound to the entire key board See also page 56 FINDER section Press one
332. erb or chorus send level of the selected drum instru ment The effects themselves can be changed on the COMMON page see below VELOCITY This parameter allows you to modify the velocity range of the drum instrument in question O means that the recorded values are left untouched a negative setting reduces all velocity values by the same amount leaving variations intact while a positive set ting shifts all velocity values in a positive direction PITCH Use this parameter to tune the selected drum instrument higher or lower The main reason for doing so would be to create a special effect or to make a snare sound etc slightly snappier O means that the pitch is left unchanged If necessary press the field to save your set tings page 130 COMMON After pressing the field on the Palette page the display looks as follows The parameters on this page apply to the entire song or Music Style and do therefore not depend on the kind of sound or Drum Set you selected DRUM INSTR EDIT REVERE LEVEL Fa Gg EmA 8 o Hab ginal Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the desired value REVERB TYPE This parameter allows you to specify what kind of reverb effect you need The available reverb types are Room1 These types simulate the reverb characteris Room2 tics of a room The higher the number 1 or Room3 2 the
333. erent MIDI environ ments studio live band preparing three MIDI Sets and linking them to the User Programs you usually use in the studio on stage etc can be a time saver In other situations such a link could be dangerous because it would reconfigure the G 70 s MIDI parame ters without you actually knowing it 1 Press the USER PROGRAM button The display changes to factory USERPROCRAM tive HOLD NG MIDI so Mm SU W SETTINGS LINE lu LINK WRITE 1 Blue Berry Swear Ballad Celebrating Blue Shoes Fame Rock j Know Him Hands Up Party i Misty Jazz pa p5 TT 2 Press the field 3 Press a MIDI Set 1 8 field to select the desired MIDI Set To break the link to this MIDI Set press its field again all indicator icons must be dark 4 Press to return to the User Program selec tion page or the button to return to the main page The selection field on the USER PROGRAM SET LIST page now contains a small MIDI message On the main page User Programs with a link to a MIDI Set are indicated by means of a MIDI socket icon User Program Recall Whenever you switch on the G 70 it automatically selects the Cancel mode i e no User Program page 112 But maybe you prefer to be operational right away In that case tell the G 70 which User Pro gram it should recall whenever you switch it on 1 Press the button The display changes to EN FE HAND AA
334. es the most helpful functions Song Style User Program Finder the PLAY LIST function and automatic song links to User Programs are only available for files on memory card or in the internal memory 2HD disks have twice the capacity of 2DD disks so use 2HDs whenever you can The how to s 1 Press the button The display changes to YE MELA FILE F9 COPY FORMAT EA 2 Ifyou intend to work with a floppy disk or memory card insert it into the drive or slot 3 Select the function you need by pressing the cor responding field in the right column 4 Select the data type you want to save load rename or delete by pressing one of the big fields E STYLE 5 On the display page that appears now select the target media INTERNAL MEMORY or memory card G 70 Music Workstation Roland The how to s 6 Do one of the following if necessary e For operations press the field that contains the name of the file you wish to load Use the fields if the desired file is not currently displayed e For operations enter a name for the file you are about to save e For operations select the file you wish to dispose of e For operations select the file you wish to copy e For other operations see page 209 7 If available press the field 8 Press the button to return to the main page In the following we will use the word media to refer to the three memory areas available
335. es to select the desired charac ter or number The field allows you to switch between upper case and lowercase characters e The field allows you to delete the character indicated by the cursor Press and hold it to clear all characters e Press to insert a blank or the number O If you forgot to insert a character use or to select the position where the missing character should be inserted Then press Insert followed by the character you wish to insert Note The G 70 supports both upper and lower case letters for file names So choose whichever is more convenient or clear Note The G 70 allows you to use long file names but some windows are relatively short so that only part of the names can be displayed We therefore suggest using short file names maximum 18 characters whenever possible 5 Press the field to save the data Note Saving User Program Sets may take in excess of 10 min utes especially if the target media already contains several sets This is due to the fact that the Database information needs to be updated for User Program Finder use Do not switch off the G 70 while this operation is in progress 1 2 3 4 G 70 Music Workstation Roland Saving data Bl Save MIDI Set Nam After programming 8 MIDI Sets you may find that you need a few more and that you have to make room for the new MIDI Sets To do so without losing existing MIDI Sets you must save the old
336. ess the field in the lower left corner and use the DATA ENTRY DEC INC buttons to select the recording mode Replace Everything you record replaces the data of the selected track This mode is automatically selected when you activate the record function for a track that does not yet contain data If you select a track that already contains data this parameter is set to Mix but could be changed to Replace if you want to overwrite the previ ous version Mix The music or data you record are added to the existing data of the selected track G 70 Music Workstation Roland Recording User Styles from scratch Specifying the pattern length Every Style pattern must have a set length Setting the MEASURE LENGTH value now will help you avoid a lot of confusion once you start recording The Arranger tends to add blank bars at the end of a track which is usually due to the fact that you stopped recording a little late i e after the last bar you played This means that you actually record 5 measures instead of 4 a STOP If you press START STOP after bar 4 EU gyi Ap BY NIN your Style will look and sound like this 5 bars SSS SEE Furthermore in STYLE COMPOSER mode all patterns are looped so that the G 70 keeps playing them back until you press the button A wrong number of measures 5 rather than 4 for example is very likely to put you off so do take the time to set the pattern length before
337. ess to close the pop up window without applying your changes Note Events inserted with PLACE EVENT are added to any events that may already exist in that area Existing events are thus not pushed towards the end of the song G 70 Music Workstation Roland Concept Programming Styles Style Composer Concept New Styles can be created in two ways e By creating new accompaniments from scratch page 180 e By editing existing Styles which requires that you copy them and then alter the settings or notes you do not like page 186 Patterns User Styles and internal Styles are short sequences or patterns of four or eight measures you can select in realtime If you have ever worked with a drum machine or groove box the pattern concept may sound familiar Pattern based accompaniments usually consist of the following elements e The basic groove i e the rhythm that is the backbone of the song e Several alternatives for the basic groove that keep the accompaniment interesting and suggest some kind of evolution or variation e Fill Ins to announce the beginning of new parts e The beginning and ending of a song Programming four to eight patterns for a three minute song is usually enough Just use them in the right order to make them suitable for your song The G 70 allows you to program 54 different pat terns per Style some of which can be selected via dedicated buttons MAIN 1 4 etc Others are selec
338. et to WHOLE Furthermore the Upper 1 part is activated if it was off Press the button to return to the main page G3 G 70 Music Workstation Using the performance functions Using the D Beam Controller The D Beam Controller allows you to control various aspects of your performance or to add something to the music by moving your hand head etc in the arr You only need to make sure that you do so over the two eyes and within a 40cm 16 range Your movements are translated into musical expression Let s first try out the DJ GEAR functions 1 Press the D BEAM button that is assigned to the function you wish to use here the but ton D BEAM DJ GEAR SFX INST CTRL This switches on the D Beam controller while the dis play changes to D YEA TT Motor Style TT Motor Song 2 Start playback of a Music Style page 25 or song page 38 3 Move your hand towards and away from the D Beam s eyes What you hear now is the VinyIRPM effect Now let s do some scratching 4 Press the field 5 Again move your hand towards and away from the D Beam Now you should hear a scratch sound Try out some other effects by pressing the SOUND EFX INSTRUMENTS and CONTROL fields and selecting one of the available options 6 Press the button to return to the main page G4 D Beam functions The D Beam Controller has two sensors that detect motion such as your ha
339. etc Finder functions for songs Music Styles and User Programs Another highlight of the G 70 is the fact that you can work with an almost unlimited number of songs Music Styles and User Programs in the internal memory on memory card or floppy disk Though there are still internal Music Styles you can also work with CUSTOM links to accompaniments in the internal memor or on memory card and even select such external Styles on the fly The same high speed access system Is available for Standard MIDI Files songs and User Programs Thanks to the clever Finder databases the difference between what s internal and what resides in an exter nal memory has become almost imperceptible Play List function Thanks to the G 70 s Play List function you can pro gram set lists for your performances The advantage of such song chains is that you won t have to look for the desired songs on stage Furthermore you can already prepare the next song while the current one is still running NEXT SONG func tion D Beam controller The G 70 has the acclaimed D Beam Controller for intuitive song and Style playback control and additional DJ like effects via movements over an invisible beam of infrared light And of course the BENDER MODULA TION lever is also there as are sockets for optional foot switches and an expression pedal D Beam technology licensed from Interactive Light Inc and so much more Listing al
340. eter will be set to 63 maximum while the Cutoff frequency can be con trolled between O no change and 64 lowest possi ble TVF Cutoff setting When you move your hand out side the D Beam s range both Resonance and IVF Cutoff return to their original values O no change Note The TVF Cutoff frequency cannot be lowered if TVF Cutoff is already set to 64 Arpeggio Oct 1 2 3 By moving your hand over the D Beam you cause the D Beam part to play arpeggios bro ken chords based on the notes extracted from the cur rent song Depending on the setting you select here the notes will be arpeggiated over 1 2 or 3 octaves Note Do not forget to assign a suitable Tone to the LW2 part which acts as D Beam part Chord Oct 1 2 3 By holding your hand inside the D Beam s range you cause the D Beam part to sound the notes extracted from the current song You could use this function to add syncopated brass or guitar hits to your melody The velocity value used for playing these notes is 100 The number 1 2 or 3 bears on the octave of this added chord 7 Ab3 G4 2 Ab4 G5 and 3 Ab5 G6 Move your hand outside the D Beam s range to stop the D Beam part from sounding the chord Note Do not forget to assign a suitable Tone to the LW2 part which acts as D Beam part Minus One By holding your hand inside the D Beam s range you switch off the parts that can be muted with the button at that tim
341. eturn to the main page GS Hold Footswitch Sustain Also called Sustain pedal or Damper pedal the foot switch you connect to the HOLD FOOTSWITCH socket allows you to hold the notes you play on the keyboard in much the same way as on an acoustic piano Though you cannot assign other functions to this footswitch you can decide when a given part should respond to these messages The Hold function is available for the following parts UP1 2 3 LW1 2 and M Bass on condition that you select WHOLE keyboard mode In SPLIT mode the sus tain pedal s Hold function only works for the right most part When UP1 2 3 are layered the Hold effect applies to those Upper parts This applies to the Auto setting You can also specify whether or not the Melody Intelli gence function MELODY INTELL should respond to Hold messages Note Do not forget to connect an optional DP 2 DP 6 or BOSS FS 5U footswitch to the HOLD FOOTSWITCH socket 1 Press the button The display changes to MENW F FOOT f K toL gt CONTROLLERS i M YOCAL EOS sprite touch 8 ge BU ARRANGER T F STYLE 7 SETTING Wu COMPOSER EF FUNCTION Fo UTILITY KA TONE EDIT mpi HAND lt lt USBDATA po CONTROLLERS STORAGE 2 Press the field followed by 3 4 the HOLD FOOTSW field FOOT CONTROLLERS Use the PART fields to select the Keyboard part whose HOLD setting you want to change Use th
342. evert to its factory defaults To avoid the loss of important data that has been placed in memory a backup of your data should be periodically created see p 211 Before using memory cards e Some data cards are equipped with a PROTECT switch which when turned on protects your data from accidental erasure The G 70 also has such a switch It is recommended that the switch be kept at the ON position and switched to OFF only at the times you wish to write new data onto the card ES mmm LNI SSO On 7 Off e This unit s memory card slot accepts CompactHash and Smart Media 3 3V memory cards Microdrive storage media are com patible You need a commercially available adapter plug for SmartMedia cards e Carefully insert the memory Card all the way in until it is firmly in place e Never touch the terminals of the memory card Also avoid getting the terminals dirty e CompactFlash and SmartMedia 3 3V cards are constructed using precision components Handle the cards carefully paying particu lar note to the following e To prevent damage to the cards from static electricity be sure to discharge any static electricity from your own body before handling the cards e Do not touch or allow metal to come into contact with the con tact portion of the cards e Do not bend drop or subject cards to strong shock or vibration e Do not keep cards in direct sunlight in closed ve
343. ey to its right D2 to play a snare sound Then try out the other keys IPopKik36 IPopCStk37st opsn38st PopGstS39st PopTomL43 PopHat2 44 IPopTomM47 IPopTomHF148 IPopCyml2_52 IPopTomH50 C2 c3 this is only an example 5 Press the button to return to the main page Entries with an icon to the right of their name refer to sounds that reside on the SRX series expan sion board you installed G 70 Music Workstation Quick Start Selecting sounds from an SRX expansion board The G 70 allows you to expand the number of sounds by installing an optional SRX series wave expansion board This allows you to use the same sounds as own ers of a Fantom X synthesizer See Installing a wave expansion board on p 227 for notes about installing such a board If your G 70 already contains such a board because you asked your Roland dealer to install it when you bought the G 70 proceed as follows to select one of the Expansion Tones 1 Specify the part you wish to assign another sound to e Press the TONE ASSIGN button of the desired part so that it lights KEYBOARD PART TONE ASSIGN MBS LW2 LW 1 UP 3 PART ON OFF e On the main page press the row of the part you wish to assign a different Tone to 79 uu at ONG Amazing Grace Cool Live Band Gospel Love he Gnd x _ The G 70 directly jumps to the TONE page that con tains the currently selected sound The red arrow indicates whic
344. f Delays 1 4 EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 71 Reverse DLY This is a reverse delay that adds a reversed and delayed sound to the input sound A tap delay is connected immediately after the reverse delay Threshold 0 127 Volume at which the reverse delay will begin to be applied Rev Delay Time sync msec Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not msec the reverse delay time should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the following parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Rev Delay Time msec 0 1300ms Delay time from when sound is input into the reverse delay until the delay sound is heard Rev Delay Time note Musical Notes Delay times can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to msec Specify the value of the desired note Rev Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Proportion of the delay sound that is to be returned to the input of the reverse delay negative values invert the phase Rev Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Frequency at which the high frequency content of the reverse delayed sound will be cut BYPASS no cut Rev Delay
345. f certain drum instru ments See page 189 BI FROM NOTE O C 127 G9 This parameter is only displayed if DATA TYPE see above is set to Note It allows you to set the note or lower limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range This note can also be selected by pressing the corresponding key after selecting the FROM NOTE field WTO NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the upper limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range This note can also be selected by pressing the corre sponding key after selecting the TO NOTE field It is not displayed when you select EQUAL UNEQUAL HIGHER or LOWER See also Fine tuning the note range on p 192 E EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data G 70 Music Workstation Roland Style Track Edit functions DELETE l l es bea S eaen Grane crock enera siena um ajor Maine FROM Unlike to the ERASE function DELETE also erases the measures so that all measures that lie behind the TO position are shifted towards the beginning of the track s You cannot choose the data type to be erased BTRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track you wish to edit Select ALL to edit all tracks BI MODE Allows you to select the mode of the pattern to be edited Major minor or 7th EI DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division o
346. f the voice effect using the G 70 s Pitch Bend lever Vibrato RATE DEPTH RISE TIME DELAY TIME These are the same parameters as for the Voice FX part See therefore page 133 This time however they apply to the Auto Pitch part Note The button icon must light for the Vibrato effect to be noticeable e Press the field to leave this page If you press the field the VOCAL EQUALIZER page appears It contains a simple equalizer for the Voice FX Auto Pitch and Singer parts See p 132 133 G 70 Music Workstation Editing the Vocal Harmonist parts Vocoder settings The Vocoder is related to voices that are added to your singing Voice FX Auto Pitch or Singer When the indicator lights synthetic har monies are added to your singing Unlike the Auto Pitch function the Vocoder can generate up to four harmony VOICES MOEA aao GENDER MALE VOCODER TYPE pa KI bawang CB NANANA ea 1 Press and hold the button 2 In the GENDER column right press the button icon that corresponds to the kind of synthesizer choir you want to add to your singing Press for a darker character or if the Vocoder signals should be reminiscent of female voices Press to create a mixed choir The field you press here determines what presets are available See also page 46 Note The and fields allow you to Jump to the effects or tone controls 3 Set the desired TRACK value with the
347. fers to a speed Hz or a note value Step Rate Hz 0 10 20 00Hz Rate of the step wise change in the phaser effect Step Rate note Musical Notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Mix Level 0 127 Level of the phase shifted sound EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Level 0 127 Output level 49 MLT Phaser Extremely high settings of the phase difference produce a deep phaser effect Phaser Mode 4 stage 8 stage 12 stage 16 stage 20 stage 24 stage Number of stages in the phaser Phaser Manual 0 127 Adjusts the basic frequency from which the sound will be modulated Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the modulation rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Resonance 0 127 Amount of feedback Mix Level 0 127 Level
348. files on the destination TO media should not be copied only files with original names will be copied in that case The data are copied and a Successful message con firms the end of the operation 7 Press the button to return to the main page TO G 70 Music Workstation Advanced Keyboard part functions Advanced Keyboard part functions Upper 3 Split On p 57 you learned how to split the keyboard into a left half with the LW1 LW2 and possibly also the MBS part and a right half with the UP1 UP2 and or UP3 part You can program an additional split between the UP1 UP2 and the UP3 parts which is great for playing ques tion and answer types of melody lines with a brass sound for Upper3 for example and a clarinet or flute for Upper1 The possibilities are as follows LW1 LW2 MBS Upper 1 and or Upper3 Arranger control Upper 2 The default split point is located at the G5 lowest note of the UP3 part Note This function is also available in WHOLE Keyboard Mode In effect the G 70 allows you to play at least three sounds assigned to three separate keyboard areas On top of that you can select the Arranger s chord recog nition area i e the notes that feed the Arranger page 80 Here is how to activate the UPPER 3 SPLIT function 1 On the main page press the field ONG Amazing Grace Cool L otp P 1 1 Gospel Love ee Pad With Vintage EP1 XY Ac Bass You can also select this p
349. floppy disk To work with a User Program on memory card insert the card and select EXTERNAL MEMORY To work with a User Program on floppy disk insert the disk and select FLOPPY Note The G 70 does not support User Programs of the Roland VA E KR or EM series 3 If available press the field of the User Program you need If the name is not displayed use PAGE to go to a different page then press the field of the settings you are interested in This page lists the names of all individual User Pro grams contained on the selected device Quick location of the User Program you need There are several ways of quickly locating the User Pro gram you are after W Sorting files Press the USER PRG STYLE LINK GENRE or SONG LINK field to sort the User Program files USER PRG The files are sorted alphabetically according to User Program name STYLE LINK User Program files with an active link to a MIDI Set are sorted alphabetically according to Style name TA GENRE The files are sorted alphabetically according to genre kind of music SONG LINK User Program files with an active link to a song file are sorted alphabetically according to song name The right column now contains the selected entry only one of them can be displayed along with the User Program name Continue with step 3 to select the User Program you want to use Mi Using the Index function The highest hierarchical level of the User
350. following page aan GRE TONI 233 f4 EC STADA jara P r TT z Ba y a TRACK INSTRUMENT ACCOMP si BREE iG m Fl EPianol LEG aa Ma 2 Mal EAT es hhh E paa re 2 EA EA y i 5 Select the Mode and Division you want to redo 6 Press the field and select Replace If you want to replace the previous recording with new data Mix To add notes you forgot to record the first time 7 Continue with step 16 on page 183 T34 Saving your Style Make it a habit to save your Styles as frequently as pos sible After all if someone decided to turn off your G 70 now you would lose everything you have programmed so far 1 Press the field on the STYLE COMPOSER page The display changes to SAVE STYLE EXTERNAL INTERNAL MEMORY MEMORY f f Y arve NAME f COUNTRY GENRE Cool Live Band png KI KY aa Doe se a This page allows you to save the current Style to the internal memory a memory card or a floppy disk Press the EXTERNAL MEMORY or field to select the area where you want to save the Music Style e Enter the name for the file See page 49 If necessary you can also supply the required COUNTRY and GENRE information for use with the STYLE FINDER function only available if you select the internal memory or a memory card Note The G 70 supports both upper and lower case letters for file names Choose whichever is more convenient or clearer 2
351. following page appears ERIR INTELLIGENCE f Big Band THRESHOLD KA Traditional 4 Press the field of the desired harmony type TYPE Selecting a Harmony Type also means that the G 70 automatically assigns a suitable sound to the MEL ODY INTELL part e g a trumpet and sax sounds for Big Band etc _ 4 If the desired option is not displayed use the PAGE 1 PAGE 3 fields to select another page Note For Traditional Latin CntryBallad Octavelype1 and Octavelype2 only the UP1 part is used All other Melody Intelligence Types use both the UP1 and the MELODY INTELL part however You can refine Melody Intelligence control by speci fying what velocity value the UP1 notes must have in order to trigger the MELODY INTEL part This allows you to leave the button on at all times while only adding harmonies to your solo play ing during the choruses by hitting the keys a little harder 5 Use the dial or the DEC INC but tons to set the desired Threshold You can also press the dial and enter the value using the on screen numeric pad The Threshold value represents the lowest velocity value between 1 and 127 the UP1 part must receive from the keyboard or via MIDI in order to trigger the MELODY INTELL part If you don t need this switching function select Off no velocity value 6 Press the button to return to the main page 7 P
352. function Press the field Press if you do not want to proceed or to select other files You are asked whether it is OK to overwrite all files on the destination media TO that have the same file names as the files you are about to copy os E Replace files the same name A non Corrida Ab zum Sueden UNKNOWN UNKNOLIN Press the field if it is OK to overwrite files with the same names on the destination media Press the field if files on the source FROM media that have the same name as existing files on the destination TO media should not be copied only files with original names will be copied in that case 119 G 70 Music Workstation Working with User Programs The data are copied and a Function Complete mes sage confirms the end of the operation 7 Press the button to return to the main page Editing an Index All User Programs in the G 70 s internal memory are already assigned to one of the eight categories You can change those assignments and even edit the Index names Furthermore you can copy an Index entry along with all its User Program assignments to a dif ferent entry 1 Press the FINDER button The display changes to a T a a Bane er AG C kowi 2 Specify the memory area EXTERNAL MEMORY or INTERNAL MEMORY 3 Press the NDEX field in the top left corner If the field is currently selected the display looks as follows USE
353. fy whether Note or not Hz the low modulation rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Low Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Rate at which the low range chorus sound is modulated Low Rate note Musical Notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync param eter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Low Depth 0 127 Modulation depth for the low range chorus sound Low Phase 0 180 deg Spaciousness of the low range chorus sound High Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Delay time from when the original sound is heard to when the high range chorus sound is heard High Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to spec ify whether Note or not Hz the high modulation rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value High Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Rate at which the high range chorus sound is modulated High Rate note Musical Notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note High Depth 0 127 Modulation depth for the high range chorus sound High Phase 0 180 deg Spaciousness of the high range
354. gnature If necessary you can Insert tempo changes anywhere within the song After pressing gt for the first time you can specify the numerator the number of beats per bar Press it again to specify the denominator the note value of each beat W SysEx After selecting a SysEx line and pressing gt the dis play looks more or less as follows PIAS TS ASIC Shy SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE EDIT 41 10 42 12 40 01 00 20 28 63 29 20 4D 49 44 fauto sum ko 2 53 4F 4E 47 53 20 5E F7 DELETE NG ESES ede EN KET Lib On this page you can edit an existing SysEx string Use the lt gt fields to select a byte a pair of num bers in the current line and 4 v to change lines SysEx refers to system exclusive messages only the G 70 or another GS compatible sound source understands Changing these values requires a thor ough understanding of the purpose and structure of SysEx messages and that lies beyond the scope of this manual Here are some guidelines however SysEx messages are usually found in the fine print of an owner s manual If not the manufacturer or dealer can supply a copy of that information SysEx messages need to be entered in hexadecimal format hence the A F fields that are considered numbers Hexadecimal means that each group contains 16 different numbers rather than 10 41 in hexadecimal notation actually represents the number 66 in decimal notation 4 x 16
355. grams The G 70 also provides User Program memories that allow you to store almost all settings or registrations you make on the front panel and the various display pages Additional registrations can be loaded directly from the internal memory or a memory card Before taking a closer look at the User Programs there is one thing we have to point out all settings related to MIDI must be written to a MIDI Set page 220 MIDI settings are not saved to a User Program The rea son for this is simple You probably need a lot more memories for your songs than you do for your MIDI gear Writing the MIDI settings to a User Program would slow down the loading process Note You can link a MIDI Set to each User Program so that the User Program in question automatically loads the required MIDI settings About the User Program memory structure Unlike previous Roland instruments the G 70 no longer has a fixed area where it stores User Program settings so that the number of User Programs is in fact unlim ited User Programs can reside in the internal memory or on a memory card You can even load them individu ally using the handy User Program Finder To keep this massive amount of information manage able the G 70 works with User Program Set Lists hence the button Such lists are what their name suggests enumerations of User Program files stored in the same memory area as the list file itself User Program list 8 references x 18
356. gs The display returns to the STYLE COMPOSER page If none of the templates matches the settings you which only contains the sound assignments you have need press the field just made 8 possibilities TRACK INSTRUMENT CONTROLS paanan a V Pop1 se Can be set for TERRE O CEST 3 all 8 tracks ACCOMELJ 4 2terec pnta E AA TEMPO AND TIME SIGNATURE a Here you can prepare the STYLE COMPOSER for the Getting ready for the first track work at hand by selecting the desired sounds and 7 On the STYLE COMPOSER page press the DIVISION setting additional parameters field and use the dial to select the Please proceed in the order given here until you have Division you want to record Intro Main Fill a firm grasp of the flexibility or Ending a Press the field and use the dial or 8 Press the RECORDER button the DEC INC buttons to select the track whose settings you want to change With the exception of the tempo all other parameters only apply to the selected track There are 8 tracks ADrum the drums ABass the bass and Acc1 6 melodic accompani ment parts b Press the field to jump to the TONE SELECT page You can also press a TONE button to assign the desired sound to the track The display changes to The and buttons are not available for Music Style tracks The ADrums track can STL COMPOSER BEC STANDE only use Drum Sets so that only the button of the TONE pad is availabl
357. guitar amp Pre Amp Volume 0 127 Volume and amount of distor tion of the amp Pre Amp Master 0 127 Volume of the entire pre amp Pre Amp Gain Low Middle High Amount of pre amp distortion Pre Amp Bass 0 127 Pre Amp Middle 0 127 Pre Amp Treble 0 127 Tone of the bass mid treble fre quency range Middle cannot be set if Match Drive is selected as the Pre Amp Type Pre Amp Presence 0 127 Match Drive 127 0 Tone for the ultra high frequency range Pre Amp Bright Off On Turning this On produces a sharper and brighter sound This parameter applies to the JC 120 Clean Twin and BG Lead Pre Amp Types Speaker Sw Off On Determines whether the signal passes through the speaker ON or not OFF G 70 Music Workstation Roland Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters Speaker Type Small 1 Small 2 Middle JC 120 Built In 1 Built In 2 Built In 3 Built In 4 Built In 5 BG Stack 1 BG Stack 2 MS Stack 1 MS Stack 2 Metal Stack 2 Stack 3 Stack Select the type of speaker The specifications of each type are as follows The speaker column indicates the diameter of each speaker unit in inches and the number of units Type Cabinet Speaker Microphone SMALL 1 small open back enclosure 10 dynamic mic SMALL 2 small open back enclosure 10 dynamic mic MIDDLE open back enclosure 12x1 dynamic mic JC 120 open back enclosure 12x2 dynamic mic BUILT IN 1
358. h part is active for Tone selection its TONE ASSIGN button also lights Note SRX sounds can be assigned to the following Keyboard parts UP1 2 3 LW1 2 and MBS 2 Press the SRX EXPANSION button E PIANO E GUITAR SRX PIANO KEYBOARD CHR PERC ORGAN ACCORDION A GUITAR BASS STRINGS EXPANSION SAX PAD PERCUSS ONIC VOCAL BRASS TRUMPET WIND SYNTH ETHNIC SFX DRUMS AR The display now responds with a list of Tones avail able on the installed wave expansion board EXP SRX 05 SupDance Pansion cece UPPER Mean Streets i Motivation E tronic Sine Yibrato License2chil Acid Punch Scratch Menu E Gtr Menu PAGES PAGES Imp Note The names of the Tones that are displayed depend on the SRX expansion board you installed 3 Press the field of the sound you are interested in If you don t like it press another field 4 If you are still not happy with the Tone use the PAGE 1 PAGE 5 and fields to select the cor responding page if available 5 Press the field of the desired Tone Alternatively you can proceed as follows e Use the list that came with the expansion board to locate the number of the Patch you would like to use The name Patch is a concept found on Fantom and other Roland synthesizers or modules The G 70 s equivalent is called Tone This also allows you to use Rhythm Sets which are the equivalent of Drum Sets on the G 70 they are usually located a
359. hat area is not altered If a Pitch Bend occurrence is not reset to 0 at some stage all notes will keep sounding flat when you no longer want them to Mi Editing control changes These messages CC can be set to the desired value 0 127 when the corresponding effect is needed but they also need to be reset to O to avoid unpleasant surprises E About the Note messages As stated above note messages comprise a note number a velocity value and a Gate Time value Note numbers can be entered the usual way DATA ENTRY dial or DEC INC The range for note messages is O C 127 G9 Velocity messages can be set anywhere between 1 extremely soft and 127 The velocity value 0 can not be entered because it would effectively switch off the note When you select the Gate Time entry pressing the dial calls up the following pop up Degree This setting refers to the old system for real time conversion of Style track information for Music Style playback Based on the fundamentals of the chords you play during Arranger playback it often leads to odd jumps of certain parts Nearest Refers to a new more musical system for real time note shifts of the Style tracks parts during Arranger playback Let us first look at an illustration Recorded strings part Result with Degree by 8 98 tg Chords played in the chord recognition are
360. he DECJ INC buttons EQ LEVEL 0 127 Use this parameter to set the equal izer s input level This may be necessary when the level of the signals sent to this processor is so high that the sound distorts Note Do not set this parameter to 0 if the equalizer is switched on because doing so means that the OUTPUT MAIN sockets transmit no signal whatsoever EQ GAIN 15 0 15dB Use this parameter to correct the level at equalizer s outputs If the settings of the remaining parameters lead to a significantly lower level which can be checked by switching the Equalizer on and off for A B comparisons select a positive value If your settings lead to a significantly higher level select a neg ative value O means that the level is neither boosted nor attenuated HI FREQ HZ 2000 4000 8000 This parameter allows you to set the cutoff frequency of the high band this is a shelving filter HI GAIN DB 15 15dB Use this parameter to set the level of the selected HI frequency Positive values boost increase the volume of that frequency Negative values cut attenuate it MID FREQ HZ 200 8000Hz This parameter allows you to set the cutoff frequency of the middle band this is a peaking filter MID Q 0 5 1 2 4 8 Use this parameter to specify the width of the MID FREQ band that you want to boost or cut Smaller values mean that neighboring frequen cies above below that value are also affected MID
361. he direct sound until when the left delay sound is heard Delay Right 200 1000ms note Adjust the time from the direct sound until when the right delay sound is heard Delay Center 200 1000ms note Adjust the time delay from the direct sound until when the center delay sound is heard Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Level Left 0 127 Adjust the volume of the left delay sound Delay Level Right 0 127 Adjust the volume of the right delay sound Delay Level Center 0 127 Adjust the volume of the center delay sound EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range 0 High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 21 4 Tap Delay Delay with four repetition lines Delay 1 4 200 1000ms note Adjusts the time until the delay is heard 232 Delay Level 1 4 0 127 Output level of the delay sound Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert t
362. he filter Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation speed Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Chorus Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 16 St Flanger This is a stereo flanger It produces a metallic resonance that rises and falls like a jet airplane taking off or landing Filter Type OFF LPF HPF Type of filter OFF no filter is used LPF cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff value HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff value Cutoff Frequency 200 8000Hz Basic frequency of the filter Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Flanger Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Flanger Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound Flanger Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of
363. he MIDI functions 214 Working with presets cca ann eae 215 Editing procedure AA KUAN WAGE 215 Editing MIDI parameters a eicevcseevetendw see 216 Keyboard Style Song Parts 0c eee 216 MIDI System PAPAG a 2 0008 aaa 217 VO EE S nae cadena AT ted wo OPAPP AP 220 aka MSc sascnenannnnannacsneenuunaes ka 220 Wg kaa cee eee eee ene eee ee 220 MIDI Set selection at power on 005 220 19 Miscellaneous aa 222 Usd VU Kit cameos AG woe eaewase Gma EG 222 General SE COS iwc sais oe decades a Aga Gahan Sane 223 louch Screen BEED APP OPPA PPO PP 223 le SAPAT APA PPO P PAD 223 Initializing the G 70 Factory Reset 224 20 Specifications 0 cc cece eee 225 21 Appendix ance scceutnteneetanesegeaadeede 227 Installing a wave expansion board 227 How to install a wave expansion board 227 Accessing the Patches of SRX series expansion boards via MIDI 0 eee 228 MFX and IFX types and parameters 229 22 MIDI Implementation Chart 250 23 Chord Intelligence ssicrinrsrisnrississrets 251 Le EE E E E E AA 253 TO Important notes G 70 Music Workstation Roland In addition to the items listed under Using the unit safely on p 6 please read and observe the following P ower supply Do not use this instrument on the same power circuit with any device that will gener
364. he corre sponding part in the stereo sound image This is only meaningful if you connect the G 70 to a stereo ampli fier L64 corresponds to hard left O to dead center and R63 to hard right VOLUME Allows you to set the level of the correspond ing part Be aware that even the maximum value pro duces no audible effect if the knob is set all the way to OFF EB Press the field to jump to the follow ing page OZ SUIT PITCH PORTAM TIME RND TUNING Gro Gina IL e Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons e Press the field to switch this effect on Portamento means that the pitch doesn t change in clearly defined steps it produces glides from one note to the next PORTAM TIME Use this parameter to specify the speed at which the glides are carried out The higher the value the slower the transitions RND TUNING This parameter allows you to introduce subtle or not so subtle pitch inaccuracies usually asso ciated with analog synthesizers Irrespective of the choice you make here Low Mid High the effect will be noticeable but never overly dramatic Select Off if you do not need this effect This is not the same as a vibrato effect because it only affects the onset of the notes There is thus no periodic modulation of the pitch NOTE WRAP Activate this field if the Vocoder notes should remain within
365. he effect press the field at the bottom edge of the display See page 132 for the Edit and Equalizer parameters Note To keep your settings you must write them to a User Program Note You can add the or harmonies to this effect 7 Press the button to return to the main page 45 G 70 Music Workstation Quick Start Auto Pitch Here s another interesting effect that can either be used as gimmick or to ensure that even the flattest of renditions suddenly sounds in tune Of course the voice will sound somewhat artificial because the emphasis is on tuning here However even if you just speak the words of a song it will be sung Just the same 1 Press the button 2 Start song playback and say something into the microphone don t sing Sounds like a very popular effect doesn t it 3 Press and hold the button The display changes to SINGER YOICE FX AUTO PITCH ASSIGN PRs Go Pe Let us begin with the most important parameter the notes that will be used by the AUTO PITCH function That is what you specify via the AUTO PITCH ASSIGN fields 4 Set the TRACK value to select a song part The 4 setting usually corresponds to the melody part of a Standard MIDI File and is thus the most likely candidate but feel free to select 1 3 or 5 16 to use another part as melody If you want to play the melody yourself press the or field or both and play the desired notes
366. he following fields for narrowing down your search if you are overwhelmed by the number of songs and pages you need to scroll and FINDER See page 140 6 Select the song you wish to assign by pressing its field so that it is displayed in orange 7 Press the field This takes you to the following page The song is assigned to step 01 and step 02 becomes the last one of your chain End PLAYLIST EEDIT She EXTERNA al 01 FIRSTDAY The field is selected automatically so you can assign a song to it right away Repeat steps 4 7 above to assign a song to this step 9 After compiling your play list press the field PLAY LIST SAVE sie TERA 8 Nam Care Ba ee mor 10 Enter a name up to 18 characters See p 49 for how to enter names 11 Press the field to save your list to the indicated memory area 146 Note This only saves the Play List i e the references to exist ing song files The songs themselves are not saved because that is unnecessary On the other hand if you delete a song see p 142 that is referenced by a Play List step playback stops at that empty step during playback and the File not found message appears The display shows a confirmation message and then returns to the PLAY LIST page Saturday Live 12 Press the button to return to the main page That page now looks as follows Cool Live Band Free Panel wer 1 St_Slow Str The Grand
367. he main page and to cancel your changes which means that the assignments you have just changed will be lost Note After 50 modifications established defeated assign ments the G 70 performs an automatic confirmation like when you press the field Windex Copy 6 This function allows you to copy one Index category along with all its User Program assignments to a another category You could take advantage of this for merging two categories to free up one category for new assignments Note There are eight Index categories in all You cannot cre ate additional categories After performing step 4 above press the field USE ARO GREY S My Favorite In the left column SOURCE press the field whose assignments you wish to copy to another Index cate gory You can also use the a fields In the right column DESTINATION press the field of the index category you wish to copy the assignments to You can also use the a fields Now specify how the User Program assignments should be copied Press the field if the assignments of the DESTINATION Index should be erased and replaced by the entries of the selected SOURCE field Press if the User Program assignments of the SOURCE category should be added to the assign ments of the DESTINATION Index the DESTINATION category will contain more assignments than before Your command is briefly confirmed by the display Note No User Program files are copied
368. he phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 22 Time Delay This effect controls the delay time and pitch in realtime Lengthening the delay time will lower the pitch and shorten ing it will raise the pitch Delay Time 200 1000ms note Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay Acceleration 0 15 Adjusts the time over which the Delay Time changes from the current setting to a spec ified new setting The rate of change for the Delay Time directly affects the rate of pitch change Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB
369. he selected sound see SOUND EDIT for Drum Sets on p 128 if you selected a Drum Set ec Halo Pad f f J Balo g MUTE 8 4 CUTO H RESO ATTACK DECAY JUMP TO jai ISTNOTE RELEASE VE RATE VE DEPTH VE DELAY Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the desired value You can also press the dial and use the numeric pad CUTOFF This filter parameter allows you to make the selected sound darker or brighter Positive Cutoff set tings mean that more overtones will be allowed to pass so that the sound becomes brighter The further this value is set in the negative direction the fewer over tones will be allowed to pass and the sound will become softer darker On page 94 you will find a graphic Note For some sounds positive Cutoff settings will cause no noticeable change because the preprogrammed Cutoff parameter is already set to its maximum value RESO This is a parameter one invariably associates with a synthesizer When the Resonance value is increased the overtones in the area of the cutoff frequency will be emphasized creating a sound with a strong character Note For some sounds negative RESO settings may pro duce no noticeable change because the Resonance is already set to the minimum value The following parameters allow you to set the sound s envelope See page 94 for details ATTACK This parameter adjusts the o
370. he time it takes the rotor tweeter to reach the newly selected speed Fast or Slow Lower values correspond to slower tran sistions Rotary Tweeter Level 0 127 Sets the woofer level Rotary Separation 0 127 Spatial dispersion of the sound Rotary Level 0 127 Sets the outpu level of the effect 84 Center Canc Removes the sounds that are localized at the center of the stereo input This is a convenient way to eliminate a vocal L R Balance 50 0 50 Volume balance of the L left and R right channels for removing the sound Range Low 16 15000Hz Lower frequency limit of the band to be removed Range High 16 15000Hz Upper frequency limit of the band to be removed G 70 Music Workstation Appendix MIDI Implementation Chart 22 MIDI Implementation Chart Music Workstation Date November 2004 Model G 70 Version 1 00 Basic Default 1 16 110 apan Parts Basic Channel Channel Changed 1 16 Off 1 16 Off NTA NTA2 Default Mode 3 Mode 3 Message Mode 3 4 M 1 Mode 3 4 M 1 Altered Note 0 127 0 127 Number True Voice anne 0 127 Velocit Note ON O 4 O 4 y Note OFF X X After Key s O 1 xg Touch Ch s O 4 Pitch Bend O 4 O 1 YY Bank Select Modulation Portamento Time Data Entry Volume Panpot Expression C1 Hold 1 Portamento Sostenuto Soft Hold 2 Resonance Realease Time Attack Time Cutoff Decay Time Vibrato Rate Vibrato Depth Vibrato Delay
371. hicles or other such locations storage temperature 25 to 85 C 12 e Do not allow cards to become wet e Do not disassemble or modify the cards e Never remove the memory card or turn off the power while an operation such as reading or writing data or formatting is being performed on the memory card Doing so can destroy the data on the memory card and or render the memory card itself unusable If you affix the write protect label to the write protect area of a SmartMedia card you will not be able to format the card or write data to it If you wish to format the card or write data to it do so without the label affixed For details on the write protect sticker refer to the owner s manual for your memory card If you attempt to format a card or write data to it when the write protect label is affixed an error message will appear In that case either insert another card or remove the write protect label e At power on do not remove insert a card while the G 70 is updat ing its internal data wait until the messages Song database checking and User Program database checking have disap peared Never turn on the power when a memory card is inserted partway into the slot Doing so will damage the data in internal memory Memory cards usable with the G 70 e The G 70 can use commercially available CompactFlash and SmartMedia memory cards You can purchase such cards at a computer shop or digital camera
372. hold the button 3 Press one of the three preset fields to mute the corresponding song parts Press to mute the melody you will notice that the 4 button icon also lights Press the field to mute everything except the bass and drums Press the field to mute the bass and drum parts 2 and 10 Note Even the preset fields can be used simultaneously And the part fields 1 16 can be added too 4 To mute other parts ad lib i e without taking advantage of the presets Press the field This mutes only 4 the mel ody Switch off all parts you don t want to hear by press ing the 1 lt 3 and 5 16 fields Indicator icons of parts you need must light the others must be dark By pressing one of these fields you switch off the active preset To save this customized Minus setting in the G 70 s internal memory press CUSTO MIZE lt 4 T G 70 Music Workstation Quick Start The field lights to indicate that your settings are now being used 5 Press the button to return to the main page Your last preset selection MELODY USER will be used until you select another preset or until you switch off your G 70 6 Press again to switch off this func tion Note You can also switch the Minus One function on off using an optional footswitch page 68 Vocal Harmonist function The Vocal Harmonist is another highlight of your G 70 In fact it doesn t just produce harmonies it can als
373. hords Note You can also add Lyrics data to songs that do not yet contain them See page 150 for details 4 Press the button if the lyrics are difficult to read Press ZOOM to select the normal size again Mi Changing the color of the lyrics Apart from enlarging the lyrics see above the G 70 also allows you to set the background color and the color of the lyrics themselves if you don t feel com fortable with the black on white system that is used by default 1 Press the field on the page shown above DAIRIS DAONG Doe Ra LYRICS BACKGROUND O Gm Gm COLOUR PRESET gm gE DOO i ol oel e 2 Proceed as follows e You may first want to try one of the COLOR PRESET fields 1 6 If none of the factory settings is to your liking or if you want to make minor correc tions e press one of the knobs red green or blue in the LYRICS column and use the dial to increase or decrease the value The changes are reflected in the small display above the COLOR PRESET button icons The system used here corresponds to the RGB color mixing system whereby the value 255 for all three knobs yields the color white while O for all three corresponds to black If you have ever worked with a graphic program this concept may be familiar to you Press one of the knobs red green or blue in the BACKGROUND column and use the dial to increase or decrease the value 3 Press the field to ret
374. hose pitch you want to change Note This pitch is only used when the corresponding button icon lights Do not forget to switch it on 5 _ 6 _ L 2 7 Press the and or field to specify which Keyboard parts are affected by the Scale Tune settings Upper 1 2 3 and or Lower 1 2 It is perfectly possible to switch on both fields If neither of them lights all of the G 70 s parts will adopt the Scale Tune setting W Storing your new scale If you think you ll need that scale in the future you should memorize or WRITE it 8 Program the scale you wish to save by switching the desired notes on or off see above 9 Press the field in the upper left corner of the display The display now looks as follows 10 Press a MEMORY 1 MEMORY 3 field to save your settings in the corresponding Scale Tune memory The display now responds with the following mes sage and then returns to the Scale Tune page UN 11 Press the button to return to the main page Metronome The G 70 is equipped with a metronome that can be used in various situations To use the metronome here is what you need to do 1 Press the button so that it lights 2 Start Arranger or song playback and you will hear the metronome 3 Press the button again to switch off the metronome Metronome settings The G 70 also allows you to specify when and how the metronome should sound 1 Press and hold
375. hronization 3997 M0016 Yeah ooh Yeak gt huh listen to this Spy on me baby use satellite i 4 Back PRESS PLAY TO START THE INTERNAL SONG ikan PRESS TAP TO SYNCHRONIZE EACH LYRICS LINE 14 Press on all beats where the subsequent text lines should appear In places where there are no lyrics to synchronize e g the bridge or the solo you can press to quickly Jump to the next measures to which you wish to link a line of text 15 Press the button when all Lyrics data have been synchronized 16 If you made a mistake somewhere you can return to that measure using and start anew from that position In that case you will need to synchronize all remain ing text even text you already synchronized until the end of the song 151 G 70 Music Workstation Editing Lyrics 17 Press the button 21 Press the button to return to the main page The display changes to You can also use the above procedure to resynchro nize lyrics already contained in the song file if you PACS MEDIA feel the synchronization isn t perfect See step 4 and following on page 150 Exporting Lyrics data as text file Here s what you need to do to export the Lyrics data contained in a Standard MIDI File as text data This Be om may be useful for editing or printing the lyrics using your computer e Press SAVE followed by SONG Note This only works if the Standard MIDI File contains lyrics data
376. ht file before pressing EXECUTE Deleted files cannot be restored Also note that MIDI Sets contain 8 different settings which means that you may lose a lot more than origi nally intended And if you delete a song that is used in a Play List that list changes loses one step while a User Program whose Link function you activated no longer finds the required song On the other hand deleting a User Program Set only does away with the List the User Programs it refers to remain intact 1 Press the button 2 Ifyou intend to work with a floppy disk or memory card insert it into the drive or slot 3 Press the field 4 Select the data type you want to delete by pressing its field ma ii Sia en en On For User Program Set and MIDI Set files the display looks as follows DELETE USEN PROGRAM SET DELETE fap SET Hatay NH 7 Uta Progr _ Select the media INTERNAL MEMORY FLOPPY disk or EXTERNAL MEMORY memory card If available and necessary use the sorting func tions and or the Finder These functions are only available for songs and Music Styles and only if you select or EXTERNAL MEMORY See also pages 37 and 86 7 Press the field of the file you want to delete 207 G 70 Music Workstation Disk Media functions The display changes to DELETE SONG DELETE STYLE SaS SaS AN Tite Fle it br DELETED from Mammary Cad TAN Tian File ml ks DELETED henan Mam
377. ical techniques and physical effects into MIDI messages to precisely reproduce the natural behavior of the instrument that is being simulated Each event is executed at a given point in time which is why they all have a position indication 1 01 119 for example The first figure refers to the bar the second to the beat within that bar and the third to the clock CPT between the current beat and the next Each beat comprises 120 clocks The example cited earlier actually means that the event is closer to the second beat than to the first W Monitoring note events The 16 track Sequencer can play back note events you select This may help you identify the occurrence you want to edit Use the speaker icon ll to switch this monitor function on and move the cursor to a note event to sound that note Note See also the remark after step 1 on the next page VIEW Press this button icon if the list of track events has become so long that finding the events you wish to edit takes too long or to ensure that only the event types you need can be selected The following pop up appears Gi See Se VICH SELECT Sonam Geum oem pir oa 3 m m Switch on the button icons of the events you want to see in the list the icons in question must light in green also includes the bank select messages CC00 and CC32 that are used for selecting sounds along with the program change numbers that can be filtered separately
378. ick Start Adding harmonies to your singing Now that your microphone is up and running let s look at the Harmonist effect proper The G 70 provides two harmony types Small 1 or 2 additional voices and Ensemble 3 or 4 additional voices 1 Connect your microphone press the but ton set the desired level and 2 press the button its indicator must light 3 Sing a few notes and listen to the harmonies pro duced 4 If the harmonies are too soft turn the knob towards the right towards MAX 5 To try out different harmonizations press and hold the button 6 Press the MALE or field to change the GENDER voice type of the harmonies pro duced adds both a male and a female voice This also changes the available preset options in the center of the display If on the above page you press GENDER for example the display changes to VOGAMHARMONIST GENDER CS MALE SMALL TYPE 7 Press one of the preset fields BAHIA GIRLS for example to select a different harmony type 8 Now press and hold the button or press the field in the display and sing again This sounds more like a choir don t you agree DE ENSEMBLE TYPE ug CD GIRLS Lp You already know what the MALE FEMALE and fields are for The 10 preset fields in the middle allow you to select different voicings and voice characters for your choir 9 To sing again without automatic harmo
379. ifted to the PANPOT row YBOBRD PARTS Pa NG ECA ua PIK 6 Use the 9 sliders below the display to change the stereo placement of the available parts L63 corresponds to hard left O to dead center and R63 to hard right Note The left most slider EFFECT does nothing while PAN POT is selected Note The slider functions can also be selected by pressing any control in the desired row VOLUME PANPOT REVERB or CHO RUS You can then use the dial and the DEC buttons to directly edit the parameter of the assigned part You can even press the DATA ENTRY dial and enter the desired value via the on screen display 7 Press the button once or twice to assign the REVERB function to the sliders This allows you to specify how much reverb should be applied to the part in question The effects parame ters themselves can be edited on an Effect page see below Note At this stage the EFFECT slider far left can be used to set the output level of the Reverb processor Setting this parameter to 0 means that you no longer hear the effect in question By contrast setting the REVERB control of a Key board part to 0 means that only the part in question is no longer processed by the effect while the remaining Keyboard parts are 8 Press the button once or twice to assign the CHORUS function to the sliders This allows you to specify how much chorus should be applied to the part in question The effect
380. igh fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level G 70 Music Workstation Roland Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters 72 Shuffle DLY Adds a shuffle to the delay sound giving the sound a bouncy delay effect with a swing feel Delay Time sync msec Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not msec the delay time should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed or a note value Delay Time msec 0 2600ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Time note Musical Notes Delay times can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to msec Specify the value of the desired note Shuffle Rate 0 100 Adjusts the ratio as a percent age of the time that elapses before Delay B sounds relative to the time that elapses before the Delay A sounds When set to 100 the delay times are the same Acceleration 0 15 Adjusts the time over which the Delay Time changes from the current setting to its speci fied new setting Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to th
381. ile on disk 5 Ja Overwrite pars fltuv 8 means that both the original Music Assistant registration and the underlying User Program are overwritten and replaced with the new versions leaves the entry intact and takes you back to the SAVE page where you can enter a different name Continue with step 2 above 5 Press the button to return to the main page 123 G 70 Music Workstation Song and Style Makeup Tools Mixing Song or Style parts Though accessible via separate buttons the Style and song mixers are part of the MAKEUP TOOLS functions In this entire chapter we never refer to tracks or parts only instruments All parameters discussed below are indeed related to individual sounds some tracks may use two or more sounds if you think the bass is too loud use the assigned slider and turn it down If the piano needs more reverb just add it It doesn t get any easier than that Important remark The parameters discussed in this section are primarily intended for real time changes to a Music Style or song They are note saved When you select a different Music Style or song either directly or via a User Pro gram the changes made here are lost You can how ever save them thus burning them into the Style or song by pressing the button and the field on the page that appears then see p 130 1 Press the MODE Or button below the display 16 5 1 3 mam 8 maan 4 2 2
382. iles with the same names on the destination media Press the field if files on the source FROM media that have the same name as existing files on the destination TO media should not be copied only files with original names will be copied in that case The data are copied and a Operation successful message confirms the end of the operation 8 Press the button to return to the main page Editing an Index You can change the assignments of songs to a category and even edit the Index names Furthermore you can copy an Index entry along with all its song assign ments to a different entry 1 Press the FINDER button You can also press the field on the main page to select songs onG A lazing Grace The display changes to a Ona A AANE rai TA aad ea GENRE o a CN E u FEVER EF EVER MID u FEVER EF EVER MID MID 2 Specify the memory area or INTERNAL MEMORY 3 Press the field in the top left corner 143 G 70 Music Workstation More refined song functions If the field is currently selected the display looks as follows SORIS p las C A Gey RENA Jj E EDIT J Gs cory m pag Ballads Celebration The Index Edit functions are only available for real Index categories so 4 Press the field of the Index category you wish to edit SOE INI EE Rename Up Tempo r TE 5 Select the edit function you need by p
383. ing Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 Width of the fre quency region boosted cut by the Peaking Gain parameter larger values make the region narrower HF Damp 16 15000Hz Bypass Frequency at which the high frequency content of the resonant sound will be cut BYPASS no cut LF Damp 16 15000Hz Bypass Frequency at which the low frequency content of the resonant sound will be cut BYPASS no cut Lid 6 5 4 3 2 1 This simulates the actual changes in sound that occur when the lid of a grand piano is set at different heights EQ Low Frequency 200Hz 400Hz Frequency of the low range EO EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Amount of low range boost cut EQ Mid Frequency 200 8000Hz Frequency of the midrange EQ EQ Mid Gain 15dB 0 15dB Amount of midrange boost cut 2143 EO Mid Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 Width of midrange larger values make the region narrower EQ High Frequency 2000Hz 4000Hz 8000Hz Fre quency of the high range EO EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Amount of high range boost cut Level 0 127 Output level 83 VIB OD Rotary This effect combines an overdrive and a rotary with Vibrato Chorus The vibrato effect cyclically modulates the pitch of organ sounds which is not the same as the Rotary effect The chorus effect mixes the normal sound of the organ with a sound to which vibrato has been applied adding richness and Spaciousness to the sound
384. ining storage capacity of the inserted memory card Version Displays the version number of the G 70 s operating system along with its creation date and time 3 Press the field to return to the menu or the button to return to the main page Initializing the G 70 Factory Reset After working extensively with your G 70 you may want to recall the original factory settings Before doing so however it would be a good idea to save your own settings to a memory card see p 204 or to archive them via USB see p 211 Here is how to initialize your G 70 1 Press the button 2 Press the field followed by the field D L a sar Ge ALL the original FACTORY DATA will be restored ALL Global Parameters will be initialized and 144 Factory User Programs 8 MIDI Set will be loaded f EXECUTE 3 Press the field to initialize the G 70 or the field to return to the menu if you have changed your mind You can also press the button to return to the main page The message Operation successful informs you that the G 70 has been initialized Note This operation does not affect the data in the G 70 s internal memory the settings in the G 70 s internal memory SSD are not erased but no longer used by the G 70 2 2 4 20 Specifications W Keyboard 76 synthesizer action type keys with aftertouch W Sound source New WX sound engine Max polyphony 128 voices Tones 1596 tones in 16 familie
385. ion of the reverb s low frequency content HF Damp Freq 4000 12500Hz Adjusts the fre quency above which the high frequency content of the reverb sound will be reduced or damped HF Damp Gain 36 0dB Adjusts the amount of damping applied to the frequency range selected with HF Damp With a setting of 0 there will be no reduc tion of the reverb s high frequency content GM2 Reverb parameters Character Room1 Room2 Room3 Hall1 Hall2 Plate Delay Pan Delay Type of reverb Pre LPF 0 7 Cuts the high frequency range of the sound coming into the reverb Higher values will cut more of the high frequencies Level 0 127 Output level of reverberation Time 0 127 Time length of reverberation Feedback 0 127 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect when the Reverb Character setting is Delay or Pan Delay Parameters of the remaining types Room1 Pan Delay Time 0 127 Time length of reverberation for Room1 Hall2 or delay time for Delay and Pan Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which the high frequency content of the reverb sound will be cut or damped If you do not want to cut the high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Feedback 0 127 Only available for Pan and Pan Delay Adjusts the amount of delay feedback 6 Press the button to return to the main page Note
386. is parameter sets the amount of delay sound that is sent to the Reverb processor Higher values mean that the delay portion will be more promi nent in the reverb signal Be careful not to overdo this effect because it tends to blur the sound image DLY FBACK This parameter specifies the number of times the Delay will repeat With a value of 0 the Delay will not repeat while higher values increase the number of repeats With negative values the Delay will be fed back with inverted phase Negative values are mainly effective with short delay times TOGO 1 G 70 Music Workstation Using the mixer functions 8 effects BI Delay for HARMONY EFFECT VOCAL PIE MO ise VOCAL F T Aii VOICE EFFECT HARMONY EFFECT ee WALL TYPE Se n boes za DELAY SEND DELAY TIME cl Cm Gm DLV REYSND DLY CHOSND DLY FBACK om Om Om The presets on this page are different while there is also one more parameter you can set see above for the others DLY CHO SND Sets the amount of delay sound that is sent to the Chorus processor Higher values mean that the delay portion will be more prominent in the chorus signal Chorus HARMONY EFFECT OT F y EFFE HARMONY EFFECT CE EFFECT Ga Ga ex LOW PASS FILTER amon nee a CHORUS SEND CHO REY SND om e Press the field of the chorus type you wish to use Note The preset you choose affects the settings of the param eters below Always
387. is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 lt last measure of the track or song This is where you specify the bar position of the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat BIBIAS 99 99 The BIAS parameter allows you to specify by how much the velocity values should change Select a positive value to increase the velocity the value is added to the velocity value of the affected notes or a negative value to decrease the velocity values that value is subtracted Select O if you prefer to work with the MAGNIFY parame ter see below G 70 Music Workstation Roland Editing 16 track songs This parameter can be particularly useful for velocity switched sounds slightly reducing or increasing the overall velocity allows you to shift all notes to the other sound Note Even the highest positive or negative VALUE doesn t allow you to go beyond 1 or 127 There is a reason why 0 is impossible that value is used to indicate the end of a note note off 127 on the other hand is the highest velocity value the MIDI standard can
388. istics of a low pass filter Setting A Frequency Cutoff frequency Note For some sounds positive Cutoff settings will cause no noticeable change because the preprogrammed Cutoff parameter is already set to its maximum value G 70 Music Workstation Roland Mixing Keyboard parts ER Using the mixer functions amp effects The MIXER environment does what its name suggests it allows you to balance the various Keyboard parts of your G 70 See page 124 and following for how to mix the song parts Your singing and the generated Vocal Harmonist parts can be mixed using the VOICE and knobs About the G 70 s effects The G 70 contains the following effects processors not all of which are available for all sections So please carefully study the following table Section Effects processors Remarks Keyboard Effects Reverb Chorus Same type as Style Song sec tion but separate processors MFX Only for the Keyboard parts Shared by these two sections but separate from Keyboard Style Song Effects Reverb Chorus parts Mastering Tools Equalizer Compressor Affect all signals transmitted to the MAIN outputs Audio Effects IFX Affects the signals received via the AUDIO IN sockets Can be transmitted Harmonic Bars Overdrive Vibrato Rotary Exclusive to this section Speaker VOICE Reverb Delay Compres Talk Singer Auto Pitch Voice sor Gate FX HARMONY Reverb Delay Chorus Vocoder Small Ensemble
389. ists of up to eight parts ADR Accompaniment drums This part takes care of the rhythm section It triggers the drum and percussion sounds of the Drum Set assigned to the ADR part ABS Accompaniment bass This part plays the bass line of the Music Style you select ACC1 ACCE These are the melodic accompaniment parts Depending on the Music Style you selected only a few of them actually play something which can be anything from a piano line a guitar line an organ line etc to synthesizer chords Not all ACC parts play chords though The ABS and ACC1 6 parts rely on the chord or note information you play in the chord recognition area page 80 i e the keyboard zone you assign to the Arranger Playback functions Style Control Starting a Music Style Music Styles can be started in several ways 1 Press the EASY SETTING button its indicator lights e Press the button so that it lights to start the Arranger right away START STOP MUN ps rm If you start the Arranger without playing a chord in the chord recognition area beforehand you will only hear the drums of the selected Music Style In most cases however the G 70 has already memorized a chord so that you will hear the full accompaniment P Stop playback of the current Style see below press the button so that it lights one of the VARI ATION 1 4 buttons to select the complexity of the introduction and then the button This starts S
390. itimbral which means that they can Do the following to gain access to the MIDI functions play several parts simultaneously with different sounds fi Pressihe KANTA Note All G 70 parts are set to receive MIDI messages If they do The display changes to l not seem to respond to the messages you send from the external l controller check the MIDI connections and the channel settings on the G 70 The transmit and receive channels of the Keyboard parts are set as follows K TUNING SPLIT amp TOUCH N ARRANGER sva SETTING FOOT CONTROLLERS OCAL HARMONIST li i La gt ad STYLE 3 COMPOSER Keyboard part Recorder track UP2 6 SQ ocean O UP3 13 o STORAGE W1 11 IN z 2 Press the field VBS 12 MIDE EASY SETTING MELODY INT 15 sero output move 3 Press the OUTPUT or field to specify which socket s to use for your MIDI applications The MIDI and USB options are mutually exclusive if you select USB the MIDI sockets are not used while MIDI communication via USB is impossible when you select MIDI 2 T4 e The G 70 is supplied with a CD ROM that contains the driver files you may need for USB MIDI applica tions Before pressing USB you must install the required drivers on your computer See the operating instructions that come with the CD ROM 4 Do one of the following Press a MIDI SET 1 8 field to select a MIDI Set Press the SELECT field that corresponds to the
391. itones This setting applies to all sections and all User Programs Octave The Octave function is another useful parameter that allows you to change the pitch of the selected part in octave steps 12 semitones at a time You could take advantage of this function for solo parts where you need the UP1 and UP2 parts to trigger the same Tone while UP2 plays one octave above or below UP1 Another use for this function is to provide access to the noises of the G 70 s new V Tones so as to be able to trigger the scraping knocking etc This probably only works when you use a Keyboard part MBS LW2 LW1 UP3 UP2 UP1 in WHOLE Keyboard Mode page 57 Working in SPLIT mode indeed means that you can only play the notes up to a certain point the split point For the noises you need to select the setting 3 Note that this also means that you need to play the real notes at the right end of the keyboard because the entire part Tone is transposed down a OCTAVE 0 o oe A A c2 C3 OCTAVE 1 o A c2 C3 This parameter also comes in handy when you wish to trigger Drum Set sounds that are not accessible via the keyboard in its normal state Remember that there are 76 keys while some Drum Sets provide drum percussion sounds for all 128 notes supported by the MIDI standard 59 G 70 Music Workstation Using the performance functions Finally you may need this parameter when you take advantage
392. k Select the type of speaker The specifications of each type are as follows The speaker column indicates the diameter of each speaker unit in inches and the number of units Type Cabinet Speaker Microphone SMALL 1 small open back enclosure 10 dynamic mic SMALL 2 small open back enclosure 10 dynamic mic MIDDLE open back enclosure 12x1 dynamic mic JC 120 open back enclosure 12x2 dynamic mic BUILT IN 1 open back enclosure 12x2 dynamic mic BUILT IN 2 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser mic BUILT IN 3 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser mic BUILT IN 4 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser mic BUILT IN 5 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser mic BG STACK 1 sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser mic BG STACK 2 large sealed enclosure 2x4 condenser mic MS STACK 1 large sealed enclosure MSSTACK2 large sealed enclosure METAL STACK large double stack 2 STACK large sealed enclosure 3 STACK large sealed enclosure 2x4 condenser mic 2x4 condenser mic 2x4 condenser mic 2x4 condenser mic 2x4 condenser mic Mic Setting 1 2 3 Adjusts the location of the mic that is recording the sound of the speaker This can be adjusted in three steps with the mic becoming more distant in the order of 1 2 and 3 Mic Level 0 127 Volume of the microphone Direct Level 0 127 Volume of the direct sound Level 0 127 Output level 48 Step Phaser The phaser effect will be varied gradually Phaser Mode 4 Stage 8 Stage 12 Stage Number of S
393. k The socket does not provide phantom power Note The INPUT socket is mono OUTPUT R amp Lsockets If connected to a mixing con sole amplifier etc these sockets transmit the signal received via the INPUT socket and processed with the G 70 s Vocal Harmonist facility If no jacks are con nected here the Vocal Harmonist signals are trans mitted via the OUTPUT sockets see below G 70 Music Workstation Roland Front panel OUTPUT section DIRECT R L sockets When you first switch on the G 70 these audio outputs are not used all signals are sent to the MAIN R amp L MONO sockets You can however assign any desired signal to these sockets page 103 MAIN R amp L MONO sockets These sockets need to be connected to an external amplifier mixing con soles etc Depending on whether you are also using the Vocal Harmonist OUTPUT sockets see above the present sockets either transmit only the music gener ated by the Arranger Recorder and Keyboard parts or both the tone generator s and Vocal Harmonist s signals Note If you can want to use only one channel on your exter nal amplifier connect the L MONO socket to its input For opti mum sound quality we recommend working in stereo though POWER ON button Press this button to switch the G 70 on and off AC socket This is where you need to connect the supplied power cord 19 G 70 Music Workstation Setting up and demo songs Setting up and de
394. k all songs with the best possible quality If you switch this parameter on such real time transforma tions are also transmitted via MIDI in which case the receiving tone generator may drop certain parts if it 2 Press the field does not support the requested sound bank If you switch this parameter off the original sound a i EASY SETTING addresses are transmitted to the receiving device But Sua ourrur mone the G 70 s tone generator continues to enhance the Sle Pate songs you play back this parameter only affects MIDI pa transmission to external instruments WRX FILTER SYSEX Use this parameter to specify whether button icon on or not off the G 70 should receive SysEx mes sages from other devices See also the explanation above UTILITY FUNCTION oO Ae HAND USB DATA 4 CONTROLLERS f STORAGE i 3 Press the 1 8 field that corresponds to the MIDI Set you want to use the two SELECT button icons 7 go dark MIDI Sets You can also select a macro SELECT and work with MIDI Sets are memories for MIDI settings The G 70 those settings in which case all eight MIDI Set indi provides eight MIDI Set memories that you can use cator icons go dark to change your MIDI configuration You can link a 4 Press the button to return to the main page MIDI Set to a User Program page 116 and specify which MIDI Set should be loaded when you switch on MIDI Set selec
395. l Arranger Style functions Working with external Music Styles Using the CUSTOM memories The G 70 provides 10 memories per family i e 120 memories in all that refer to Music Styles in the inter nal memory INTERNAL MEMORY or on a memory card EXTERNAL MEMORY These memories behave exactly like the other memories In the case of a memory card however they only work if the card in question has been inserted into the PCMCIA slot Thanks to the G 70 s powerful software loading a CUSTOM Style is as swift as working with internal Styles The Music Style referenced by the CUSTOM memory you select is automatically loaded and copied to the Disk User memory see also p 85 This isa RAM mem ory whose contents are erased when you switch off the G 70 and overwritten when you select another CUS TOM memory or use the Disk User function Here s in a nutshell what happens when you select a CUSTOM memory Even though the drawing may sug gest that this takes quite some time the G 70 performs these steps in a split second LIVE BAND O maga You select a Link memory ic Style The G 70 looks up the name of the referenced Music Style The data are loaded from card or the internal memory DISK of es USER This memory contains the Music Style data The Style can be played back When you unpack the G 70 the CUSTOM memories are empty So you first need to program your
396. l a User Program with the desired settings page 112 4 If you want to start your song with an introduc tion press the button and a VARIATION button 1 4 52 5 Press the button to start recording r a mag START STOP EEFE FE ESE ALA a a e row 5 Bae i di pots r assai ss e Lai a E i The Recorder now counts in one measure after which Arranger playback and recording start Note See page 73 for setting the Count In function 6 Play the Arranger chords with your left hand and the melody with your right Note You can also use the G 70 s performance functions for your melody playing See page 58 for details 7 To stop recording do one of the following e Press the and a VARIATION 1 4 button The Arranger will play an ending phrase When it is finished Arranger playback and recording stop e Press the button This will stop Arranger playback and recording e Press the button This will stop Arranger playback and recording Listening to your song You probably want to listen to your song now If you like it be sure to save it see Saving your song on p 55 8 Press the RECORDER button This causes the Recorder to return to the beginning of your new song 9 Press the button to start playback Playback of your recording starts 10 Press again to stop playback and to return to beginning of the song If you
397. l of the G 70 s advantages and functions would take another ten pages while you must be dying to put it through its paces That is why we would like to ask you to read this manual from cover to cover You ll find that the G 70 is quite unlike any other instrument you know Have fun N CAUTION G 70 Music Workstation Using the unit safely USING THE UNIT SAFELY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREVENTION OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS About NWARNING and Z CAUTION Notices Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe NWARNING injury should the unit be used improperly Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly Material damage refers to damage or other adverse effects caused with respect to the home and all its furnishings as well to domestic animals or pets WARNING e Before using this instrument be sure to read the instruc tions below and the Owner s Manual e Do not open or perform any internal modifications on the unit e Do not attempt to repair the G 70 or replace parts within it except when this manual provides specific S instructions directing you to do so Refer all servicing to your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Informa tion page e Never use or store the G 70 in places that are e Subject
398. l or the DEC INC buttons Press this field to switch the equalizer of the corresponding part on or off The parameter settings of that column are only used if the indicator icon lights The equalizer can be used for two things a empha sizing a specific frequency range to create a special effect or make the part more distinguishable b to reduce the level of frequencies that mask other sounds or produce a boomy sound FREQUENCY Hz Use this parameter to select the fre quency whose level you wish to change with the GAIN parameter The smaller the value the lower the fre quency that will be boosted or cut GAIN This parameter sets the level of the selected fre quency O means that the frequency s level does not change no difference between equalizer on and off e Press the field to leave this page T 32 Voice FX settings When the indicator lights your original voice is no longer output by the Vocal Harmonist Instead it will be changed transformed according to the preset you select here VOGAL PIE NI NI co VIERATO 1 Press and hold the button 2 Press one of the 12 fields in the middle to select the kind of transformation you want 3 Press the field to add an automatic vibrato effect to the transformed voice The Vibrato parameters can be set on the EDIT page 4 When you are done either press the button to return to the main page or one of the other fields to se
399. l up the on screen NUMERIC ENTRY pad ei P a Bir ERE MUMERIC PAD f ar a Enter the value you want to use then press the ENTER field If necessary you can use the field to correct erroneous entries before pressing ENTER and refer to the volume that is used when the expression pedal is depressed UP highest volume or in the upright position DOWN lowest volume UP DOWN 0 127 You do not need to specify 0 for the DOWN position Selecting any other value will reduce the volume of the selected parts up to the DOWN value Likewise you do not need to specify 127 as maximum value for UP Note If you select Expression the DOWN and UP values rep resent MIDI Expression CC11 values It is perfectly possible to set the DOWN value to 127 and the UP value to 0 so that the selected part only sounds when the Expression pedal is in the upright position This can be used for some clever effects instead of alternating between UP1 and UP2 by vary ing your velocity page 60 which requires a consid erable amount of striking precision you could invert UP2 s response to the expression pedal so that UP1 does not sound when UP2 does and vice versa 6 Press the button to return to the main page G 70 Music Workstation Roland Scale Tuning Scale Tuning Another useful function is called Scale Tuning It allows you to use oriental Asian and other scales in
400. lay 9 types Chorus 9 types programmable Others Adjustable input gain Level switch 225 G 70 Music Workstation Specifications W Data storage Floppy disk drive Internal memory Memory card Type of files managed E Other functions Keyboard Modes Easy Setting Chord voicing Melody Intelligence Metronome Singer Key Adapter Assignable switches Miscellaneous System updates USB E Connections Headphone sockets 3 5 2HD 2DD Solid State Disk PCMCIA Compact Flash Mem ory Stick Smart Media Micro drive Styles Songs SMF User Pro grams MIDI Sets Play List txt files Split 2 slit points Whole Arranger Organ Piano ACV Adaptive Chord Voicing 18 types With headphone output amp LEVEL control 6 5 semi tones automatic SMF transposition 2 programmable Tap Tempo Sync Start Stop V Link interactive demo in sev eral languages Flash memory Data storage amp MIDI communi cation 1x main 1x metronome with LEVEL control Pedal amp footswitch sockets FC 7 controller programmable Audio connections Vocal Harmonist with MIC LINE switch External Source Metronome MAIN outputs DIRECT outputs Video output Others HOLD FOOTSWITCH FOOT SWITCH programmable FOOT PEDAL Input XLR TRS phone balanced unbalanced Outputs Separate Left Right or added to MAIN Audio inputs Left amp Right line level with separate effects pro cessor RCA
401. ld erased because they use a lot of memory IN SID E Only the notes or values between FROM NOTE FROM CC and TO NOTE TO CC will change Only the notes or values above FROM NOTE FROM CC and below TO NOTE TO CC will change MFROM NOTE O C 127 G9 This parameter is only displayed if DATA TYPE see above is set to Note It allows you to set the note or lower limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range This note can also be selected by pressing E EXECUTE the corresponding key after selecting the FROM NOTE field WTO NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the upper limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range This note can also be selected by pressing the corre sponding key after selecting the TO NOTE field It is not displayed when you select EQUAL UNEQUAL HIGHER or LOWER See also Fine tuning the setting range BIFROM CC 0 127 This parameter is only displayed if DATA TYPE see above is set to something else than Note It allows you to set the lower limit of the control change numbers or values to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range This note can also be selected by pressing the corresponding key after selecting the FROM NOTE field WETO CC 0 127 This parameter allows you to set the upper limit of the of the control change numbers or values to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range It is not displa
402. lds that allow you to select the patterns you want to audition Here s how to select them SALE GOMEO SER ADRUMS LR Y POP1 gt ASS SLID ADRUMS 4 POP1 ee ABASS ASS SLIDE Ec Note You can also start recording using an optional foot ACCONPS switch connected to the FOOT SWITCH jack See Start Stop on aceon a na a KA p 69 You could start by playing only the bass drum part If you specified the track length see above before recording the Arranger jumps back to the beginning of the pattern after the set number of measures The second time around you could add the snare drum the third time the HiHat and so on When recording another part ABass Acc6 do everything you would do during a live performance Feel free to add modulation Pitch Bend and to use an optional hold pedal connected to the HOLD FOOT SWITCH jack 21 Press again to stop recording The display changes to RAE EO res sre 2 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select Major minor or 7th Only one mode can be selected for playback Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select one of the Divisions Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Intro 1 4 Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill Up 153 End 154 Only one Division can be selected for playback 3 Nam If you like your drum part continue with Saving your Style If not record a new version 4 Press the button to return to the
403. lected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 last measure of the track or song This is where you specify the bar position of the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat 163 W BIAS CPT 4800 4800 This parameter sets the amount by which the duration or gate time of the selected notes is to change The shortest possible GATE TIME value is 1 used for all drum notes so that selecting 1000 for notes with a GATE TIME value of 1 in the specified time range still leaves you with the same value E MAGNIFY 0 200 Use this parameter rather than BIAS to produce propor tional changes to the affected GATE TIME values Values below 100 decrease the duration while any thing above 100 increases it Select 100 if you pre fer to work with the BIAS CPT parameter see above W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data MERGE Use this parameter to combine the data of two tracks i e of all data the two tracks contain from start to finish The combined version can be found on the destination track DST After executing this f
404. level Select if the current setting must not change CC32 04127 ALL This control change is the so called LSB bank select message Select if the cur rent setting must not change PC 1 128 Use this parameter to change the address a k a program change number of a sound e g from 1 to 2 TIG W INC DEC These are so called relative changes the positive or nega tive value you set here is added to or subtracted from the original values of the selected track s Use these fields to increase or decrease the existing values for the entire selected track s Expression Panpot Reverb Chorus 127 127 These parameters allow you to add or subtract a given value to from the current Expression Pan Reverb Send or Chorus Send values This may come in handy if the realtime changes you recorded turn out to be too high or too low WE EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data SHIFT CLOCK SHIFT CLOCK allows you to shift the notes of the selected FROM TO range See page 170 for details BTRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track you want to edit Select ALL to edit all tracks EMODE Allows you to select the mode of the pattern to be edited Major minor or 7th W DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division or pattern you want to edit Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill Up 1 3 End 1 4 BIDATA TYPE Allows y
405. lides from one note to the next PORTAM TIME Use this parameter to specify the speed at which the glides are carried out The higher the value the slower the transitions RND TUNING This parameter allows you to introduce subtle or not so subtle pitch inaccuracies usually asso ciated with analog synthesizers Irrespective of the choice you make here Low Mid High the effect will be noticeable but never overly dramatic Select Off if you do not need this effect This is not the same as a vibrato effect because it only affects the onset of the notes There is thus no periodic modulation of the pitch CHORD INT This parameter works like the MELODY INT function of the Arranger section it even produces har monies when the source a song or your playing on the keyboard only plays one note PITCH BEND Press this field so that it lights if you want to influence the pitch of the voice effect using the G 70 s Pitch Bend lever e Press the field to leave this page If you press the field the display looks as follows SMILE BU ALAB PART 1 PART 22 FREQUENCY HZ ALL PARTS FREQUENCY HZ GAIN DE G This page contains a simple equalizer for the SMALL parts and an EQ band that applies to both voices simultaneously e Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons 136 EQUALIZER Press this field to switch all equali
406. lity of the telephone voice Treble 15dB 0 15dB Bandwidth of the telephone voice Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 80 Phonograph Simulates a sound recorded on an analog record and played back on a record player This effect also simulates the various types of noise that are typical of a record and even the rota tional irregularities of an old turntable Signal Distortion 0 127 Depth of distortion Frequency Range 0 127 Frequency response of the playback system Decreasing this value will produce the impression of an old system with a poor frequency response Disc Type LP EP SP Rotational speed of the turntable This will affect the frequency of the scratch noise Scratch Noise Level 0 127 Amount of noise due to scratches on the record Dust Noise Level 0 127 Volume of noise due to dust on the record Hiss Noise Level 0 127 Volume of continuous hiss Total Noise Level 0 127 Volume of overall noise Wow 0 127 Depth of long cycle rotational irregularity Flutter 0 127 Depth of short cycle rotational irregular ity Random 0 127 Depth of indefinite cycle rotational irregularity Total Wow Flutter 0 127 Depth of overall rotational irregularity Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W
407. ll be flattening out whatever level differences that may have been there RATIO 1 1 0 1 INF use this parameter to specify how strongly the level of signals that exceed the THRSHLD level is to be reduced 1 2 0 for example means that the level values in excess of the THRSHLD level are halved The 1 INF is useful if you set THSRHLD to OdB or thereabout This produces a limiter effect which means that no signal level will never exceed the THR SHLD value This may help you protect the speakers of the PA system etc GAIN 24 24dB This parameter allows you to establish the desired mix among the three compressor bands Choose a negative value to decrease the level or a positive one to increase it Choose O for a band that Should not be compressed To save the settings you have just made in order to use them again at a later stage press the field There is only one USER memory By saving your new settings you therefore overwrite the previous ones Press the field if you want to set the compres sor or the button to return to the main page Voice and Vocal Harmonist part mixing Your G 70 provides three knobs VOICE HARMONY and that you can use without even bother ing about the MIXER environment That is why there are no MIXER functions for this section But the Vocal Harmonist does have separate effects processors Note For the following it would be a good idea to set the knob at least
408. lows you to modify the existing data to delete data you do not need and to add informa tion that seems to be missing To avoid unpleasant surprises be sure to save your song before editing the MASTER track Note To leave this page either press the field return to the sequencer s main page or the button return to the G 70 s main page Editing existing events The MASTER track of each Standard MIDI File con tains at least the following information Tempo This is the Tempo Change value located at 1 01 000 It specifies the song s tempo It cannot be erased Time signature This is the Beat Change value located at 1 01 000 It specifies the song s tempo It cannot be erased SysEx The SysEx string located close to the beginning of the song It tells the sound source what format Is being used how the effects processors should be set types parameter settings etc Song length The End of Data value refers to the posi tion of the last event which can be located on any track and thus to the end of the song This value cannot be edited manually You can however extend the song by inserting MASTER track events after this position by recording additional data or by inserting blank measures page 165 171 G 70 Music Workstation Using the 16 track sequencer To change information already available on the MAS TER track proceed as follows 1 Use the a v buttons or the dial to selec
409. ls filter settings etc page 214 USS PROGRAM LIB remain as they are B E Tempo Press this field if the tempo setting contained in every User Program should be ignored Tone Press this field to ignore Tone selection for the Keyboard parts when a different User Program is recalled Harmonist Press this field to ignore the various VOICE FX AUTO TUNE etc settings you have made See Editing the Vocal Harmonist parts on p 131 No Match Found OPTIONS FOUND Q Ai SE 325 xt men e a o If the G 70 did find one or several matches the Transpose Press this field to ignore the Transpose FOUND number will be smaller than the GLOBAL value and mode contained in every User Program number KBD Mode Press this field to ignore the Keyboard Note See also Editing User Program Finder information on Mode Whole Split and Arranger Chord settings Stan p 117 for how to make the Finder functionality even more dard Piano Style Left Right etc powerful Press to activate all button icons and to Selectively loading User Program settings weena User Program Hold Your G 70 can keep certain settings of the previous User Program while selecting another User Program That way you can go on playing with the last sounds you selected and or Harmonist settings you made Pressing one of the above fields without selecting a User Program afterwards has no effect Only when you select another User Progra
410. lso Easy editing and useful functions on p 160 for some additional functions that are not covered here 1 Press the button 16 TRACK SEQUENCER JJJANSEFEDES AN 3 d OVERDRIVE GT ieee SQUARE WAY 5 dire 6 J EARITONE SAX ees 7 JJERASS 1 j 5 d ALTO SAX j 3 d TRUMPET E 10 J Jazz j 12 d piano 2 j 13 d MUTED GT J 14 d CLEAN GT baa 15 PIANO 1 j 16 FIANO 4 j The Meas field at the top of the display informs you about the current measure The tempo and time sig nature are displayed next to it You can use the RECORDER and gt buttons to jump to another measure or to return to the beginning of the song 2 Press the RECORDER button The display changes to REALTIME REG STANDBY RECORDING SELECT ha seam GO CHANGE g a 4 B 7153 3 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the track you want to record to 4 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to specify how the tracks linked to the Keyboard parts should behave see p 156 5 See step 7 and following on page 156 for what to do now Note Be sure to select a track that either contains no data or whose data may be overwritten Replace If you select REC MODE Mix the new data are added to the data already present on the selected track 6 Press the button or play the first 7 8 notes if you selected COUNT IN Wait N
411. ly be read by the G 70 or a DisCover 5 5M and is of little use to other sequenc ers or SMF players they simply ignore it So you might as well save the song under its original name Besides you can also save the song to a different memory area card or disk See page 49 for how to change the name Press the field 139 G 70 Music Workstation More refined song functions If you selected the memory area that contains the original version the following message is displayed SAVE SOIC already exists pos and BG a A Sila oe this name e Press the field to overwrite the old version Press the field if you do not want to overwrite this song and return to the main page Then enter a different name or select a different media If the song doesn t exist in the selected memory area the data are saved 9 Press the button to return to the main page Working with the Song Finder The Song Finder allows you to quickly locate the songs you want to play back You will see in a minute that it is far more powerful when you work with the internal memory or memory cards than with floppy disks 1 Press the FINDER button The display changes to 4 L HEREWEGO pna esr flagged by means of a Ew icon The note J means that the file in question also contains Play amp Search information 2 Specify the memory area that contains the a you need EXTERNAL MEMORY FLOPPY INTERNAL MEMORY
412. ly one note in that area the accompaniment plays only that note i e it assumes that you deliberately chose to omit the third and fifth of your chord To have the Music Style sound a major minor or seventh chord you only need to play three notes by the way Other more complex chords require that you press four keys PIANO STYLE This mode works as follows the Arranger decodes every chord you play no matter where you play it Causing the Arranger to play another chord requires that you play at least a triad i e the three notes that make up a major or minor chord You can play more than three chord notes but remember that two notes won t cause the Arranger to change the key Note You can also select PIANO STYLE by pressing the EASY SETTING button INTELLIGENT Select INTELLIGENT when you want the Arranger to supply the missing notes of the chord you play See p 251 for a chart of intelligent chords and the way to play them The G 70 can handle virtually any chord you can think of and playing them requires no more than three finger s This is probably the mode you will select most of the time 5 Press the button to return to the main page Note The choice you make here also affects the Arpeggio Oct and Chord Oct options of the D Beam Controller See page 66 Arranger Hold The ARRANGER HOLD function sustains the notes you play in the chord recognition area ZONE until you play other notes At first
413. m 1 3 Cool Live Band Gospel Love USE PROGR ower 1 SESiowe SEE The Grand PER owcr2 Pad With KEN CA EP1 But let us not return to the main page Just yet Mi Changing the pitch of other notes Changing the pitch of other notes than the ones already highlighted is a matter of pressing the desired on screen buttons in question And defeating the pitch change of a note whose button icon lights is as easy as pressing that field again the button icon then goes dark Press all lit on screen button icons to switch the Scale Tuning function off again W Customizing the pitch changes At first pressing an on screen button means that Its pitch is lowered by 50 cents 1 4 tone or 50 There may be situations where you want to raise the pitch of a note or select a different tuning 4 Press the value field of the note key whose pitch you want to change That field now lights As stated earlier the pitch of all notes is at first set to 50 one quarter tone down You can however select any value between 64 slightly lower than a quarter tone down and 63 slightly higher than a quarter tone up Use the dial or the DEC INC but tons to set the desired pitch You can also press the dial and enter the value using the on screen numeric pad If you selected a field the EDIT message is displayed to indicate that the stored settings have changed Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the other notes w
414. m As you will notice the CCOO number is always 93 The that the installed board is recognized correctly CC32 value on the other hand depends on i the board 1 Turn on the power as described in Switching the you installed and ii the sound you need G 70 on off on p 21 The MIDI standard can only handle 128 program 2 Press the MENU button and the UTILITY field change numbers which is why boards with more than 3 Press the field to select the following page 128 Patches use several consecutive CC32 values Patches Ccoo CC32 SRX 1 ih T CESI SRX 2 1 50 93 01 SRX Expansion Board SRX 05 SupDance SRX 3 1 128 93 02 Free Space Internal Memory 29472 Kb SRX_4 1 198 93 03 Free Space Memory Card 232380 Kb SRX 5 10128 93 04 Version 0100 2004November 09 15 32 53 SRX 5 129 256 93 05 SRX 5 2574312 93 06 Check whether the name of the installed Wave as aiai i ui Expansion Board is displayed SRX 6 1290256 93 08 If No SRX Card is displayed next to SRX Expansion SRX 6 257 384 B 09 Board the wave expansion board Is not recognized SRX 6 384 448 93 10 Re install the wave expansion board correctly SRX 1 198 93 T 4 Press to return to the main page SRX 7 129 256 93 n2 SRX 7 25 384 93 13 SRX 7 385 475 Jd 14 SRX 8 1 128 93 15 SRX 8 129 256 93 16 SRX 8 25 384 93 17 SRX 8 385 448 93 18 SRX 9 14128 93 19 SRX 9 129 256 93 20 SRX 9 257384 J3 21 SRX 9 385 414 93 22 SRX 10 1100 93 23 MFX and
415. m will the selected data filter because that is what the User Program Hold settings are start working 1 ki JO NECK DAET ly whose 4 Press the button to return to the main page tings should be used select it otherwise 5 Use the USER PROGRAM ona 2 Press the button and the whether the filters you selected should be used ela button lights or not button dark _OR 115 G 70 Music Workstation Working with User Programs Automatic functions for User Programs Song Link This function means that by recalling a User Program you also prepare the associated song Such songs reside in the internal memory or on a memory card and must be available when you load such a User Program for this system to work All you need to do then is hit the button to start playback of that song Your G 70 only memorizes the song name If at the time you recall such a User Program that song is not available the display will respond with Y Choir Aahs The Grand X Remove the memory card because the internal mem ory is always available insert the proper card and select that User Program again If you don t the G 70 will start playback of the previously loaded song when you press again 1 Press the USER PROGRAM button Factory USERPROGRAM MIDI LINK WRITE 1 Blue Berry Swear Ballad Celebrating 4 Blue Shoes Fame Rock i i Know Him Hands Up Party i Misty Jazz pa p5 Ima 2
416. made a mistake in the Arranger chords and would like to record that part again go back to step 2 above Recording without accompaniment Let us now look at how to start recording without automatic accompaniment You can nevertheless star the Arranger at a later stage after your ad lib introduc tion for example it will playing in sync with the song tempo 1 Press the button its indicator flashes Note Whenever you press the button and start recording see below the song RAM memory is erased Be sure to save the current song data before recording a new song see p 55 2 Press the EASY SETTING button 3 Use the buttons the button or if the main page is displayed the dial to set the desired tempo 4 If you want to start Music Style playback at a later stage select a Music Style see p 27 and a sound for your solo playing see p 29 Note Rather than performing the above steps you could recall a User Program with the desired settings page 112 5 Press the button to start record ing The Recorder now counts in one measure after which recording starts Note See page 73 for setting the Count In function 6 Start playing 7 To start Arranger playback at a later stage press the button 8 If you want to stop Arranger playback before the end of the song press either the or the button This will stop Arranger playback while recording goes on This allows you to improvise withou
417. me value 1 for all notes Increasing it to 20 for example has no audi ble effect on the sounds 1 Control Change also allows you to insert Bank Select mes sages CCOO and CC32 Such messages must be located BEFORE the program change to which they apply The correct order is therefore CC00 CC32 PC Also it is usually wiser to assign each of these three values to consecutive CPT positions Specify the position where your new event should be inserted by pressing the BAR and fields and entering the desired value for each unit using the dial or the DEC INC buttons Press the field to confirm your settings and add the new event Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes 177 G 70 Music Workstation Using the 16 track sequencer W ERASE EVENT e se the dial or the a buttons to select the event you want to delete e To select several consecutive events press the dial while turning it towards the left upward direction or the right downward direction e Press the ERASE EVENT button icon to remove the event you selected BI MOVE EVENT This function allows you to move one or several events Note If the position to which you move the selected event already contains other events the moved event is added at the end of that group e Select the event you want to move Note For this function you could take advantage of the VIEW filter to avoid selecting even
418. ming Styles Style Composer BI PLACE EVENT This function is only available if the Style Composer s clipboard already contains events that you copied using COPY EVENT Press the button icon The following pop up appears AACS MINE 2YNT 1 01 000 CC 0 Bank Select MSB PLACE EVENT TO Q 1 1 01 060 Note 70 Bb4 33 1 02 000 Note 37 C 2 111 1 e Specify the position where the first event of the group you copied with should be inserted by pressing the BAR and fields and entering the desired value for each unit using the dial or the DEC INC buttons e Press the field to confirm your settings and add the new event s Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes Note Events inserted with PLACE EVENT are added to any events that may already exist in that area Existing events are thus not pushed towards the end of the song PLACE EVENT amp 2 O 2 16 Disk Media functions The G 70 s DISK amp MEDIA functions allow you to save edited data and settings to the internal memory an external memory card or floppy disk to save and load User Program Sets and MIDI Sets to format various storage media to delete files and to copy data If you re still wondering whether to use a floppy disk or a memory card consider this e Memory cards have a much bigger capacity up to 4GB and are more reliable than floppy disks e Though you can also use 2DD or 2HD floppi
419. mo songs You must be dying to try out your new G 70 to see what It is capable of We ll get to that in a minute But first we need to connect It Connection The G 70 does not contain internal speakers You therefore need to connect it to an external amplifier Roland s KC series for example or use optional headphones Roland RH 25 RH 50 or RH 200 for example Be sure to switch off both the G 70 and the external devices you want to connect before making or breaking audio and or MIDI connections If you do not have access to the sound system of the venue where you are performing ask the local engineer to set the volume to the minimum level Mixing console keyboard amplifier active speakers OPTIONAL Dynamic microphone select MIC Other signal source select LINE im Microphone DR 10 or DR 20 Expression pedal e27 Connect the microphone using an EV 5 EV 7 unbalanced mono 1 4 or a bal anced XLR jack CD MP3 player etc Keyboard amplifier active speakers etc Footswitches DP 2 DP 6 or BOSS FS 5U Stereo headphones To wall outlet 0 VOCAL HARMONIST OUTPUT VOCAL HARMONIST INPUT MAIN AC R LMONO DIRECT R L EXTERNAL METRONOME U U SOURCE OUT BSB Gi Be oe E m m mE m E EE saa BET MULI
420. monist part can have its own effect set tings These settings change automatically as you press TALK VOICE FX AUTO TUNE or SINGER on the one hand and VOCODER SMALL or ENSEMBLE on the other can therefore use a short Reverb Room for example while can be processed with the Church algorithm and so on Thus by pressing VOICE FX you not only select that part and its voice transformations but also the reverb and delay settings you are about to edit In fact the Roland engineers already programmed the effect parameters for you so that you only need to read on if you want to edit those presets yourself TO G 70 Music Workstation Using the mixer functions amp effects Extremely important remark Before you even consider spending some time with the Vocal Harmonist effects you need to change the fol lowing parameter If you don t your changes will be lost as soon as you press another VOCAL HARMONIST button Do not change this setting if you are happy with the way the effects sound and therefore have no intention to delve into this matter The following setting is remembered even after you switch off your G 70 1 Press the button A TVA 2 Press the UTILITY then the field UTILITY PLAYER Z KEYBOARD UPPER MF LINK TOUCH SCREEN BEEF 3 Press the button icon Switch it on to use the most suitable effect settings for each preset that can be assigned to the various
421. mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels Level 0 127 Output level Use this parameter to com pensate for exaggerated level differences resulting from the settings you made 6 Spectrum Spectrum is a type of filter that modifies the timbre by boost ing or cutting the level at specific frequencies Spectrum 250Hz Gain 15dB 0 15dB Spectrum 500Hz Gain 15dB 0 15dB Spectrum 1000Hz Gain 15dB 0 15dB Spectrum 1250Hz Gain 15dB 0 15dB Spectrum 2000Hz Gain 15dB 0 15dB Spectrum 3150Hz Gain 15dB 0 15dB Spectrum 4000Hz Gain 15dB 0 15dB Spectrum 8000Hz Gain 15dB 0 15dB frequency band Spectrum Band Width Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 Simulta neously adjusts the width of the adjusted ranges for all the frequency bands Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels Level 0 127 Output level Use this parameter to com pensate for exaggerated level differences resulting from the settings you made wt ee ry ee ry ry Gain of each 7 Enhancer This effect controls the overtone structure of the high fre quencies adding sparkle and tightness to the sound Enhancer Sens 0 127 Sensitivity of the enhancer Mix Level 0 127
422. muster Selecting a high positive velocity value may thus lead to all notes being played at 127 E MAGNIFY 0 200 This parameter works like a compander effect a dynamics processor that simultaneously acts as compressor and expander although it processes MIDI data by selecting a value above 100 you increase the differences between high and low velocity values in the selected range Values below 64 are lowered while values above 64 are increased The result is therefore that the difference between pianissimo and fortissimo becomes far more pro nounced MAGNIFY values below 100 have the opposite effect they push all velocity towards the imaginary center of 64 thus reducing differences in playing dynamics BI FROM NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the note or lower limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range WTO NOTE O C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the upper limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range It is not displayed when you select EQUAL UNEQUAL HIGHER or LOWER See also Fine tuning the setting range on p 163 for details about the six button icons WE EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data 167 G 70 Music Workstation Using the 16 track sequencer CHANGE GATE TIME This function allows you to modify the duration of the notes in the selected time FROM TO and no
423. n AN the EXTERNAL memory Ls will be lost Are You Sure 2 O9 6 7 In the case of a floppy disk the External Memory message will read Floppy Disk of course Press the field to format your disk card Press or to return to the FORMAT display page without formatting Wait for the confirmation to appear then press the button to return to the main page Note Never remove the floppy disk or memory card while the operation is in progress Wait for the confirmation to appear before returning to business as usual G 70 Music Workstation Roland Format Archiving data using a computer USB The G 70 s USB port can be used for exchanging files with a computer or for MIDI communication Here we will look at the archiving function which are often called Data storage See page 214 for the MIDI functions You can transfer the following file types from the inter nal memory or a memory card to your computer and vice versa Music Styles User Programs Songs SMF files txt files These files reside in dedicated folders and should only be put there see step 12 below The following computers and operating systems are Supported IBM PC compatible Windows 98SE Me 2000 XP or later Apple MacOS 9 04 or later Note The G 70 does not handle or generate audio files Note The USB cable needed for this connection is optional 1 Disconnect the G 70 s USB port from your com puter if it is con
424. n Change this setting only if your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat WEVALUE 127 0 127 This is where you can set the transposition interval in semi tone steps If you wish to transpose a C part to D enter 2 As you see you can transpose the highest possible MIDI note all the way down to the lowest and vice versa T GG Warning 0 represents the lowest note the MIDI standard and the 16 track sequencer can handle while 127 is the highest note If you select 127 for note number 74 D5 for example the resulting note number would be 201 which is impossible Consequently the sequencer will sub tract 12 from 201 until the result is less than or equal to 127 and therefore use the value 117 This happens to all notes that would otherwise lie below O or above 127 Note Be careful when applying TRANSPOSE to a drum track track 10 or any other track that uses a Drum Set This results in a dramatic change of your rhythm section with a triangle playing the kick notes for example BI FROM NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the note or lower limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range WTO NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the upper limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range It is not displayed when you select EQUAL UNEQUAL HIGHER or LOWER See also Fine t
425. n the keyboard WHOLE mode you trigger two Tones the one assigned to UP1 or UP3 and the one assigned to UP2 To layer the UP1 or UP3 and UP2 parts you need to switch them both on See page 28 for details The following parameters allow you to transpose Coarse or to detune Fine the Upper2 part relative to the Upper1 or Upper3 part Though this is also possi ble when the UP1 UP3 part is off detuning or shifting the UP2 part would not be very meaningful You could use COARSE to program an interval of a fifth 7 semitones for UP2 which is especially effective for brass sounds and guitar power chords Do not forget to activate both the UP1 or UP3 and UP2 parts when you want to take advantage of the COARSE and FINE parameters If only the UP2 part is active your solos may sound flat Note In WHOLE mode these parameters can also be used for layer effects involving the UP2 which is detuned and the LW1 or LW2 part which are not detuned The FINE parameter works well when you assign the same or similar Tones to UP1 or UP3 and UP2 creating a kind of natural chorus effect that you could enhance by panning UP1 or UP3 to the left and UP2 to the right or vice versa see p 95 Note that FINE can also be used for other purposes than creating this chorus effect 1 Press the button The display changes to MEND i K TUNING Vee CONTROLLERS SPLIT amp TOUCH a lt o o gt i HARMON
426. n use them to directly access fre quently used functions that are only available via the function menu The ASSIGN SW assignments belong to the settings that can be written to a User Program If you don t change their assignment they can be used to trigger the FADE IN and FADE OUT functions 9 STYLE CONTROL section Use these buttons to select the desired Music Style pattern and to start stop Music Style playback see p 25 MUSIC ASSISTANT AD EFFECTS LCD CONTRAST 43 22 3 LYRICS amp SCORE x TAP EFFECTS a DISK amp MEDIA A LCD CONTRAST knob Use this knob to adjust the display s contrast if it is difficult to read The display itself is a touch screen and therefore needs to be clear at all times so that you know what you are doing Note The display may take some time to warm up That is why you may have to change the contrast several times after pow ering on 42 MUSIC ASSISTANT button Press this button to access the MUSIC ASSISTANT environment where you can select Music Style regis trations for a given song you want to play You can also program your own Music Assistant registrations 143 LYRICS amp SCORE button Press this button if you want the lyrics contained in the songs to appear in the display At the same time the chords of the notes played by the song parts will also be displayed This however is information that is extracted derived in realtime by the G 70 This function can even
427. nal orchestration to the Style you just saved select it press the field on the STYLE COVER page then save it again using the procedure described above Note If you save an internal Music Style under a different name you can no longer select the new version using the STYLE family buttons see p 27 Such customized Styles need to be assigned to a CUSTOM memory see p 84 or can be directly recalled using the Style Finder see p 86 L B One Touch You may find yourself using the One Touch function at regular intervals because it automates quite a few tasks The G 70 s One Touch memories are actually miniature User Programs that go way beyond any thing you may know from other arranger instruments The ONE TOUCH function makes a number of automatic settings for you 1 2 3 4 5 Tone Selection UP1 UP2 UP3 LW1 LW2 MBS Harmonic Bar status 8 UP1 LW1 MBS Pan UP1 UP2 UP3 LW1 LW2 MBS Chorus Send UP1 UP2 UP3 LW1 LW2 MBS Octave UP1 UP2 UP3 LW1 LW2 MBS Tone Edit settings UP1 UP2 UP3 LW1 LW2 MBS C1 value UP1 UP2 UP3 LW1 LW2 MBS MFX status UP1 MELODY INT D Beam Harmonic Bar effect UP1 LW1 MBS Part status on off UP1 UP2 UP3 LW1 LW2 MBS Main Split value Upper 3 Split value Upper 3 Split status on or off Bass Inversion status on or off Keyboard Mode SPLIT or WHOLE Sync Start amp Stop Status Intro Ending status on or off Pattern level VARIATIO
428. nce between the sound that is sent through the delay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Level 0 127 Output level 2 34 30 DST Chorus This effect connects distortion and a chorus in series Distortion Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the volume Distortion Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the distortion sound Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation speed Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Chorus Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Level 0 127 Output level 31 DST Flanger This effect connects distortion and a flanger effect in series Distortion Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the volume Distortion Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the distortion sound Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Flanger Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Flanger Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flanger Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 10
429. nce to resume from the first step of the sequence ON or not OFF Input Sync Threshold 0 127 Volume at which an input note will be detected Mode Legato Slash Sets the manner in which the vol ume changes as one step progresses to the next LEGATO The change in volume from one step s level to the next remains unaltered If the level of a following step is the same as the one preceding it there is no change in vol ume SLASH The level is momentarily set to O before progressing to the level of the next step This change in volume occurs even if the level of the following step is the same as the preceding step Shuffle 0 127 Timing of volume changes in levels for even numbered steps step 2 step 4 step 6 The higher the value the later the beat progresses Level 0 127 Output level 57 VK Rotary This type provides modified response for the rotary speaker with the low end boosted further This effect features the same specifications as the VK 7 s built in rotary speaker Speed Slow Fast Rotational speed of the rotating speaker Brake Off On Switches the rotation of the rotary speaker When this is turned on the rotation will gradually stop When it is turned off the rotation will gradually resume Woofer Slow Speed 0 05 10 0Hz Low speed rotation speed of the woofer Woofer Fast Speed 0 05 10 0Hz High speed rotation speed of the woofer Woofer Trans Up 0 127 A
430. nd overwrite all data of the destination track in the selected source track range Mix The data in the selected range will be added to any existing data on the destination track In either case the length of the destination track may change to include all data of the source track Note If the Style RAM memory already contains new data save It before copying The G 70 has no Undo function Saving a Style before copying allows you to revert to the previous ver sion if something goes wrong See Saving your Style on page 185 11 Press the field and use the DEC INC buttons to select Replace or Mix 157 G 70 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer 12 Press the field and use the dial to select the track you wish to copy the data to Note ADrums data can only be copied to ADrums tracks Like wise you can only copy ABass data to other ABass tracks If you selected ALL for SOURCE TRACK this parame ter is also set to ALL 13 Repeat this operation with the and fields to select the Mode Major Minor 7th ALL and the Division Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill Up 1 3 End 14 ALL Note A If you selected ALL for SOURCE or DIVISION this Or parameter is also set to ALL 14 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to specify the number of copies to be made Select 1 to the excerpt only once 15 Press the field to listen to the destination t
431. nd using CREATE EVENT Style tracks you only Just recorded do not contain it It allows you to use a revolutionary system for adapt ing the recorded note information to a more natural behavior also known as voicing There are two options ZOO Other edit operations The buttons in the right half of the STYLE MICRO EDIT page allow you to reduce or expand the number of events of the track you selected SHALE Here ENT Alteration Mode 01 000 CC O Bank Select MSB 0 01 000 CC 32 Bank Select LSB 4 EVENT 4 O EVENT EVENT 01 000 Program Change 01 000 CC 10 Pan COPY EVENT 01 000 CC 91 Reverb 0 0 0 o 6 01 000 CC 11 Expression 12 0 80 01 000 CC 93 Chorus 0 0 E CREATE EVENT Press this button icon to add a new event to the selected track The following pop up appears E CREATE CUENT _ om euum CE o _ os eam ia If the position for which you create a new event already contains other events the new event is added at the end of that group e Press the button icon that corresponds to the kind of event you want to add to the list The meaning of the available message types should be clear by now Here are the default values that are assigned to events you create Note Note Number 60 C4 On Velocity 100 Gate Time 60 Program Change CCOO Bank Select MSB value 0 CC32 Bank Select LSB value 4 Program Change Number 1 The Bank Select message
432. nd files Only the following types of files can be transferred between the G 70 and your computer Standard MIDI Files MID Song files with the KAR extension User Program Files UPG Music Styles STL Text files TXT for synchronization with songs see p 150 e Do not move rename or delete folders of the con nected memory area using your computer mouse or other commands Never add files to folders flagged with an X in the illustration above Never copy files to the root directory of the G 70 s internal memory or card and never rename or delete files you see there Never format optimize or scan the G 70 s memory area using your computer s tools e The G 70 can only handle filenames consisting of single byte alohanumeric characters i e no Russian Chinese Japanese Korean etc names Be sure to only use files whose names do not exceed 32 characters In some cases the new songs Styles or User Pro grams you copied to the associated Put New Here folder may not be visible to the corresponding Finder right away If that occurs briefly select the other memory area memory card or internal memory then return to the originally selected memory area 13 To disconnect the G 70 from your computer e Macintosh Drag the G70 SSD G70_CARD or Removable Disk icon to the trash OR Windows Click on the removal icon on the task bar Wait until a drop down menu appears and select th
433. nd or body movements in front of it These sensed positions are translated into MIDI messages that can be assigned to a variety of parameters 1 If you want to assign another function to the D BEAM without actually selecting it press and hold the D BEAM button that is assigned to the func tion you wish to use If you also wish to switch this function on briefly press the corresponding button DIBEAM g CONTROLS TE There are 4 groups DJ GEAR SOUND EFX INSTRUM and CONTROLS Press the field that corresponds to the desired function see below 3 Use the DJ GEAR SOUND EFX and fields to select the remaining groups and assign the desired function as well The assignments of all four groups DJ GEAR SOUND EFX INSTRUM CONTROLS will be written to a User Program one per group so that you can also alter nate between these groups while playing and still use your favorite settings 2 _ DJ Gear Vinyl RPM Allows you to simulate the sound you hear when manually turning a vinyl record to locate cue the position where you wish to start playback Cutting This is a very powerful filter effect that allows you to suppress the high frequencies in a rhythmic way like a DJ does sometimes IT Motor simulates the effect you hear when you sud denly stop a turntable the playback speed decreases while the pitch drops and the sound becomes muffled Scratching The D B
434. nd release the mouse key Wait until the operation is completed G 70 Music Workstation Roland Format 2 13 G 70 Music Workstation MIDI TA Mini MIDI is short for Musical Instrument Digital Interface The word refers to many things the most obvious being a connector type that is used by musical instruments and other devices to exchange messages relating to the act of making music When you play on the G 70 s keyboard or start song or Style playback your instrument transmits MIDI data to its MIDI OUT socket or to the USB port If you connect that socket to the MIDI IN socket of another instrument the external instrument may play the same notes as one of the G 70 s parts select sounds etc MIDI is a universal standard which means that musical data can be sent to and received by instruments of different types and manufacturers Furthermore MIDI allows you to connect your G 70 to a computer or hardware sequencer You can also use the USB port for MIDI applications Connect your G 70 as shown below Transmits MIDI IN data The G 70 receives data External MIDI instrument computer 4 External MIDI instrument The G 70 transmits data 4 MIDI communication via the USB port is also possible MIDI can simultaneously transmit and receive messages T on 16 channels so that up to 16 instruments can be The how to s controlled Nowadays most instruments like your Accessing the MIDI functions G 70 are mult
435. nd that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 69 Serial Delay This delay connects two delay units in series Feedback can be applied independently to each delay unit allowing you to produce complex delay sounds Delay 1 Time sync msec Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not msec the delay 1 time should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Delay 1 Time msec 0 1300ms Delay time from when sound is input to delay 1 until the delay sound is heard Delay 1 Time note Musical Notes Delay times can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter a
436. nd up to put its massive array of functions at your fingertips The full color touch sensitive screen and the large number of front panel buttons usually provide direct access to the available functions thus doing away with the need to wade through countless menus Parameters that belong together from a musician s point of view are usually located on the same or adja cent display pages while setting them has been greatly simplified with respect to earlier arranger instruments Cover functions and Makeup Tools for Standard MIDI Files and Music Styles Reorchestrating existing Standard MIDI Files and Music Styles has become a breeze thanks to high quality Song and Style Cover presets and an intuitive instrument based set of MAKEUP TOOLS parameters that allow you to revoice your songs and Styles without spending hours editing single events The structure of Standard MIDI Files can be changed in real time thanks to four programmable MARK amp JUMP memories which allows you to play extended versions of prerecorded songs Adaptive Chord Voicing technology The G 70 s Arranger not only boasts a new structure with 4 accompaniment levels 4 Intros and 4 Ending phrases but also relies on a more musical real time conversion of the chords you play into meaningful accompaniment phrases Roland s patent applied for ACV technology can indeed transpose Music Style parts in such a way as to eliminate unnatural jumps of Strings lines plano
437. nected 2 For Windows XP If a message asks you to restart your computer do as directed 3 Switch on the G 70 4 Use a USB cable to connect the G 70 to your com puter MIDI _ USB THRU OUT IN os p To the a USB port of your computer f Note Always connect the G 70 directly to your computer or to a powered USB hub 5 Press the button The display changes to SPLIT amp TOUCH C h aman aa DI FUNCTION EC lt E I eo pee TONE EDIT 6 Press the USB DATA STORAGE field USBIDAIASIORAGE CONNECTION MODE ae C External Memory J Internal Memory czo Now you need to specify which memory area should appear on the computer s desktop 7 Press or mem ory card to establish the connection with your computer Depending on the area you choose the display now looks as follows OSs BATA ILORA PC lt gt INTERNAL MEMORY Pag mimi UU Or like this 334 DAVEY SIORAGE PC t 5 EXTERNAL MEMORY CA Mp dumami eee CONNECTED ek DISCONNECT 2 11 G 70 Music Workstation Archiving data using a computer USB Note In this state all of the G 70 s panel functions are blocked You can however keep playing the last Keyboard part s you selected You cannot select other sounds or parts however Note To cancel the connection press DISCONNECT or the EXIT button 8 Op
438. ng a wave expansion board turn off the power of the G 70 and all connected devices and disconnect all cables including the G 70 s power cable On the G 70 remove only the four screws shown in the following diagram and detach the cover The cover is located on the bottom panel e Screws to be removed H O When turning the unit upside down get a bunch of newspapers or magazines and place them under the four corners or at both ends to prevent damage to the buttons and controls Always orient the G 70 in such a way that no buttons or controls get damaged When turning the G 70 upside down handle with care to avoid dropping it or allowing it to fall or tip over Plug the connector of the Wave Expansion Board into the connector of the slot and at the same time insert the board holder through the hole of the wave expansion board Wave expansion board B SS SRX series sal Position as shown before you install the board o Connector Use the installation tool supplied with the wave expansion board to turn the holders in the LOCK direction so the board will be fastened in place Installation tool 4 LOCK 227 G 70 Music Workstation Appendix 5 Use the screws that you removed in step 2 to fas a ten the cover back in place Accessing the Patches of SRX E Checking whether the board is recognized series expansion boards via MIDI After installing the wave expansion check to confir
439. ng pressure to the display When connecting disconnecting cables grasp the connector itself never pull on the cable This way you will avoid causing shorts or damage to the cable s internal elements A small amount of heat will radiate from the G 70 during normal operation This is perfectly normal To avoid disturbing your neighbors try to keep the G 70 s volume at reasonable levels You may prefer to use headphones so you do not need to be concerned about those around you especially late at night When you need to transport the G 70 package it in the box including padding that it came in Otherwise you will need to use equivalent packaging materials or a flightcase Use only the specified expression pedal EV 5 EV 7 sold sepa rately By connecting any other expression pedals you risk caus ing malfunction and or damage to the G 70 About the touch screen Wipe off stains on the touch screen using ethanol but do not allow the ethanol to soak into the joint of the upper fume and the bottom glass for it may otherwise cause peeling or malfunction Do not use organic solvents or detergents other than ethyl alcohol ethanol Before using floppy disks handling the floppy disk drive Install the G 70 on a solid level surface in an area free from vibra tion If the unit must be installed at an angle be sure the installa tion does not exceed the permissible range upward 2 down ward 18 Avoid using the G 7
440. ng range of the following parameter refers to a speed or a note value Delay Right Time msec 0 2600ms Adjust the time from the direct sound until when the right delay sound is heard 4S G 70 Music Workstation Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters Delay Right Time note Musical Notes Delay times can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to msec Specify the value of the desired note Delay Center Time sync msec Note Use this parame ter to specify whether Note or not msec the center delay time should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the following parameter refers to a speed or a note value Delay Center Time msec 0 2600 ms Adjust the time delay from the direct sound until when the center delay sound is heard Delay Center Time note Musical Notes Delay times can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to msec Specify the value of the desired note Center Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Left Level 0 127 Right Level 0 127 Cen
441. nged G 70 Music Workstation Roland Style Track Edit functions WE EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data TIME SIGNAT TIME SIGNATURE CECI DIVISION BEAT BEAT O 44 6 44 8 44 44 O 44 6 44 amp 44 Dan FILLDOWNL Lg O 44 Byt amp 44 FILL UP O O O 44 6G 44 amp 44 VARIATION 6 KK O O44 6 44 6 44 Oa Q pecu The TIME SIGNAT page allows you to check and set the time signature of specific or all patterns The major minor and seventh Modes of a pattern must always use the same time signature which is why you cannot edit them separately Use this parameter to specify the time signature of the selected pattern DIVISION see below The MAIN INTRO and ENDING entities comprise four varia tions which is why there are four TIME SIGN values you can set using the VARIATION 1 4 button icons When you select Fill Up or Fill Dwn for DIVISION only three TIME SIGN icons are displayed The most commonly used time signatures are 2 4 3 4 4 4 6 8 and 12 8 Other values such as 7 4 13 8 etc are also possible Note When you change the time signature of an already recorded pattern its notes and events are reshuffled so that you may end up with incomplete measures None of your data are deleted however EI DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit Intro Main Fill Dwn Fill Up End BIVARIATION Use these button icons
442. nies press the Or button again so that neither of them lights Note Obviously you do not have to use a song as backing you can also play the accompaniment yourself or use the Arranger See page 28 and below Who specifies the harmonies Now that you know what the Vocal Harmonist does let us briefly look at how it does that You may have noticed the field in the lower left corner of the above display pages Its current default setting is AUTO This means that during song or Arranger playback the note information contained in the song data or played in the chord recognition area of the keyboard will be used for specifying the pitches of the harmony notes Auto Harmony Note If the song you are playing back contains a Harmony track the harmonies will be based on those notes In all other cases the harmonies are generated in realtime If you stop song playback and play chords on the keyboard the note information thus generated is used for the harmony pitches Use the dial to select another setting The possibilities are Auto The G 70 uses one of the following systems depending on what note information is avail able Keyboard Only notes played on the keyboard will be all used for specifying harmony pitches Keyboard Only notes played to the left of the split point Left page 57 will be used for specifying harmony pitches Keyboard Only notes played to the right of the split Right point
443. not all note messages of the selected MIDI channel should be received by the NTA part set the range to the desired values Note The LOW LIMIT value cannot be higher value than HIGH LIMIT and vice versa If you select the V Link part When you select V LINK on the page the display changes to HUE Soy a fer ULINK TX CLIP CONTROL TH COLOR CONTROL TH MNEL CHR 6 Haba PAGE KI KI Here you can only set TX parameters because the G 70 only sends V LINK messages it does not receive them See page 222 for details about the V LINK functionality Note Press the field to recall the default setting for the parameter that is currently selected whose dis play field lights CLIP CONTROL TX This parameter allows you to set the MIDI channel CHANNEL to be used for the transmission of these messages Use the field to enable lights or disable dark the transmission of these mes sages COLOR CONTROL TX This parameter allows you to set the MIDI channel CHANNEL to be used for the trans mission of these messages Use the field to G 70 Music Workstation Roland Editing MIDI parameters enable lights or disable dark the transmission of these messages PARAM This page contains several parameters that are not related to one another the other MIDI pages always concentrate on one aspect MUG Seay KEYBOARD STYLE SONG SYSTEM E PARTS PARTS PARTS Param PARAMET
444. not formatted a message will be displayed that allows you to format it before the User Programs are copied 10 If you chose EXT MEMORY for TO disable the card s write protection if available and insert it into the PCMCIA slot See the owner s manual of the memory card for how to disable its write pro tection If you chose FLOPPY DISK for TO disable its write protection see p 11 and insert it into the drive 11 Press the field You are asked whether it is OK to overwrite all files on the destination media TO that have the same file names as the files you are about to copy COPY STYLE B EINT MEMORY EINT MEMORY GES LOPPY DISK CCOFLOPPY DISK GEERT MEMORY EBERT MEMORY Replace files of the same name Bee Qe PALS 12 Press the field if it is OK to overwrite files with the same names on the destination media Press the field if files on the source FROM media that have the same name as existing files on the destination TO media should not be copied only files with original names will be copied in that case The data are copied and a message confirms the end of the operation Note Never remove the floppy disk or memory card while the operation Is in progress Wait for the confirmation to appear before returning to business as usual 13 Press the button to return to the main page Note If the remaining storage capacity is smaller than the size of the files yo
445. note information extracted in realtime page 49 will be displayed on screen even if the button does not light in which case the lyrics chords and notes no longer appear in the G 70 s display Note The signal format PAL or NTSC can be set via a MENU function OUTPUT M AIN need adapter plugs 1 4 gt RCA Cinch or Roland PJ 1M cables These inputs are only suitable for line level signals Note that they are stereo with a left and right chan nel If you only connect one cable to L or R the signal is only audible on the left or right channel The volume of the signal received via these inputs can be set with the 3 EXT SOURCE knob 12 VOCAL HARMONIST section INPUT switch If you connect a microphone to the INPUT socket set this switch to MIC To try out the Vocal Harmonist function for other signals guitar external synthesizers amp modules CDs MDs etc set this switch to LINE Note For the LINE setting to work with electric guitars or basses you need to connect such instruments to an effects pedal or rack effect in bypass mode and connect the effect s output to the INPUT socket INPUT socket This is where you can to connect an optional microphone like a Roland DR 10 or DR 20 or other external signal source you wish to process using the G 70 s Vocal Harmonist facility This is a combo socket to which you can connect either a bal anced XLR or unbalanced 1 4 jac
446. nother group of 5 Styles Note If you can t seem to find the Style you wish to assign and if you know it exists in the selected memory area check the FOUND value It should indicate the same figure as the GLOBAL entry You can also use the Finder for locating the desired Music Style See p 86 for detalls Note It is perfectly possible to use older Music Styles with the G 70 They will be converted automatically to the new VARIATION 1 x 4 system 7 Press the field The G 70 returns to the STYLE page where you came from The name of the selected Style appears in the field you selected before pressing the button You could now program other assignments if you wanted to Note CUSTOM assignments are stored internally but they are not part of the User Programs Thus you can only program 120 links in all rather than 120 per User Program Note CUSTOM settings reside in a global memory whose con tents are saved together with all User Program Set data p 205 Be sure to save your current settings before loading an entire User Program Set Use Save User Program Set on p 205 for saving the settings Selecting CUSTOM Style memories The names are important for locating the Styles If you change the name of a Music Style that is refer enced by one of the CUSTOM memories the G 70 can no longer find it Conversely if you have two memory cards that both contain a Music Style called Reggae1 even inserting
447. ns pro ceed as follows e Press the button to start Style play back e Press the button twice in succession dou ble click STYLE CONTROL BASS SYNC ___ INTRO MAIN END RIT ty STOP e AUTO FILL IN START STOP This selects an Ending pattern and slows down the tempo according to the ACCELER RITARD and MEA SURE settings When the Ending phrase is finished and Arranger playback stops the tempo is reset 6 For Fill Ritardandos The FILL RIT function is suitable for ballads It causes the next Fill In to slow down ritardando Try using this function now e Switch on the button STYLE CONTROL INTRO MAIN END RIT INVERSION START NSTOP EJ EY EY LI EE oe TITI 4 FILL IN START STOP e Press the button G 70 Music Workstation Roland Tempo related settings Arranger Options e Press the ARRANGER SETTING field followed by the ARRANGER OPTIONS field eee loa SETTING TEMPO CHANGE FILL IN TEMPO HALF BAR F5 FILL RIT Ci z v FILL RITARDANDO e Start Arranger playback and press the but ton icon to switch it on e Press and a VARIATION 1 4 button At the next downbeat the G 70 plays a Fill In The tempo slows down while the fill is being played At the end of the fill the Style returns to the previously set tempo this is called a tempo 7 Press the button to return to the main page ST G 70 Music Workstation Additiona
448. ns to sound to when it disappears This change can be indicated on a graph as shown in the display The envelope shape is unique to each instrument and is an important ele ment in how we distinguish the sounds we hear The envelopes of musical instrument sounds can change depending on how the instrument is played For example if a trumpet is played sharply and strongly the attack will be quick and the sound will be sharp But if a trumpet is played lightly and softly the attack will be softer In order to adjust the attack of a sound you can modify the ATTACK parameter of the envelope 93 G 70 Music Workstation Advanced Keyboard part functions The envelope parameters affect both the volume 8 Press the button to return to the main page TVA and the filter TVF If the cutoff frequency has aaa a E been lowered it will rise as the envelope rises and D Hera fall as the envelope falls ATTACK 64 63 This parameter adjusts the onset of the sound Negative values speed up the attack so that the sound becomes more aggressive DECAY 64 63 This parameter adjusts the time over which the sound s volume and Cutoff frequency fall from the highest point of the attack down to the sustain level Note Percussive sounds usually have a sustain level of 0 Piano and guitar sounds are in this category Holding the keys for a long time will thus have little effect on the dura tion of the notes you are playing even if you select
449. nset of the sound Negative values speed up the attack so that the sound becomes more aggressive DECAY This parameter adjusts the time over which the sound s volume and Cutoff frequency fall from the high est point of the attack down to the sustain level Note Percussive sounds usually have a sustain level of 0 Piano and guitar sounds are in this category Holding the keys for a long time will thus have little effect on the dura tion of the notes you are playing even if you select a high value here RELEASE This parameter adjusts the time over which the sound will decay after the note is released until it is no longer heard The cutoff frequency will also fall according to this setting Use the following three parameters if you think the part in question has too much or could use a little more vibrato 127 G 70 Music Workstation Song and Style Makeup Tools Note Some Tones already contain natural sampled vibrato whose depth or speed cannot be changed VB RATE This parameter adjusts the speed of the pitch modulation Positive settings make the preset pitch modulation faster and negative settings make it slower VB DEPTH This parameter adjusts the intensity of the pitch modulation Positive settings mean that the wobble becomes more prominent while negative settings make it shallower VB DELAY This parameter adjusts the time required for the vibrato effect to begin Positi
450. nsformation do not press the field 6 Select the track s you wish to modify 7 Select the range FROM and TO for the edit operation The FROM and TO parameters in the left half of the display allow you to specify the positions measure beat clock of the track excerpt you want to change Example to change measures 1 4 of the selected track enter the following values FROM BAR 0001 TO BAR 0005 BEAT 01 BEAT 01 CPT 000 CPT 000 8 Specify what you want to change and how it should change press one of the parameter fields to the right of the FROM TO section use the dial the DECJ INC buttons or for notes and velocity values the keyboard 9 Confirm the operation by pressing the EXECUTE field 10 Press the field to return to the 16 track Sequencers main page 11 Save your song G 70 Music Workstation Roland Editing 16 track songs QUANTIZE RAGED Use this function if you chose not to quantize your music during recording page 157 and now realize that the timing Is not quite what you expected It to be Quantizing after recording has the advantage that you can first listen to the original and then cor rect only those notes whose timing is definitely off BTRACK ALL 1 16 Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks BI FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or song Refers to the first mea
451. nt Note In the case of Drum Sets this setting applies to all drum percussion instruments There is also a parameter that can be set for certain drum instruments See page 128 REVERB Use this parameter to set the Reverb Send Level The send level refers to the amount of the signal transmitted to the reverb effect and hence to the strength intensity with which the instrument is pro cessed CHORUS Use this parameter to set the Chorus Send Level The send level refers to the amount of the signal transmitted to the chorus effect and hence to the strength intensity with which the instrument is pro cessed Note The four parameters discussed so far can also be set on the SONG STYLE MAKEUP TOOLS mixer page see p 124 VELOCITY This parameter allows you to modify the velocity range of the instrument in question O means that the recorded values are left untouched negative values reduce all velocity values by the same amount leaving differences between notes intact while positive settings shift all velocity values in a positive direction OCTAVE Only for Tones Use this parameter to trans pose the selected instrument up or down by up to 4 octaves if you think it is too high or too low G 70 Music Workstation Roland Using the Makeup Tools SOUND EDIT for Tones Pressing the field on any of the MAKEUP TOOLS pages takes you to the following page where you can make more refined changes to t
452. ntering names on p 49 The field allows you to switch between uppercase and lowercase characters The NAME you enter here only refers to the Music Assistant entry and has no effect on the underlying User Program whose name does not change e Press the EXECUTE field to confirm the new name T 2 2 W Deleting Music Assistant entries The DELETE function allows you to dispose of the selected Music Assistant registration Again this is a virtual process because the underlying User Program does not disappear In fact this operation only removes the MA icon from the Music Assistant entry e Select the Music Assistant entry you want to discard e Press the field This operation cannot be undone which is why the following question is now displayed MOUSIG ASSISTANT oad ONG EE Renan This File will be DELETED from Memory Card Name MuAss Another Paradise J Artist None a Genre Pop ARE YOU SURE deletes the Music Assistant entry leaves the entry intact and takes you back to the initial Finder page with the list leaves the file intact and takes you back to the MUSIC ASSISTANT LIST page Saving a Music Assistant entry The SAVE function on the MUSIC ASSISTANT LIST page does two things at once e t gathers the settings of all parameters that make up your current registration and saves them e t creates a new User Program and gives it the same name or it modifies the existing User
453. o transform your voice in various ways More impor tantly its sound quality surpasses by far anything you may already have tried Setting up Here s what you need to do to take advantage of the Vocal Harmonist function 1 Connect a dynamic microphone to the INPUT jack on the G 70 s rear panel VOCAL HARMONIST nma O UT P UT maman Q INPUT wl Jl LINE MIC CH Set to MIC Examples Roland DR 10 or DR 20 2 Set the switch to MIC You can also connect the mono output of other instruments In that case you need to set the switch to LINE VOCAL HARMONIST INPUT GB a IH uned liiic Set to LINE L MONO Ipi as 46355 5555 B a pa DAG E J l s Synthesizer sound module etc 3 Set the knob on the front panel to MIN Note If you like you can connect the Vocal Harmonist OUT PUT sockets to another amp or additional mixer channels 4 Press the button it must light and switch off the VOCODER or button 5 Sing into the microphone and gradually increase the setting 6 7 8 Set it to the highest possible value taking care to avoid that the OVER indicator lights It would be best to sing at the level you will be using during your per formances If your singing is inaudible in the speakers con nected to the amp or the headphones tu
454. o a speed Hz or a note value Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Frequency at which the two vowels switch Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Depth 0 127 Effect depth Input Sync Sw Off On Determines whether the LFO for switching the vowels is reset by the input signal ON or not OFF Input Sync Threshold 0 127 Volume level at which reset is applied Manual 0 100 Point at which Vowel 1 2 switch 49 or less Vowel 1 will have a longer duration 50 Vowel 1 and 2 will be of equal duration 50 or more Vowel 2 will have a longer duration EO EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range FO EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range 237 G 70 Music Workstation Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels Level 0 127 Output level 47 Speaker Sim Simulates the speaker type and mic settings used to record the speaker sound Speaker Type Small 1 Small 2 Middle JC 120 Built In 1 Built In 2 Built In 3 Built In 4 Built In 5 BG Stack 1 BG Stack 2 MS Stack 1 MS Stack 2 Metal Stack 2 Stack 3 Stac
455. o edit or press its field and set the desired value with the dial The button icon must be blue for the effect to be noticeable Here s what the parameters mean RATE Sets the speed of the vibrato effect DEPTH Allows you to set the vibrato intensity Vibrato is an effect that changes modulates the pitch The higher the DEPTH value the more outspo ken these periodic pitch changes will be RISE TIME Allows you to set a swell for the vibrato effect This parameter specifies how long it takes before the DEPTH value is reached once the Delay Time is up G 70 Music Workstation Roland Vocal Harmonist function DELAY TIME Allows you to set a delay between the moment you start singing and the moment the vibrato effect kicks in 6 Press to leave this page or to try out other Gender settings Voice FX Ever wondered what your voice would sound like If you were a woman for men man for women robot or something else You re about to find out 1 Press the button 2 Sing into the microphone and listen to yourself You may have to switch off the or button if it lights to hear how this function works 3 Press and hold the button The display now looks as follows TYPE 4 Press one of the twelve TYPE fields to try out other possibilities 5 For added strangeness or realism you can press the field right 6 If you feel the general idea is OK but would like to fine tune t
456. o on the EFFECTS page see above 3 Press the field below COMPRESSOR that displays the name of the currently selected preset 4 Select the desired preset with the dial or the DECJ INC buttons The available presets are 1 Hard Comp 4 Mid Boost 6 Standard 2 Soft Comp 5 High Boost 7 User 3 Low Boost The settings you make on this page can be saved to a User memory and recalled as and when necessary Here s how to edit the parameters 5 Press the field of the parameter you wish to change 6 Set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons BC LEVEL 0 127 Use this parameter to set the com pressor s input level The higher the value the stronger the three frequency bands wil be compressed The value you set here is thus added to the LEVEL settings of the three bands If you set this parameter to O the com pressor has no effect on the output signal BC GAIN 24 0 24dB Use this parameter to correct the level at the compressor s outputs If the settings of the remaining parameters lead to a significantly lower level which can be checked by switching the compressor on and off for A B comparisons select a positive value If your settings lead to a significantly higher level select a negative value O means that the level is neither boosted nor attenuated TOG 7 8 SPLIT 1 200 800 SPLIT 2 2000 8000 On other devices these parameters are sometimes called th
457. o rename your new Play List before saving It Note By pressing the field you return to the EDIT page Note When you press the button the following mes sage appears PUA LIST EDIT Ex TERNAL INTERNAL MEMORY MEMORY Gr Theo sina t Play List has not been saved Exit anyway Press to return to the main page and delete any changes you have made up to that point Press to return to the EDIT page without deleting your changes M Clear ALL The Play List Edit page contains a field you can use to remove a steps from the currently selected Play List In effect this means that only the name is preserved while the list can must be pro grammed again 14 7 G 70 Music Workstation More refined song functions Using Play Lists The two fields l lt lt gt gt 1 that appear on the main Here s how Play Lists can be used for your perfor page during chain playback allow you to navigate in mances your play list The added display shows the name of e f necessary insert the memory card that contains the song that is assigned to the currently selected the list and songs you need into the slot step 1 Press the button Cool Live Band Free Panel ower 1 St Slow Str The Grand X NEN CA EP1 You can release it as soon as the display looks more 3 ASS XV Ac Bass or less as follows Use the aa field to select the previous step and Saturday Live a Ga gt gt to select the next step If you d
458. o so while play a a O ret back is running the previous or next song will be played back as soon as the current song is finished Note The MARK JUMP buttons are also available during Play List playback so feel free to use them see p 39 6 Press again to continue with the next step 7 To switch off the Play List function press the 2 Use the scrollbar the dial or the button it goes dark DECJ INC buttons to scroll through the Play Lists Selecting another single song via the Song Finder or if available and necessary a User Program with a song link will temporarily 3 Press the field that corresponds to the list you deactivate Play List function This is signalled by the want touse flashing indicator When the external song is finished the Play List function resumes and the indicator of the function lights steadily Note If Play List playback is stopped at an entry for which NEXT SONG is not active and if you then select a User Program with a song link the Play List function is switched off Pressing then starts playback of the song recalled by the User Program 4 Press the button to return to the main page The indicator now lights to indicate that Managing Play Lists the Play List function is active Play Lists can be renamed and deleted PLAY STOP m 5 Press the PLAY STOP s button to start playback e f necessary insert the memory card that contains of your play list the list y
459. ode Normal Cross Select the way in which delay sound is fed back into the effect NORMAL The left delay sound will be fed back into the left delay and the right delay sound into the right delay CROSS The left delay sound will be fed back into the right delay and the right delay sound into the light delay Delay Left 0 0 500 0ms Adjust the time from the direct sound until when the left delay sound is heard Delay Right 0 0 500 0ms Adjusts the time until the delay sound is heard Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Modulation Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modula tion speed Modulation Depth 0 127 Adjust the depth of the modulation Modulation Phase 0 180 deg Adjust the spatial spread of the sound EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range FO High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 20 3 Tap Delay The Triple Tap Delay produces three delay sounds center left and right Delay Left 200 1000ms note Adjust the time from t
460. of the UPPER 3 SPLIT function see p 90 to avoid that the UP3 notes are way too high for what you have in mind 1 Use the TONE ASSIGN buttons to select of the Key board part you wish to transpose in octave steps KEYBOARD PART TONE ASSIGN MBS LW2 LW1 2 If the main page is not displayed press the button several times until it appears 3 Use the OCTAVE ally fields to set the desired interval up to 4 octaves higher or lower P2 UP1 4 If necessary repeat this with the remaining Key board parts m Key Touch velocity sensitivity Of course the G 70 s keyboard is also velocity sensitive This allows you to control the timbre and volume of the Keyboard parts by varying the force with which you strike the keys 1 Press the button The display changes to MENW R i EES jm YOCAL WY SPLIT8 TOUCH HARMONIST ma ARRANGER r SETTING EE COMPOSER i UTILITY x sz j lt m FUNCTION PE toneco HAND A ec USBDATA i P CONTROLLERS STORAGE 2 Press the field followed by the field SPIS TOUGH GO 3 4 Press a field in the PARTS column to select the Keyboard part whose velocity sensitivity you wish to change Press a field in the CURVE column to set the desired velocity sensitivity LOW Select this setting if you are used to playing on an electronic organ or if you do not want velocity changes to bring a
461. of the phase shifted sound Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels EO Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Level 0 127 Output level 50 Inf Phaser A phaser that continues raising lowering the frequency at which the sound is modulated Mode 1 2 3 4 Higher values will produce a deeper phaser effect Speed 100 100 Speed at which to raise or lower the frequency at which the sound is modulated upward downward Resonance 0 127 Amount of feedback Mix Level 0 127 Level of the phase shifted sound Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Level 0 127 Output level 51 Ring Modul Ring Modulator is an effect which applies amplitude modula tion AM to the input signal producing bell like sounds You can also change the modulation frequency according to the volume of the sound input to the effects device Frequency 0 127
462. ominent or not strong enough You can also use it to upgrade older Music Styles to ensure that they use the G 70 s new sounds Be aware however that Style tracks can neither use HARMONIC BARS nor SRX EXPANSION sounds BTRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track you want to edit Select ALL to edit all tracks BI MODE Allows you to select the mode of the pattern to be edited Major minor 7th or ALL BI DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division or pattern you want to edit Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill Up 1s 3 End 1 4 ALL MINIT VALUE Press this field to reset all values on this page to their initial state if you want to start again There are two kinds of changes that can be performed on this page FROM TO and INC DEC BI FROM TO Enter the original data value i e the value that is being used right now by the selected track s in the FROM col umn For TO specify the new value that should replace the FROM value These are absolute changes you don t add or subtract values you replace them with other values This system is only available for messages that allow you to select sounds or sound banks namely CC00 04127 ALL This control change is the so called MSB bank select message It allows you to select the Capital Tone select O of a sound address if you don t want to use variations or to select another varia tion
463. on lights 3 Press the button to return to the main page or continue with the next step Dynamic Arranger The DYNAMIC ARRANGER function allows you to con trol the volume and timbre of the Arranger parts via the way you strike the keys in the chord recognition area velocity sensitivity 1 Select the ARRANGER CHORD page see step 1 of Chord recognition area ZONE on p 80 Ge Ce Ce Ce ZONE TYPE HODE LEFT MES JE RIGHT CM JESS WHOLE TY Sees OFF ER 2 Press the button icon to switch the Arranger s velocity sensitivity off dark or on lights This function only becomes meaningful if you also Specify how the various Arranger parts should respond to your velocity 3 Press the field The display changes to GPAs Bor ACCOMP4 ACCOMPS ACCOMPE cLose a mn 4 Press the field of the Arranger part whose velocity sensitivity you wish to change 5 6 7 G 70 Music Workstation Roland More refined Arranger settings There are eight Arranger parts A DRUMS the drums A BASS the bass and ACCOMP 1 6 the melodic accompaniment parts Set the desired value with the dial or the DECJ INC buttons You can specify positive and negative sensitivity val ues Positive values mean that the volume of the part in question increases when you strike the chord rec ognition area keys harder while negative values mean that the volume of the selected Arranger part increases
464. on of the Pitch Shift B sound L64 is far left O is center and 63R is far right Level Balance A100 0B A50 50B A0 100B Adjust the volume balance between the Pitch Shift A and Pitch Shift B sounds When set to A100 0B only the sound of Pitch Shift A is output when set to A0 100B only the sound of Pitch Shift B is output Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level G 70 Music Workstation Roland Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters 24 FBK Pitch Pitch Shifter with several echoes Pitch Shift Mode 1 5 Higher settings of this parameter will result in slower response but steadier pitch Pitch Coarse 24 0 12 semitone Adjust the pitch of the pitch shifted sound in semitone steps 2 1 octaves Pitch Fine 100 0 100 cent Make fine adjustments to the pitch of the pitch shifted sound in 2 cent steps one cent is 1 100th of a semi tone Pitch Pre Delay 0 0 500 0ms Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the pitch shifted sound is heard Pitch Feedback 98 0 98 Adjust the proportion of the processed sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left an
465. on has no function at all Rotary HB Slow Fast Allows you to select the slow or fast speed of the Rotary effect This only works if the Harmonic Bars are being used by UP1 LW1 and or MBS Rotary HB On Off Allows you to switch the Rotary effect on first time and off second This only works if the Harmonic Bars are being used by UP1 LW1 and or MBS Fade In Fade n is a function you may want to use occasionally While it is being performed the assigned button 1 or 2 flashes Fading in means that the vol ume of both the Arranger Style and Keyboard parts gradually increases giving the impression that you have been playing for a long time before what you play becomes audible The volume is automatically set to zero and then gradually increased to the value specified with the knob When the Fade In is com pleted the indicator of the ASSIGN SW button goes dark Fade Out Fade Outs are extremely popular in pop music and the G 70 allows you to end a song just like the original To do so press the assigned ASSIGN SW button it flashes The volume then gradually decreases until it reaches zero indicator lights steadily Scale Upper Allows you to assign the selected Scale Tune see p 71 setting to the three Upper parts Scale Lower Allows you to assign the selected Scale Tune see p 71 setting to the three Lower parts Half Bar on Fill In The ASSIGN SW button allows you to switch the Half Bar f
466. ond On Velocity 127 to the velocity playing dynamics The MICRO EDIT page adds a third message to that pair 65535 It describes the duration of the note in ques tion You may remember this value from the TRACK EDIT environment where it is called Gate Time Control Change These messages usually add some thing to the notes being played like modulation a dif ferent volume a new stereo position The G 70 recog nizes and allows you to edit all available control change numbers CC00 127 and displays their official name wherever possible not all control change numbers have universally accepted functions The value can be set between from 0 to 127 Program Change These messages are used for select ing sounds within the current bank 1 128 Pitch Bend These messages are used for temporary changes to the pitch of the notes being played at that time Pitch Bend messages can be positive higher or negative lower Setting range 128 128 Poly Aftertouch This refers to aftertouch messages the G 70 s does not generate it uses channel aftertouch Its sound source recognizes them however The difference between polyphonic aftertouch and channel aftertouch is that the former is related to a single note while the latter applies to all the notes the track is currently play ing Channel Aftertouch See above These messages are generated by the G 70 s keyboard G 70 Music Workstation Roland
467. ondition of the Arranger running or stopped one move inside the D Beam s range stops or starts it A second move ment will start or stop it again Start Stop Song Depending on the current condition of the Recorder running or stopped one move inside the D Beam s range stops or starts it A second move ment will start or stop it again Fade OUT Fade Outs are extremely popular in pop music and the G 70 allows you to end a song just like the original To do so move your hand inside the D Beam s range The volume then gradually decreases until it reaches zero Auto Fill Allows you to switch the but ton and function on and off Fill Up Triggers the Fill In that takes you to the next Variation i e from MAIN 1 to 2 You can use this function up to three times to jump to the most complex level Variation 4 If you then use the D Beam again however nothing happens You thus cannot cycle back to the lowest level Variation 1 Fill Down Triggers the Fill In that takes you to the pre vious Variation i e from MAIN 2 to 1 You can use this function up to three times to jump to the simplest level Variation 1 If you then use the Aftertouch again however nothing happens You thus cannot cycle back to the highest level Variation 4 ADrum On Off This setting allows you to switch the Arranger s ADrums part on and off using the D Beam Controller There are also combined on off options
468. ontinuing see p 185 BTRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track whose length you wish to change BM DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division or pattern you want to edit Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 143 Fill Up 1 3 End 154 M LENGTH BAR Press this field and use the dial or the DECJ INC buttons to set the length of the selected pattern s in steps of one bar You can also make an existing track longer by specifying a BAR value that lies beyond the last notes Note To change the BAR length of all three Modes switch on all three BAR fields then set the desired value BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the time signature in the selected area Note To change the BEAT length of all three Modes switch on all three BEAT fields then set the value CPI This field allows you to fine tune the length In most cases you will probably work with multiples of J notes i e 120CPT because 120CPT represent one beat of an X 4 bar 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 etc Note To change the CPT length of all three Modes switch on all three CPT fields then set the value BI MODE Use these button icons to choose the Modes to which the new length setting should apply You can also switch on two or all three button icons Note If you set TRACK to ALL all three Modes are selected automatically and that cannot be cha
469. ooo c ccc LLL LLL 24 WMS PG PAA AP 58 The general idea o u uuina ieaiaia 24 Setting the transposition interval via the display 58 Playing to an automatic accompaniment 25 Global MWanSPOSe lt s52240250heneeeeneeeenneece KAYA 59 Professional transitions Fill IN n aa Kaht nma wks 26 Octave NANANG EL SAD PE MISA BE SESS 99 A aE a EErEE EELEE AAAP 26 Key Touch velocity sensitivity 60 Selecting Music Styles 27 Master UNG AA AA iirinn 61 Changing the tempo asicaeua meswi odjeidnicinintaeaecnacans 28 Ar TOU AP AA AA AA 61 Using the Keyboard parts 28 ASIIGNSW BUTTONS maana anga mada wat ded 62 Playing with an Upper and or Lower part 28 Using the D Beam Controller nawa naa mwaa ies 64 Alternating between soundS asaan asma kain 29 Using optional footswitches 67 Selecting sounds for the Keyboard parts 29 EA PEO BARAT PASA ret eere AA AA 67 Drumming on the KeyOOAIG 4 scuvivervarvenen nese 31 Hold Footswitch Sustain a 68 Selecting sounds from an SRX expansion board 32 Foot Switi essisrasa itai ii rann 69 Using the Harmonic Bars aa 33 BRas 0 Foot Ped AA PP OY 70 IT VOU likea req ATON aus aman aka Lana hEAGKN LAAN as 34 SONG INDO ng dete ee se anaes tbe E he KA ARNAN 71 About the MANUAL field 0000 34 Metronome 0 GG TTT 73 Using just one organ sound and bass pedals 34
470. or BOSS FS 5U footswitch con nected to the HOLD FOOTSWITCH socket Hold Lower1 The footswitch does the same as the LOWER 1 HOLD function see also p 92 Hold Lower2 The footswitch does the same as the LOWER 2 HOLD function see also p 92 Hold Lower 1 2 The footswitch allows you to switch the LOWER 1 2 HOLD functions on and off Rotary HB Slow Fast Allows you to select the slow or fast speed of the Rotary effect This only works if the Harmonic Bars are being used by UP1 LW1 and or MBS Rotary HB On Off Allows you to switch the Rotary effect on first time and off second This only works if the Harmonic Bars are being used by UP1 LW1 and or MBS User Program Up User Program Down Allows you to select the next Up or previous Down User Program Play Stop Song Starts and stops the Recorder Same function as the button Jalk The footswitch performs the same function as the button in the VOCAL HARMONIST section Harmony On Off The footswitch allows you to switch the currently selected HARMONY function VO CODER or ENSEMBLE on and off Select this function if you want to switch the harmonies on for the choruses and off for the verses for example while playing on the keyboard Minus One The footswitch allows you to switch the Minus One function on and off See page 41 for how to select the option that will be used when the Minus One function is on 5 Press the button to r
471. or four 3 Press the field of the Music Style you want to use S World BIBLE user ae Orchestr SI Fox Country Ballad Pop Fox Nice Fox Fox Band Slow Country Country Fox PAGES CUSTOM If the Arranger is running while you select another Style the new Style starts on the next downbeat 4 Press the button to return to the main page 27 G 70 Music Workstation Quick Start Changing the tempo If the accompaniment is too fast or too slow here is how to change the Music Style tempo 1 Press to decrease the tempo in steps of one unit 2 Press to increase the tempo in steps of one unit You can also press the button several times to specify the desired tempo The new tempo Is dis played in the upper right hand corner of the display Picco ra em ONG Amazing Grace Cool Live Band ower 1 St Slow Str ower2 Pad With at ASS XY Ac Bass The button flashes red to indicate the downbeat while Arranger playback is stopped If Arranger playback is running the button flashes red on the first and green on the other beats of a bar 3 To quickly return to the default tempo hold down and simultaneously press FAST gt Using the Keyboard parts Your G 70 provides six parts that allow you to play different sounds on the keyboard These parts are called Keyboard parts Let s add a live melody to the accompaniment Playing with an Upper and or Lower part At power on
472. or one of the other buttons to set those parameters as well Note The and fields allow you to Jump to the effect or tone controls If you press the field the display looks as follows SHIGE YN VIBRATO e Press the field of the parameter you wish to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons For the following the button icon must be on for the effect to be noticeable Vibrato RATE Sets the speed of the vibrato effect 131 G 70 Music Workstation Editing the Vocal Harmonist parts Vibrato DEPTH Allows you to set the vibrato intensity Vibrato is an effect that changes modulates the pitch The higher the DEPTH value the more outspoken these periodic pitch changes will be Vibrato RISE TIME Allows you to set a swell for the vibrato effect This parameter specifies how long it takes before the DEPTH value is reached once the Delay Time IS Up Vibrato DELAY TIME Allows you to set a delay between the moment you start singing and the moment the vibrato effect kicks in e Press the field to leave this page If you press the field the display looks as follows KO GAL Seu jars SINGER YOTCE FX AUTO PITCH FREQUENCY HZ Gm T Gum f EQUALIZER EQUALIZER EQUALIZER This page contains a simple equalizer for the Voice FX Auto Pitch and Singer parts Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and set the desired value with the dia
473. or the U K IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug The technology used in the G 70 is covered by patents pending in certain countries throughout the world Roland Hi2 Gs SMF fs U MUSIC WORKSTATION Owner s Manual Thank you for purchasing the Roland G 70 Music Workstation The G 70 is Roland s most complete arranger keyboard yet a collection of all major advantages a Roland instrument can offer perfect accompaniments high class sounds the possibility to expand the number of sounds via an optional expansion board SRX series a D Beam controller vir tual organ drawbars professional effects a Vocal Harmonist the Cover functions first introduced on Roland s unique DisCover 5 keyboard There s simply too much to mention in this introduction Much care has been taken to facilitate access to all those countless functions which is why the G 7
474. orner You also use the dial and the DECJ INC buttons You can press this field as many times as necessary or until it is no longer displayed To return to a pre vious group of 5 songs press If you need to copy all songs that are currently dis played on all available pages press the field Note In some cases working with the field may yield an error message at some stage because a 2HD disk can only hold 1 44MB worth of data while a memory card and the internal memory are a lot bigger Note If the target media memory card or floppy disk is not formatted a message will be displayed that allows you to for mat it before the songs are copied If you chose EXT MEMORY or FLOPPY DISK for TO enable the card s disk s write protection and insert it into the PCMCIA slot or disk drive To enable the write protection of a floppy disk open the little window see p 11 See the owner s man ual of the memory card for how to disable its write protection Note Not all cards have a write protection function Press the field Press if you do not want to proceed or to select other files G 70 Music Workstation Roland Working with the Song Finder You are asked whether it is OK to overwrite all files on the destination media TO that have the same file names as the files you are about to copy Replace files of the same name oe Gm omen PFs 7 Press the field if it is OK to overwrite f
475. ote Note The Play Stop function can also be assigned to the D Beam controller or an optional footswitch see Start Stop Song on p 65 Play Stop Song on p 68 Play Stop on p 69 Nam Play the new part Press the RECORDER button to stop recording Nam Saving your song The 16 track sequencer uses a special portion of the G 70 s RAM memory where all editing takes place To ensure that you do not forget to save your song after recording and or editing it you are given the opportu nity to do so upon leaving the Song Composer page by pressing the button meas 0030 2 3 130 474 Song has been changed Do you wish to save to disk HOTTE aor Si paiaina 14 g CLEAN GT SETIA vee eke GN i6 BETTY AA RA AG Note The Song RAM memory is erased when you switch off your G 70 Note If you use the 16 track sequencer to edit a song that already contains Cover modifications the Cover settings are ignored and erased when you save the edited version of your song We therefore recommend saving such songs under a dif ferent name 1 G 70 Music Workstation Roland Example 2 Adding tracks Press to save your changes and the entire song This will take you to the following display page ome B B Brew CE acc 2 oer 3 lt ub cm 4r 5jlwno 6 Pors 7 TUv wxvz9 Gana a ul m o D lt E m na o D Press to return to the main page without saving
476. ou can also name your User Program at a later stage and then save it again This name is very important for taking advantage of the User Program Finder function page 113 Use a name that somehow summarizes the purpose of this User Program The name of the song you will use these settings for is probably the most explicit name you can think of It is perfectly possible to program several User Pro grams for one song Selecting a User Program is a lot faster than calling up one of the G 70 s functions modifying the settings etc while playing You could program one User Program for the first part of a song another one for the bridge and a third one for the closing section Doing so allows you to play with the effect settings of the various processors for example 7 Press the field Important note User Programs are not saved in a special area inside the G 70 but on the media that also contains the list file you are currently using The name of that list is displayed in the upper left corner next to a yellow folder icon The area where your Set is stored appears in the right corner USERPROGRAM O HO SONG f MIDI w SETTINGS LINE lu LINE WRITE 1 Blue Berry i I Swear Ballad You cannot select a different folder here T12 If the target memory area which cannot be chosen here already contains a User Program of that name you are asked whether it is OK to overwrite it WRITEUSER PROGRAM a
477. ou to select the data to be edited See the list on page 193 BIVALUE 1920 1920 This parameter sets the amount by which the notes are shifted The value refers to CPT units one CPT 1 120 J Note Notes on the first beat of the first bar cannot be shifted further to the left that would mean shifting them to the O measure which doesn t exist W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data TRACK LENGTH Sotto Jemrerm enaner etocx enera sianar LENGTH MAJOR MINOR 7TH E 0001 00 000 0001 00 000 0001 00 000 E DIVISION B 0002 00 000 0002 00 000 0002 00 000 E 0004 00 000 0004 00 000 0004 00 000 xt E 0004 00 000 0004 00 00 0004 00 000 5 pes The TRACK LENGTH function allows you to modify the length number of bars beats and clocks of a pattern after recording Data that lie outside the range you decide to keep are discarded The various fields display the settings that are cur rently in effect Obviously you only need to specify different settings for the Mode whose length you want to change The white part of the window shows the current length settings for the selected TRACK ADrums in the example above and DIVISION Ending The three columns MAJOR MINOR 7TH refer to the modes As always there are only three lines 1 3 for Fill Ins Note There is no way to recall the previous version so be sure to save your Style before c
478. ou wish to rename or delete into the slot 1 Press the button The display looks more or less as follows PLAY LIST 4 EXTERNAL FINTERNAL Saturday Live i At the end of the first song step the next song is selected automatically if the RECORDER button lights If you stop playback halfway into the song then start it again the next step is played back If the button does not light playback stops at the end of the current step the next step is 2 Use the scrollbar or the dial move loaded but playback needs to be started using the through the available Play Lists if available and button If you stop playback half necessary way into the song then start it again playback con 3 Press the field that corresponds to the list you tinues from the place where you stopped it need T483 G 70 Music Workstation Roland Play List function M Renaming a Play List To change the name of the selected chain press the RENAME field PLAY LIST RENAME Coc Enter the desired characters page 49 and press the field After a brief confirmation the dis play returns to the Play List page Note You do not need to save a Play List after renaming it Mi Deleting a Play List See steps 1 3 above then press the field As this may ruin your work you need to confirm this command PLAY LIST DELETE pa ee EXTERNAL This File will be DELETED from Internal Memory Play List Saturday Live
479. ough The Arranger has a similar func tion called ARR Hold See also Lower Hold on p 92 Note If none of the PART ON OFF buttons lights the notes you play on the keyboard will not be audible It would how ever be possible to go on controlling the Arranger Note Your settings can be written to a User Program and recalled at a later stage See p 111 BSetting the split point When the button lights the keyboard is split in two halves The split point is located at the C key below the brown EFFECT slider This key is called the C4 Arranger control UP1 UP2 UP3 This split point applies both to the chord recognition area of the Arranger and the SPLIT keyboard mode There may be situations where the automatically assigned range Is not what you need In that case you can change the split point 1 Press and hold the KBD MODE button or the SPLIT field in the display SPLIT MP a sage 324 Han C4 AS G 70 Music Workstation Roland Split and Whole modes The display now looks more or less as follows UPPER3 SPLIT GOG O O HAIN SPLIT UPPER 3 SPLIT 2 Use the MAIN SPLIT POINT lt gt fields to select the new split point The setting range is F1 F 7 The orange keys in the display refer to the right half As you can see the SPLIT POINT is the lowest note of the right half Note Your settings can be written to a User Program and recalled at a later stage See p 111 Using WHOL
480. ould be processed by the VOICE Reverb processor of the VOCAL HARMONIST sec tion Delay Send Allows you to specify how strongly the currently selected VOICE part should be processed by VOICE Delay of the VOCAL HARMONIST section HARMONY column Reverb Send Allows you to specify how strongly the currently selected HARMONY part should be processed by the HARMONY Reverb processor which is a separate processor Chorus Send Allows you to specify how strongly the currently selected HARMONY part should be processed by the Chorus processor of the VOCAL HARMONIST sec tion The VOICE section doesn t have a chorus effect Delay Send Allows you to specify how strongly the currently selected HARMONY part should be processed by the HARMONY Delay processor 4 Repeat the above for the remaining combinations To select a different Harmonist part switch on its button The name of the currently selected parts appears below the VOICE and HARMONY mes sages Note All settings for all VOCAL HARMONIST buttons are writ ten to a User Program page 111 5 Set the MIC INPUT parameters as desired As explained under Compressor Gate and effects on p 43 the Compressor and Gate apply to the MIC INPUT signal before it reaches the VOCAL HARMON IST section 6 Press the button to return to the main page or continue with the next section to program the effect processors Reverb Delay and Chorus effects Each Vocal Har
481. ould send MIDI real time messages when you start the Arranger or Recorder sequencer This allows you to synchronize external instruments or software sequencers with your G 70 sae a EM n E Era SONG RH il c e Just as a reminder TX means transmit and RX stands for receive MESYNC TX START STOP If you activate this option the G 70 sends start or stop messages when you start or stop Arranger STYLE or song SONG playback The Recorder also transmits Continue messages CLOCK This option means that the Arranger STYLE or Recorder sequencer sends MIDI Clock messages that tell the receiving instrument or MIDI device which tempo to choose SONG POSITION only for SONG If you switch this parameter on the Recorder sequencer sends Song Posi tion Pointer SPP messages that signal the current play back position Note See your sequencer s etc manual to find out whether it accepts Song Position Pointer messages MESYNC RX The SYNC RX parameters allow you to specify whether and how the Arranger STYLE and or Recorder sequencer should be synchronized to exter nal sequencers or drum machines The available options are Auto This is a good setting for remote control of song or Style playback using a PK 5A dynamic MIDI pedal board for example If the G 70 receives a MIDI Start message FA it waits for Clock messages that specify the tempo If those Clock messages are no
482. page 39 When you select a song that contains such markers the indica tors of the MARK amp JUMP buttons light For songs that do not contain these indications the buttons remain dark Editing and programming MARK JUMP locations can be carried out as follows 1 Press and hold a MARK JUMP button 1 4 MARK amp JUMP 1 2 3 4 Press whichever button you like The display changes to BUNGO MARK FADE METRO IA MINUS LY JUMP l in out Home L one 1 2 3 4 BAR BAR BAR 0006 WRITE BEB MARK 2 Press the field that corresponds to the MARK JUMP button for which you wish to program a different location 1 4 The following can be done both during playback and while it is stopped 3 Do one of the following e Start song playback and press the field This inserts the number of the current measure in the field that lights OR e Stop playback Press the dial and use the on screen numeric keypad to enter the desired bar number Press the field of the numeric pad to dispose of the last number you entered You can also use the dial or the DECJ INC buttons Example if you wanted to enter 14 and then notice that you pressed the 4 field twice 144 press to get rid of the second 4 As soon as you enter a new value an EDIT message appears next to the memory number see field 3 above e Press the field to confirm your set ting The message disappears Repe
483. page 57 will be used for specifying harmony pitches Song The note information contained in the song you are playing back is used Not convinced so far Just in case you are a little bit disappointed by the Vocal Harmonist function here are some tips and a bonus Use it with song backing The Harmonist sounds most convincing when used during song playback Please bear in mind that trans forming your voice in realtime requires quite a few calculations and that the human voice is one of the most difficult signal sources to recreate with vary ing pitches The Vocal Harmonist was fine tuned to blend in with Standard MIDI File playback and that s when it sounds most real Try it out it works EB Check the following Gender Voice Input 1 Press and hold the button or press the field in the display The display changes to TYPE GENDER VOICE INPUT EA Bi 2 Press the field if you re a man or the field if you re a woman This is an important clue for the Vocal Harmonist After selecting the correct setting you may find that the harmonies sound better And just in case you wanted to sound like a some what worn out opera singer 3 Press the field indicator icon must light Sing a few notes and note the vibrato If the effect is not strong enough 4 Press the field SIS Sey VIBRATO 5 Use the DATA ENTRY lt gt a buttons to select the parameter you wish t
484. pages G G g G G g The references User Programs are saved G pA separately Same system for Internal pages 2 18 memory or memory AG Set Lists are references to User Programs They do not contain those registrations The advantage of User Pro gram Set Lists is that loading a completely different set of registrations takes less than a second loading User Program Sets on an older Roland arranger instrument took much longer This system allows you to prepare one set of User Pro grams for weddings another for corporate events a third for anniversaries etc that may access the same User Program data here and there If you change a User G 70 Music Workstation Roland Saving your settings to a User Program Program e g by selecting another sound for the LW2 part that change is automatically adopted by all Set Lists that refer to that User Program Saving your settings to a User Program It is a good idea to memorize your settings frequently even If you still need to do some touching up after wards Those intermediary saves allow you to return to the previous stage whenever you do not like your last mod ifications Try to use the User Programs as recall buff ers to be able to return to the previously edited set tings discarding only the latest modifications 1 Change
485. parameter The smaller the value the lower the fre quency that will be boosted or cut GAIN This parameter sets the level of the selected fre quency 0 means that the frequency s level does not change no difference between equalizer on and off for that particular part or the overall EO band e Press the field to leave this page G 70 Music Workstation Roland Ensemble settings 137 G 70 Music Workstation More refined song functions Let us have a look at additional and more refined func tions you can use for song playback See page 160 for recording and editing sequencer songs Using the Fade In Out function If you don t change their assignments the ASSIGN SW and 2 buttons allow you to start fade ins and fade outs This function is also available for Style playback FADE FADE i IN OUT ADEL Note If you did change the assignments of these buttons see page 62 for how to select the Fade In and Fade Out functions Note Fade In and Fade Out can also be assigned to an optional footswitch etc E Fade In Fading in means that the volume of both the song and Keyboard parts but neither the Vocal Harmonist signal nor your voice gradually increases giving the impression that you have been playing for a long time before the music becomes audible The volume is automatically set to zero and then gradually increased to the value specified with the MASTER VOLUME knob e Stop song or Style playback an
486. parameter you want to edit and use the dial or the DEC IINC but tons to set the desired value You can also press the DATA ENTRY dial and enter the value via the on screen numeric pad 7 Nam gu PAD GE J dd ee ET E a E eed say enter usm SE All parameter values can be positive or negative so remember to also use the field 8 Press to reset all parameters on this page to their saved settings 9 To save your changes at this stage press the field and see page 130 You can also press another field in the top row to change yet other parameters before saving your modified song or Style PALETTE Pressing the field on any of the MAKEUP TOOLS pages takes you to the following page where you can set the most fundamental parameters of the instruments used by the selected song or Style aa A 7 ri te ses a BT Le Sig ahi meh Ws aos s ngg PALETTE yg F C common C Patere yg PE sy EDIT E Halo Pad PART 8 ST dJ I SOLO MUTE R ATTACK AY D ESO c DEC JIMPTO Jqa spp d u 15TNOTE Bi Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the desired value You can also press the dial and use the numeric pad VOLUME The volume of the selected instrument Nega tive values decrease the current volume positive values increase It PANPOT Use this parameter to change the stereo placement of the selected instrume
487. per Lower M Bass You can even use these effects simultaneously if you like 1 Press the lever towards the rear of the G 70 to add a vibrato effect wobble to the notes you are playing MODULATION Lowers the pitch a _ Raises the pitch a BENDER a The Modulation axis can also be used for switching between the slow and fast Rotary speeds for the HARMONIC BAR and sounds 2 Turn the lever to the left to temporarily lower the pitch of the notes you are playing Turn it to the right to raise the pitch of your notes The Pitch Bend interval range is preset to 2 semi tones 3 Release the lever if you no longer need the effect Transposition If you are used to playing a song in a particular key the Transpose function will help you go on playing in that key while sounding in another one That way you can accompany a singer or instrument without changing your fingering 1 Press the TRANSPOSE button to transpose the G 70 down by up to 6 semitones 53 Using the performance functions 2 Press the TRANSPOSE button to transpose the G 70 up by up to 5 semitones Transposition never applies to a part that uses a Drum Set or the drum part of a song To transpose from the key of C to E press four times To transpose from C to G press five times To return to the original setting no transposition simultaneously press and hold and gt As long as the interval is different from 0 one
488. ph 51 Ring Modul 81 Step Pitch 22 Time Delay 52 Step Ring 82 Sympa Reso 23 2 Pitch Shifter 53 Tremolo 83 VIB OD Rotary 24 FBK Pitch 54 Auto Pan 84 Center Canc 25 Reverb 55 Step Pan 26 Gate Reverb 56 Slicer 27 OD Chorus 57 VK Rotary 28 OD gt Hanger 58 3D Chorus 29 OD gt Delay 30 DST Chorus 59 3D Flanger 60 3D Step Figr To avoid confusion and too much leafing through pages we decided to explain the available parame ters elsewhere See page 229 Here s how to edit the parameters 5 Press the field of the parameter you wish to change the number of fields and their meaning depend on the selected type If the required parameter is not displayed press the PAGE fields to jump to another page then press the appropriate display Some effects have only one parameter page 6 Set the desired value with the dial or the DECJ INC buttons and upper right cor ner allow you to specify how strongly the multi effect s output signal should be processed by the Reverb and or Chorus processor If you feel that is unnecessary set both parameters to 0 7 Press the button to return to the main page Linking Multi FX type selection to the Upper part Upper 1 M FX Link If you like the G 70 can automatically load the Multi FX type that is suited for the Tone you assign to the UP1 part 1 Press the button The display changes to MENW f K TUNING ARRANGER 23 SETTI
489. ppears SHALES MINE EY NT 1 01 000 CC O Bank Select MSBI HOYE EVENT TO m Qexccure 1 01 060 Note 70 Bb4 33 1 1 02 000 Note 37 C 2 111 1 PLACE 3 EVENT mew SD e Specify the position to which the first event in chro nological order of the selected group should be shifted by pressing the BAR and fields and entering the desired value for each unit using the dial or the DEC INC buttons e Press the field to confirm your settings and move the event Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes Mm COPY EVENT This function allows you to copy one or several events Use to insert a copy of those events at the desired position ARE WINE spy Control Change CC 0 Bank Select MSB CC 32 Bank Select L5B EVENT Program Change 4 CC 10 ba 11 CC 91 a verb 3 Chorus 35 35 B1 3 1 01 000 te 42 F 2 8 1 01 000 Alteration Mode Nearest Std Ste D 1 02 000 Ga Back Note For this function you could take advantage of the VIEW filter to avoid selecting event types that should not be included in the copy See VIEW on p 198 e To select several consecutive events press the dial while turning it towards the left upward direction or the right downward direction All events selected in this way appear on a blue back ground e Press the COPY EVENT button icon The new selection will replace the previous one ZOT G 70 Music Workstation Program
490. press to stop Arranger playback The G 70 provides four programmable looped divisions MAIN Kia Looped divisions do not select other divisions when they are finished they keep playing until you select another division by hand or by foot WOne shot divisions One shot divisions are only played once and then select a looped division or stop the Arranger The G 70 uses the following one shot divisions INTRO 1 4 FILL UP 1 3 FILL DOWN 1 3 and ENDING 1 4 The division type affects the way in which the respec tive tracks are played back Any track of a looped pat tern that is shorter than the longest track is repeated until the longest track is finished Here s how you can take advantage of that if the drums play the same notes during four measures while the rhythm guitar or piano needs four mea sures to complete a cycle recording only one drum measure is enough because It is automatically repeated until the longest track is finished 179 G 70 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer Recording User Styles from scratch Important remark User Style recording and editing is carried out in the G 70 s Style RAM memory When you leave Style Composer mode after recording or editing a Style by pressing EXIT the display warns you that you need to save your Style If you haven t yet done so you Should take advantage of this security system SPECO MEOSE Cool Live Band d 92 4 4 Press
491. pressed the wrong field just press it again to remove the MA symbol 6 If necessary select additional User Programs 7 Press the button to return to the main page T121 G 70 Music Workstation Working with User Programs Editing Music Assistant registrations The G 70 also allows you to edit certain aspects of existing Music Style registrations 1 Press the button MUSIC ASSISTANT The display now looks as follows PAUSE ASSIA Eby mmaa Air On G _ Alex Ragtime __ Alfie Song CYA __ All at One Time __ All But Myself All My Love __ All OF Myself All Shaken Up Almost Like Love Aloha Hawaii _ Alone Once Again Als Sterrenhemel z P m m m m 1 eee ma a NP ra Fra Fra ra Fra Fra ra a 2 Select the Music Assistant entry you want to edit 3 Continue with Renaming Music Assistant registra tions or Deleting Music Assistant entries M Renaming Music Assistant registrations e Press the field followed by the field if it does not yet light a a E Kn eles eed Baa EXECUTE This function allows you to change or supply the NAME ARTIST and GENRE information for the selected Music Assistant registration ARTIST refers to the person that made the song famous while GENRE describes the kind of music Press the NAME ARTIST or GENRE field and enter the desired characters See E
492. programmed Cover settings do not provide what you re looking for See page 124 MENU button Press this button to call up a menu that provides access to more In depth G 70 functions you may only wish to set from time to time 16 5 1 3 8 4 2 2 3 2 1 3 5 1 1 3 1 MODE HARMONIC BAR EFFECT DBEAM M INT MBS LW 2 LW 1 UP 3 UP 2 UP 1 Assignable sliders These sliders can be used as virtual drawbars when the button lights In that case refer to the footage Indications above the sliders for their specific function page 33 Note The HARMONIC BAR function is only available for the following parts UP1 LW1 and MBS Then there are three buttons that allow you to spec ify the part group whose settings you want to change Keyboard parts arranger parts and recorder parts Q2 DATA ENTRY NUMERIC PAD PUSH 4 gr 2 STYLE SONG USER PRG K3 27 SPLIT 3 EASY SETTING ARR ORGAN PIANO WHOLE DATA ENTRY section The dial can be used to set the value of the parameter field that is currently highlighted Turn it to scroll through the available settings You can also press it to call up a numeric key pad that allows you to enter the desired value by pressing the corresponding fields in the display To change the selected value in small steps press lower value or higher value The al v gt lt buttons are used to select a paramet
493. ption TRANSPOSE is also useful for drum tracks It allows you to select another snare or kick sound for example Most Drum Sets provide at least two snares one assigned to note num ber 38 D2 and a second assigned to note number 40 E2 By entering FROM NOTE 38 pressing the field and selecting 2 you can change your D2 snare to the E2 snare BI FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or song Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the G 70 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation should Start after the selected beat WTO By default the TO position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 lt last measure of the track or song This is where you specify the bar position of the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operatio
494. r JAZZ Selects sounds suitable for jazz combos ETHNIC Selects sounds suitable for world music 4 Press the following three fields and enter the desired values using the dial or the DECJ INC buttons Tempo Allows you to specify the initial tempo of the new song J 20 250 Choose a tempo that is comfort able for recording You can set the final tempo by editing the MASTER track see p 171 or by recording it after activating the TEMPO REC SW parameter see p 157 Time Signature BEAT If your new song uses the 4 4 time signature there is no need to change this value Otherwise enter the desired time signature 1 2 32 16 The warning alerts you to the fact that pressing may have disastrous consequences See Saving your song on p 159 if you still need to save your previous song Mi Using two drum tracks He G 70 allows you to use as many drum tracks as you like simply assign a Drum Set to the desired track and start playing This requires no particular ini tialization procedure Track 10 however can only play Drum Sets and should therefore be used for your main percussion applications But feel free to add a beat box or orchestral percussion to a song that also requires a regular drum kit 5 Press the field to really initialize the Song RAM memory which you haven t done so far The G 70 now initializes the song RAM memory and jumps to the main 16 track Sequencer page Preparations 6 P
495. r Finder functions to locate the User Programs you want to appear in the Music Assistant list then press their fields to add and again to remove the MA label As you will learn later on Music Assistant registra tions are in fact a virtual concept because they only exist if there is a User Program file they can refer to That explains why deleting a User Program file see above also discards the associated Music Assistant entry E Copy This function allows you to copy the selected User Program to another memory area Be sure to select a User Program before pressing the field on the USER PROGRAM LIST page Also bear in mind that the COPY page only lists User Programs that match the last search criteria you used for the USER PRO GRAM FINDER On the other hand if you only need to copy certain User Programs on memory card or in the internal memory using the FINDER is actually a good idea it helps you to avoid too many presses of the PAGE or gt field On the USER PROGRAM OPTIONS page press the field USER ARO ORE GALON EE Renate PA DELETE Music Bssist Ba cor Ba cor FROM COUNT MEMORY To EINT MEMORY FZ z EEFLOFFPY DISK SZAT FLOPPY DISK EEST MEMORY ext er A non Corrida UNKNOWIN UNKNOUIN Jo xo PPL Ab zum Sueden 4 6 G 70 Music Workstation Roland Editing User Program Finder information Start by specifying the source that contains the User Program s you wish to
496. r devices that radiate heat leave it inside an enclosed vehicle or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes Excessive heat can deform or discolor the G 70 To avoid possible breakdown do not use the G 70 in a wet area such as an area exposed to rain or other moisture Do not allow objects to remain on the keyboard This can be the cause of malfunction such as keys ceasing to produce sound Maintenance For everyday cleaning wipe the G 70 with a soft dry cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with water To remove stubborn dirt use a mild non abrasive detergent Afterwards be sure to wipe the instrument thoroughly with a soft dry cloth Never use benzene thinner alcohol or solvents of any kind to avoid the possibility of discoloration and or deformation Repairs and data Please be aware that all data contained in the instrument s mem ory may be lost when it is sent for repairs In certain cases such as when circuitry related to memory itself is out of order we regret that it may not be possible to restore the data Roland assumes no liability concerning such loss of data Additional precautions Please be aware that the memory contents can be irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction or the improper operation of the instrument Use a reasonable amount of care when using the G 70 s buttons other controls and jacks connectors Rough handling can lead to malfunctions Never strike or apply stro
497. r pattern you want to edit Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 153 Fill Up 1 3 End 154 BI FROM TO FROM refers to the position where the edit operation is to begin That position is specified as Bar Beat CPT values TO designates the position where the edit operation is to end Bar Beat CPT value See page 191 for details W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data COPY SILE TRAGIC EDIN TRACK MODE a Source BEAR pisk E2 USER T Style SHUFFLE See page 186 for a step by step discussion This function also allows you to copy tracks from other Music Styles 193 G 70 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer INSERT e STYLE TRACK EDI T ee INSERT allows you to insert new data and shift data that lie behind the FROM position towards the end of the pattern this is the exact opposite of DELETE The empty measures you create can be filled using the COPY function or by recording new phrases in that area Note The INSERT function does not provide a TO pointer Instead you have to specify the length of the blank to be inserted using the FOR values BTRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track you want to edit Select ALL to edit all tracks EMODE Allows you to select the mode of the pattern to be edited Major minor or 7th WE DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division or pattern you want to edit Intro 1 4 Main
498. r you wish to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons 11 Press the field and save your MIDI settings to a Set or Press the button to return to the main page 215 G 70 Music Workstation MIDI Editing MIDI parameters Let us briefly look at where to find the part you may want to edit use PAGE to select it KEYBOARD STYLE SONG SYSTEM UPL 23 ADrums Part1 16 Sync LW1 2 ABass Basic Channel MBS Accomp Style Channel MELODY INT Accomp2 NTA Accomp3 V LINK Accomp4 Param Accomp5 Accomp6 Note Always select the part you want to edit before changing the remaining parameters Keyboard Style Song Parts MUG Seay Upper MIDI TX MIDI RX LIMIT Ka TH EVENT Ra EVENT FILTER Y FILTER Y pO The Keyboard Style and Song parts have the same TX transmission and RX reception parameters so we will discuss them only once except where there are sig nificant differences Note Press the field to recall the default setting for the parameter that is currently selected whose display field lights TX ON RX ON These two button icons allow you to specify whether lights or not dark the part whose name appears in the upper left corner should transmit TX or receive RX MIDI data MIDI TX EB CHANNEL 1 16 Allows you to assign a MIDI transmit channel to the selected part Unless you have a very good reason to do otherwise we suggest using the same I
499. rack The INTO position indicates where the beginning of the excerpt will be after the copy operation To copy the source data to the beginning of the selected track select BAR 1 BEAT 1 and CPT 0 16 Press the BAR BEAT or field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the target INTO position 17 Press the field to copy the data Editing on the fly by recording Adding notes in realtime To add notes to an existing part proceed as follows e On the main STYLE COMPOSER page select the Divi sion you wish to change page 182 e Press the RECORDER button press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select Mix e Select the track and start recording by pressing the button Play the notes where you want them to sound Adding controller data in realtime To add controller data modulation Pitch Bend Hold expression to an existing part select REC MODE Mix Operate the performance function BENDER MODULATION lever optional footswitch for Hold data optional foot controller for expression data where needed Adding or changing settings of existing parts The following operations require that you record in Mix mode without touching the keyboard or control lers select the track and division whose settings you wish to change and start recording Unless you want to program continuous value changes Panpot data for example you can stop recording after the first be
500. re pronounced modulation Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound i e the stereoness of the effect Chorus Feedback 0 127 This parameter sets the level at which the chorus sound is re input fed back into the chorus By using Feedback a denser Chorus sound can be created Higher values result in a greater feedback level G 70 Music Workstation Roland Editing the Keyboard effects processors GM2 Chorus parameters Pre LPF 0 7 Cuts the high frequency range of the sound coming into the chorus Higher values will cut more of the high frequencies Level 0 127 Output level of the chorus sound Feedback 0 127 Adjusts the amount of the chorus sound that is fed back into the effect Delay 0 127 Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard Rate 0 127 This parameter sets the speed fre quency at which the chorus sound is modulated Higher values result in faster modulation Depth 0 127 This parameter sets the depth at which the chorus sound is modulated Higher values result in a more pronounced modulation Reverb Send 0 127 This parameter sets the amount of chorus sound that is sent to the Reverb processor The value 127 effectively allows you to connect the chorus and reverb effects in series Chorus before Reverb If you do not want the chorus signal to be processed by the Reverb effect set this value to 0 Delay parameters L R C
501. ress the RECORDER button The display changes to REAGOS KET JIE REC TYPE PUNCH IN OCTAN 4 4 RECORDING SELECT PROGRAM CHANGE o E a kii E diiis naig INPUT QUANTIZE COHTROL CHANGE PUNCH OUT OCTAVE 7 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the track you want to record to TI 5G 8 Press the field and use the dial or the DECJ INC buttons to specify how the following tracks should behave the other tracks are always GS tracks KEYBOARD PART MELODY INTELL If you select the corre sponding part Sound and tone generator of the selected part 1 Song parts If you select GS or if there is no alterna tive Track REC TYPE 1 3 Fixed GS cannot be changed 4 GS UPI 5 Fixed GS cannot be changed 6 G5 UP 7 10 Fixed GS cannot be changed 11 Gb LW1 12 GS MBST 13 Gs UPS 14 GS LW2 15 GS MELODY INTELL 16 Fixed GS cannot be changed The track uses sounds of the G 70 s GM2 GS sound source and is not linked to the Keyboard part shown right The track uses the same sound as the Keyboard part it is linked to In the case of the UP1 LW1 and MBS parts this can also be the corresponding Harmonic Bar part Keyboard parts can use an SRX sound while regular Song parts cannot The impor tant thing to remember is that whenever you assign a different sound to the connected Keyboard part the track
502. ress the button once again to switch off this automatic harmony function Using the Style Cover function The COVER function provides masks that change the instrumentation of the selected Music Style Simply by selecting another preset you can cause a Viennese waltz to be played back by a heavy metal band etc Even though the arrangement rhythm riffs does not change the Style s character can be modified beyond recognition 1 Press the button once or twice to select the display page shown below Jai z BAND PE DANCE o Bal ETHNIC 2 Select the parts whose instrumentation you want to change e Press the field if all instruments should be replaced Press the field if only the drum and percus sion instruments should change Press the field if you re happy with everything but the bass line s sound 3 Press one of the six fields in the lower half of the display to select another preset If you don t like any of the presets press page 1 to return to the original orchestration 4 If none of the displayed presets appeal to you use the PAGE fields at the right to jump to another page with different presets 5 Try out various presets to see how fast this con cept works 6 If you like the new version better than the original one press the field to save the Music Style to the internal memory a memory card or floppy disk see p 77 Note The COVER information is part of the data only th
503. ressing its field W Rename This function allows you to change the name of the selected Index e Press the field SONG jy lays Celie ade jac por e Enter the new name 12 characters See Entering characters on p 141 Note The field allows you to switch between uppercase and lowercase characters e Press the EXECUTE field to confirm the new name W Edit This function allows you to assign the desired songs to the selected Index or to remove existing song assignments 144 e After performing step 4 above press the field og a e Use the FINDER SONG NAME ARTIST GENRE and FILE NAME fields to locate the desired file See page 140 Press the fields of all songs you wish to assign to the selected Index category Selected songs are displayed on an orange back ground To remove a song from the selected cate gory press its orange field so that it turns gray If necessary use the PAGE fields to go to previ ous or subsequent list pages Note When you change pages new assignments or removals are automatically updated which means that the contents of the selected category changes e Press to return to the SONG LIST page Press to return to the main page Windex Copy This function allows you to copy one Index category along with all its song assignments to a another category You could take advantage of this for merg ing two categories to free up one catego
504. riginal ver sion of the file you are about to save the following message is displayed amp A file of this name a A already exists Overwrite e Press the field to overwrite the old version _or e Press the field if you do not want to overwrite this file and return to the SAVE page instead Then enter a different name or select a different media Note Never remove the floppy disk or memory card while the operation Is in progress Wait for the confirmation to appear before returning to business as usual Bl Save User Program Set This function allows you to save the Set currently assigned to the USER PROGRAM buttons This also includes all GLOBAL parameters see the list in the Parameter Reference booklet You can also use this function to copy the Set along with all User Programs i e the registration data it refers to from one media to another 1 Press the button 2 Press the field followed by the field eg TU IG ox fe e ava ose see 8 eo 3 Select the target media INTERNAL MEMORY or EXTERNAL MEMORY memory card Note User Program Sets cannot be saved to floppy disk 4 Enter the name for the file e Use the and fields to select the position for which you wish to enter a new character e Use the alohanumeric keypad to enter the desired characters This keypad works exactly like the keypad of a cellphone you may have to press an alphanu meric field several tim
505. ring names 15 Use the and fields to select the position for which you wish to enter a new character 16 Use the alphanumeric keypad in the right corner to enter the desired characters This keypad works exactly like the keypad of a cell phone you may have to press an alphanumeric field several times to select the desired character or num ber The field allows you to switch between upper case and lowercase characters The field allows you to delete the character indicated by the cursor Press and hold it to clear all characters e Press to insert a blank or the number O If you forgot to insert a character use or to select the position where the missing character should be inserted Then press Insert followed by the character you wish to insert 17 If you re happy with the name for your Singer Key settings press EXECUTE G 70 Music Workstation Roland Vocal Harmonist function The display briefly confirms that your name has been stored DINUG NE RENAME KO Operation complete No 6 xyz9 18 Press the button to start playback The song may now be playing in a different key If it is not the melody falls within the range you set Note For new songs you load we recommend saving them once to the same memory location to speed up the recognition process of the HIGHEST and LOWEST notes See page 205 for how to save songs Displaying Lyrics and chord information Onl
506. rkers page 139 Use the MARK amp JUMP 1 4 buttons to select the position you want to jump to without stopping or delaying playback the indicator of the button you pressed flashes Such changes occur at the end of the current measure the indicator stop flashing and lights which makes more musical sense than jump ing when you re halfway into a measure MARK amp JUMP 1 2 3 4 There are four MARK memories For the factory loaded songs they correspond to 1 verse 2 chorus 3 bridge 4 ending 39 G 70 Music Workstation Quick Start The advantage of these markers is that you can return to the chorus for example if you notice that the audience wants the song to last a little longer than originally planned Markers also allow you to change the song structure in realtime by starting with the bridge for example Note If you press a MARK amp JUMP button almost immediately after starting song playback the Recorder may suddenly stop and the message Song Scanning may appear This can be solved by reducing the playback tempo so that the G 70 has enough time to process all MIDI data contained in the song M Reset rewind fast forward You can also use the following buttons to jump to different song locations TOP BWD FWD I lt lt lt gt gt TOP allows you to return to the beginning of the current song BWD allows you to rewind one measure at a time You can also press and hold this
507. rn the knob towards the right towards MAX Note If a howling sound a k a feedback is produced your microphone may be pointed at a speaker Try orienting it dif ferently or slightly reduce the setting Use the knob to set the balance between your Original singing and the effects that are added to your voice Note You can start song playback and sing to It See Playing back songs Standard MIDI Files on p 38 and Minus One on p 41 for details Compressor Gate and effects Your G 70 provides a compressor effect you might want to set up now The compressor reduces volume peaks and thus levels out differences in the micro phone signal The gate effect on the other hand can be used to avoid that background noises cause the Vocal Har monist etc to start working even though you are not singing These two effects are located immediately behind the MIC INPUT socket and thus applied to the micro phone signal before it is processed by the Vocal Har monist section Press and hold the button to jump to the following page GENDER VOICE INPUT MALE FEMALE G 70 Music Workstation Roland Vocal Harmonist function 9 Press the field KEAN ARNIS TA MIC INPUT VOICE HARHONY voce FX SMALL SUSTAIN LEY THRESHOLD 3 REVERB SEND 7T Gm Ga Hr OUTPUT LEY CHORUS SEND DELAY SEND ou om 10 If you need the compressor press the COMPRE
508. rograms 3 4 1 2 3 The display shows a list of 5 User Programs in the selected memory area The USER PRG STYLE LINK and fields allow you to sort songs in alpha betical order If the name of the User Program you want to use to is already displayed press its line _ To display the next 5 User Programs press the field in the lower right corner You can press this field as many times as necessary or until it is no longer displayed You also use the dial and the DECJ INC buttons To return to a previous group of 5 user Programs press See page 113 for details about locating the desired User Program Editing the User Program Finder information The Finder information is based on search criteria that needs to be added to User Program files Adding infor mation to a file is a process we call editing User Program Options The field in the lower left corner provides access to a display page where you can add database information This also works for User Program files that already contain entries you wish to modify _ First select the User Program whose database information you wish to change or edit by pressing its field Press the field a KIES ar oon paa9 mao Now do one of the following BI Rename This function allows you to change or supply the USER PRG and GENRE information of the selected User Program STYLE LINK and SONG LINK cannot
509. rom the Roland library 2 If necessary press the field and select the language for this interactive demo function Press if you didn t mean to select this page The current language selection will not change 3 Press the field that provides access to the desired demo function There are 12 sound demo songs 12 Style demo songs 1 lyrics amp score demo and one Vocal Harmonist demo 4 If you can barely hear the music set the knob far left MASTER section to a higher level The main page When you leave Demo mode or any other display page or if you do not change any of the G 70 s set tings the display looks more or less as follows OP STY Cool Live Band PELE USER P 1 1 Gospel Love aa MI a KG Lower 1 5t Slow Str The Grand X 6 Lower2 Pad With Vintage EP1 PER XY Ac Bass The information shown here depends on the G 70 s current settings the data you loaded etc but the above illustration should be fairly close to what you see on your instrument Unlike on previous Roland arranger instruments almost all information displayed is assigned to fields you can press to Jump to a different page set a parameter or select a parameter for editing Pressing field G for instance takes you to the ARRANGER SETTING page Press 2 if you want to change the split point settings The and buttons 8 look different and therefore also behave differently press one of them to select
510. rtain instruments of the selected Drum Set E PUAS REAP L PLLA a Pier PAO Ka PPL yea PH NBA apa CAK TA ts a eee a fe y PANG pira paa POE WG BAT binali G po C AL r i a STIM Nio 38 PopSnare38 1 4 ey i 99 z 84 VOLUME PANPOT CHORUS JUMP TO PE 1STHNOTE KI e This page effectively allows you to reconfigure your Drum Set but you cannot select sound from another Set Note The names of the drum percussion sounds depend on the currently selected Drum Set The sounds are usually similar in nature however Use the PAGE to select the drum instrument you want to replace with a different sound watch the icon that appears to the left of this field Use the dial or the DEC IINC buttons to select another sound The first sounds you can select for a given instrument are usually variations of the snare bass drum etc But turning the dial long enough you could also select any other sound even a melodic one Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the desired value VOLUME Use this parameter to set the volume of the selected drum instrument PANPOT Use this parameter to set the stereo place ment of the selected drum instrument O means no change negative values shift the instrument towards the left and positive values shift it towards the right REVERB amp CHORUS Use these parameters to set the rev
511. rument oriented editing Lyrics amp chord display score display Other functions PLAY LIST function 99 steps NEXT SONG function Text Import Export amp lyrics syn chronization Manages up to 99 999 songs Play amp Search function Song Finder WE Sequencer 16 track sequencer with micro amp macro editing functions W Display type amp controls Color 1 4 VGA Touch screen with 3D SG 3D simulated graphics Contrast potentiometer WE Panel controls 9 assignable sliders Harmonic Bar Mixer Alpha dial with push Data entry Cursor 6 switches data entry INC DEC Up Down Right Left PITCH BEND MODULATION lever D Beam controller with macro settings MASTER VOLUME knob KEYBOARD ACCOMP BALANCE EXTERNAL SOURCE volume knob Keyboard Part switches UP1 UP2 UP3 LW1 LW2 MBS Tone Assign UP1 UP2 UP3 LW1 LW2 MBS W User Programs 144 SET LIST references for access via front panel Unlimited access Internal memory memory card floppy disk via FINDER data base Parameter Hold Song Link MIDI Set Link Additional functions W Music Assistant registrations 500 factory registrations Unlimited number of programmable entries W Vocal Harmonist 4 presets Talk Voice FX 12 presets Auto Pitch Singer 2 Harmony modes Small 30 macros Ensemble 30 macros Vocoder 24 presets Effect processors Voice Noise Gate Compressor Reverb 9 types Delay 9 types pro grammable Harmony Reverb 9 types De
512. ry for new assignments Note There are eight Index categories in all You cannot cre ate additional categories After performing step 4 above press the field INDEX In the left column SOURCE press the field whose assignments you wish to copy to another Index cate gory You can also use the a fields In the right column DESTINATION press the field of the index category you wish to copy the assignments to You can also use the a fields Now specify how the song assignments should be copied Press the field if the assignments of the DESTINATION Index should be erased and replaced by the entries of the selected SOURCE field 6 Press if the song assignments of the SOURCE category should be added to the assign ments of the DESTINATION Index the DESTINATION category will contain more assignments than before Note No song files are copied during this operation Press the field to return to the SONG LIST page Note Press the button to return to the main page G 70 Music Workstation Roland Play List function Play List function The Play List function allows you to prepare play lists of all the songs you want to use during a performance The advantage of working with such chains is that you do not need to select files between songs Programming Play Lists e f necessary insert the memory card that contains 1 2 3 4 the desired songs into the slot
513. s 00 08 215 Exchange LW2 1 00 eee eee 63 70 Ps ccacauanaanaaaaaaaaads 63 70 FUNCUONS AA 90 ModeS AA 56 Options 91 Cie ma a ma 29 KIA 24 28 93 Sound selection kna bababa hakhak 29 e E e EEEE EE S E EEEE 60 ranSpoSEe onnan nananana 59 L ELLE AA 22 Large Hall a 109 LCD Contrast 0 00008 21 LEAKAGE aa 35 E i 80 Length aana 183 197 Level PAA 106 Chorus eaea a 99 102 Reverb nannaa anaana anaana 97 102 See also Volume LING errean EEE 219 Limit High Low aaa 217 ELA AA 106 LINE paaa NASAAN KANA 42 NG ETETE 116 KAC 101 KG 187 ARABIA ABLABALIBALADAO ANT 109 Ko 204 MIRA AA 204 User Program Set 204 OCA PAA AA AA 216 OMO AA 215 Bola ra eee 82 Looped patterns 179 LOW 4 44 BAKA NBA BAG EEEE 217 Ka a OLA PPO 60 Pass Filter 0 a 110 Lower a 163 192 Hold a 92 LOWEST 0 a 48 LWI esc ese 6 se LABAN ABAN ANAN A GANA tcc 33 LWR Hold a 92 la e 49 KSCOrE ee eee ees 49 Color 50 EI ec pk tcdosdea ded desde teed dnd oe dirs 150 IVD AA 220 M MAA E 122 MA Music Assistant 118 MUGS PATYO PG OO 195 MEL AE AA 167 195 ET ATAY 25 74 75 103 187 VAR pancscacccaendiesebesauciaase 79 G 70 Music Workstation Roland Index WIIG ez AA 23 EL 184 Makeup Tools aaa 124 Nea ateeste Kan KG co eee ees 44 48 Malpwaananaanaaag aadik 45 134 135 ELLE 34 DUS AA AA
514. s Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Balance D100 0W D50 50W D0 100W Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Level 0 127 Output level 23G 41 CHO Flanger This effect connects a chorus and a flanger in parallel Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Modulation frequency of the chorus effect Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity of the cho rus effect Chorus Balance D100 0W D50 50W D0 100W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Modulation frequency of the flanger effect Flanger Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity of the flanger effect Flanger Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flanger Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the flanger sound W Level 0 127 Output level 42 I
515. s Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Level 0 127 Output level 40 Flanger DLY This effect connects a flanger and a delay in parallel Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Flanger Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Flanger Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flanger Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the flanger sound W Delay Time 0 0 500 0ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypas
516. s 48 Drums Set SRX expansion board 1 slot board optional Multitimbral parts 32 Effects processors 8 programmable units 8x Reverb 8x Chorus for Arranger Recorder 16 track sequencer 8x Reverb 8x Chorus for Key board parts 84x Multi FX for Keyboard parts 84x effects for External Audio Input Effect Parametric equalizer amp multi band compressor Compatibility GM2 GS W Harmonic Bars Adjustable via assignable sliders Upper1 Lower1 9 harmonic bars 16 5 1 3 8 4 2 2 3 2 1 3 5 1 1 3 1 MBass 2 harmonic bars 16 8 Percussion On Off 2 2 3 4 Slow Fast Effects Leakage Level Overdrive Vibrato Chorus On Off V1 C1 V2 C2 V3 C3 Rotary Speaker Simulation Slow Fast Motor on off via MODULATION lever 8x3 Upper1 Lower1 MBass programmable registrations Memories W Styles 285 Styles divided in 12 families 120 programmable links to additional Styles CUSTOM Unlimited access Internal memory memory card floppy disk via FINDER data base 30 ALL Covers 18 Drum Covers 24 Bass Covers Instrument oriented editing 8 tracks with micro and macro editing 4 programmable registrations per Style Style Cover Style Makeup Tools User Style Composer One Touch G 70 Music Workstation Roland General settings E Songs Real time SMF player 4 programmable MARK amp JUMP locations Song Cover 30 ALL Covers 18 Drum Covers 24 Bass Covers Song Makeup Tools Inst
517. s Tu Wand TRACK INSTRUMENT After selecting the ADrums track you can change the pitch of certain sounds of the selected Drum Set The eligible sounds and corresponding note numbers are C 2 37 Side Stick D2 38 Stand 2 Snare 1 E2 40 Stand 2 Snare 2 F2 41 Low Tom 2 E3 52 Chinese Cymbal G 3 56 Cowbell A3 57 Crash Cymbal 2 F4 65 High Timbale Note The names of the drum percussion sounds depend on the currently selected Drum Set The sounds are usually similar in nature however e On the above display page select the ADrums track e Select the division whose settings you wish to change and possibly also all clones page 182 e Press the field and use the DEC INC buttons to select Mix Let us assume that your part already contains data e Press the field and select the drum sound whose pitch you want to change with the dial or the DEC INC buttons e Press the field and use the dial to set the desired pitch 64 63 You can play on the keyboard to listen to the result e Press the button to start recording e Press again after the first or second beat but wait until the count in if any finished Expression Panpot Reverb Chorus Setting or modifying the Expression Panpot Reverb Send and Chorus Send parameters is similar to assigning sounds to existing tracks 1 Stop playback of your Style if it is running 2 Press the field on the STYLE COMPOSER page SHEE COMPOSE SOL
518. s are added automatically you don t have to worry about that Pitch Bend 0 Alteration Mode Nearest Limit Low Std Limit High Std e Specify the position where your new event should be inserted by pressing the BAR and fields and entering the desired value for each unit using the dial or the DEC INC buttons e Press the field to confirm your settings and add the new event Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes W ERASE EVENT e Use the dial or a buttons to select the event you want to delete e To select several consecutive events press the dial while turning it towards the left upward direction or the right downward direction e Press the ERASE EVENT button icon to remove the event you Selected BI MOVE EVENT This function allows you to move one or several events to a different position Note If the position to which you move the selected event already contains other events the moved event is added at the end of that group e Select the event you want to move Note Events located at 1 01 00 cannot be moved further to the left G 70 Music Workstation Roland Editing individual Style events Style Micro Edit e To select several consecutive events press the dial while turning it towards the left upward direction or the right downward direction All events selected in this way appear on a blue back ground e Press the button icon The following pop up a
519. s page by pressing the button rack field and the field But the above method is a lot faster 2 Press the or OFF field to switch the proces sor on icon lights or off icon goes dark You can also do so on the EFFECTS page see above 3 Press the field below MFX that displays the name of the currently selected type 4 Select the desired type with the dial or the DECJ INC buttons Note Multi FX type selection can be linked to Tone selection for the Upper part See page 101 The available types are 1 Thru 31 DST Flanger 61 Band Chorus 2 Stereo EQ 32 DST Delay 62 Band Flanger 3 Overdrive 33 EH Chorus 63 Band Step Flg 4 Distortion 34 EH Flanger 64 VS Overdrive 5 Phaser 35 EH Delay 65 VS Distortion 6 Spectrum 36 Chorus DLY 66 GT Amp Simul 7 Enhancer 37 Flanger gt DLY 67 Gate 8 Auto Wah 38 CHO Flanger 68 Long Delay 9 Rotary 39 CHO Delay 69 Serial Delay 10 Compressor 40 Flanger DLY 70 MLT Tap DLY 11 Limiter 41 CHO Flanger 71 Reverse DLY 12 Hexa Chorus 42 Isolator 72 Shuffle DLY 13 Trem Chorus 43 Low Boost 73 3D Delay 14 Space D 44 Super Filter 74 Long Time DLY 15 St Chorus 45 Step Filter 75 Tape Echo 16 St Flanger 46 Humanizer 76 LoH Noise 17 Step Hanger 47 Speaker Sim 77 LoFi Comp 18 St Delay 48 Step Phaser 78 LoFi Radio 19 Mod Delay 20 3 Tap Delay 21 4 Tap Delay 49 MLT Phaser 79 Telephone 50 Inf Phaser 80 Phonogra
520. s value to FR to record in A you must set this value to A etc H Octave The field next to allows you to transpose the keyboard in octave steps which may be convenient for extremely high or low notes or for using the Special noises of certain sounds 14 Press the field and use the dial to transpose the keyboard up or down 4 4 octaves Tempo 15 The current tempo value may be a bit fast for recording so change it by pressing the tempo field and using the dial or the DECJ INC buttons The tempo value you set here is recorded and regarded as preset tempo You can change it at any stage In STYLE COMPOSER mode so start by selecting a tempo that allows you to record the music the way you want it to sound Input Quantize INPUT QUANTIZE is a function that corrects minor timing problems It shifts the notes whose timing is not exactly right to the nearest correct unit Always select a resolution setting that is fine enough to accept all note values you play yet not finer than the shortest note If the shortest notes of your accompaniment are 1 16th note triplets set the INPUT QUANTIZE value to 1 16t 16 Press the field and use the dial to specify the quantize value The preset value 1 16 is OK for most situations If you do not want quantize your music while record ing set this parameter to Off You can also quantize the part after recording it page 191 Record mode 17 Pr
521. s volume will be O and no sound will be heard If you pull a harmonic bar all the way out the volume will be at the maximum Each harmonic bar is assigned to a sine wave pure tone of a set pitch By mixing these sine waves you can create a variety of organ sounds If necessary press the PERCUSSION fields left side to switch the organ percussion on off and change its speed and timbre Note When percussion is on the 1 pitch will not be produced Play a few notes with your left hand The organ sound you hear now is assigned to the LOWER 1 part To change it press the TONE ASSIGN button or the button next to the sliders and move the sliders meas HARMONIG BARS sco LOWER EE eA ER ES CO 5 6 07M 5 Eg A BF 2 TG ka T EL ER F H I1 m 1 NWhomwc 0 Of course you can also change the PERCUSSION set tings of the LW1 organ part Press TONE ASSIGN if you need to change the UPPER 1 part s registration again WARNING The G 70 s assignable sliders are not motorized It is therefore very likely that their physi cal positions no longer correspond to what you see on the HARMONIC BARS UPPER 1 page and hear We recommend quickly moving a slider all the way up or down before actually setting it to the desired position If you like a registration You can save it to one of the eight memories press the field it lights then one of the numeric fields 1 8 Note This only saves the regi
522. se parameters allow you to modify the output level of the Reverb or Chorus processor SONG VOLUME or STYLE VOLUME This parameter allows you to set the overall volume of the selected song or Music Style if you think it is too soft compared with other songs or Music Styles TEMPO Allows you to change the song s or Music Style s tempo J 20 250 if you do not agree with the preset tempo TRANSPOSE only for songs This parameter allows you to transpose all song parts except the drums up to 12 semitones 1 octave up or down This value is written to the song data and used every time you play back this song 129 G 70 Music Workstation Song and Style Makeup Tools Saving your modified song or Style The changes saved with the following procedure affect the selected song or Style file directly They are not part of the settings that are saved to a User Program 1 If you are happy with your changes and wish to preserve them press the field The display changes to SAYS JUNG EXTERNAL INTERNAL MEMORY f MEMORY O Sons name ty ARTIST B GENRE FILE NAME evmanal ere aan Ar OF a jor 3 Pens 2 If necessary change the song s or Style s name You only need to do this if you want to preserve the original version and only if you want to save the new version to the same memory area The edits you have just performed can only be read by the G 70 and so are of
523. section whose default settings you want to load These two fields can be used instead of a MIDI set If you press Keyboard amp Style Parts the Song parts no longer receive transmit MIDI messages If you press Song Parts the Keyboard and Style parts no longer transmit MIDI messages Press the field to gain access to the MIDI parameters Next use the PAGE fields to select the part or section whose settings you want to change 5 If you changed some MIDI parameter settings press the field to write them to a MIDI Set page 220 6 Press the button to return to the main page Working with presets The opening MIDI page contains two big fields with preset settings All you need to do Is press them to restore the default settings for the sections or aspects in question Keyboard amp Style Parts This field recalls the factory MIDI settings for the Keyboard parts UP1 2 3 LW1 2 MBS MELODY INT and the Style parts ADrum ABass Acc1 6 The most important and practical use for this field is resetting the MIDI transmit receive channels of the Keyboard and Arranger parts and to switch off MIDI transmission reception of the Song parts Note This field applies to both reception RX and transmission TX The G 70 indeed allows you to set separate TX and RX chan nels for each part Song Parts This field restores the factory settings for the G 70 s Song parts and switches off the MIDI trans mission and reception of the
524. see there is a lot you can control away with out having to wade through endless menus Note If the main page does not appear automatically you can return to it by pressing the button once or several times 2 G 70 Music Workstation Quick Start Quick Start In this chapter we will scratch the surface and walk you through its major sections The general idea O Your G 70 is several instruments in one There are three main sections you can use for playing live Keyboard parts This section consists of parts you need to play via the keyboard hence the name Keyboard The G 70 pro vides seven Keyboard parts six of which can be used simultaneously UP1 UP2 UP3 LW1 LW2 and MBS UP stands for Upper and refers to the right half if there is a split LW refers to Lower and thus to the left half MBS is short for Manual Bass i e a monophonic bass part whose notes depend on the chords you play There is no Manual Drum part because any of the parts just mentioned can be used to play a Drum Set The seventh part MELODY INT is what computer buffs would calla cross platform part it belongs to the Keyboard section but it is in part controlled by the Arranger See Melody Intelligence on page 76 Arranger Style section Pi Left hand Right hand melody Arranger control Keyboard parts The Arranger is your backing band It plays an accom paniment called Music Style In a way
525. settings to a User Program if you want to keep them 99 G 70 Music Workstation Using the mixer functions 8 effects Using the multi effects processor Multi FX Your G 70 contains a multi effects processor that can be used for processing any Keyboard part you like There is a similar multi functional processor for exter nal audio signals with the same algorithms which is be covered on page 104 1 Press the PART ON OFF button it must light 2 Select the Dist Guitar Tone on page 2 of the E GUITAR BASS 3 Play a few notes on the keyboard and switch the button on off to hear the difference MULTI FX The MFX can be assigned to any of the Keyboard parts To do so proceed as follows e Press the button EFFECTS 3 LC Ab YBOARD REVERE CHORUS E TE a a MFX PAR ASSIGN Roland k Md olo ic COMPRESSOR TE io e Press the field a C C e Press the field s of the Keyboard part s that should use the selected MFX effect Note There is only one MFX processor that is shared by all Keyboard parts e Press the button to return to the main page TOO Selecting another MFX type and editing it The G 70 provides 84 different Multi FX types some of which are combinations of two effects for added flexi bility Here is how to select another Multi FX type 1 Press and hold the button until the dis play looks as follows HG You can also select thi
526. solator This is an equalizer which cuts the volume greatly allowing you to add a special effect to the sound by cutting the vol ume In varying ranges Boost Cut Low Mid High Level 60 0 4 dB These boost and cut each of the High Middle and Low frequency ranges At 60dB the sound becomes inaudible OdB is equivalent to the input level of the sound Anti Phase Low Sw Off On Turns the Anti Phase func tion on and off for the Low frequency ranges When turned on the counter channel of stereo sound is inverted and added to the signal Anti Phase Low Level 0 127 Adjusts the level settings for the Low frequency ranges Adjusting this level for cer tain frequencies allows you to lend emphasis to specific parts This is effective only for stereo source Anti Phase Mid Sw Off On Turns the Anti Phase func tion on and off for the Middle frequency ranges When turned on the counter channel of stereo sound is inverted and added to the signal Anti Phase Mid Level 0 127 Adjusts the level settings for the Middle frequency ranges Adjusting this level for certain frequencies allows you to lend emphasis to specific parts This is effective only for stereo source Low Boost Sw Off On Turns Low Booster on off This emphasizes the bottom to create a heavy bass sound Low Boost Level 0 127 Increasing this value gives you a heavier low end Depending on the Isolator and filter set tings this effect m
527. songs in the selected memory Mi Using Play amp Search If you only know the melody of the desired song press the field under step 1 Oc OO E r aa a 2jocr Lel e Je shieno e Press the field SONG FIRE A JAL ABETIC SEARCH DER gh ONLY Play the melody on the keyboard sea PH ORI e As indicated in the display play the main theme on the keyboard You can play in any key and the rhythm doesn t have to be perfect either this func tion just looks for intervals e f you played a wrong note press DELETE LAST NOTE e To enter the entire line again press to erase the previously entered notes then play the phrase again e After entering the melody press the field The display now returns to step 1 on page 38 and shows the names of the songs that contain the mel ody you played Press the field of the song you want to play back Note If no songs were found the following message appears and no file names are displayed in which case you need to press the SONG NAME ARTIST GENRE or FILE NAME field to display all songs again F ne me a No Match Found Eea 2 ml If the G 70 did find one or several matches the FOUND number will be smaller than the GLOBAL number Starting playback 7 To return to the main page press EXIT one Amazing Grace Cool Live Band ower 1 St Slow Str M The Grand X UPPER 1 ower2 Pad Wi
528. ss the dial while turning it towards the left upward direction or the right downward direction All events selected in this way appear on a blue back ground e Press the button icon The following pop up appears SPALL yla ENT abr Mana Alteration Mode 1 01 000 CC O Bank Select MSBI 0 CREATE j MOVE EVENT JJ TO 78 Q 1 01 060 Note 70 Bb4 33 1 1 02 000 Note 37 C 2 111 1 e Specify the position to which the first event in chro nological order of the selected group should be shifted by pressing the BAR and fields and entering the desired value for each unit using the dial or the DEC INC buttons e Press the field to confirm your settings and move the event Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes E COPY EVENT This function allows you to copy one or several events Use PLACE EVENT to insert a copy of those events at the desired position nN MINERO EN gt o C E Beat Change 4 01 020 Sys Ex FO 7E 7F 09 01 F7 01 031 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 00 7F 00 41 F7 01 037 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 01 38 06 01 F7 0 4 o o 0 01 043 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 01 33 5432 F7 0 0 0 0 01 050 Sys Ex FO H 10 4212 40 01 34 5431 F7 01 056 Sys Ex FO H 10 4212 40 01 00 20 28 01 099 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 01 00 20 28 04 060 Tempo Change 02 000 Tempo Change 52 02 060 Tempo Change 46 03 000 Tempo Change 140 Dex 174 No
529. ssages Use the fields to switch the reception RX or transmission TX of velocity messages on or off If you don t select On specify which velocity value to use instead of the continuous flux The value you set will be used for all notes received via MIDI IN USB RX or sent to MIDI OUT USB TX WIX FILTER SYSEX Use this parameter to specify whether button icon on or not off the G 70 should send SysEx mes sages Such messages are not standardized so that each manufacturer can use them ad lib for temporary or per 2 19 G 70 Music Workstation MIDI manent changes to the way a part behaves Effect set 4 Press the button to return to the main page tings for instance can only be changed via SysEx mes sages Using MIDI Sets Such messages may slow down playback on external 1 Press the button MIDI instruments or yield no effect at all which is why The display changes to you have the option to switch off their transmission in Han paa LYRICS Use this switch to specify whether the Lyrics data contained in the songs you play back should be FOOT CONTROLLERS Jj K TUNING transmitted via MIDI button icon on or not off RSS spuiraroucn DATA CHANGES This parameter allows you to specify Se ARRANGER EE how the original program changes of the songs you play back are transmitted via MIDI The G 70 may change sound addresses usually CCOO and CC32 values so as to ESS tone corr play bac
530. start by selecting the type and then set the programmable parameters The names of these types SMOOTH CELESTE are probably self explanatory You may notice that the Chorus character changes as you Select different types e Press the field of the parameter you wish to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons The three knob icons allow you to alter the selected Chorus type LOW PASS FILTER A low pass filter can be applied to the sound sent to the Chorus processor to cut the high frequency range Higher values will cut more of the high frequencies resulting in a mellower chorus sound CHORUS SEND This parameter reflects the setting on the Vocal Effect page It was provided so that you do not need to switch pages while editing the Chorus pro cessor CHOP REV SND This parameter sets the amount of Chorus sound that will be sent to the Reverb Higher val ues result in more Chorus sound being sent The value 90 effectively allows you to connect the Chorus and Reverb effects in series Chorus before Reverb If you do not wish the Chorus signal to be processed by the Reverb effect set this value to 0 5 Press the button to return to the main page Note The first thing to do now Is probably to write your set tings to a User Program page 111 TO Note For certain parts there is also an equalizer See pages 132 and 135 for how to set them ER Working with User Pro
531. stortion Also changes the vol ume Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels Amp Simulator Type Allows you to specify what kind of guitar amp will be simulated SMALL small amp BUILT IN single unit type amp 2 STACK large double stack amp 3 STACK large triple stack amp EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Level 0 127 Output level Use this parameter to com pensate for exaggerated level differences resulting from the settings you made 4 Distortion Produces a more intense distortion than the above The parameters are the same as for 3 Overdrive G 70 Music Workstation Roland Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters 5 Phaser Adds phase shifted copy to the original sound and modulates it Phaser Manual 100 8000Hz Adjusts the basic fre quency that is modulated by the effect Phaser Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Phaser Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Phaser Resonance 0 127 Amount of feedback Higher values create a rather more synthetic character Phaser Mix Level 0 127 Level of the phase shifted sound with respect to the original signal Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a
532. stration of the currently selected part You will have to repeat this for the other sections If you want to save their registrations too 34 Press another numeric field to recall the settings stored in that memory in which case the sound changes About the MANUAL field The field on the HARMONIC BARS page allows you to change the organ sound so as to corre spond to the current positions of the sliders This will change the sound After selecting another memory their physical positions usually no longer correspond to the sound you hear Using just one organ sound and bass pedals As stated earlier pressing the EASY SETTING button creates a split that involves two organ sounds UP1 and LW1 This actually simulates a two manual instrument If you only need one organ sound that is assigned to the entire keyboard press the KBD MODE button its indicator must light Press PART ON OFF to switch off the LOWER 1 part Note You could connect a PK 5A MIDI pedal to the G 70 s MIDI IN socket and use it to trigger the MBS M BASS part See page 214 for the G 70 s MIDI functions Using effects An organ sound without rotary speaker modulation is only half an organ sound right So let s have a look at this and the other effects because the G 70 provides a lot more than just a convincing rotary effect 1 On the HARMONIC BARS page UPPER 1 LOWER 1 or M BASS press the field in the upper left hand corner These effects
533. sure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the G 70 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation should Start after the selected beat WTO By default the TO position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 lt last measure of the track or song This is where you specify the bar position of the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat EI FROM NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the note or lower limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range ETO NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the upper limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range This parameter is not displaye
534. t as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Attack 0 127 Speed at which the pan changes between steps 239 G 70 Music Workstation Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters Input Sync Sw Off On Specifies whether an input note will cause the sequence to resume from the first step of the sequence ON or not OFF Input Sync Threshold 0 127 Volume at which an input note will be detected Level 0 127 Output level 56 Slicer By applying successive cuts to the sound this effect turns a conventional sound into a sound that appears to be played as a backing phrase This is especially effective when applied to sustain type sounds Step 1 16 0 127 Level at each step Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the rate should be synchro nized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the following parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Rate at which the 16 step sequence will cycle Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Attack 0 127 Speed at which the level changes between steps Input Sync Sw Off On Specifies whether an input note will cause the seque
535. t Bans 4 Change the Style data to your liking Copying individual Style tracks The COPY function can be used to copy individual tracks Modes and Divisions to replace existing parts while keeping the remaining parts of the Style already in memory 1 Press the field on the STYLE COM POSER page followed by the field Cs a kas il a a FROM DISK USER tyle SHUFFLE Ca ecm 2 Press the field 3 Select the Style that contains the track s to be copied WSelecting an internal Style To use one of the Styles that can be selected via the front panel proceed as follows use the STYLE but tons and the fields in the display to select the desired Style The blue field shows the name of the Style selected as source WSelecting an external Style You can also work with a Style saved in the internal memory area on a floppy disk or a memory card EXTERNAL e Press the button icon to jump to the STYLE FINDER page an STE B A court i a ZSLROCKI ZSLROCK2 SLSWNG1 68 ma FOUND 553 Cm GLOBAL 553 e See Style Finder quickly locating Styles on p 86 for the complete procedure e Press the field of the Style you need it appears on an orange background e Press the field to return to the STYLE TRACK EDIT COPY field 4 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the track to be copied You can also select ALL
536. t a very good idea BISHIFT 48 48 This parameter allows you to transpose the received note messages before sending them to the G 70 s tone genera tor This allows you to change the pitch of the received MIDI note messages if you are used to playing a song that is being received via MIDI in another key The maximum possible transposition is four octaves up 48 and down 48 Each step represents a semi tone LIMIT HIGH LIMIT LOW C G9 LIMIT HIGH and LIMIT LOW allow you to set the note range to be received If not all note messages received on a given MIDI channel should be played by the selected G 70 part set the range to the desired values Note The LOW LIMIT value cannot be higher value than HIGH LIMIT and vice versa RX EVENT FILTER The data filters of the RX section allow you to specify whether ON or note OFF the messages in question should be received Press the field to open the fol lowing pop up window NUS Shy PROGRAM CHANGE PANPOT HOLD om PITCH BENDER EXPRESS r f VOLUME CHORUS The RX filters are the same as the IX filters See page 216 for details Press the field and save your MIDI settings to a Set or Press the button to return to the main page specific as you will notice Press the field and use the PAGE fields to select the page that contains the parameter you want to edit SYNC parameters The SYNC parameters allow you to specify whether or not the G 70 sh
537. t accompani ment 9 Press the button to stop record ing 10 See Listening to your song G 70 Music Workstation Roland Recording your music Adding more parts Here is how to redo part of your recording one part you do not like or to add additional parts to what has already been recorded Let us first have a look at what has been recorded so far and where We started out with the Arranger which means that the following tracks may now contain data not all Music Styles use all 8 tracks the Arranger can play back simultaneously Arranger part Recorder track ADR 10 ABS 2 ACC1 1 ACC2 3 ACC3 5 ACC4 7 ACC5 8 ACC6 9 If you also recorded one or several Keyboard parts their data reside on the following tracks Keyboard part Recorder track UP 1 4 UP2 6 UP3 13 LW1 11 LW2 14 MBS 12 MELODY INT 15 UP1 2 3 and or LW1 2 can also be used as additional drum part if you assign it a Drum Set TONE button For the following we will assume that you also recorded the melody using the UP1 part track 4 and that you now want to add some chords using the LW1 part 1 Start by taking note of the track you wish to re record See the tables above For our example we will use track 11 LW1 If you want to redo a part but do not know what track it has been recorded to you can take advantage of the Recorder s Mute function for locating it 2 Press the RECORDER but ton 16 TRACK SEQUENCER
538. t of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 last measure of the track or pattern This is where you specify the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat BI FROM NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the note or lower limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range The note can also be selected by pressing the corresponding key after selecting the FROM NOTE field 191 G 70 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer WETO NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the upper limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range This note can also be selected by pressing the corre sponding key after selecting the TO NOTE field This parameter is not displayed when you select EQUAL UNEQUAL HIGHER or LOWER Mi Fine tuning the note range Before setting FROM NOTE and possibly TO NOTE you can decide how you want to use the note indications Depending on the option you choose TO NOTE may not even be available so that setting it beforehand would be a waste of time EQUAL Only the selected note note n
539. t received a PK 5A for instance doesn t send them the G 70 starts playback using its internal tempo If however Clock messages F8 follow after the Start message the G 70 uses the external tempo You can nevertheless go on using the Recorder sequencer or Arranger without MIDI Start Clock messages which is not possible when you select MIDI 217 G 70 Music Workstation MIDI Internal The Recorder sequencer SONG or Arranger STYLE uses its internal tempo MIDI Song or Style playback can be started or stopped with MIDI real time messages Start Stop Clock received from an external clock source Remote The Recorder sequencer SONG or Arranger STYLE waits for a start message to start playback at its own tempo When it receives a stop message playback stops External clock messages are ignored BASIC parameters The Basic channel is used to receive and transmit Program Change and Bank Select messages for selecting User Programs as well as for the reception and transmission of other kinds of messages that are not directly related to a specific MIDI channel such as the PART SWITCH function for example Note that if you select another channel messages intended for the BASIC parameters use might also cause other parameters to change when you don t want them to NUS Shy KEYBOARD STYLE SONG SYSTEM ml PARTS l PARTS mo PARTS MIDI TX MIDI RX CHANNEL RE FILTER Basic EU Pa
540. t the end of the list You cannot however select Tones or Performances e Press the dial The display now changes to XI m I I NUMERIC PAD y EN FE EN EE E E ii e Pess the field if you want to use the numeric pad for selecting Drum Sets the board s Rhythm Sets Otherwise switch it off e Enter the number of the Patch sound you want to use then press the field If necessary you can use the field to correct erroneous entries before pressing ENTER The display now jumps to the page that contains the sound whose number you entered Press the field to leave the numeric pad without selecting another sound 6 Press the button to return to the main page Next time you select this TONE family the G 70 automatically jumps to the page that contains the Tone you selected last G 70 Music Workstation Roland Using the Harmonic Bars Using the Harmonic Bars The G 70 contains a virtual drawbar organ that is based on Roland s Virtual Tonewheel technology found in organs like the VK 8 VK 88 VK 7 VK 8M etc This section can be assigned to three Keyboard parts UP1 LW1 and MBS The remaining Keyboard parts cannot be used as virtual organ but they can trigger organ sounds that are part of the normal Tones 1 Press the EASY SETTING button The button s indicator lights and the following parts are assigned to the keyboard LOWER 1 LW1 to the left and UPPER 1 UP1 to the
541. t the list entry you want to edit The name of the selected parameter appears in the upper right hand corner of the display MASIERIKAG aa Tempo Change b Tempo Change 01 000 Beat Change 4 4 Sys Ex FO 7E 7F 09 01 F7 01 031 Sys Ex FO H 10 4212 40 00 7F 00 41 F7 01 037 Sys Ex FO H 10 4212 40 01 38 06 01 F7 EVENT 01 043 Sys Ex FO H 10 421240 01 33 5432 F7 0 0 0 0 0 01 050 Sys Ex FO 41 10 421240 01 34 5431 F7 01 056 Sys Ex FO 41 10 4212 4001 00 20 28 EVENT 0 0 0 0 0 01 099 Sys Ex FO H 10 421240 01 00 20 28 4 04 060 Tempo Change 60 COPY D 02 000 Tempo Change 52 EVENT 02 060 Tempo Change 46 03 000 Tempo Change 140 PLACE 3 EVENT 2 Press the DATA ENTRY gt button to select the first value SUAS SISTA SUT Tempo Change Value 1 000 Tempo Change J100 1 000 Beat Change 4 4 1 020 Sys Ex FO 7E 7F 09 01 F7 1 031 Sys Ex FO 41 10 42 12 40 00 7F 00 41 F7 1 037 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 01 38 06 01 F7 1 043 Sys Ex FO 41 10 42 12 40 01 33 5432 F7 Sys Ex FO 41 10 4212 40 01 34 5431 F7 1 056 Sys Ex FO 41 10 421240 01 00 20 28 1 099 Sys Ex FO H 10 421240 01 00 20 28 4 060 Tempo Change 60 2 000 Tempo Change 52 EVENT 2 060 Tempo Change 46 E PY 3 000 T Ch 140 A 3 Modify the value e Rotate the dial to set the desired value or e Set the value using the DEC INC buttons or e Press the dial and enter the value using the numeric
542. t those parameters as well Note The and fields allow you to jump to the effects or tone controls If you press the field the display looks as follows VY OIGE FAX EDIT GENDER PITCH VIBRATO COARSE RATE _ RISE TIME a Om FINE DEPTH DELAY TIME Gm GE g VIBRATO Note Be sure to select the desired preset before pressing the field and modifying the following parameters e Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons Here s what the parameters mean GENDER Allows you to change the timbre of the part Negative values produce a masculine effect positive values add feminine qualities This parameter should be set in relation to the COARSE value if you want to achieve a realistic effect Pitch COARSE Allows you to transpose the processed voice signal in semitone steps 12 corresponds to 1 octave 24 to 2 octaves Pitch FINE Allows you to change the tuning of the pro cessed voice in very small cent steps For the following the indicator icon must light for the effect to be noticeable Vibrato RATE Sets the speed of the vibrato effect Vibrato DEPTH Allows you to set the vibrato intensity Vibrato is an effect that changes modulates the pitch The higher the DEPTH value the more outspoken these periodic pitch changes will be Vibrato RIS
543. t types that should remain where they are See VIEW on p 175 Note Events located at 1 01 00 cannot be moved further to the left e To select several consecutive events press the dial while turning it towards the left upward direction or the right downward direction All events selected in this way appear on a blue back ground e Press the button icon The following pop up appears MINERO 2YNT Note Number 1 02 033 CC 121 Reset All Ctrl 0 cREATE HOVE EVENT TO cLose pi 95 73 EVENT perm 1 19 03 030 Note 19 04 010 Note 69 A 4 Ta e Specify the position to which the first event in chro nological order of the selected group should be shifted by pressing the BAR and fields and entering the desired value for each unit using the dial or the DEC INC buttons e Press the field to confirm your settings and move the event Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes 1 173 Mi COPY EVENT This function allows you to copy one or several events Use PLACE EVENT to insert a copy of those events at the desired position MINERO Spire TRA Note Number EVENT 1 02 033 CC 121 Reset All Ctrl 0 1 02 035 CC 10 Pan 72 1 02 036 CC 93 Chorus 20 1 02 037 CC 31 Reverb 74 1 02 038 CC 11 Expression 127 1 02 040 CC 7 Volume 80 1 02 041 Pitch Bend 0 MOVE 1 02 042 CC 0 Bank Select MSB 0 74
544. tages in the phaser Phaser Manual 0 127 Adjusts the basic frequency from which the sound will be modulated Step Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the modulation rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Step Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Frequency i e modula tion speed Step Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync param eter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation 233 Polarity Inverse Synchro Selects whether the left and right phase of the modulation will be the same or the opposite INVERSE The left and right phase will be oppo site When using a mono source this spreads the sound SYNCHRO The left and right phase will be the same Select this when inputting a stereo source Resonance 0 127 Amount of feedback Cross Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the phaser sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Step Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the step rate should be syn chronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the following parame ter re
545. te FROM TO NOTE ranges We recommend you only use this function to shorten notes that suddenly seem too long when you assign a different sound to the track in question You cannot view the duration of the notes here which makes editing the data en bloc a little bit hazardous Use the MICRO EDIT page to change the duration of individual notes AGK C lt l l o Sotto arenie no chance crock utamwsr After selecting a sound with a slow release i e a sound that lingers on after all notes have been released however CHANGE GATE TIME will help you cut the notes down to size and thus avoid undesir able overlaps BTRACK ALL 1 16 Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks BI FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or song Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the G 70 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation should start after the selected beat WTO By default the TO position is set to the last event of the se
546. te For this function you could take advantage of the VIEW filter to avoid selecting event types that should not be included in the copy See VIEW on p 173 e To select several consecutive events press the dial while turning it towards the left upward direction or the right downward direction All events selected in this way appear on a blue back ground e Press the COPY EVENT button icon The new selection will replace the previous one BI PLACE EVENT This function is only available if the sequencer s clip board already contains events that you copied using COPY EVENT For safety reasons it would be a good idea to use this function immediately after copying events Press the button icon The following pop up appears STYLE MICRO EDIT 1 01 000 CC O Bank Select MSB DO PLACE EVENT TO Oe 1 01 060 Mote 70 Bb4 33 1 1 02 000 Mote 37 C 2 111 1 PLACE 3 ca Specify the position where the first event of the group you copied with should be inserted by pressing the BAR and fields and entering the desired value for each unit using the dial or the DEC INC buttons Press the field to confirm your settings and add the new event s Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes Note Events inserted with PLACE EVENT are added to any events that may already exist in that area Existing events are thus not pushed towards the end of the song Editing song dat
547. te It would be a good idea to enter at least 2 characters possibly even 3 so as to narrow down your search to a work able size Search the database The next step is to decide how the Style Finder should look for files Press the field to search for all entries that start with the characters you entered BEA for example Files that match the specified criteria will be displayed at the top of the list The order depends on the button icon you activated STYLE NAME COUNTRY GENRE or TEMPO Press the field to have the G 70 search the selected entry for files that contain the supplied information This would allow you to also locate a file called Raggabeat if you entered BEA See page 49 for how to enter characters The field allows you to delete the character indicated by the cursor Press and hold it to clear all characters Press to insert a blank or the number O If you forgot to insert a character use or to select the position where the missing character should be inserted Then press Insert followed by the character you wish to insert To enter numbers without cycling through the char acters first press the field After enter ing the numbers switch it off if you need to enter characters again e Press the field to start your search 87 G 70 Music Workstation Additional Arranger Style functions Note If no Styles were found the following message appears and no file names are
548. te at a time 4 may not be the best possible setting Try to select a track with several notes If you want to play the melody yourself press the Or field or both and play the desired notes while you speak or sing into the microphone Note See page 134 for the parameters Note To keep your settings you must write them to a User Program 7 Press Or to leave this page Talk The Talk function is meant for announcements between songs it switches off any other Vocal Harmonist effect Voice FX Auto Pitch Singer Vocoder Small Ensemble that may be on Furthermore it mutes the Vocal Har monist s effects processors Reverb Chorus Delay etc You can however add some reverb and or delay if you like That way your voice has its normal sound when you wish or need to address your audience The Talk func tion can even be set in such a way that the music song is turned softer but not muted altogether while you are talking HINT You could combine this with the Chain function page 145 and insert a short announcement tune between the actual songs so that your announcements are easily recogniz able Of course you could also play the tune yourself 1 Press the button and speak into the micro phone All Vocal Harmonist transformations are now muted This includes the VOCODER SMALL and ENSEMBLE buttons 2 After your announcement press the button again to return to the previous
549. teadily and the Arranger plays a different accompaniment 9 Now try out Variations 3 and 4 Professional transitions Fill In So far we have only used the main accompaniment patterns i e the phrases that are repeated over and over until you stop the Arranger The various variations can be used for verses 1 second verses 2 choruses 3 amp 4 and other song parts Switching between these patterns is a matter of press ing the VARIATION 1 4 buttons Yet that produces instant changes of the accompaniment while real musicians tend to announce new song parts by means of roll in the drums or slightly different accompani ment notes The G 70 allows you to make such announcements in the following way e f you press it on any beat before the last of the cur rent bar the Arranger plays a Fill In pattern that lasts until the end of the current bar It then changes to the newly selected pattern at which point and the selected numeric VARIATION button light steadily If you press it on the last beat of the current bar the Fill In will start on the next downbeat and last an entire bar after which the Arranger automatically selects the new pattern If you press the same numeric button 1 4 again the Fill In is played according to the above rules But when it finishes the Arranger returns to the pattern you had been using up to that point 5 Switch off the button if you do not want the ne
550. ted on the basis of the chords you play in the chord recognition area of the keyboard major minor seventh Tracks Unlike a drum machine a Style not only contains the rhythm part drums amp percussion but also a melodic accompaniment such as piano guitar bass and strings lines That is why the Style divisions work with tracks eight to be precise See also Arranger parts on p 74 The part to track assignment Is fixed You cannot assign the ADrums part to track 6 for example The reason why the ADrums part is assigned to the first track and the ABass part to the second is that most programmers and recording artists start by laying down the rhythm section of a song There are exceptions to this rule however so feel free to start with any other part if that is easier for the Style you are programming Note Though there are six ACC parts most Styles only contain two or three melodic accompaniment lines In most cases less means more i e do not program six melodic accompaniments just because the G 70 provides that facility If you listen very carefully to a CD you will discover that it is not the number of instruments you use that makes a song sound big but rather the right notes at the right time Looped vs one shot The G 70 uses two kinds of patterns looped divisions and one shot divisions Mi Looped divisions Looped divisions are accompaniments that are repeated until you select another division or
551. tempo as well as general SysEx messages G 70 Music Workstation Roland General considerations Example 1 Recording a song from scratch Let us now record a song from scratch using the 16 track sequencer If you already played back a song since switching on the G 70 the s song RAM memory already contains data we need to erase Even if the G 70 s song RAM memory is still empty using the INI TIALIZE SONG function would be a good idea Here is how to 1 Press the RECORDER but ton The display changes to SWEETPOT meas 0023 2 J 130 4 4 EDIT MASTER TRACK INITIALIZE Bisons d 14 d CLEAN GT j 15 PIANO sae i 16 riano 4 2 Press the field The display changes to DIE 3 SONG TEMPLATES SETTINGS TEMPO AND TIME SIGNATURE The internal Song will be deleted Are you sure 3 If you want the G 70 to set most parameters for you press one of the TEMPLATES fields Here is what the options mean ORCHESTR Selects orchestral sounds suitable for classi cal music and film scores BAROQUE Selects orchestral sounds suitable for cham ber music ROCK Selects sounds suitable for rock music FOLK Selects sounds suitable for folk music COUNTRY Selects sounds suitable for country music ELECTRONIC Selects classical sounds suitable for dance music POP Selects sound often used in pop arrange ments 155 G 70 Music Workstation Using the 16 track sequence
552. ter Level 0 127 Output level of the delay sound Output Mode Speaker Phones Adjusts the method that will be used to hear the sound that is output to the OUTPUT jacks The optimal 3D effect will be achieved if you select SPEAKER when using speakers or PHONES when using headphones EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 74 Long Time DLY A delay in which the delay time can be varied smoothly and allowing an extended delay to be produced Delay Time sync msec Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not msec the delay time should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a Speed or a note value Delay Time msec 0 2600ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Time note Musical Notes Delay times can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to msec Specify the value of the desired note Delay Acceleration 0 15 Adjusts the time over which the Delay Time changes from the current setting to a spec ified new setting The rate of change for the Delay Time directly affects the rate of pitch change Feedback 98 0 9
553. th Vintage EP1 UPPER2 org XV Ac_Bass f Scat UPPERS The main page is the G 70 s display page that pro vides a maximum of relevant information and allows you to select and change items you may need dur ing normal operation 8 9 G 70 Music Workstation Roland Playing back songs Standard MIDI Files It also displays the name of the selected song the tempo and the current measure You can press the button icon in the upper right hand corner to see the song s tempo This value will however be displayed as soon as you start song playback Note If the message Too many events is displayed the selected song contains more than that number and cannot be played back Press the button Playback of the selected song starts If necessary use and to change the tempo You can also press the button several times in the rhythm of the desired tempo To quickly return to the default tempo simulta neously press lt SLOW and FAST gt 10 Use the MASTER knob to set the G 70 s output volume You can also play to the music using the Keyboard parts If necessary use the knob to set the desired balance Other practical playback functions MARK JUMP The factory loaded songs in the G 70 s internal memory contain four locations markers you can jump to right away For songs that do not yet contain them you can program these markers yourself You can also edit the locations of existing ma
554. that can be selected using program change mes sages 128 was no longer sufficient to access all sounds of a given instrument The G 70 boasts over 1 500 sounds PITCH BENDER Pitch Bend messages MODUL Modulation messages CCO1 VOLUME Volume messages CC07 PANPOT Pan pot messages CC10 EXPRESSION Expression messages CC11 HOLD Hold Sustain Damper messages CC64 SOSTENUTO Sostenuto messages CC66 SOFT Soft messages CC67 REVERB Reverb Send messages CC91 CHORUS Chorus Send messages CC93 CAP Channel aftertouch RPN Registered parameter number CC100 101 NRPN Non registered parameter number CC98 99 SysEx SysEx messages system exclusive CC16 General purpose controller that allows you to influence the C1 parameter see p 93 Note TX FILTER parameters with a symbol are not available for Style parts G 70 Music Workstation Roland Editing MIDI parameters MIDI System parameters The following MIDI parameters usually apply to the G 70 as a whole even though some of them are rather MIDI RX Mi CHANNEL 1 16 Allows you to assign a MIDI receive channel to the selected part The default settings usually work best but you are most welcome to change them Note Unless you have a very good reason to do otherwise we suggest using the same TX and RX channel numbers for a part Note Assigning the same channel to two or more parts is usu ally no
555. that you do not need to work with a piano sound The settings affected by the EASY SETTING button are to add other parts for creating richer sounds See e Whole mode with only UP1 active p 57 e The The Grand X Tone is assigned to UP1 e Arranger ZONE WHOLE page 80 Press the button to start and stop the Arranger See page 27 for how to select internal Music Styles e Arranger TYPE PIANO STYLE page 80 Arranger control UP1 This setting is also used when you press the button In addition the G 70 switches on the LW1 part that can be played using your left hand Arranger control UP1 LW1 The settings affected by the EASY SETTING but ton are 5G Split and Whole modes Using the SPLIT Keyboard Mode Split means that the keyboard is divided into two halves You can use the LW1 LW2 and MBS parts in the left half and the UP1 UP2 UP3 parts in the right It is also possible to use an additional split between UP1 UP2 and UP3 see Upper 3 Split on p 90 LW1 LW2 MBS UP1 UP2 UP3 Here s how to activate the SPLIT keyboard mode 1 Press the KBD MODE button 2 Press the PART ON OFF buttons of the parts LW2 LW1 etc you want to play via the keyboard and switch off the parts you do not need If a part is on its button lights Note If you like you can activate a Hold function for the LW1 2 parts That way briefly pressing the notes to be played by the LW1 2 parts is en
556. the wrong card would recall a Reggae1 Style but it might be the wrong one and quite a few other CUSTOM memories might not recall any Style at all because the other names only exist on the other card 1 Press a button of the STYLE pad to select a Music Style family STYLE LIVE DISCO 8 BEAT 16 BEAT BAND ROCK DANCE CONTEMP BALL JAZZ BOSSA ROOM BLUES 50 s amp 60 s SAMBA LATIN WORLD G 70 Music Workstation Roland Working with external Music Styles That button lights and the display looks as follows DISK jE S World useR G Orchestr SI Fox Country Ballad Pop Fox Country Rock Nice Fox Country Beat Fox Band Easy Country Slow Country Country Fox PAGES CUSTOM In some cases an error message File not found displayed at this point means that the card does not contain the referenced file Note If you do not wish to use the Music Style after all press EXIT In that case the G 70 keeps on using the last Music Style it did find Disk User You can also load one Music Style directly into the G 70 s Disk User memory and use it You could take advantage of this function whenever none of the CUS TOM memories refer to the Music Style you need for playing a given piece As its name implies you can also use this function for working with Styles on floppy disk in the internal memory or on a memory card Note The Music Style in this memory is only available until you swit
557. the DEC INC but tons or by pressing the dial and using the on screen numeric pad SRV Room SRV Hall SRV Plate parameters Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Adjusts the delay time between the direct sound until the reverb sound is heard This is used to simulate the distance between the original signal and the reflective surfaces Time 0 127 The duration of the reverb signal The higher the value the longer the simulated room becomes Size 1 8 Determines how the later reverberations are propagated which gives the listener important clues about the height of the simulated room High Cut 160 12500Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which the high frequency content of the reverb will be reduced If you do not want to reduce the high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Density 0 127 Density number of the reflections Diffusion 0 127 Adjusts the change in the density of the reverb over time The higher the value the more the density increases with time The effect of this setting is most pronounced with long reverb times LF Damp Freq 50 4000Hz Adjusts the frequency below which the low frequency content of the reverb sound will be reduced or damped 97 G 70 Music Workstation Using the mixer functions 8 effects LF Damp Gain 36 0dB Adjusts the amount of damping applied to the frequency range selected with LF Damp With a setting of O there will be no reduct
558. the DECJ INC buttons to select it If you also need to change certain aspects of that effect 2 Press the button icon next to the STYLE SONG EFFECTS REVERB or CHORUS display Important remark The effects settings discussed below are primarily intended for real time changes to a Music Style or song They are note saved nor are they saved to a User Program When you select a different Music Style or song either directly or via a User Program the changes made here are lost You can however save them thus burning them into the Style or song by pressing the button and the field on the page that appears then see p 130 TOT G 70 Music Workstation Using the mixer functions 8 effects Reverb for Style Song parts BALE TONG May afer les REVERB LEVEL Press the field of the effect type you wish to use The options are ROOM1 ROOM2 ROOM3 These types simulate the reverb characteristics of a room The higher the number 1 2 or 3 the bigger the room becomes HALL1 HALL2 These types simulate the reverb of a small 1 or large 2 concert hall and thus sound much bigger than the Room types above PLATE Digital simulation of a metal plate that is some times used for creating reverb effects Works well for percussive sounds DELAY A delay effect no reverb Works a lot like an echo effect and thus repeats the sounds PAN DELAY This is a stereo version of the above Delay effect
559. the low range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range G 70 Music Workstation Roland Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 17 Step Flanger A Step Flanger is a flanger effect with clearly noticeable steps rather than continuous pitch changes Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Flanger Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Flanger Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Step Rate 0 10 20 0HZz note Rate period of pitch change Flanger Phase 0 180deg Spatial spread of the sound 0 Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 18 St Delay Delay is an effect that allows you repeat the input signal thus creating echoes repetition Delay FBK Mode Normal Cross Select the way in which delay sound is fed back into the effect NORMAL The left delay sound will be fed back into the left
560. the section whose tempo should be dis played You can change the tempo value of the selected section using the and buttons after stopping playback They do not allow you to switch from Style to Song mode however because that is handled automatically depending on whether the or button currently lights Note While on the main page you can also set the tempo using the dial and the DEC INC buttons The fields indicated by 4 take you to a page where you can select songs SONG Music Styles STYLE or User Programs USER PROG These fields have the same functions as the buttons of the same name in the FINDER pad The OCTAVE button icons 5 allow you to shift the tuning of the currently selected Keyboard part indi cated by a red arrow To select a Keyboard part press its TONE ASSIGN button The remaining fields 6 allow you to select the Key board part you wish to assign another sound to and recalls the TONE SELECT page They duplicate the functions of the KEYBOARD PART TONE ASSIGN buttons The SCALE TUNE field takes you to a page where yo can change the tuning of the G 70 s notes so as to be able to use Arabic scales for example G 70 Music Workstation Roland Front panel The TRANSPOSE field 8 finally calls up the display page where you can transpose one several or all sec tions this depends on the mode you select on that page This field duplicates the function of the TRANSPOSE buttons As you
561. the song This may be a bit dangerous though If you don t want to wait until the above warning Song has been changed is displayed automati cally proceed as follows Using this manual Save function has the advantage that you can save your song whenever you are happy with your latest recording or edits Bear in mind that a power failure is all it takes to lose your song Don t wait until it is too late Press the field on the 16 track Sequencer s main page The display now responds with Te 3 TONO Gp sons neve ARTIST GENRE ty FILE NAME KIr Sere or cscs You can also select this page by pressing the button field gt field 2 Specify where you want to save your song Press the field to select the G 70 s internal memory as target this is a 50MB storage area similar to a hard disk Insert a floppy disk into the drive and press the field Press the field This option is only available if you connected a memory card to the G 70 s PCMCIA slot before switching it on 159 G 70 Music Workstation Using the 16 track sequencer You need to give your song two names a SONG NAME and a FILE NAME The FILE NAME is the one that allows the G 70 to recognize your song o eli aro poe pO ree 3 Press the button icon 4 Enter the name e Move the cursor to the desired position using and gt e Enter the character for that position using the alpha
562. this function is switched on so that you can briefly play the chord for a given bar and release all keys in the chord recognition area If the icon indicator is dark the melodic accompaniment bass and other parts stops as soon as you release all keys in the chord recognition area only the drums keep playing 1 Select the ARRANGER SETTING page see step 1 of Chord recognition area ZONE on p 80 ARRANGE SETTING ZONE TYPE NODE LEFT MER Je RIGHT CM JET WHOLE MIAM JEA 2 Press the button icon to switch the function off dark or on lights 3 Press the button to return to the main page or continue with the next step Intro amp Ending Alteration If you think that the Intro and Ending patterns sound odd when you start a piece with a rather unusual chord Csus4 for instance switch off the ALTERATION func tion In that case the special chord is memorized but the Intro or Ending uses the normal chord progression e g C Am F G If this button icon is on however the chord progression of the selected Intro or Ending pat tern is adapted to the first chord you play which may lead to odd results If ALTERATION is off the Arranger only switches to the special chord Csus4 in our example when the Intro Ending is finished 1 Select the ARRANGER CHORD page see step 1 of Chord recognition area ZONE on p 80 2 Press the button icon to switch that function off dark or
563. tion at power on the G 70 see below If you need to reset some or all When you switch on the G 70 it automatically selects MIDI parameters to their default values select default MIDI settings If they do not match the settings and or rather required for your setup you can tell the G 70 which than a MIDI Set MIDI Set it should recall when you switch it on Writing a MIDI Set aa Burton e display changes to 1 If you are still on one of the EDIT MIDI pages press the Back field FOOT CONTROLLERS If not press the button and the field NT tuna on the MENU display page p SPLIT amp TOUCH N ARRANGER SETTING FUNCTION HARMONIST 2 COMPOSER EASY SETTING n x 4 S lt iz m tse UTILITY NA oO noi LG UG Local Off SELECT Keyboard amp Style Parts WRITE AE TONE EDIT LE 2 Press the field it lights red 3 Press the field that corresponds to the MIDI Set where you wish to save your MIDI settings 1 lt 8 The display returns to the MIDI page 2 2 O 2 Press the field followed by the field 3 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the MIDI Set to be recalled when the G 70 is switched on 4 Switch on the field Switch off this button icon if no MIDI Set should be recalled when the G 70 is switched on Note If the G 70 is also set to recall a User Program that con tains a MIDI link that sele
564. to copy all tracks of a given Mode Division In that case the DESTINATION track is also set to ALL am L GI G 70 Music Workstation Roland Copying existing Styles 5 Repeat this operation with the and fields to select the Mode Major Minor 7th ALL and Division Int 1 4 Int ALL Main 1x4 Main ALL FDw 13 FDw ALL FUp 13 FUp ALL End 1 4 End ALL 6 Press the field to listen to the excerpt you are about to copy Note LISTEN is not available when you select ALL for the MODE or DIVISION fields BI FROM Start by specifying the position of the first event or note to be copied 7 Press the BAR BEAT or field in the FROM row and use the dial or the DEC buttons to set the position of the starting point By default the FROM parameters are set to Bar 1 Beat 1 CPT 0 ETO The TO position indicates the end of the excerpt to be copied By default the TO values are set to include the entire track 8 Press the BAR BEAT or field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the desired position To copy an entire bar select the beginning of the fol lowing bar Example to copy bars 1 4 specify FROM 1 1 0 TO 5 1 0 9 Press to listen to the excerpt again 10 Press the field aaa ed bea Do aaa INTO Style Cool Live Band oJ mM COPY MODE Copying can be carried out in one of two modes Replace The data in the selected range will be copied a
565. to the note you played C The name of the corresponding chord is displayed in the upper left hand corner of the display onG Amazing Grace Cool Live Band 7 Play another chord in the left half of the keyboard The same pattern is now played in that key You don t even have to play full chords e For major chords playing just the root note is enough e g C for C major A for A major etc e For minor chords playing the root note and the third key to its right will do e For seventh chords playing the root and the second key to Its left is enough C major C minor Only the key that corresponds to Root note third key to the the chord s name right C7 Root note second key to the left 25 G 70 Music Workstation Quick Start Note The function that takes care of this easy fingering is called INTELLIGENT page 80 See also p 251 for a list of other chords that can be played using this system augmented diminished etc What you hear now is the MAIN 1 pattern the and VARIATION 1 buttons light This is the simplest accompaniment of the selected Music Style Let s listen to the accompaniment your could use for your choruses 8 Press the VARIATION 2 button the and buttons light and 2 flashes STYLE CONTROL INTRO MAIN END RIT INVERSION STAN STOP a a aay AUTO FILL IN START STOP co o At the end of the VARIATION 1 pattern the VARIA TION 2 button lights s
566. together or to quickly alternate between sounds or Tones as we call them Use the PART ON OFF buttons to select the part s you want to play You can play several sounds simultaneously which is called a layer or via separate keyboard zones split Below please find an explanation of the Keyboard parts See p 74 for the Arranger parts e UP1 Upper1 Upper1 is normally the main solo part and switched on automatically in Piano mode e UP2 The Upper2 part can be used as additional solo part to be layered with the Upper1 part or as an alternative melody sound UP3 The Upper3 part is yet another solo part that can be added to UP1 and UP2 It can also be used in an additional split combination see p 90 LW1 and LW2 The Lower1 and Lower parts can either be used in the same way as the UP parts in WHOLE mode or be assigned to the left half of the keyboard in SPLIT mode MBS In WHOLE mode the MBS part is yet another normal part In SPLIT mode it supplies a semi auto matic bass line to your left hand notes if one of the two LW parts is active When neither LW button lights it behaves like any other Keyboard part Note All Keyboard parts can be used to play drum sounds Unlike previous Roland arranger instruments the G 70 no longer provides a dedicated Manual Drums part e MELODY INTELL Melody Intelligence This part is triggered by the Arranger and plays automatic har monies that
567. tton 1 4 after switching on END RIT the Arranger automatically uses the ENDING phrase that corresponds to the MAIN number you have been using up to that point Note Here again it would be wiser not to play chords while the Ending phrase is running Note See Additional Arranger Style functions on p 74 for more Arranger functions Note You can also select patterns via the Aftertouch function Seep 75 Selecting Music Styles So far we have been using only one Music Style the one that is selected automatically at power on Here is how to select a different accompaniment 1 Press a button of the STYLE pad to select a Music Style family LIVE DISCO 8 BEAT 16 BEAT BAND ROCK DANCE CONTEMP w o N gt BALL JAZZ ROOM BLUES 50 s amp 60 s SAMBA LATIN WORLD G 70 Music Workstation Roland Playing to an automatic accompaniment The indicator of that button lights and the display looks as follows DISK SE World user Q Orchestr SI Fox Country Ballad Pop Fox Country Rock Nice Fox Country Beat Fox Band Easy Country Slow Country Country Fox PAGES CUSTOM The display shows a list of 10 Music Styles available for the family you selected If the name of the desired Style is not displayed 2 Use the PAGE 1 PAGE 4 fields to switch pages CUSTOM The number of pages depends on the selected family Some families have only one page while others may have two three
568. tyle playback with a musical introduction TA The length of the Intro depends on the Style you select At the end of the Intro the Arranger switches to the Music Style pattern you selected with the and one of the VARIATION buttons STYLE CONTROL INTRO MAIN END RIT INVERSION START STOP O EJ Ce AUTO FILL IN START STOP Note The Intro is renewable i e you can press the button again while the Intro is playing Doing so on the fourth beat of the first Intro bar for instance will retrigger the begin ning of the Intro in the second bar 0R Press the SYNC button and play a chord or just one note in INTELLIGENT mode see p 80 In this case the Arranger starts as soon as you play a note or chord in the chord recognition area see p 80 Note Do not play chord changes while the Intro is running Unlike the MAIN patterns INTRO patterns usually contain chord changes Chord recognition is not deactivated during Intro playback so that the beginning of a song may Jump from one key to another in a rather unnatural way This recognition can be switched off however so that you do not have to worry about it see Intro amp Ending Alteration on page 81 Note You can also start and stop the Arranger with the D Beam controller page 65 Stopping Music Styles There are three ways to stop Style playback e Press to stop playback right away 0R e Press the button so that it lights and one of the VA
569. u need to program it yourself See Rename on page 88 Mi Using the Index function The highest hierarchical level of the Style Finder database is called Index All search operations apply to the selected Index and therefore not necessarily to all files in the internal memory or on a memory card e After performing step 2 press the field in the upper left corner Sve NIYA Pop Rock e Either press the field that corresponds to the desired Style category or if you re not sure which category the Style belongs to press ALL This may be a safer bet e Now return to the previous page by pressing BACK The display returns to the page shown under step 1 above This time however only the Styles belonging to the selected Index are displayed Continue with step 3 to select the Style you want to USE G 70 Music Workstation Roland Style Finder quickly locating Styles BScarching for Music Styles The powerful part starts as soon as you press the FINDER field ao B KIES fx paa Bp Decide what you want to look for e Press the field if you want the G 70 to look for Style names then enter the name or part of it Press the field if you want to look for a country then enter the name or part of it Press the field to locate a specific genre Rock n Roll 16 Beat etc then enter the desired characters Press the field and enter the tempo value you are looking for No
570. u to change the way the Arranger reads the chords you play If this function is off ABASS part ABS plays the root of the chords that feed the Arranger while the chords of the ACCOMP 1 46 parts are voiced in such a way as to avoid semitone intervals for complex chords that wouldn t sound very nice Bass Inversion gives you more artistic license because you specify the notes played by the ABS part Switch on Bass Inversion for songs that rely on bass rather than on chord patterns for example C C B C Bb etc JD G 70 Music Workstation Additional Arranger Style functions 1 Press the button so that it lights to switch this function on STYLE CONTROL BASS INTRO MAIN INVERSION END RIT 2 Press it again to switch this function off again Note You can also assign this function to an optional foot switch page 69 or FC 7 See page 67 7G SYNC m START STOP Melody Intelligence The Arranger can play chords and also add a counter melody to he notes you play Those automatic harmo nies are based on the chords you play in the chord rec ognition area This counter melody is played by the MELODY INTELL part There are 18 harmony types to choose from 1 Press the button so that it 2 3 lights MELODY This adds a harmony to the notes you play Do not forget to switch on the UP1 part page 57 To select another harmony type press and hold the button until the
571. u wish to copy the G 70 automatically stops the operation without displaying a message as soon as the media is full Always check the contents of the destination media immediately after the copy operation to make sure that all required files have been copied G 70 Music Workstation Roland Format Format This function allows you to format the inserted floppy disk or memory card For safety reasons you cannot format the internal memory because it also contains the G 70 s operating system It would be a good Idea to also format floppy disks for matted for MS DOS because that speeds up data access Memory cards must always be formatted on the G 70 during formatting the G 70 indeed also cre ates a number of folders where your various files will be stored 1 Defeat the disk s or memory card s write protection if available Floppy disk Close the little window page 11 Memory card See its owner s manual this depends on the kind of card you are using 2 Insert the floppy disk into the drive or the memory card into the PCMCIA slot 3 Press the button 4 Press the field YNEZ Mable Jae O The display changes to ORMAJ MEDIA FORMAT EXTERNAL FLOPPY MEMORY DISK ik 5 On the display page that appears now press the or field This obviously depends on whether you Inserted a floppy disk or a memory card The display now responds with POAT e All the Data o
572. ually contains the melody This only applies to Standard MIDI Files you play back using the Recorder Note Use the Minus One function to mute the selected track if it should not be played alongside the generated vocal part See page 41 for detalls Press the and or field if you want to use the melody you play on the keyboard The divide between LEFT and RIGHT follows the split point setting see p 57 G 70 Music Workstation Roland Auto Pitch settings 4 When you are done either press the button to return to the main page or one of the other fields to set those parameters as well Note The and fields allow you to jump to the effects or tone controls If you press the field the display looks as follows AULD PIPE Sul GENDER PITCH VIBRATO PORTAM TIME RATE _ RISE TIME 5 Gm S DEPTH DELAY TIME f f PITCHBEND VIBRATO e Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DECJ INC buttons Here s what the parameters mean GENDER Allows you to change the timbre of the part Negative values produce a masculine effect positive values add feminine qualities This parameter should be set in relation to the COARSE value if you want to achieve a realistic effect PORTAM TIME amp PORTAMENTO See page 46 PITCH BEND Press this field so that it lights if you want to influence the pitch o
573. uickly copying somebody else s songs from a memory card to the internal memory of your G 70 and vice versa It also allows you to copy songs to another device Be sure to select a song before pressing the field on the SONG LIST page Also bear in mind that the COPY page only lists songs that match the last search criteria you used for the SONG FINDER On the other hand if you only need to copy certain songs on memory card or in the internal memory using the FINDER would be a good idea it helps you to avoid too many presses of the PAGE e or field 5 6 On the SONG OPTIONS page press the field SOI GAT FROM B EINT MEMORY To 5 EINT MEMORY GEBFLOFFY DISK BEAT MEMORY COFLOPPY DISK HEBERT MEMORY Start by specifying the source that contains the song s you wish to copy Press the button icon once or twice to select the memory area INT MEMORY The G 70 s internal memory FLOPPY DISK The floppy disk in the G 70 s drive Do not forget to insert it before selecting this option EXT MEMORY The memory card in the G 70 s PCMCIA slot Do not forget to insert it before select ing this option Now specify the target you wish to copy the selected song s to Press the button icon once or twice to select the memory area If the name of the song you want to copy Is already displayed press its line You can also select several SONGS To display the next 5 files press the field in the lower right c
574. unction you could use DELETE to remove all data from the SRC track ett earen Cf ener cock Juha ESRC TRACK 1 16 Allows you to select the track whose data should be added to those of the DST track MIDST TRACK 1 16 except the track selected as SRC Use this parameter to specify the track that should contain a combination of its original data and those of the selected source track W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data GLOBAL CHANGE gato Jenner enot enaner rock atan This function allows you to make quick changes to certain settings The change always applies to entire tracks you cannot use GLOBAL CHANGE for just a few measures Designed to help you prepare a Stan dard MIDI File it isa wonderful tool for the following applications e Upgrading older Standard MIDI Files to take advan tage of the G 70 s new sounds e Global changes to the Reverb and or Chorus Send values which is very convenient when you suddenly notice that the effect is too prominent or not strong enough BTRACK ALL 1 16 Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks MINIT VALUE Press this field to reset all values on this page to their initial state if you want to start again You will notice that there are two kinds of changes that can be performed on this page FROM TO and INC DEC
575. unction on and off Certain pop songs in 4 4 contain bars that only last two beats The usual place for such a bar is between the first and the second verse Another favorite position for halved bars is at the end of a chorus or the bridge Your G 70 allows you to faithfully reproduce these anomalies using this function This does not change Style playback right away Only when a Fill In starts will the Half Bar func tion be activated and play half the number of beats of the fill you selected Arranger Hold Allows you to switch the Arranger Hold function on and off See p 80 Dynamic Arranger Allows you to switch the Dynamic Arranger function on and off See page 81 for details Arr Chord Off Allows you to switch the Arranger s chord recognition off in which case only the drum per cussion of the selected Music Style keeps playing or can be used See page 80 Arranger RIT Tempo Allows you to start the Arranger s RIT function page 82 Arranger ACC Tempo Allows you to start the Arranger s ACC function page 82 Reset Start Tempo This function allows you have the Arranger start on the first beat of the currently selected Music Style pattern when you press the ASSIGN SW but ton Use it when you are accompanying a singer or solo ist whose timing is a little shaky and suddenly notice that the Arranger lags one or two beats behind the singer soloist 3 G 70 Music Workstation Roland ASSIGN SW buttons
576. unctions are only available for songs and Music Styles and only if you select or EXTERNAL MEMORY See also pages 37 and 86 Press the field of the file you want to rename The display changes to RENAME SONG RENAME STYLE ue E00 e paa AA E E If you selected the RENAME page by accident press Back This takes you back to the previously selected page If available and necessary press the STYLE NAME COUNTRY ARTIST or field and enter the desired characters See page 205 for how to enter characters Note The G 70 supports both upper and lower case letters for file names So choose whichever is more convenient or clear Note The G 70 allows you to use long file names but some windows are relatively short so that only part of the names can be displayed We therefore suggest using short file names maximum 18 characters whenever possible Press the field to confirm your settings and rename the file Note Never remove the floppy disk or memory card while the operation is in progress Wait for the confirmation to appear before returning to business as usual 10 Press the button to return to the main page G 70 Music Workstation Roland Delete Delete Use these functions to delete the selected User Pro gram Set MIDI Set set song or Music Style from the internal memory a memory card or floppy disk Carefully check whether you selected the right file type and the rig
577. uning the setting range on p 163 for details about the six button icons W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data CHANGE VELO The CHANGE VELO function allows you to modify the dynamics called velocity of a track or excerpt Increasing the velocity values means that the notes in question will be louder and brighter than before while reducing the velocity values means the oppo site Use this function when you are happy with the timing of the notes but would like the sound to be brighter louder or rounder softer You can either decide to add subtract a fixed velocity value VALUE or to change them proportionally MAG NIFY METRACK ALL 1 16 Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or song Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the G 70 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation should Start after the selected beat WTO By default the TO position
578. urn to the LYRICS page SO Using an external monitor Your G 70 also provides a VIDEO OUTPUT socket you can connect to the video input of a TV screen or moni tor That monitor or screen always displays the Lyrics if available even if you or the G 70 select s other display pages Scores on the other hand are never dis played by the external monitor 1 Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT socket to the video input of the TV set or monitor USB PCMCIA VIDEO om OUTPUT si lg ma 2 Switch on your TV set or monitor and start play back of a song with Lyrics If the lyrics and chords do not appear correctly on the external screen proceed as follows 3 Press the button The display changes to Song SORRYSEE M 008 1 4 109 4 4 What have I got to do to make you love me What have I got to do to make you care What do I do when lightning strikes 4 Press the field The display changes to PANES PLOK Gm GE ia is a CI oo 5 Press the Or field to select the desired setting or the one that works COLOUR PRESET Note If you work with a TV set do not forget to select the correct channel AV or something to that effect see the manual that came with your set 6 Press the button to return to the main page Displaying scores Only available for Standard MIDI File playback and only in the G 70 s display If you don t remember the notes of the song you are about to pl
579. used LPF cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff value HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff value Cutoff Frequency 200 8000Hz Basic frequency of the filter Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the modulation rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Output Mode Speaker Phones Adjusts the method that will be used to hear the sound that is output to the OUTPUT jacks The optimal 3D effect will be achieved if you select SPEAKER when using speakers or PHONES when using headphones EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W
580. used for displaying the notes Press whichever is more convenient for you this setting has no effect on the octave the notes are actually played in it is only used for display purposes e Use the buttons in the PITCH row to specify how the note names should be displayed next to the note symbols means that the note names are not displayed refers to the Anglo Saxon German Dutch sys tem while corresponds to the French ltal lan system e se the buttons in the DRUM RANGE row to specify which notes of the drum track usually track 10 should be displayed means that you will only see the notes between note numbers 35 and 59 FULL on the other hand means that you will see all drum notes This setting is only used if you set one of the TRACK field s to 10 or the number of a track that plays a drum part Most drum parts only trigger MIDI notes between numbers 35 and 59 7 Press to see the notes again If necessary you can return to the OPTIONS page to correct settings you don t like after all G 70 Music Workstation Quick Start Recording your music You can record your music as Songs that can be saved internally to a memory card or a floppy disk Your singing using the Vocal Harmonist page 42 is not recorded There are two approaches for recording G Recording everything at once This is the easy approach you press the but ton you set the G 70 the way you want it to sound with or without Arr
581. ve settings increase the time before vibrato will begin and negative settings Shorten the time If necessary press the field to save your set tings page 130 SOUND EDIT for Drum Sets If the Instrument icon to the left of the sound name depicts a drum kit the page selected with looks as follows Here you can edit the Drum Set as a whole IG PIG Pelee ya 4 43 fn ANG 36 l GSA NP AG x am JE con soe Fre Pare RESO a e suma Le e Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the desired value You can also press the dial and use the numeric pad CUTOFF Allows you to make the Drum Set all instru ments brighter positive values or darker negative val ues The further this value is set in the negative direc tion the fewer overtones will be allowed to pass and the sound will become softer darker RESO This parameter allows you to add a synthetic character to your Drum Sets choose a positive value or to make it sound more natural e se the field to suppress or add the drum sounds e se the field to suppress or add the percussion sounds If necessary press the field to save your set tings page 130 123 DRUM INSTR EDIT If the instrument icon to the left of the sound name depicts a drum kit you can also press the field Doing so takes you to the following page where you can make more refined changes for ce
582. ver can only be renamed here WARNING Changing the name of a song or Style is usually dangerous Song files can be referenced by Play Lists and User Programs Link function If you change their names here such songs are no longer loaded when they should Similarly Music Styles can be assigned to CUSTOM memories By changing their name you also estrange them from the CUSTOM memories that refer to them The procedure is the same for all file types you can rename so we will describe the steps only once 1 Press the button The display changes to YNEZ Mable rE STYLE a e E USER PROGRAM SET DELETE JE FILE FB COPY FORMAT EA 2 Ifyou intend to work with a floppy disk or memory card insert it into the drive or slot 3 Press the field 4 Select the data type you want to rename by press ing its field MIDI SET USER kd E diel 3 The display changes to RENAME SONG ME O H aaa 8 ON TARE 5 6 7 8 9 Nam _ User Program Set and MIDI Set files only have a file name you can change As there is no Finder function ality for such files the display looks a little different GRAM SET RENAME USER PR KJ RENAME NDI SET Select the media NTERNAL MEMORY FLOPPY or EXTERNAL MEMORY memory card If available and necessary use the sorting func tions and or the Finder These f
583. vy Rock Note See page 119 for how to copy individual User Programs Here you can only copy Sets the List file as well as with the User Program files it refers to If you selected the wrong file type press and try again 5 Start by specifying the source that contains the files you wish to copy Press the button icon to select the memory area INT MEMORY The G 70 s internal memory area EXT MEMORY The memory card in the G 70 s PCMCIA slot Do not forget to insert it before select ing this option FLOPPY DISK The disk in the G 70 s floppy drive User Program Sets cannot be copied from floppy disk 6 Now specify the target you wish to copy the selected song s to Press the button icon to select the destination media Note FROM and TO cannot be set to the same media you cannot copy FROM INTERNAL MEMORY TO INTERNAL MEM ORY or FROM FLOPPY DISK TO FLOPPY DISK Note User Program Sets cannot be copied to floppy disk 7 If the name of the file you want to copy is already displayed press its line 8 9 You can also select several files by pressing their fields To display the next 5 files press the field in the lower right corner You can press this field as many times as necessary or until it is no longer displayed To return to a pre vious group of 5 files press If you need to copy all files on all available pages press the field Note If the memory card or floppy disk is
584. when you change a parameter setting after recalling a User Program to alert you to the fact that the cur rent settings no longer correspond to the ones you recalled If you like them better than the original set tings you must save them again See page 111 Note By pressing the numeric button of the memory with the asterisk once again you restore the original settings of that memory thus cancelling any changes you have made Selecting User Programs with The following method is especially useful if you pro grammed two or more User Programs for a song or if the User Program sequence corresponds exactly to the song sequence you are about to play i e settings of the first song or song part in memory 1 on page 1 set tings of the second song or song part in 2 on page 1 etc With or UP you always select the preceding or following User Program Selects the following User Program for example 3 P1 if you selected 7 P1 before pressing this but ton Selects the preceding User Program for example 6 P1 if you selected 7 P1 before pressing this button Note If you press after selecting 8 P18 your G 70 will call up 1 P1 Likewise if you press after selecting 1 P1 your G 70 will call up 8 P18 and so on Note User Programs can also be selected using an optional footswitch connected to the FOOT SWITCH socket on the rear panel See User Program Up User Program Down on p 68 Working with the
585. while you speak or sing into the microphone Note Selecting LEFT and or RIGHT will set the TRACK parame ter to Off Use the OCTAVE parameter to shift the pitch of the Auto Pitch notes up to 2 octaves up or down 5 Press the field to add some wobble to the Auto Pitch sound This vibrato effect is not linked to the Voice FX vibrato and can thus be set separately see below 6 For more refined control over the Auto Pitch voice press the EDIT field AO APPS EY NI GENDER PITCH VIBRATO DEPTH DELAY TIME Though they are not linked to their namesakes on the Voice FX Edit page most parameters on this page will look familiar Therefore please see above for the explanations of GENDER and VIBRATO RATE DEPTH RISE TIME and DELAY TIME 7 Press the parameter field whose value you want to edit and set the desired value with the DATA ENTRY dial Note Parameter fields can also be selected using the DATA ENTRY gt a buttons 8 Press the field to switch on this effect Portamento means that the pitch doesn t change in clearly defined steps it produces glides from one note to the next Portamento Time 0 Rough pitch changes in semitone steps normal Portamento Timez 1 127 Pitch glides from one note to the next Use the PORTAM TIME parameter to specify the speed at which those glides are carried out 0 127 The higher the value the slower the transitions
586. with many repeats Press the field and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons This parameter specifies the output level of the Cho rus processor Setting this parameter to O means that your no longer hear the effect in question By contrast setting a CHORUS parameter on the mixer page for Music Styles to 0 means that only the selected instrument is no longer processed by the effect while the remaining instruments are Note See Mixing Song or Style parts on p 124 for details Press the field and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons This parameter sets the amount of chorus sound that is sent to the Reverb processor The value 127 effectively allows you to connect the Chorus and Reverb effects in series Chorus before Reverb If you do not want the chorus signal to be processed by the reverb effect set this value to 0 Press to return to the display page with the modules 0R Press the button to return to the main page Note Do not forget to save your type selection to a User Pro gram if you want to keep them Using the individual outputs and audio inputs Output assign PART OUTPUTS The G 70 is equipped with four outputs grouped into two pairs MAIN and DIRECT OUTPUT CN L MONO The MAIN sockets are considered the main output which is why all parts are assigned to them by default In some cases such as when using the
587. xcept that they are only understood by GM and GM2 compatible sound modules CAF Channel Aftertouch messages If you don t really need them these messages should definitely be erased because they use a lot of memory When you select Note a FROM NOTE and TO NOTE field appear that allow you to set the upper and lower limit of the notes to be copied See also Fine tuning the setting range on p 163 BIVALUE CPT 4800 4800 This parameter sets the amount by which the notes are shifted The value refers to CPT units one CPT 1 120 J Notes on the first beat of the first bar cannot be shifted further to the left because that would mean shifting them to the O measure which doesn t exist W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data TRACK XCHANGE TRACK EXCHANGE allows you to move the data of the source track left to the destination track right and at the same time the data of the destination track to the source track thus replacing the two tracks AGO EY a nm a m BTRACK 1 16 This is where you select the two tracks to be exchanged Obviously there is no ALL option here BITRACK 1 16 This is where you select the two tracks to be exchanged Obviously there is no ALL option here This track cannot be set to the same number as the above Note Be careful when exchanging a drum track and a musi cal track The result may not be what you had in mind
588. xt pattern change to be preceded by a Fill In Note The length of a Fill In can be halved See Half Bar on Fill In on p 63 67 and 69 Intro amp Ending Now that we ve got the transitions covered you may Start wondering how to create more professional intros for your songs and how to end them in style That is what the and buttons are for While the MAIN patterns keep repeating the same accompaniment until you select another one or until you stop Arranger playback Fill Ins see above Intros and Endings are played only once Once the INTRO pattern is finished the Arranger auto matically proceeds with the MAIN 1 lt 4 pattern depending on which button flashes At the end of the Ending pattern however the Arranger stops 1 Stop Arranger playback by pressing the button it goes dark 2 Play a chord in the left half of the keyboard to specify the key of the Intro pattern 3 Press the and the numeric button 1 4 that corresponds to the Intro pattern you want to 1 Start playback of the MAIN 1 pattern see above use 2 Play a chord in the left half of the keyboard 3 Press the button it lights STYLE CONTROL INTRO MAIN END RIT INVERSION ar ET STYLE CONTROL INTRO MAIN END RIT INVERSION START NG Top oe AUTO FILL IN START STOP oo E 4 Press the START STOP button to start Arranger playback The Arranger plays the introduction of the currently selected Music
589. y available for Standard MIDI File playback Your G 70 also allows you to view the lyrics if avail able and even the notes of the songs in the display The Lyrics function was provided to allow you to read the words of the songs being played back in a karaoke fashion the words to sing are highlighted at the right time Note that this function is only available for Stan dard MIDI Files that contain Lyrics data Ask your dealer for details Apart from the Lyrics the G 70 also displays the chords which may come in handy for a guitarist or bassist with whom you are playing The chord information is usually not contained in a song as such but that s no problem the G 70 can cal culate it in realtime and even display it a little ahead of the changes This also applies to the notes proper that can be displayed in realtime 1 Select a song page 38 2 Press the button The display changes to Song SORRYSEE M 008 1 4 109 4 4 What have I got to do to make you love me What have I got to do to make you care What do I do when lightning strikes 3 Start song playback 49 G 70 Music Workstation Quick Start The chord information appears at the bottom of the screen Note The chord information is calculated in real time and may not always be accurate Also with chords where the third has been omitted no information will be displayed because it is impossible to tell whether those are minor or major c
590. y modulates the stereo location of the sound Modulation Wave TRI SOR SIN SAW1 SAW2 Modu lation Wave TRI triangle wave SOR square wave SIN sine wave SAW1 2 sawtooth wave Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the modulation rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Depth 0 127 Depth to which the effect is applied EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Level 0 127 Output level 55 Step Pan This uses a 16 step sequence to vary the panning of the sound Step 1 16 L64 0 63R Pan at each step Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the rate should be synchro nized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the following parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Rate at which the 16 step sequence will cycle Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be se
591. yed when you select EQUAL UNEQUAL HIGHER or LOWER See also Fine tuning the note range on p 162 Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data 163 G 70 Music Workstation Using the 16 track sequencer DELETE PAA aaa ee eee Sette Jemrerme menor Stoner crock acum 4 Unlike the ERASE function DELETE not only erases the data but also the measures beats and or CPT units so that all measures that lie behind the TO position are shifted towards the beginning of the track s Since DELETE also disposes of the measures themselves see the illustration you cannot choose the data type to be erased Delete From 2 1 0 To 4 1 0 gh NAN KU CI BTRACK AL 1 16 Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks BI FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or song Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the G 70 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation should Start after the selected beat WTO By def
592. you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Balance D100 0W D50 50W D0 100W Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Level 0 127 Output level 36 Chorus gt DLY This effect connects a chorus and a delay in series Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation speed Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Chorus Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Delay Time 0 0 500 0ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard G 70 Music Workstation Roland Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that Is sent through the delay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Level 0 127 Output level 37 Flanger
593. zers on this page on or off The equalizer can be used for two things a emphasizing a specific frequency range to create a special effect or make the part more distin guishable b to reduce the level of frequencies that mask other sounds or produce a boomy sound FREQUENCY Hz Use this parameter to select the fre quency whose level you wish to change with the GAIN parameter The smaller the value the lower the fre quency that will be boosted or cut The ALL PARTS FRE QUENCY Hz parameter affects the sound of both parts GAIN This parameter sets the level of the selected fre quency O means that the frequency s level does not change no difference between equalizer on and off The ALL PARTS GAIN dB parameter affects the sound of all four parts e Press the field to leave this page Ensemble settings When the button lights four part harmo nies are added to your singing The associated page allows you to specify what kinds of voices will be used for these harmonies KOSAL FAO IST E ENSEMBLE TYPE it QUARTET co cm GIRLS Press and hold the button With the exception of the fact that up to four voices are generated the parameters and fields on this page work exactly like the Small parameters so please see above Note When the ENSEMBLE parts are used together with VOICE FX or AUTO PITCH only three harmony voices are avail able Note The VOCAL EFFECT and EQUALIZER fields allow you

Delta Electronics VFD-E Power Supply User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents